RUDSETI (Rural Development and Self Employment

Training Institute)

TECHNICAL BID (PART-I)

TENDER DOCUMENT

FOR CONSTRUCTION OF RURAL DEVELOPMENT AND SELF EMPLOYMENT TRAINING

INSTITUTE (RUDSETI) AT

KHAGARIJAN DEVELOPMENT BLOCK OFFICE CAMPUS, NAGAON, DIST.: NAGAON, ASSAM.

NAME OF TENDERER : ______________________________________ ADDRESS : ______________________________________ DATE OF ISSUE : ______________________________________ LAST DATE OF SUBMISSION WITH TIME : _______________________________________ PLACE OF RECEIVING THE TENDER. : _______________________________________

C O N T E N T S

SL. NO.

DETAILS

PAGE NO.

TECHNICAL BID 1-6 1 Notice Inviting Tender 7-10

2 General rules and Directions to Tenders 11-13

3 Schedule’s A to F 14-17

4 Conditions of contract 18-46

5 Clauses of contract 47-54

6 Special conditions 55-125

7 Technical specification for civil works, sanitary & plumbing works

126-238

8 Technical specification for electrical works

9 Safety code

10 Model rules for protection of Health and sanitary arrangements for workers employed by contractors

11 List of preferred makes

12 Tender Form 239-240

13 ANNEXURE -1 - Bio Data 241-243

14 ANNEXURE -2 - Acceptance 244

15 ANNEXURE -3 - Form of Agreement 245-246

16 ANNEXURE -4 - Details of construction equipments & plants 247

17 ANNEXURE -5 - List of relatives employed in RUDSETI 248

18 ANNEXURE -6 - Format for receipt of Materials at site 249

19 ANNEXURE -7 - Format for concrete cube test 250

20 ANNEXURE -8 - Format of measurement book 251

21 ANNEXURE -9 - Format for running bill 252-254

22 ANNEXURE -10 - Format for Rate analysis 255

23 ANNEXURE -11 - Format for certificate of payment 256

24 ANNEXURE -12 - Format of site order book 257

25 ANNEXURE -13 - Format for application -Extension of time 258

26 ANNEXURE -14 - Format for Hindrance register 259

27 ANNEXURE -15 - Format of BG for EMD 260

28 ANNEXURE -16 - Format of BG for security deposit 261-262

29 ANNEXURE -17 - Draft agreement of Integrity Pact 263-269

30 ANNEXURE -18 - 270

31 Tender drawings (GIVEN IN SEPARATE PDF FILE)

1

CONSTRUCTION OF RURAL DEVELOPMENT AND SELF EMPLOYMENT TRAINING INSTITUTE (RUDSETI) AT KHAGARIJAN DEVELOPMENT BLOCK OFFICE CAMPUS,

NAGAON, DIST:NAGAON, ASSAM.

NOTICE INVITING TENDERS

RUDSET Institute,Nagaon invites sealed bids from eligible & experienced Firms/Companies in a “TWO BID CONCEPT” for the work of “CONSTRUCTION OF RURAL DEVELOPMENT AND SELF EMPLOYMENT TRAINING INSTITUTE (RUDSETI) AT KHAGARIJAN DEVELOPMENT BLOCK OFFICE CAMPUS, NAGAON, DIST.: NAGAON, ASSAM comprising of Civil, Electrical, Plumbing, Sanitary and Water supply works including obtaining service connections and electrical load. 1) Details of the Tender :

1. Estimated cost of the works. (excluding G.S.T)

Rs.472.35 Lakhs ( approx)

2. Earnest Money Deposit Rs. 4,72,000.00 (Rupees Fourlakhseventytwo thousandonly )

3 Period of Completion 18 (eighteen) months.

4 Date of Pre Bid meeting 16/02/2019at 3.30P.M atCanara Bank, Circle Office, G. S. Road, Near Bora Service Station Guwahati.

5 Cost of Tender Documents Rs.5,000.00 (Rupees Fivethousand only) RUDSETI, Nagaon.

6. Issue of Tender Documents ( hard copy )

04/02/2019 to 06/03/2019 during Office hours 10.00 AM TO 5.00 PM from Office of the Director, RUDSET Institute, Nagaon, Tilak Deka Road, Natun Bazar, Nagaon, Assam-782001.

7. Tender documents ( soft copy )

The Tender document can also be down loaded from the website of www.rudsetitraining.org and a document fee of Rs. 5,000.00 (Five thousand only) by way of Demand Draft favouring Director,RURAL DEVELOPMENT AND SELF EMPLOYMENT TRAINING INSTITUTE (RUDSETI) payable at Nagaon, Assam, may be submitted along with the Tender Document.

8 Last date and time for submission of the tender

06/03/2019 upto 2.00 P.M At the Office of the Director, RUDSET Institute, Nagaon, Tilak Deka Road, Natun Bazar, Nagaon, Assam-782001.

9 Date and time of Opening of the Tenders - Technical bids

08/03/2019 at 12.00 Noon At the Office of the Director, RUDSET Institute, Nagaon, Tilak Deka Road, Natun Bazar, Nagaon, Assam-782001.

2

2) Eligibility Criteria : Contractors who fulfill the following requirements are eligible to apply

Sl No

Criteria Documents Required

The contractor should be registered class-A contractor with CPWD or State PWD or MES or Railways or such other Government organizations or Registered in Public sector units or Public sector Bank‟s or Financial institutions as Civil works contractor.

a) A copy of valid registration certificate from respective authorities.

b) A copy of valid Electrical license issued by statutory authorities of the bidder.

2 The Contractor should have minimum of 05 (Five) years experience in the field as on 31.03.2018, worked with PSU of Central Government or State government departments for the prequalifying project/ projects.

Copy of Registration of the Firm or Copy of incorporation certificate. At least one copy of the work order from the clients prior to 31.03.2013 and Copies of Work orders from the Clients from 31.03.2013 to 31.03.2018 for each FY.

3 Bidder should have a minimum of Rs.4.72 Crore (Rupees Four Crore Seventy Two Lakhs only) annual average turnover per year during last three financial years. i.e 2015-16, 2016-17, 2017-18 from the construction related business.

1. Audited balance sheet and P&L account for years mentioned. 2. Certificate from chartered accountant certifying the turn over for years mentioned. 3. GST Returns Receipt

4 The Tenderer should have executed any of the following construction work in a single contract during the last Seven (7) years ending with 31.03.2018 for at least, One (1) similar work costing Rs.3.78 crores. OR Two (2) similar works each costing Rs. 2.30 crores. OR. Three (3)similar works each costing Rs.1.90 crores. Similar work meansConstruction works of Office / Residential / Institutional buildings PSU or Central Government or State government departments for the prequalifying project/ projects

Order copies and satisfactory completion certificates clearly indicating the cost & nature of work executed, date of commencement & completion issued by an Officer not below the rank of Executive Engineer or equivalent Note: The amount of works executed during previous years shall be increased by 5 % every year from the date of actual completion to bring it to the present value.

5 The contractor must have valid Goods & Service tax (GST) registration, PAN number. Also a fully-fledged office set up in Assam for operational convenience preferably in Guwahati.

Copy of the GST registration certificate and copy of PAN card. Details of local address. Acceptance of the address subjected to verification by the RUDSETI to its satisfaction.

Note- The bidder should have not been blacklisted from any of the client/ organization like Government department/ organization/PSUs/PSBs/Autonomous

3

Tenders documents can be collected on payment of stipulated cost between the dates mentioned in the Notice Inviting Offer (NIO) during the working hours every day except on Sundays and Public Holidays, at the office of RUDSET Institute, Nagaon, Tilak Deka Road, Natun Bazar, Nagaon, Assam-782001. 3) The cost of tender documents shall be paid by way of Demand Draft for Rs.5,000/- (Five Thousand only) of a Scheduled commercial Bank issued in favour of Director,RURAL DEVELOPMENTAND SELF EMPLOYMENT TRAINING INSTITUTE (RUDSETI) payable at Nagaon, NAGAON, ASSAM. 4) Alternatively, the Tender document can also be down loaded from the website of www.rudsetitraining.org and a document fee of Rs. 5,000.00 (Five thousand only) by way of Demand Draft favouring Director,RURAL DEVELOPMENTAND SELF EMPLOYMENT TRAINING INSTITUTE (RUDSETI) payable at Nagaon, Assam, may be submitted along with the Tender Document. The Tender submitted without the Tender Document fee will be liable for rejection.The Tender documents shall be printed with font size of 12 in A-4 size paper and neatly bounded ( hard bound/ spiral bound) in two separate books (i.e Technical bid and Financial bid) and submitted as detailed in clause 10 below.Failure of the same will be summarily rejected. 5) Tender documents consists two portions. Portion One is TECHNICAL BID: comprising Notice Inviting the Offer ( NIO ), Eligibility criteria, General rules and Directions to Tenderers, Schedules A to F, Conditions of contract, Clauses of Contract, Special conditions, Technical specifications, Safety code, Model rules for protection of Health & sanitary arrangements, List of preferred makes, Annexures 1 to 19, Tender Drawings. Second portion is FINANCIAL BID: Comprising only SCHEDULE A: Schedule of Quantities and Rates (SOR). 6) Tenders shall be on prescribed Form for item rate tenders as issued by the RUDSET Institute as hosted in its web site. 7) The time allowed for carrying out the work will be 18 (eighteen) months from the, ten day after the date of written orders to commence the work or from the first date of handing over of the site, whichever is later 8) The site for the work is available. 9) Nature of the document: TWO BID CONCEPT. This Tender document comprises of the following: A. TECHNICAL BID: (first envelope) consisting of following should be hardbound /spiral bound and submitted as in Sl. No. 10 below in a separate envelope-

a) EMD – Earnest Money Deposit

b) Notice inviting tender (NIT).

c) General Rules & directions to contractor

d) Schedules.

e) Conditions of contract.

f) Clauses of contract.

g) Special conditions

h) Safety code.

i) Model rules for protection of health and sanitary arrangements for workers employed by

contractors.

j) Technical specifications for electrical works.

k) Preferred makes/brand of materials

l) Annexures.

m) Integrity pact.

n) Tender Drawings.

4

B. FINANCIAL BID (second envelope): SCHEDULE-A i.e. Schedule of quantities & Rates (SOR). Financial bid should be hardbound /spiral bound and submitted in separate envelop as in Sl. No. 10 below. 10) Submission and opening of Tenders: a) Tenders on prescribed form should be placed in two envelops one sealed envelope consisting of “Technical bid” duly superscribed as “Technical bid” and other sealed envelope consisting “Financial bid” duly superscribed as “Financial Bid” and both envelopes shall be kept in one bigger sealed single envelope, with the name of work, Name of Tenderer and due date written on the envelopes. b)Sealed Tenders shall be addressed to the Director, RUDSET Institute, Nagaon &submitted at RUDSET Institute, Nagaon, Tilak Deka Road, Natun Bazar, Dist- Nagaon, Assam-782001. c)Sealed Tenders shall be dropped in the TENDER BOX kept at the above said address up to 06/03/2019till 2.00 PM d) The first part of tenders i.e Technical bid will be opened on (08/03/2019) and at the same location at 12.00Noon. If last day of submission of tender is declared a holiday under NI Act/Bandh by the Government subsequent to issuance of tender the next working day will be deemed to be the last day for submission of the tender. e) The Financial bid of only the qualified /shortlisted applicants will be opened on a pre-notified time & date, under intimation to such qualified / shortlisted applicants. 11) The tender shall be accompanied by earnest money deposit of Rs. 4,72,000.00 (Rupees FourlakhSeventy two thousand only)by way of Demand Draft of a Scheduled commercial Bank issued in favour of Director,RURAL DEVELOPMENTAND SELF EMPLOYMENT TRAINING INSTITUTE (RUDSETI) payable at Nagaon. EMD can also be submitted by way of irrevocable Bank guarantee from scheduled commercial Bank valid for 120 days. EMD shall be submitted in the Technical bid only. No interest shall be allowed on the Earnest Money. Tenders without Earnest Money shall be summarily rejected. 12) Copies of other drawings and documents pertaining to the works will be open for inspection by the tenderers at the office of the Project Architect M/s. Architects Collaborative, M. R. Dewan Road, Chandmari, Guwahati – 781 003, Phone No. (0361) 2668301, 2663488. 13) Tenderers are advised to inspect with prior information from Director, RUDSETI, Nagaon and examine the site and its surroundings and satisfy themselves before submitting their tenders as to the nature of the ground and sub-soil, the form and nature of the site, the means of access to the site, the accommodation they may require and in general shall themselves obtain all necessary information as to risks, contingencies and other circumstances which may influence or affect their tender. A tenderer shall be deemed to have full knowledge of the site whether he inspects it or not and no extra charges consequent on any misunderstanding or otherwise shall be allowed. Submission of a tender by tenderers implies that he has read this notice and all other contract documents and has made himself aware of the scope and specifications of the work to be done, site details and local conditions and other factors bearing on the execution of the work. 14) The tenderer shall be responsible for arranging and maintaining at his own cost all materials, labour, tools and plants, water, electricity, access, facilities for workers and all other services required for executing the work unless otherwise specifically provided for in the contract documents.

5

15) Director, RURAL DEVELOPMENTAND SELF EMPLOYMENT TRAINING INSTITUTE (RUDSETI), Tilak Deka Road, Natun Bazar, NAGAON, DIST.: NAGAON, ASSAM reserves to itself the right of accepting the whole or any part of the tender and the tenderer shall be bound to perform the same at the rates quoted. 16) The tender for the works shall remain open for acceptance for a period of 120 days from the date of opening of tenders. If any tenderer withdraws his tender before the said period or makes any modifications in the terms and conditions of the tender which are not acceptable to the RUDSETI, then the RUDSETI shall, without prejudice to any other right or remedy, be at liberty to forfeit full value of the earnest money as aforesaid. 17) This Notice Inviting Tender shall form a part of the contract document. The successful Tenderer/contractor, on acceptance of his tender by the Accepting Authority, shall, enter in to an agreement within 10 days from the date of acceptance letter. 18) RUDSETI does not bind itself to accept the lowest or any other tender, and reserves to itself the authority to rejectany or all of the tenders received without the assignment of a reason. All tenders in which any of the prescribed conditions are not fulfilled or new conditions are stipulated by the tenderer or are incomplete in any respect are liable to be rejected. 19) Canvassing whether directly or indirectly, in connection with tenders is strictly prohibited and the tenders submitted by the contractors who resort to canvassing will be liable to rejection. 20) Pre bid queries and clarification to Tender: The tenderer should carefully examine and understand the specifications, terms and conditions of the Tender and may seek clarifications, if required. The tenderer in all such cases seek clarification in writing in a word document (.doc) in the same serial order of that of the Tender by mentioning the relevant page number and clause number of the Tender. The soft copy of the pre-bid queries should be sent by E Mail to rudseti_nagaon@rediffmail.com. The pre-bid query should be in the following format

Sl No Page No

Tender Clause No Tender Clause Query

All communications regarding points requiring clarifications and any doubts shall be given in writing to the Director, RURAL DEVELOPMENTAND SELF EMPLOYMENT TRAINING INSTITUTE (RUDSETI), TILAK DEKA ROAD, NATUN BAZAR, NAGAON, DIST.: NAGAON, ASSAM-782001, by the intending tenderers before 5:00 PM on 15/02/2019by email to rudseti_nagaon@rediffmail.com. No oral or individual consultation shall be entertained. No queries will be entertained from the tenderers after the pre-bid meeting. Pre-Bid meeting: A pre-bid meeting of the intending tenderer will be held as scheduled below to clarify any point /doubt raised by them in respect of this Tender document:

Date Time Venue

16/02/2019

3.30 P.M

Canara Bank, Circle Office, G. S. Road, Near Bora Service Station Guwahati.

No separate communication will be sent for this meeting. If the meeting date is declared as a holiday under NI Act by the Government subsequent to issuance of RFP, the next working day will be deemed to be the pre-bid meeting day. Authorized representatives of interested tenderers shall be present during the scheduled time.

6

The RUDSETI will consolidate all the queries and discussions during the pre-bid meeting and the consolidated replies for the queries shall be made available in the website and no individual correspondence shall be made. The replies/clarification of the RUDSETI in response to the queries raised by the bidder/s, and any other clarification/amendments/corrigendum furnished hereof will become part and parcel of the Tender document and it will be binding on the tenderers. Non-reply to the queries raised by any of the Tenderer shall not be accepted as a valid reason for non-submission of the Tender. In addition, non-reply to any query may not be deemed the version of the Tenderer as reflected in the query has been accepted by the RUDSETI. 20. Amendment to Tender document : At any time prior to deadline for submission of Tender, the RUDSETI, for any reason, whether, at its own initiative or in response to a clarification requested by prospective bidder may modify the Tender document by amendment. Notification of amendments will be made available on the website www.rudsetitraining.org and will be binding on all tenderers and no separate communication will be issued in this regard. In order to allow prospective tenderers reasonable time in which to take the amendment into account in preparing their tender, the RUDSETI, at its discretion, may extend the deadline for a reasonable period as decided by the RUDSETI for the submission of tender. 21. Brief details of the work : The proposed Complex consisting of Institute-cum-Hostel Building and 1 (one) no. of Residential Block G + 1 floors framed structure with all services as per the drawing and schedule of quantities including obtaining water supply, sanitary, electrical connections, electrical power load from respective Civic authorities & Assam State power Distribution Company or any other authority. At present there is no bore well or water supply point at the site. 22. Definition : A “ Tenderer / Bidder” is the Firm/ Company who submits it tender for the subject works.

For & on behalf of the RUDSET Institute `

Director, RUDSETI, NAGAON, DIST.: NAGAON, ASSAM,

7

RUDSET Institute

CONSTRUCTION OF RURAL DEVELOPMENT AND SELF EMPLOYMENT TRAINING INSTITUTE (RUDSETI) AT KHAGARIJAN DEVELOPMENT BLOCK OFFICE CAMPUS,

NAGAON, DIST.: NAGAON, ASSAM.

GENERAL RULES AND DIRECTIONS TO TENDERERS

1. All work proposed for execution by contract will be notified in a form of Invitation to Tender and

signed by the RUDSET Institute.

This form will state the work to be carried out, as well as the date for submitting and opening tenders and the time allowed for carrying out the work, also the amount of Earnest money to be deposited with the tender, and the amount of the security deposit to be deposited by the successful tenderers and the percentage, if any, to be deducted from bills. Copies of the specification, tender drawings and any other documents required in connection with the work signed for the purpose of identification by the officer inviting tender shall also be open for inspection by the contractor at the office of officer inviting tender during office hours.

2. In the event of the tender being submitted by a firm, it must be signed separately by each partner

thereof or in the event of the absence of any partner, it must be signed on his behalf by a person holding a power-of-attorney authorising him to do so, such power of attorney to be produced with the tender, and it must disclose that the firm is duly registered under the Indian Partnership Act 1952 by enclosing a copy of the partnership deed duly certified by one partner as true copy.

Tender by Hindu Joint Family (HUF) firm may be signed by the Kartha or Manager or any other duly authorised representative followed by the name and designation.

3. Receipts for payments made on account of a work, when executed by a firm, shall be in the

name of the firm by one of the partners, or by some other person having due authority to give effectual receipts for the firm.

4. Any person who submits a tender shall fill up the printed prescribed form stating what rate he is

willing to undertake each item of the work. Tenders, which propose any alteration in the work specified in the same form of invitation to tender, or in the time allowed for carrying out the work, or which contain any other conditions of any sort, will be liable to rejection. No single tender shall include more than one work. Tenders shall have the name and number of the works to which they refer, written on the envelopes. Modifications to specifications, item description, any clauses, conditions or any provisions whatsoever in the tender documents shall lead to disqualification of the tender.

8

In case the lowest tendered amount (worked out on the basis of quoted rate of Individual items) of two or more contractors is same, then such lowest contractors may be asked to submit sealed revised offer quoting rate of each item of the schedule of quantity for all sub-sections/sub heads as the case may be, but the revised quoted rate of each item of schedule of quantity for all sub sections/sub heads should not be higher than their respective original rate quoted already at the time of submission of tender. The lowest tender shall be decided on the basis of revised offer. If the revised tendered amount (worked out on the basis of quoted rate of individual items) of two or more contractors received in revised offer is again found to be equal, then the lowest tender, among such contractors, shall be decided by draw of lots. In case of any such lowest contractor in his revised offer quotes rate of any item more than their respective original rate quoted already at the time of submission of tender, then such revised offer shall be treated invalid. Such case of revised offer of the lowest contractor or case of refusal to submit revised offer by the lowest contractor shall be treated as withdrawal of his tender before acceptance and 50% of his earnest money shall be forfeited. In case all the lowest contractors those have same tendered amount (as a result of their quoted rate of individual items), refuse to submit revised offers, then tenders are to be recalled after forfeiting 50% of EMD of each lowest contractors. Contractor, whose earnest money is forfeited because of non-submission of revised offer, or quoting higher revised rate(s) of any item(s) than their respective original rate quoted already at the time of submission of his bid shall not be allowed to participate in the retendering process of the work. (a) The rate(s) and/or amount(s) must be quoted in decimal coinage. Amounts must be quoted in full

rupees by ignoring fifty paisa and less and considering more than fifty paise as rupee one. . (b) In case of illiterate contractors the rates or the amounts should be attested by a witness, with a

declaration that the contents of the tender documents have been explained to the tenderer. (c) The rate columns should be filled in English figures and English words. (d) The rate and amount columns for alternative items, if any, shall be filled up but amounts shall not

be added in the total. The amount of alternative items of which quantities are not mentioned shall not be filled.

5. The officer inviting tender or his duly authorised assistant will open tenders in the presence of

any intending contractors who may be present at the time, and will enter the amounts of the several tenders in a comparative statement in a suitable form. In the event of a tender being accepted for consideration, a receipt for the earnest money forwarded therewith shall thereupon be given to the contractor who shall thereupon for the purpose of identification sign copies of the specifications and other documents mentioned in Rule-I. In the event of a tender being disqualified and rejected, the earnest money forwarded with such unaccepted tender shall thereupon be returned to the contractor remitting the same, without any interest.

6. The Officer inviting tenders shall have the right of rejecting all or any of the tenders and will not

be bound to accept the lowest or any one tender. 7. The memorandum of work tendered for and the schedule of materials to be supplied by the

RUDSET Institute and their issue-rates, shall be filled in and completed in the office of the officer inviting tender before the tender form is issued. If a form is issued to an intending tenderers without having been so filled in and completed, he shall request the officer to have this done before he completes and delivers his tender.

9

8. The Tenderer shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that all confidential information which the Tenderer obtains in the course of participating in this Tender or at any time thereafter is not disclosed or used other than for the purpose of project execution /scope of work/ deliverables. Tenderer shall suitably defend, indemnify RUDSET Institute for any loss/damage suffered by RUDSET Institute on account of and to the extent of any disclosure of such confidential information. Confidential information for this purpose refers to such information pertaining to RUDSET Institute provided to Tenderer which is marked as confidential and which is not available in the Public Domain”.

9. In the case of item rate tenders, only rates quoted shall be considered. Any tender containing

percentage below/above the rates quoted is liable to be rejected. Rates quoted by the contractor in item rate tender in figures and words shall be accurately filled in so that there is no discrepancy in the rates written in figures and words. However, if a discrepancy is found, the rates which correspond with the amount worked out by the contractor shall unless otherwise proved be taken as correct. If the amount of an item is not worked out by the contractor or it does not correspond with the rates written either in figures or in words then the rate quoted by the contractor in words shall be taken as correct. Where the rates quoted by the contractor in figures and in words tally but the amount is not worked out correctly, the rates quoted by the contractor will unless otherwise proved be taken as correct and not the amount. In event no rate has been quoted for any item(s), leaving space both in figure(s), word(s), and amount blank, it will be presumed that the contractor has included the cost of this/these item(s) in other items and rate for such item(s) will be considered as zero and work will be required to be executed accordingly.

In case the same item appears more than once in the schedule of work under the same sub head or among the different sub heads of works, the lowest rate quoted for that item shall be taken for other items also and tender will be evaluated accordingly.

10. In the case of any tender where unit rate of any item/items appears unrealistic, such tender will

be considered as unbalanced and in case the tenderer is unable to provide satisfactory explanation such a tender is liable to be disqualified and rejected and/ or the tenderer is liable for additional security deposit as demanded by the Employer in the form of Demand Draft or Bank guarantee from scheduled commercial Bank valid for contract period / smaller period ( as decided by the RUDSET Institute) in the format prescribed by the RUDSET Institute.

11. All rates shall be quoted only on the tender form. Quoted rates and units different from

prescribed in the tender schedule will be liable for rejection. The amount for each item should be worked out and requisite totals given. Special care should be taken to write the rates in figures as well as in words and the amounts in figures only, in such a way that interpolation is not possible. The total amount should be written both in figures and in words. In case of figures, the word `Rs.' should be written before the figure of rupees and words `P' after the decimal figures, e.g., `Rs.2.15p' and in case of words, the words, `Rupees' should precede and the word `Paise' should be written at the end, unless the rate is in whole rupees and followed by the words `only' it should be invariably be up to two decimal places. While quoting the rate in Schedule of quantities, the word `only', should be written closely following the amount and it should not be written in the next line.

All corrections such as cuttings, interpolations, omissions and over-writings shall be numbered as `c', `i', `o' and `ow' and initialed and total of such c, l, o and ow on each page certified at the end of the page with grand total at the end of the bill/schedule of quantities. Use of correcting fluid, anywhere in tender document is not permitted. Such tender is liable for rejection.

12. The contractor whose tender is accepted shall be required to furnish by way of Initial security a

sum which shall be equal to 2% (two percent) of the accepted value of the tender including the Earnest Money Deposit , within 10 (ten) days of the date of issue of the letter of acceptance of his tender, Demand Draft payable to the RUDSET INSTITUTE or by way of Fixed Deposit Receipt with the RUDSET Institute for the duration of the contract period and defect liability period. A further sum of 8% (eight percent) of the Gross value of each interim/final bill shall be deducted as retention money to make up, together with the Initial Security Deposit, subject to a maximum of Rs.47.23lakhs. The Initial Security amount will also be accepted in Fixed Deposit Receipt in the name of Director, RUDSET INSTITUTE for the full period of contract including

10

defect liability period or in form of Bank Guarantee from any other Scheduled Bank in the prescribed format. In case a fixed deposit receipt of RUDSET INSTITUTE is furnished by the contractor to the Employer it shall be free from any loans or any encumbrance and shall be assigned/hypothecated to the Employer.

In case the successful tenderer fails to remit the Initial security deposit within the above stipulated time, the Earnest money deposit shall be forfeited.

13. On acceptance of the tender, the name of the accredited representative(s) of the contractor who

would be responsible for taking instructions from the Employer and / or Engineer-in-charge / Architect shall be communicated in writing to Employer.

14. The rates quoted shall be all inclusive rates for the item of work described, including materials,

labour, tools and plant, lead, lift carriage and transport supervision, Royalties, duties, levies, cess, entry tax, Octroi, profession tax, purchase tax, turnover tax, or any other tax on material or finished work in respect of this contract, overheads and profits, mobilizing, demolishing and other charges whatsoever including any special difficulties any restrictions for transport etc. complete but excluding GOODS & SERVICES TAX (GST)for proper execution of the work as per drawings and specifications and no claim whatsoever for any extra payment shall be maintainable.

Forest Royalties, duties, levies, cess, entry tax, Octroi, profession tax, purchase tax, turnover tax, or any other tax on material or finished work in respect of this contract shall be payable by the contractor and the RUDESTI will not entertain any claim whatsoever in respect of the same. All charges payable to local bodies for any service connections for construction purposes, land tax etc. shall also be paid by the contractor and nothing extra shall be paid/reimbursed for the same.

15. The contractor shall give a list of the RUDSET Institute employees related to him with their

places of posting and designations in prescribed Format as per the Annexure-05. 16. The tender for the work shall not be witnessed by a contractor or contractors who

himself/themselves has/have tendered or who may and has/have tendered for the same work. Failure to observe this condition would render tenders of the contractors tendering, as well as witnessing the tender, liable to summary rejection.

17. The tender for composite work includes in addition to building work all other works such as

sanitary and water supply installations drainage installation, electrical work, horticulture work, roads and paths etc. The tenderer apart from being an approved Civil Engineering contractor (Building) or in the panel of Nationalised Banks must associate himself with agencies of appropriate class which are eligible to tender for sanitary and water supply drainage, electrical and horticulture works in the composite tender. The names and details of such agencies shall be got approved by the RUDSET Institute.

18. Errors and omissions due to clerical, typographical or printing etc.., if any, will have to be got

clarified and corrected before quoting the rates. The interpretation given by the appropriate tender accepting authority of the RUDSET Institute shall be final and binding.

19. Procurement of all materials, other than specifically stipulated to be issued by the RUDSET

Institute, if any, shall be at the cost and the responsibility of the contractor.

11

:: S C H E D U L E s ::

SCHEDULE `A' :: Schedule of Rates & Quantities – SOR -(Specified in detail and attached) (Should be submitted in a separate envelope as financial bid) SCHEDULE `B' :: Schedule of materials to be issued to the contractor.

Sl. No.

Description of items

Quantity Rates in figures & words @which the materials will be charged to the contractor

Place of Delivery

………… N I L …………..

SCHEDULE – „C‟ :: Tools and Plants to be hired to the contractor under headings.

Sl No.

Description

Hire Charges per day

………… N I L …………..

SCHEDULE „D‟ :: Extra schedule for work :

i. Conditions of contract

ii. Clauses of contract

iii. Special conditions

iv. Technical specifications for civil, water supply, plumbing,

Electrical works

v. Safety code

vi. Model rules for protection of Health & sanitary vii. List of preferred makes

SCHEDULE `E‟ :: Name of work ::

CONSTRUCTION OF RURAL DEVELOPMENT AND SELF EMPLOYMENTTRAINING INSTITUTE (RUDSETI) AT KHAGARIJAN DEVELOPMENT BLOCK OFFICE CAMPUS, NAGAON, DIST.: NAGAON, ASSAM.

12

SCHEDULE `F' :: Reference to Conditions of contract. Definitions :: 2(a) work :: Construction of Rural Development and Self Employment training

Institute (Rudseti) At Khagarijan Development Block Office Campus, Nagaon, Dist.: Nagaon, Assam.

. 2(b) Site :: Khagarijan Development Block Office Campus, Nagaon, Dist.: Nagaon, Assam. 2(c) Contractor :: Successful tenderer to whom the work is awarded 2(d) RUDSET Institute or Buyer :Director,

RUDSET Institute, NAGAON, TILAK DEKA ROAD, NATUN BAZAR, DIST.: NAGAON, ASSAM

2(e) Architect : :M/s. Architects Collaborative

M. R. Dean Road, Chandmari Guwahati – 781 003. Phone No.(0361) 2668301, 2663488.

2(h) Accepting Authority :Director,

RUDSET Institute, NAGAON, TILAK DEKA ROAD, NATUN BAZAR, DIST.: NAGAON, ASSAM

2(j) Percentage on cost of materials : 15 % ( fifteen %) and labour to cover all overheads and profits. 2(k) Standard Schedule of Rates :APWD 2013-14 / CPWD schedule of Rates 2016 9.1 (d) Standard specification to be :APWD 2013-14 / CPWD Specifications / followed

10 (b) Standard Contract Form :Item rate Tender form ofRUDSET INSTITUTE as modified& corrected up todate of tender. Reference to CLAUSES OF CONTRACT Clause 1 : Estimated cost of work :Rs. 472.35 Lakhs ( approx) Earnest Money Deposit : Rs. 4,72,000.00 a) 2%initial security deposit (including EMD) within 10 days. b) Security Deposit :: 8% of the work executed (Rule 13 of General Rules and Directions) deducted from bills c) Maximum percentage for quantity of items : Same as given below of work to be executed beyond which against clause 12 & rates are to be determined in accordance its subclasses with clause 12.2 & 12.3

13

Clause 2 :: Authority for fixing compensation under clause 2.

DIRECTOR, RUDSET INSTITUTE, NAGAON

Clause 5 Time allowed for execution of work from date of commencement

18 months ( eighteen months)

Clause 5.4 Authority to give fair and reasonable extension of time for completion of work

DIRECTOR, RUDSET INSTITUTE, NAGAON

Clause 10 B Mobilisation Advance Max. percentage of accepted tendered cost (contract amount)

-- N I L --

Plant & Machinery Advance Maximum percentage of contract amount.

-- N I L --

Rate of interest per cent per annum on mobilization Advance and Plant and machinery Advance

-- N I L --

Clause 12 :: 12.1 (iii)

Schedule of Rates for determining. Rates for additional, altered or substituted items that cannot be determined under 12.1 (b) (i)&(ii)

APWD Schedule of Rates 2013-14.

12.1(vi)A(a) Limit for value of any contract item, substituted item or contract- cum-substituted item beyond which sub-clauses (i) to (v) shall not apply and clauses 12.2 & 12.3 shall apply.

25 % (Twenty five %)

12.1(B)(vi)A(b) (for lumpsum contracts) Limit for deviations ordered on any individual trade beyond which provisions of sub-clauses (i) to (v) shall not apply and clauses 12.2 and 12.3 shall apply.

Not Applicable.

Clause 16 :: Competent Authority for deciding reduced rates.

Director, RUDSET Institute, Nagaon

Clause 19 :: Submission of Labour License Within 10 days from the date of receipt of Acceptance letter

Clause 25 i) Amount of claim by any party beyond which Arbitrator shall give reasons for award.

All Claims

ii) Appointing Authority Director, RUDSET Institute, Nagaon

Clause 36 (i) a) Minimum Qualifications & experience required for Principal Technical Representative to be incharge of work

GRADUATE ENGINEER with 3 years Experience OR Diploma holder with 5 years OR Retired A. E. from Govt. Department with 5 years experience as A. E

b) Discipline to which the Principal Technical representative should belong

CIVIL

d) Minimum experience of works 3 years for Graduates and 5 years for Diploma.

e) Recovery to be effected from the contractor in the event of not fulfilling provision of clause 36(i).

Rs 30,000/-p.m.

Clause 42 :: (i) (a)

Schedule/Statement for determining theoretical quantity of cement and bitumen.

On the basis of Schedule of Rates printed by APWD 2013-14

14

RUDSET INSTITUTE

CONSTRUCTION OF RURAL DEVELOPMENT AND SELF EMPLOYMENT TRAINING INSTITUTE (RUDSETI) AT KHAGARIJAN DEVELOPMENT BLOCK OFFICE CAMPUS,

NAGAON, DIST.: NAGAON, ASSAM.

CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT Definitions :- 1. The `Contract' means the tender documents and acceptance thereof and the agreement duly

executed between the RUDSET INSTITUTE and the Contractor, together with the documents referred to therein including these conditions,NIT, specifications, schedule of quantities, agreement, designs, drawings and instructions issued from time to time by the Employer and / or Engineer-in-Charge and all these documents taken together, shall be deemed to form one contract and shall be complementary to one another.

2. In the contract, the following expressions shall, unless the context otherwise requires, have the

meanings, hereby respectively assigned to them.

a) The expression `works' or `work' shall be as mentioned Schedule F, unless there be something either in the subject or context repugnant to such construction, be construed and taken to mean the works by or by virtue of the contract contracted to be executed whether temporary or permanent, and whether original, altered, substituted or additional.

b) The `Site' shall mean the land/or other places on as mentioned Schedule F, into or

through which work is to be executed under the contract or any adjacent land, path or street through which work is to be executed under the contract or any adjacent land, path or street which may be allotted or used for the purpose of carrying out the contract.

c) The `Contractor' shall mean as mentioned in schedule F, the individual Kartha, or

Manager of HUF, firm or Company, whether incorporated or not, undertaking the works and shall include the legal heirs/representatives of such individual or the partners composing firm and theirs legal heirs and successors, or company's authorised and constituted attorneys/agents and permitted assigns of such firm or company.

d) The `Employer/RUDSET INSTITUTE means as mentioned in schedule F any officer of

the Institute who is specifically authorised to enter into contracts and in-charge of the work mentioned in Schedule F.

e) The `Engineer-in-Charge' means the Officer, Engineer and/or Site Engineer appointed by

the Architect to the Project as mentioned in Schedule `F' hereunder who shall supervise and be in-charge of the work or any other person specifically deputed by the Employer.

f) `Contract Price' shall mean the final accepted rates in the Schedule A hereto.

g) `Date of Contract' means the `Calendar date on which the Employer and Contractor

have signed the Agreement on the Stamp Paper.

h) "Accepting Authority" shall mean the authority mentioned in Schedule `F'.

15

i) "Excepted Risk" are risks due to riots (other than those on account of contractor's

employees or agents or persons worked under or at the instance of the contractor) or civil commotion (in so far as both these are uninsurable), war (Whether declared or not) invasion, act of foreign enemies, hostilities, civil war, rebellion revolution, insurrection, military or usurped power, any acts of Government, damages from aircraft, acts of God, such as earthquake, lightening and unprecedented floods, and other causes over which the contractor has no control and accepted as such by the Accepting Authority.

j) "Market Rate" shall be the rate as decided by the Employer on the basis of the cost of

materials and labour and the site where the work is to be executed plus the percentage mentioned in Schedule `F' to cover all overheads and profits.

k) "Schedule(s)" referred to in these conditions shall mean the relevant schedule(s)

annexed to the tender papers or the standard Schedule of Rates of the C.P.W.D. or ASSAM P.W.D. mentioned, if any, in Schedule `F' hereunder, with the amendments thereto issued upto the date of receipt of the tender.

l) `Approved' or `Approval' wherever used in the specifications or schedule of Quantities

shall mean, respectively, 'approved by or approval of the `Accepting Authority' in writing. m) `Notice in writing' or ` `written notice' shall mean a notice in writing typed or printed

characters delivered to or sent by registered post to the last known address private or business address or registered office address, and shall be deemed to have been received when in ordinary course of post it would have been delivered, and/or delivered personally, or otherwise proved to have been received.

n) `virtual completion' shall mean that the work/building is complete in all respects in the

opinion of the Employer/ RUDSET INSTITUTE /Architect. o) `Drawings' shall mean all drawings and/or sketches duly signed by the Engineer-in-

charge or their representative on behalf of the Employer before commencement or during the progress of the work.

p) `Letter of Acceptance' shall mean an intimation by a letter issued by the Accepting

Authority of the Employer/ RUDSET INSTITUTE to tenderers that his tender has been accepted in accordance with the provisions in the said letter.

q) "Defect Liability Period" shall mean a period of twelve months from the certified date of

virtual completion issued by the Engineer in charge / Employer. However, in the case of specialist contracts like for anti-termite treatment [minimum 10 (Ten) years guarantee], water proofing treatment works [minimum 5 (five) years guarantee] and the like, the period of warranty in such contracts shall supersede the defect liability period, and the defect liability period of twelve months shall stand extended to be equal to the warranty period.

3. Scope and Performance::Where the context so requires, words imparting the singular only also

include the plural and vice versa. Any reference to masculine gender shall whenever required include feminine gender and vice versa.

4. Headings to these Conditions of Contract, Clauses of contract, special conditions, Technical

specifications shall not be deemed to form part thereof or be taken into consideration in the inter-pretation or construction thereof or of the contract.

5. The contractor shall be furnished, free of cost one certified copy of the contract documents

(except standard specifications, Schedule of Rates) together with all drawings as may be forming part of the tender papers. None of these documents shall be used by the Contractor for any purpose other than for this contract.

16

6. Works to be carried out :: The work to be carried out under the contract shall, except as otherwise provided in these conditions, include all labour, materials, tools, plants, equipment and transport which may be required in preparation of and for and in the full and entire execution and completion of the works. The descriptions given in the Schedule of Quantities (Schedule - A) shall, unless otherwise stated, be held to include waste on material carriage and cartage, lead, lift, safety works, carrying and return of empties, hoisting, setting, fitting and fixing in position and all other labour necessary and for the full and entire execution and completion as aforesaid in accordance with good practice and recognised principles.

7. Rates

The rates quoted shall be all inclusive rates for the item of work described, including cost of materials, wastage, labour, tools and plant, lead, lift carriage and transport supervision and Royalties, duties, profession tax, excluding GST, Turnover Tax or any other tax on material in respect of this contract or, overheads and profits, mobilizing, demolishing and other charges whatsoever including any special difficulties any restrictions for transport, any other incidentals works etc. complete and for proper execution of the work as per drawings and specifications and no claim whatsoever for any extra payment shall be maintainable unless otherwise specifically exempted and are specified as payable or reimbursable under this Agreement.

8. Sufficiency of Tender:

The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself before tendering as to the correctness and sufficiency of his tender for the works and of the rates and prices quoted in the Schedule of Rates (SOR), which rates and prices shall, except as otherwise provided, cover all his obligations under the Contract and all matters and things necessary for the proper completion and maintenance of the works.

9. Discrepancies and Adjustment of Errors :: The several documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory of one another, detailed drawing being followed in preference to small scale drawing and figured dimensions in preference to scale and special conditions in preference to General Conditions.

9.1 If there is any difference or discrepancy between the description of items as given in the

schedule of quantities, particular specifications for individual items of work (including special conditions) and I.S. Codes etc., the following order of preference shall be observed :

a) Description of the Item as detailed in Schedule of rates (SOR). b) Particular Specifications, Special condition, Additional conditions if any c) Detailed Drawings d) APWD / CPWD specifications e) Assam PWD specifications f) Clauses of contract g) Indian Standard Specifications of B.I.S. h) Manufacturer‟s specifications i) As decided by Employer Moreover, the Contractor is not allowed to take benefit out of any clerical / grammatical mistake in the standard clauses/ Bill of Quantities/Specifications etc. being used in the agreement”.

9.2 If there are varying or conflicting provisions made in any one or more document(s) forming part of

the contract, the Accepting Authority shall be the deciding authority with regard to the intention of the document and his decision shall be final and binding on contractor.

9.3 Any error in description or quantity or rate in Schedule of Quantities or any omission therefrom

shall not vitiate the Contract or release the Contractor from the execution of the whole or any part of the works comprised therein according to drawings and specifications or from any of his obligations under the Contract.

17

10. Signing of Contract :: THE successful tenderer/contractor, on acceptance of his tender by the Accepting Authority, shall, within 10 days from the stipulated date of start of the work sign the contract consisting of following failing which the Earnest money deposit shall be forfeited :-

a) Standard form of agreement on stamp paper, the notice inviting tender, all the documents

including drawings, if any, forming the tender as issued at the time of invitation of tender and acceptance thereof together with any correspondence leading thereto.

b) Standard Contract Form as mentioned in Schedule `F' consisting of ::

a. Notice inviting tender (NIT). b. General Rules & directions to contractor. c. Schedules A to F. d. Conditions of contract. e. Clauses of contract. f. Special conditions g. Technical specifications for civil, plumbing & sanitary works h. Technical specifications for electrical works i. Safety code. j. Model rules for protection of health and sanitary arrangements for workers

employed by contractors. k. Preferred makes. l. Annexures 1 to 19. m. Integrity pact. n. Tender Drawings o. Schedule of Rates ( SOR)

18

RUDSET INSTITUTE

CONSTRUCTION OF RURAL DEVELOPMENT AND SELF EMPLOYMENT TRAINING INSTITUTE (RUDSETI) AT KHAGARIJAN DEVELOPMENT BLOCK OFFICE CAMPUS,

NAGAON, DIST.: NAGAON, ASSAM.

CLAUSES OF CONTRACT

Clause - 1:: DEPOSITS The person/persons whose tender(s) may be accepted (hereinafter called the contractor) shall deposit a sum which together with the EMD shall equal to 2% (two percent) of the accepted tendered cost as Initial security deposit within 14 days of the issue of the letter of acceptance, in the form of Demand Draft payable to the Employer, or by way of Fixed Deposit receipt with the RUDSET INSTITUTE for the entire duration of the contract period plus the defect liability period and shall further permit the Employer at the time of making any payment to him for work done under the contract to deduct a sum of 8% of the gross amount of each running bill as Retention money till the sum alongwith the sum already deposited as initial security deposit will amount to security deposit of an amount equal to 10% subject to a maximum of Rs.47.23 lakhs. Such deductions will be made and held by the Employer by way of Retention money unless he has/they have deposited the full amount of Security Deposit as mentioned above in the form of Fixed Deposit Receipt or irrevocable Guarantee Bond of any Scheduled Bank for the entire period of the Contract including the defect liability period. All compensation or the other sums of money payable by the contractor under the terms of this contract may be deducted from, or paid by the sale of a sufficient part of his security deposit or from the interest if any, arising therefrom, or from any sums which may be due to or may become due to the contractor by Government on any account whatsoever and in the event of his Security Deposit being reduced by reason of any such deduction or sale as aforesaid, the contractor shall within 10 days make good in the cash or Guarantee Bond of a Scheduled Bank in favour of the Employer or fixed deposit receipt tendered by the Scheduled Banks (in case of guarantee offered by scheduled banks, the amount shall be within the financial limits prescribed by the Reserve Bank of India); any sum or sums which may have been deducted from, or raised by sale of his security deposit or any part thereof. The security deposit shall be collected from the running bills of the contractor at the rates mentioned above and the Earnest money deposited at the time of tenders and the Initial Security Deposit will be treated as part of the Security Deposit. Clause - 2 :: COMPENSATION FOR DELAY :: Time is the essence of the contract. The completion of the building is essential to comply with various requirements of the institute. Thus the contractor shall be aware and take note that non- completion of the building will affect the committed programs of the institute and thus the loss by way delayed completion of related works etc, are invaluable and cannot be easily assessed. Therefore, it is a part of the agreed terms that in the event of any delay in completion of the work, the institute is liable to charge the contractor without the necessity of providing for any details of such losses suffered by the RUDSETI.. If the contractor fails to maintain the required progress in terms of the contract or to complete the work and clear the site on or before the contract or approved extended date of completion, he shall, without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Employer on account of such breach, pay as agreed compensation the amount calculated at the rates stipulated below or such smaller amount as may be fixed by the authority mentioned in Schedule `F' on the contract value of the work for every completed week that the progress remains below that specified in clause 5 or that the work remains incomplete.

19

This shall also apply to items or group or items for which a separate period of completion has been specified, if any. For this purpose the term `Contract Value' shall be value at the contract rates of the work as ordered.

(a)

Completion period (as originally stipulated) exceeding 6 months and not exceeding 2 years.

½ ( half ) percent per week

Provided always that the total amount of compensation for delay to be paid under this condition shall not exceed the undernoted percentage of the Contract Value or of the Contract Value of the item or group of items of work for which a separate period of completion is originally given :-

(a)

Completion period (as originally stipulated) exceeding 6 months and not exceeding 2 years.

7-1/2 (seven and half percent )

Clause -2.1 :: RUDSET Institute, Nagaon shall have the right to adjust set-off against any sum payable to the Contractor under this or any other contract with the Employer/RUDSET INSTITUTE anywhere in India/outside India. Clause -3 :: Subject to other provisions contained, the Employer may without prejudice to his any other rights or remedy against the contractor in respect of any delay, inferior workmanship, any claims for damages and/or any other provisions of this contract or otherwise, and whether the date of completion has or has not elapsed, by notice in writing absolutely determine and cancel the contract in any of the following cases; i) If the contractor having been given by the Employer and/or the Engineer-in-charge a notice in

writing to rectify, reconstruct or replace any defective work or that the work is being performed in any inefficient or otherwise improper or unworkman like manner shall omit or comply with the requirement of such notice for a period of seven days thereafter.

ii) If the contractor being a company shall pass a resolution or the court shall make an order that

the company shall be wound up or if a receiver or a manager on behalf of a creditor shall be appointed or if circumstances shall arise which entitle the court or the creditor to appoint a receiver or a manager or which entitle the court to make a winding up order.

iii) If the contractor has without reasonable cause failed to commence the work or has suspended

the progress of the work or has failed to proceed with the work with due diligence so that in the opinion of the Employer (which shall be final and binding) he will be unable to secure completion of the work by the date for completion and continues to do so after a notice in writing of seven days from Employer.

iv) If the contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated date or items of work with

individual date of completion, if any stipulated, on or before such date (s) of completion and does not complete them within the period specified in a notice given in writing in that behalf by the Employer and /or Engineer-in-charge.

v) If the contractor persistently neglects to carry out his obligations under the contract and/or

commits default in complying with any of the terms and conditions of the contract and does not remedy it or take effective steps to remedy it within 7 days after a notice in writing is given to him in that behalf by the Employer and /or Engineer-in-charge.

vi) If the contractor commits any acts mentioned in clause 21 hereof.

20

Clause -3.1 :: When the contractor has made himself liable for action under any of the cases aforesaid, the Employer shall have powers :: a) To determine or rescind the contract of which termination or rescission notice in writing to the

contractor under the hand of the Employer shall be conclusive evidence. Upon such determination or rescission, the security deposit of the contractor shall be liable to be forfeited and shall be absolutely at the disposal of Employer.

b) To employ labour paid by the Employer and to supply material to carry out the work or any part of

the work debiting the contractor with the cost of the labour and the price of the materials (of the amount of which cost and price certified by the Engineer-in- charge shall be final and conclusive) against the contractor and crediting him with the value of the work done in all respects in the same manner and at the same rates as if it had been carried out by the contractor under the terms of his contract. The certificate of the Engineer-in- charge as to the value of the work done shall be final and conclusive against the contractor provided always that action under the sub-clause shall only be taken after giving notice in writing to the contractor. However if the net total expenses incurred by the Employer are less than the amount payable to the contractor at his agreement rates, the difference shall not be paid to the contractor.

c) After giving notice to the contractor to measure up the work of the contractor and to take such

whole, or the balance or part thereof as shall be unexecuted out of his hands and to give it to another person to complete in which case any expenses which may be incurred in excess of the sum which would have been paid to the original contractor if the whole work had been executed by him, of the amount of which excess the certificate in writing of the Employer shall be final and conclusive shall be borne and paid by the original contractor and may be deducted from any money due to him by Employer under this contract or on any other contract account whatsoever or from his security deposit or the proceeds of sales thereof or a sufficient part thereof as the case may be.

Clause -3.2:: In any such event the contractor shall have no claim to compensation for any loss sustained by him by reason of his having purchased or procured any materials or entered into any engagements or made any advances on account or with a view to the execution of the work or the performance of the contract. And in case action is taken under any of the provisions aforesaid, the contractor shall not be entitled to recover or be paid any sum for any work thereto or actually performed under this contract unless and until the Engineer- in-charge has certified in writing the performance of such work and the value payable in respect thereof and he shall only be entitled to be paid the value so certified. Provided further that any of the recoveries to be made when the excess costincurred by the Employer under the action in (b) and/of (c) above is more than the Security Deposit to be forfeited, such recoveries shall be limited to the amount by which the excess cost incurred exceeds the Security deposit so forfeited. Clause-4 :: In any case in which any of the powers conferred upon the Employer under Clause-3 hereof, shall have become exercisable and the same shall not be exercised, the non-exercise thereof shall not constitute a waiver of any of the conditions hereof and such powers shall notwithstanding be exercisable in the event of any future case of default by the contractor and the liability of the contractor for compensation shall remain unaffected. In the event of the Employer putting in force all or any of the powers vested in him under the preceding clause he may, if he so desires after giving a notice in writing to the contractor, take possession of (or at the sole discretion of the Employer which shall be final and binding on the contractor) use as on hire (the amount of the hire money being also in the final determination of the Employer ) all or any tools, plant, materials and stores in or upon the works, or the site thereof, belonging to the contractor, or procured by the contractor and intended to be used for the execution of

21

the work/or any part thereof, paying or allowing for the same in account at the contract rates, or, in the case of these not being applicable, at current market rates to be certified by the Engineer-in-charge, whose certificate thereof shall be final and binding on the contractor, otherwise the Employer by notice in writing may order the contractor or his clerk of the works, foreman or other authorised agent to remove such tools, plant, materials, or stores from the premises, within the time to be specified in such notice, and in the event of the contractor failing to comply with any such requisition, the Employer may cause to remove them at the contractor's expense or sell them by auction or private sale on account of the contractor and at his risk in all respects and the certificate of the Engineer-in-Charge as to the expense of any such removal and the amount of the proceeds and expense of any such sale shall be final and conclusive against the contractor. Clause-5 :: TIME AND EXTENSION FOR DELAY :: The time allowed for execution of the Works by the Contractor as specified in the Schedule '`F' or the extended time in accordance with these conditions shall be the essence of the Contract. The execution of the works shall Commence from the 10th day after the date on which the Employer issues written orders to commence the work or from the date of handing over of the site whichever is later. If the contractor commits default in commencing the execution of the work as aforesaid, the Employer shall without prejudice to any other right or remedy available in law be at liberty to forfeit the earnest money absolutely. Clause -5.1 :: Time and Progress Chart The contractor shall submit a Time and ProgressBar Chart and get it approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The Chart shall be prepared in direct relation to the time stated in the Contract documents for completion of items of the works. It shall indicate the forecast of the dates of commencement and completion of various trades of sections of the work and may be amended as necessary by agreement between the Employer and the Contractor within the limitations of time imposed in the Contract documents, and further to ensure good progress during the execution of the work, the contractor shall in all cases in which the time allowed for any work exceeds one month (save for special jobs) complete 1/8th of the whole of work before 1/4th of the whole time allowed in the contract has elapsed; 3/8th of the work before one half of such time has elapsed and 3/4th before 3/4th of such time has elapsed. Clause -5.2 :: If the works be delayed by :-

a) Force majeure, or

b) Excepted risk;

c) abnormally bad weather, or

d) serious loss or damage by fire, or

e) civil commotion, local commotion of workmen, strike or lockout, affecting any of the trades employed on the work, or

f) delay on the part of other contractors or tradesmen engaged by the Employer in executing work not forming part of this Contract, or

g) Non-availability of stores, which are the responsibility of the Employer to supply or

h) any other cause which, in the absolute discretion of the authority mentioned in Schedule `F' is beyond the Contractor's control,

then upon the happening of any such event causing delay, the Contractor shall immediately give notice thereof in writing to the Employer but shall nevertheless use constantly his best endeavor to prevent or make good the delay and shall do all that may be reasonably required to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge to proceed with the works. Clause -5.3 :: Request for extension of time Request for extension of time, to be eligible for consideration, shall be made by the Contractor in writing within fourteen days of the happening of the event causing delay to the Accepting Authority. The Contractor shall also, if practicable, indicate in such a request the total period for which extension is desired, overlapping period, if any, with earlier events causing delays, net-extension required.

22

Clause -5.4 :: In such case the authority may give a fair and reasonable extension of time for completion of work. Such extension shall be communicated to the Contractor by the Employer in writing, within 3 months of the date of receipt of such request. Non application by the contractor for extension of time shall not be a bar for giving a fair and reasonable extension by the Employer and this shall be binding on the contractor. Clause - 6 :: MEASUREMENTS (i) Engineer-in-charge/Architect is duty bound to, except as otherwise provided, ascertain and

determine by measurement the value in accordance with the contract of work done. (ii) ALL measurement of all items having financial value shall be entered in Measurement Book

and/or level field book so that a complete record is obtained of all works performed under the contract. All such measurement books and level books shall be with machine numbered pages with a certificate of the Architect/Engineer-in-charge regarding the name of the work and contractor and number of pages. All such measurement books and level books shall be maintained carefully, work wise and shall be handed over to the Employer at the completion of the work.

(iii) All measurements and levels shall be taken jointly by the Site engineer authorized by the

Engineer-in-Charge and the contractor or his authorised representative from time to time during the progress of the work and all such measurements shall be verified by the Architect/Engineer-in-Charge/Architect to verify the accuracy of the measurement and signed and dated by the Engineer-in-Charge / Architect in token thereof and by the contractor or his representatives in token of their acceptance. Employer reserves the right to test check the measurements to the extent of 25% of measurements of each and/ or all items verified by the Architect/Engineer-in-Charge and any discrepancies are found they shall be corrected by the Employer and it shall be binding on the contractor. If the contractor objects to any of the measurements corrected a note shall be made to that effect with reason and signed by both parties.

(iv) THE contractor shall, without extra charge, provide all assistance by providing appliance, labour

and other things necessary for such measurements and recording levels.

(v) Except where any general or detailed description of the work expressly shows to the contrary,

measurements shall be taken in accordance with the procedure set forth in the specifications notwithstanding any provision in the relevant Standard Method of measurement or any general or local custom. In the case of items which are not covered by specifications, measurements shall be taken in accordance with the relevant standard method of measurement issued by the Indian Standard Institution and if for any item no such standard is available then a mutually agreed method shall be followed.

(vi) THE contractor shall give not less than seven days' notice to the Engineer-in-Charge or his

authorised representative in-charge of the work and Employer before covering up or otherwise placing beyond the reach of measurement any work in order that the same may be test checked and correct dimensions thereof be taken before the same is covered up of placed beyond the reach of measurement and shall not cover up and place beyond reach of measurement any work without consent in writing of the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorised representative in-charge of the work and Employer who shall within the aforesaid period of seven days inspect the work, and if any work shall be covered up or placed beyond the reach of measurements without such notice having been given or the Engineer-in-Charge's and Employer consent being obtained in writing the same shall be uncovered at the contractor's expense, or in default thereof no payment or allowance shall be made for such work or the materials with which the same was executed. No earthwork shall be started without recording initial ground levels in the level field book jointly signed by both the parties in token of acceptance.

23

(vii) Whenever any payment for lead in earthwork or any other item of work is involved as an item of

work, separately or together with any other item of work, the contractor shall get the lead measured jointly by the Engineer-in-Charge before executing any work and obtain the approval in writing of the Engineer-in-Charge failing which the lead as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge and or Employer shall be treated as final and binding on the contractor. In the case of earth work of cutting, filling and disposal, lead charts shall be prepared by the contractor giving area and quantities to be cut and filled and lead involved and got approved in writing before executing the work failing which lead charts will be prepared by the Engineer-in-Charge as to cause most economic method of cut fill and shall be accepted for payment whether or not work is actually carried out by the contractor accordingly.

(viii) Engineer-in-charge or his authorised representative may cause to check the measurements

recorded jointly or otherwise as aforesaid and all provisions stipulated herein above shall be applicable to such checking of measurements or levels.

(ix) Recording of measurements of any item of work in the measurement book and/or its payment in

the interim on account of final bill shall not be considered as conclusive evidence as to the sufficiency of any work or material to which it relates nor shall it relieve the contractor from liabilities from any over measurement or defects noticed till completion of the defects liability period.

Clause 7 :: INTERIM RUNNING BILL PAYMENTS (i) No payment shall be made for a item of work, estimated to cost Rs 75,00,000/- ( Rupees Seventy

five lakh) or less till after the whole of the work shall have been completed and certificate of completion given.

(ii) For item of works estimated to cost over Rs.75,00,000/- ( Seventy five lakh) the interim or

running account bills, duly accompanied by detailed measurements theoretical consumption of cement, steel and any other item as may be required by the Engineer-in-Charge or the Employer, shall be submitted by the contractor for the work executed on the basis of such recorded measurements on the format of the Employer in triplicates on or before the date of every month fixed for the same by the Engineer-in-charge/employer. The Contractor shall not be entitled to be paid any such interim payment if the gross work done together with net payment/adjustment of advances for material collected, if any, since the last such payment is not less than 75 per cent of the proportionate cost of work as per stipulated progress of work in the contract, in which case the interim bill shall be due on the appointed date of the month after the requisite progress is achieved. Architect/Engineer-in-charge shall forward the Contractor Bill to the RUDSETI within 15THworking day after the day of presentation of the bill by the Contractor to the Engineer-in-charge/Architect/Joint measurements under intimation to the Employer together with the account of the material issued by the Employer or dismantled materials.

(iii) All such interim payments accepted by the Contractor shall be regarded as payments by way of

advances against final payment only. These shall not preclude the requiring of bad, unsound and imperfect or unskilled work to be rejected, removed, taken away and reconstructed or re-erected. Any certificate given by the Engineer-in-charge relating to the work done or materials delivered forming part of such payment, may be modified or corrected by any subsequent such certificate(s) or by the final certificate and shall not by itself be conclusive evidence that any work or materials to which it relates is/are in accordance with the contract and specifications. Any such interim payment, or any part thereof shall not in any respect conclude, determine or affect in any way powers of the Engineer-in-charge/Employer under the contract or any of such payments be treated as final settlement and adjustment of accounts or in any way vary or affect the contract.

(iv) Pending consideration of extension of date of completion interim payments shall continue to be

made as herein provided.

24

Clause - 8 :: FINAL BILL PAYMENTS (i) WITHIN ten days of the virtual completion of the work, the contractor shall give notice of such

completion to the Engineer-in- Charge and within thirty days of receipt of such notice the Engineer-in-Charge / Architect shall inspect the work.

(ii) If there is no defect in the work Engineer-in-charge / Architect shall furnish the contractor with a

final certificate of completion. Otherwise a provisional certificate of physical completion indicating defects (a) to be rectified by the contractor and/or (b) for which payment will be made at reduced rates, shall be issued.

(iii) No final certificate of completion shall be issued, nor shall the work be considered to be complete

by the employer until the contractor shall have removed from the premises on which the work shall be executed all scaffolding, surplus materials, rubbish and all huts and sanitary arrangements required for his/their work people on the site in connection with the execution of the works as shall have been erected or constructed by the contractor(s) and cleaned off the dirt from all wood work, doors, windows, walls, floor or other parts of the building, in, upon, or about which the work is to be executed or of which he may have had possession for the purpose of the execution thereof, and not until the work shall have been measured by the Engineer-in-Charge / Architect. If the contractor shall fail to comply with the requirements of this Clause as to removal of scaffolding, surplus materials and rubbish and all huts and sanitary arrangements as aforesaid and cleaning off dirt on or before the date fixed for the completion of work, the Engineer-in-Charge may at the expense of the contractor remove such scaffolding, surplus materials and rubbish, etc., and dispose of the same as he thinks fit and clean off such dirt as aforesaid, and the contractor shall have no claim in respect of any such scaffolding or surplus materials as aforesaid except for any sum actually realised by the sale thereof.

Clause 8 (A) :: NIL Clause 8 (B) :: COMPENSATION FOR NON SUBMISSION OF FINAL DRAWINGS (i) THE CONTRACTOR shall submit one set of completion plan, within thirty days of the completion

of the work, showing details of all water supply, sanitary, drainage, electrical and all other services.

(ii) IN case, the contractor fails to submit the completion plan as aforesaid, he shall be liable to pay

a sum equivalent to 2.5% of the value of the work subject to a ceiling of Rs.25,000/- (Rs. Twenty Five thousand only) as may be fixed by the Engineer-in-Charge /Architect concerned and in this respect the decision of the said Engineer in Charge shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

Clause 9 :: TIME PERIOD FOR SETTLEMENT OF FINAL BILL (1) The Contractor shall submit the final bill in the same manner as specified in interim bills within

three months of physical completion of the work or within one month of the date of the final certificate of completion furnished by the Engineer-in-Charge/Architect whichever is earlier. No further claims shall be made by the contractor after submission of the final bill and these shall be deemed to have been waived and extinguished. Payments of those items of the bill in respect of which there is no dispute and of items in dispute for quantities and rates as approved by Engineer-in-Charge, shall be made by the employer within the period specified herein under, the period being reckoned from the date of receipt of the bill by the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorised representative complete with account of materials issued by the Employer , dismantled materials, if any theoretical consumption of materials, inventory of fittings and fixtures, detailed measurements etc. complete.

a) If the gross amount of the work done :: 3 months

under the contract items,

b) If the gross amount of work done exceed the contract value a reasonable time will be required for settlement of the bill, depending upon the availability of the fund.

25

Clause –10 :: MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY EMPLOYER :: No materials will be supplied by the Employer. Clause -10 A:: MATERIALS TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR, TESTS (i) The contractor shall, at his own expense, provide all materials, required for the works other than

those which are stipulated to be supplied by Employer, if any. (ii) The contractor shall, at his own expense and without delay supply to the Engineer-in-charge

samples of materials to be used on the work and shall get these approved in advance. All such materials to be provided by the Contractor shall be in conformity with the specifications laid down or referred to in the contract. The contractor shall, if requested by the Engineer-in-charge furnish proof, to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge that the materials so comply. The Engineer-in-Charge may within thirty days of supply of samples or within such further period as he may require and so intimated to the Contractor in writing, inform the Contractor whether samples are approved by him or not. If samples are not approved, the Contractor shall forthwith arrange to supply to the Engineer-in-Charge for his approval fresh samples complying with the specifications laid down in the Contract. When materials are required to be tested in accordance with specifications, approval of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be issued after the test results indicate the specification laid down under the contract are met with.

(iii) The Contractor shall at his risk and cost submit the samples of materials to be tested or analysed

and shall not make use of or incorporate in the work any materials represented by the samples until the required tests or analysis have been made and material finally accepted by the Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor shall not be eligible for any claim or compensation either arising out of any delay in the work or due to any corrective measures required to be taken on account of and as a result of testing of materials.

(iv) THE contractor shall at his risk and cost make all arrangements and shall provide all facilities as

the Engineer-in-Charge may require for collecting and preparing the required number of samples for such tests at such time and to such place or places as may be directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and bear all charges and cost of testing unless specifically provided for otherwise elsewhere in the contract or specifications. The Employer and or Engineer-in-Charge or his authorised representative shall at all times have the right to inspect/supervise the works and access to all workshops and places where work is being prepared or from where materials, manufactured articles or machinery are being obtained for the works. The contractor shall afford every facility and every assistance as required by the Employer/Engineer-in-Charge.

(v) The Engineer-in-Charge/Employer shall have full powers to require the removal from the

premises of all materials which in his opinion are not in accordance with the specifications, and in case of default, the Employer/Engineer-in-Charge shall be at liberty to employ at the expense of the contractor other persons to remove the same without being answerable or accountable for any loss or damage that may happen or arise to such materials. The Engineer-in-Charge/authorised representative of employer shall also have full powers to require other proper materials to be substituted thereof and in case of default the Engineer-in-Charge/ Employer may cause the same to be supplied and all cost which may attend such removal and substitution shall be borne by the Contractor.

Clause 10-B:: A.> SECURED ADVANCE ON MATERIALS ::

THE employer may pay to the contractor after entering into the contract or during the progress of the execution of the work on request upto 75% of the assessed value of any materials which are in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge non-perishable, non-fragile and non-combustible and are in accordance with the contract and which have been brought on the site in connection therewith and are adequately stored and/or protected against damage by weather or other cause but which have not at the time of advance been incorporated in the works. When materials on account of which an advance has been made under this sub-clause are incorporated in the work

26

the amount of such advance shall be recovered/deducted from the next payment made under any of the clause or clauses of this contract.

B.> MOBILISATION ADVANCE :: No advance will be paid. C.> PLANT AND MACHINERY ADVANCE :: No advance will be paid. D.> INTEREST APPLICABILITY :: Not applicable for the present case Clause -10 C :: Deleted Clause -10 D :: Deleted

The contractor shall treat all materials obtained during dismantling of a structure, excavation of the site for a work, etc. as employer's property unless otherwise specified and such materials shall be handed over or disposed of to the best advantage of the Employer according to the instructions in writing issued by the Engineer-in-Charge.

Clause -11 :: (i) THE contractor shall execute the whole and every part of the work in the most substantial and

workmanlike manner and both as regards materials and otherwise in every respect in strict accordance with the specifications. "The contractor shall also conform exactly, fully and faithfully to the design, drawings and instructions in writing in respect of the work signed by the Engineer-in-Charge and the Contractor shall be furnished free of charge one copy of the contract documents together with specifications, designs, drawings and instructions as are not included in the standard specifications of Schedule „F‟ or in any Bureau of Indian Standard or any other, published standard or code or, Schedule of Rates or any other printed publication referred to elsewhere in the contract.

(ii) THE contractor shall comply with these provisions and with due care and diligence execute and

maintain the works and provide all labour and materials, tools and plants including for measurements and supervision of all works, structural plans and other things of temporary or permanent nature required for such execution and maintenance in so far as the necessity for providing these, is specified or is reasonably inferred from these presents.

(iii) The Contractor shall take full responsibility for adequacy, suitability and safety of all the works

and methods of construction. Clause - 12 :: DEVIATION/VARIATIONS EXTENT & PRICING ::

The Employer and /or The Engineer- in- Charge with the specific approval of the employer shall have power :-

(i) to make alteration in, omissions from, additions to or substitutions for the original specifications, drawings, designs and instructions that may appear to him to be necessary or advisable during the progress of the work, and

(ii) to omit a part of the works or Item of the works or reduce the quantity in case of non-availability

of a portion of the site or for any other reasons and the contractor shall be bound to carry out the works in accordance with any instructions given to him in writing signed by the Engineer-in-Charge and such alterations, omissions, additions or substitution shall form part of the contract as if originally provided therein and any altered, additional or substituted work which the contractor may be directed to do in the manner specified above as part of the works, shall be carried out by the contractor on the same conditions in all respects including price on which he agreed to do the main work without any extra compensation except as hereafter provided :

(a) No work which radically changes the original nature of the contract shall be ordered by

the Engineer-in-Charge as a deviation.

27

(b) In the event of any deviation being ordered which in the opinion of the Contractor changes the original nature of the Contract, he shall within fifteen days of having been so ordered bring this to the notice of the Engineer-in-Charge with the reasons but nevertheless carry it out and the disagreement as to the nature of work and the rate to be paid therefore shall be resolved in accordance with Clause 25.

Clause -12.1:: The time for completion of the works shall, in the event of any deviations resulting in additional cost over the contract sum being ordered, be extended by the employer if requested by the Contractor as follows :: a) In the proportion which the additional cost of the altered, additional or substituted work, bears to

the original Contract sum plus b) 25% of the time calculated in (a) above or such further additional time as may be considered

reasonable on the recommendations of by the Engineer-in-Charge. Rates for such altered, additional or substituted work shall be determined by the Employer as follows on the recommendations of Engineer-in-Charge: (i) If the rate for altered, additional or substituted item of work is specified in the Schedule of

Quantities, the Contractor shall carry out the altered, additional or substituted item at the same rate. In the case of composite tenders, where two or more schedules of quantities may form part of the contact, the applicable rate shall be taken from the schedule of quantities of that particular part in which the deviation is involved, failing that at the lowest applicable rate for the same item of work in the other Schedules of Quantities.

(ii) If the rate for any altered, additional or substituted item of work is not specified in the Schedule of

Quantities, the rate for that item shall be derived from the rate for the nearest similar item specified therein. In case of composite tenders where two or more schedule of quantities form part of the contract, the rate shall be derived from the nearest similar item in the Bills of Quantities of the particular part of works in which the deviation is involved failing that from the lowest of the nearest similar items in other schedule of quantities.

(iii) If the rate for altered, additional or substituted item of work cannot be determined in the manner

specified in sub-paras (i) and (ii) above, then such item of works shall be carried out at the rate entered in the Schedule of Rates mentioned in Schedule `F' plus/minus the percentage by which the tendered amount of the works actually awarded is higher or lower than the estimated amount of the works actually awarded.

(iv) If the rate for any altered, additional or substituted item of work cannot be determined in the

manner specified in sub-paras (i) to (iii) above, then the rate for such item of work shall be derived from the Schedule of Rates specified in sub-para (iii) above plus/minus the percentage mentioned in the sub-para (iii)above. In the case of materials issued by the Employer, issue rates of materials, with storage charges recovered, enhanced by two and a half percent for profits and overheads shall be adopted in place of schedule Rate plus percentage specified in sub-para(iii), Provided always that if rate(s) for part (s) of an item (s) for such part(s) shall be determined by the Engineer-in-Charge on the basis of the purchase price as supported by the vouchers plus ten per cent for profits and overheads unless the Engineer-in-Charge finds the purchase price unreasonable. In the latter event the price shall be determined on the basis of market rate(s) prevailing during the fortnight following the date of the order plus ten per cent for profit and overhead.

(v) If the rate for any altered, additional or substituted item of work cannot be determined in the

manner specified in Sub-paras (i) to (iv) above, the Contractor shall, within 15 days of the date of receipt of the order to carry out the said work, inform the Engineer-in-Charge of the rate which he proposes to claim for such item of work, supported by analysis of the rate claimed, and the Engineer-in-Charge shall within three months thereafter, after giving due consideration to the rate claimed by the Contractor, determine the rate on the basis of market rate(s). In the event of the Contractor failing to inform the Engineer-in-Charge within the stipulated period of time, the rate

28

which he proposes to claim, the rate for such item shall be determined by the Engineer-in-Charge on the basis of market rate (s) only.

(vi) A. Except in case of items relating to foundations as it exists at the time of commencement of

work as per Clause B as under, the quantities of which may change due to site conditions, provisions contained in sub-conditions (i) to

(v) above shall not apply to :-

(a) that value of any contract item, substituted item or contract-cum-substituted item as is in excess of the original value of the item plus the percentage mentioned in Schedule `F' or Rs.20,000/- whichever is higher. (b) The value of all items not already included in the Contract, as is in excess of the percentage mentioned in Schedule `F' or Rs.40,000/- whichever is higher.

(vi) B. In case of items relating to foundations as it exists at the time of commencement of work, quantities of which may change due to site conditions, provisions contained in sub-conditions (i) to (v) above shall not apply to

(a) Value of any items of any individual trade which exceed by more than the percentage maintained in Schedule `F' of the value of that trade included in the Contract as a whole, unless the Contractor and the Engineer-in-Charge agree to a higher percentage for any particular item. (b) The value of item not included in the Contract in excess of 5% of the contract sum or Rs.40,000/- whichever is higher.

NOTE ::- Individual trade means the sub-heads into which the Schedule of Quantities as provided in the Contract has been divided and in the absence of any such provision in the contract the sub-heads as given in the Schedule of Rates. Clause -12.1.2 :: For the purpose of operation of clause 12.1 (vi), the following works shall be treated

as works relating to foundation. (a) For buildings, compound walls plinth level or 1.2 metres (4 feet) above ground level whichever is

lower excluding items of flooring and D.P.C. but including base concrete below the floors.

(b) For abutments, piers, retaining walls of culverts and bridges, walls of water reservoirs the bed of floor level.

(c) For retaining walls where floor level is not determined, 1.2•metres above the average ground level or bed level.

(d) For roads all items of excavation and filling including treatment of sub-base and soling work. Clause –12.2 :: In the case of contract items, substituted items, contract cum substituted items or additional items which exceed the limits laid down in sub para (vi) of Condition 12.1 above, the contractor may, within fifteen days of receipt of order or occurrence of the excess claim revision of the rates, supported by proper analysis, for the work in excess of the above mentioned limits, provided that if the rates so claimed are in excess of the rates specified in the Schedule of Quantities. Engineer-in-charge shall, within sixty days of receipt of the claims supported by analysis, after giving consideration to the analysis of the rates submitted by the contractor, determine the rates on the basis of the market rates and the contractor shall be paid in accordance with the rates so determined. In the event of the contractor failing to claim revision of rates within the stipulated period, or if the rates determined by the Engineer-in-charge, No claims shall be entertained after the claim of the final bills.

29

Clause -12.3 :: The provisions of the preceding paragraph shall also apply to the decrease in the rates of items. for the work in excess of the limits laid down in sub para (vi) of Condition 12.1 in accordance with the provisions or sub-paras (i) to (iv) of Condition 12.1 and the Engineer-in-Charge may after giving notice to the contractor within one month of the occurrence of the excess and after taking into consideration any reply received from him within fifteen days of receipt of the notice revise the rates for the work in question within one months of expiry of the said period of fifteen days having regard to the market rates. Clause -12.4 :: The contractor shall send to the Engineer-in-Charge once every three months an upto date account giving complete details of all claims for additional payments to which the contractor may consider himself entitled and of all additional work ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge which he has executed during the preceding quarter failing which the contractor shall be deemed to have waived his right and to have no claim in the matter. Clause -12.5 :: No increase or decrease of rates under clause 12.1, 12.2 and 12.3 shall be made unless within the stipulated period after the order of variation and before the commencement of such quantities a notice shall have been given in writing by the party claiming increase or decrease of rates. Clause -13 :: FORECLOSURE OF CONTRACT IN FULL OR IN PART (i) The employer shall give notice in writing at any time after acceptance of the tender, if the Employer shall decide to abandon or reduce the scope of the works for any reason whatsoever and hence not require the whole or any part of the works to be carried out, to that effect to the Contractor and the contractor shall act accordingly in the matter and the Contractor shall have no claim to any payment of compensation or otherwise whatsoever, on account of any profit or advantage which he might have derived from the execution of the works in full but which he did not derive in consequence of the foreclosure of the whole or part of the works. (ii) The employer may pay to the Contractor at Contract rates full amount for works executed at Site and, in addition, a reasonable amount as certified by the Engineer-in-Charge for the Items hereunder mentioned which could not be utilised on the work to the full extent in view of the foreclosure and the contractor expressly agrees for such payment without demur. (a) Any expenditure incurred on preliminary site work, e.g., temporary access roads, temporary

labour huts, staff quarters and site office. (b) Employer shall have the option to take over Contractor's materials or any part thereof either

brought to site or of which the Contractor is legally bound to accept delivery from suppliers (for incorporation in or incidental to the work). For materials taken over or to be taken over by the Employer cost of such materials as detailed by Engineer-in-Charge shall be paid. The cost shall, however, take into account purchase price, cost of transportation and deterioration or damage which may have been caused to materials whilst in the custody of the Contractor.

(c) Reasonable compensation for transfer of T & P from Site to Contractor's permanent stores or to

his other Works, whichever is less. If T & P are not transported to either of the said places, no cost of transportation shall be payable.

(d) Reasonable compensation for repatriation of Contractor's Site staff and imported labour to the

extent necessary. (e) The reasonable amount of items on (a), (c) and (d) above shall not be in excess of 2% of the cost

of the work remaining incomplete on the date of closure, i.e., total stipulated cost of the work as per accepted tender less the cost of work actually executed under the contract and less the cost of contractor's materials at site taken over by the Employer as per item (b)above. Provided always that against any payments due to the contractor on this account or otherwise, the Employer shall be entitled to recover to be credited with any outstanding balances due from contractor for advances paid in respect of any tool, plants and materials and any other sums which at the date of termination were recoverable by the employer from the contractor under the terms of the contract.

30

(iii) If any materials supplied by the Employer are rendered surplus, the same except normal wastage

shall be returned by the Contractor to the Employer at the rates not exceeding those at which these were originally issued less allowance for any deterioration or damage which may have been caused whilst the materials were in the custody of the Contractor. In addition cost of transporting such materials from site to the Employers stores, if so required by the Employer shall be paid.

(iv) THE Contractor shall, if required by the Employer/Engineer-in-Charge furnish to him books of

account, wage books, time sheets and other relevant documents and evidence as may be necessary to enable him to certify the reasonable amount payable under this Condition. Provided always that against any payments due to the contractor on this account or Otherwise, the Employer shall be entitled to recover or be credited with any outstanding balances due from the contractor for advance paid in respect of any tool, plants and materials and any other sums which at the date of termination were recoverable by the Government from the contractor under the terms of the contract. A compensation for such eventuality, on account of damages etc. shall be payable @ 0.5% of cost of work remaining incomplete on date of closure i.e. total stipulated cost of the work less the cost of work actually executed under the contract shall be payable.

Clause -14 :: CANCELLATION OF CONTRACT IN FULL OR PART :: i.> If contractor ::

(a) at any time makes default in proceeding with the works or any part of the work with due diligence or poor quality of work / workmanship or non compliance of contract specifications and continues to do so after a notice in writing of 7 days from the Employer and or Engineer-in-Charge; or

(b) commits default in complying with any of the terms and conditions of the Contract and

does not remedy it or take effective steps to remedy it within 7 days after a notice in writing is given to him in that behalf by the Employer and or Engineer-in-Charge; or

(c) fails to complete the works or items of work with individual dates of completion, on or

before the date(s) of completion, and does not complete them within the period specified in a notice in writing is given to him in that behalf by the Employer and or Engineer-in-Charge; or

(d) shall offer or give or agree to give to any person in CBCRD TRUST service or to any

other person on his behalf any gift or consideration of any as an inducement or reward for doing or for bearing to do or for having done or forborne to do any act in relation to the obtaining or execution of this or any other Contract for the Employer or;

(e) shall enter into a Contract with the Bank in connection with which commission has been

paid or agreed to be paid by him or his knowledge, unless the particulars of any such commission and the terms of payment thereof have been previously disclosed in writing to the Employer /Engineer-in-Charge; or

(f) shall obtain a Contract with the Employer as a result of wrong tendering or other non-

bona-fide methods of competitive tendering; or being an individual, or in a firm, any partner thereof shall at any time be adjudged insolvent or have a receiving order or order for administration of his estate made against him or shall take any proceedings for liquidation or composition (other than a voluntary liquidation for the purpose or amalgamation or reconstruction) under any Insolvency Act for the time being in force or make any conveyance or assignment of his effects or composition or arrangement for the benefit of his creditors or purport so to do, or if any application be made under any Insolvency Act for the to me being in force for the sequestration of his estate or if a trust deed be executed by him for benefit of his creditors; or

31

(g) being a company, shall pass a resolution or the Court shall make an order for the winding up of the company or a receiver or manager on behalf of the debenture holders or others shall be appointed or circumstances shall arise which entitle the Court or debenture holders to appoint a receiver or manager; or

(h) shall suffer an execution being levied on his goods and allow it to be continued for a

period of 21 days; or (i) assigns, transfers, sublets (engagement of labour on a piece-work basis or of labour with

materials not to be incorporated in the work, shall not be deemed to be subletting) or otherwise parts with or attempts to assign, transfer sublet or otherwise parts with the entire works or any portion thereof without the prior written approval of the Accepting Authority;

(j) the Accepting Authority may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy which shall have accrued or shall accrue thereafter to the Employer, by a notice in writing cancel the contract as a whole or only such of items in default from the Contractor.

The Employer /Architect / Engineer-in-Charge shall on such cancellation by the accepting authority have powers to, for which the Contractor shall hereby unconditionally agree :: (a) to take possession of the Site and any materials, constructional plant, implements, stores, etc.,

thereon; and/or (b) to carry out the incomplete work by any means at the risk and cost of the Contractor.

ii> On cancellation of the Contract in full or in part, the Engineer-in-Charge shall determine what amount, if any, is recoverable from the Contractor for completion of the works or part of the Works or in case the Works or part of the Works is not to be completed, the loss or damage suffered by the Employer. In determining the amount, credit shall be given to the Contractor for the value of the work executed by him up to the time of cancellation, the value of Contractors' materials taken over and incorporated in the work and use of tackle and machinery belonging to the Contractor.

iii.> Any excess expenditure incurred or to be incurred by the Employer in completing the Works or part of the Work or the excess, loss or damages suffered or may be suffered by the Employer as aforesaid after allowing such credit shall without prejudice to any other right or remedy available to Employer in law be recovered from any money due to the Contractor on any account, and if such moneys are not sufficient the Contractor shall be called upon in writing and shall be liable to pay the same within 30 days.

iv.> If the Contractor shall fail to pay the required sum within the aforesaid period of 30 days, the Engineer-in-Charge with the approval of the Employer shall have the right to sell any or all of the Contractor's unused materials, constructional plant, implements, temporary buildings, etc. and adjust the proceeds of sale thereof towards the satisfaction of any sums due from the Contractor under the Contract and if thereafter there be any balance outstanding from the Contractor, it shall be recovered in accordance with the provisions of the Contract.

v.> Any sums in excess of the amounts due to the Employer and unsold materials, constructional

plant, etc., shall be returned to the Contractor, provided always that if cost or anticipated cost of completion by the Employer of the Works or part of the Works is less than the amount which the Contractor would have been paid had he completed the Works or part of the Works, such benefit shall not accrue to the Contractor.

In the event of above course being adopted by the Engineer-in-Charge, the contractor shall have no claim to compensation for any loss sustained by him by reason of his having purchased or procured any materials or entered into any engagements or made any advance on any account or with a view to the execution of the work or the performance of the contract.

32

Clause -15 :: SUSPENSION OF WORK :: a) The Contractor shall, on receipt of the order in writing of the Employer, whose decision shall be final and binding on the Contractor, suspend the progress of the Works or any part thereof for such time and in such manner as the Employer may consider necessary so as not to cause any damage or injury to the work for any of the following reasons :: (i) on account of any default on the part of the Contractor or;

(ii) for proper execution of the works or part thereof for reasons other than the default of the Contractor; or

(iii) for safety of the Works or part thereof. The Contractor shall, during such suspension, properly protect and secure the Works to the extent necessary and carry out the instructions given in that behalf by the Engineer-in-Charge. b) If the suspension is ordered for reasons (ii) and (iii) in sub para (a) above. (i) the contractor shall be entitled to an extension of time equal to the period of every such

suspension PLUS 25%, for completion of the item or group of items of work for which a separate period of completion is specified in the Contract and of which the suspended work forms a part ; and

(ii) If the total period of all such suspensions in respect of an item or group of items of work for

which a separate period of completion is specified in the Contract exceeds thirty days, the Contractor shall, in addition, be entitled to such compensation as the Employer/Engineer-in-Charge may consider reasonable, in respect of salaries and/or wages paid by the Contractor to his employees and labour at Site, remaining idle during the period of suspension, adding thereto the percentage mentioned in Schedule `F' to cover all other expenses including indirect expenses of the Contractor, provided the Contractor submits his claim supported by details to the Employer within fifteen days of the expiry of the period of 30 days.

c) If the Works or part thereof is suspended on the orders of the Employer for more than three-months at a time, except when suspension is ordered for reason (i) in sub-para (a) above, the Contractor shall after receipt of such order serve a written notice on the Employer requiring permission within fifteen days from receipt by the Employer of the said notice, to proceed with the Works or part thereof in regard to which progress has been suspended. If such permission is not granted within that time, the Contractor, if he intends to treat the suspension, where it affects only a part of the works as an omission of such part by the Employer or where it affects whole of the Works, as an abandonment of the Works by the Employer shall within ten days of expiry of such period of 15 days give notice in writing of his intention to the Employer. In the event of the Contractor treating the suspension as an abandonment of the Contract by the Employer, he shall have no claim to payment of any compensation on account of any profit or advantage which he might have derived from the execution of the work in full but which he could not derive in consequence of the abandonment. He shall, however, be entitled to such compensation, as the Engineer-in-Charge may consider reasonable, in respect of salaries and/or wages paid by him to his employees and labour at Site, remaining idle in consequence and of materials collected which could not be utilised on the Works, adding to the total thereof the percentage mentioned in Schedule `F' to cover all other expenses including indirect expenses of the Contractor provided the contractor submits his claim supported by details to the Employer within 30 days of the expiry of the period of 3 months ; Provided, further, that the contractor shall not be entitled to claim any compensation from the Employer for the loss suffered by him on account of delay by the Employer in the supply of materials in Schedule `B' where such delay is covered by difficulties relating to the supply of wagons, force majeure including non-allotment of such materials by controlling authorities, acts of God, acts of enemies of the state/country or any reasonable cause beyond the control of the Employer.

33

Clause -16 :: INSPECTION :: (i) All works under or in course of execution or executed in pursuance of the Contract shall be at all

times be open and accessible to the inspection and supervision of theArchitect/ Engineer-in-Charge and or Employer, his authorised subordinates in charge of the work and to all his superior officers of the Quality Control Organisation of the Employer or any Consultant of the Employer and of the Chief Technical Examiner's Office under Central Vigilance Commission.

(ii) The Contractor shall at all times during the usual working hours and at all other times at which

reasonable notice of the visit of such officers has been given to the contractor, either himself be present to receive orders and instructions and inspections or have a responsible agent duly accredited in writing present for that purpose. Orders given to the contractor's agent shall be considered to have the same force as if they had been given to the Contractor himself.

(iii) IF it shall appear to the Engineer-in-Charge and or Employer or his authorised subordinates in-

charge of the work or to the Engineer in charge of Quality Control or any Consultant of the Employer or to the Chief Technical Examiner, that any work has been executed with unsound, imperfect, or unskillful workmanship, or with materials or articles provided by him for the execution of the work which are unsound or of a quality inferior to that contracted or otherwise not in accordance with the contract, the contractor shall, on demand in writing, which shall be made within twelve months of the completion of the work, from the Employer and or Engineer-in-Charge specifying the work, materials or articles complained of notwithstanding that the same may have been passed, certified and paid for, forthwith rectify, or remove and reconstruct the work so specified in whole or in part, as the case may require or as the case may be, remove the materials or articles so specified and provide other proper and suitable materials or articles at his own charge and cost. In the event of the contractor failing to do so within a period specified by the Employer / Engineer-in-Charge/Architect in his demand aforesaid, then the contractor shall be liable to pay compensation at the same rate as under the clause 2 for non-completion of the work in time for this default.

IN such case the Engineer-in-Charge/Architect may not accept the item of work at the rates applicable under the contract but may accept such items at reduced rates as the Employer or the competent authority may consider reasonable during the preparation of on account bills or final bill if the item is so acceptable without detriment to the safety and without substantially affecting the utility of the item and the structure or he may reject the work outright without any payment and/or get it and other connected and incidental items rectified, or removed and re executed at the risk and cost of the contractor. Decision of the Engineer-in-Charge to be conveyed in writing in respect of the same will be final and binding on the contractor. Clause -17 :: REFUND OF SECURITY DEPOSIT If the contractor or his working people or servants shall break, deface, injure or destroy any part of building in which they may be working, or any building, road, road curb, fence, enclosure, water pipe, cables, drains, electric or telephone post or wires, trees, grass or grass land, or cultivated ground contiguous to the premises on which the work or any part is being executed, or if any damage shall happen to the work while in progress, from any cause whatever or if any defect, shrinkage or other faults appear in the work within twelve months after a certificate final or otherwise or its virtual completion shall have been given by the Employer/Engineer-in-Charge/Architect as aforesaid arising out of defect or improper materials or workmanship the contractor shall upon receipt of a notice in writing on that behalf make the same good at his own expense or in default the Employer/Engineer-in-Charge /Architect cause the same to be made good by other workmen and deduct the expense from any sums that may be then or at any time thereafter may become due to the contractor, or from his security deposit, except for the portion pertaining to asphaltic work which is governed by sub-para (iii) of Clause 35 or the proceeds of sale thereof or of a sufficient portion thereof. Fifty (50) percent of the security deposit except the portion pertaining to asphaltic work which is governed by sub-para (iii) of Clause 35, water proofing work , anti-termite work which are governed by clause 19 of special conditions may be refunded after the expiry of six months (after the virtual completion of the work) or after the final bill has been prepared and passed whichever is later, and the remaining fifty (50) percent of the Security Deposit shall be refunded fourteen (14) days after the expiry of the defect liability period of twelve months after the

34

completion of the work except for water proofing & anti-termite works provided that all the works are carried out as per specifications and condition of contract and all the defect and damages are rectified satisfactorily to the satisfaction of the Employer/Engineer-in-Charge/Architect. Clause -18:: THE contractor shall provide at his own cost all materials (except such special materials, if any as may in accordance with the contract be supplied by the Employer), plant, tools, appliances, implements, ladders, cordage, tackle, scaffolding and temporary works required for the proper execution of the work, whether original, altered or substituted and whether included in the specification or other documents forming part of the contract or referred to in these conditions or not, or which may be necessary for the purpose of satisfying or complying with the requirements of the Engineer-in-Charge as to any matter as to which under these conditions he is entitled to be satisfied, or which he is entitled to require together with carriage therefore to and from the work. The contractor shall also supply without charge the requisite number of persons with the means and materials, necessary for the purpose of setting out works, and counting, weighing and assisting the measurement for examination at doing the same may be provided by the Engineer-in-Charge at the expense of the contractor and the expenses may be deducted, from any money due to the contractor, under this contract or otherwise and or from his security deposit or the proceeds of sale thereof, or of a sufficient portions thereof. Clause –18 A :: In every case in which by virtue of the provisions sub-section of Section 12, of the Workmen's Compensation Act, 1923, Employer is obliged to pay compensation to a workman employed by the contractor, in execution of the works, Employer shall be entitled to recover from the contractor the amount of the compensation so paid; and, without prejudice to the rights of the Employer under sub-Section 12, of the said Act, Employer shall be at liberty to recover such amount or any part thereof by deducting it from the security deposit or from any sum due by the Employer to the contractor whether under this contract or otherwise. The Employer shall not be bound to contest any claim made against it under Section 12, of the said Act, except on the written request of the contractor and upon his giving to the Employer full security for all cost for which the Employee might become liable in consequence of contesting such claim. Clause –18 B :: In every case in which by virtue of the provisions of the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act 1970, and of the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Central Rules, 1971, the Employer is obliged to pay any amounts of wages to a workman employed by the contractor in execution of the works, or to incur any expenditure in providing welfare and health amenities required to be provided under the above said Act and the rules under Clause 19H or under the Contractors' Labour Regulations, or under the Rules framed by the State or Central Employer from time to time for the protection of health and sanitary arrangements for workers employed by the Contractors, the Employer shall be entitled to recover from the contractor the amount of wages so paid or the amount of expenditure so incurred; and without prejudice to the rights of the Employer under sub-Section (2) of Section 20, and sub-Section (4) of Section 21, of the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970, the Employer shall be at liberty to recover such amount or any part thereof by deducting it from the security deposit or from any sum due by the Employer to the contractor whether under this contract or otherwise. The Employer shall not be bound to contest any claim made against it under sub-Section (1) Section 20 and sub-Section (4) of Section 21,or any other provisions of the said Act, except on the written request of the contractor and upon his giving to the Employer full security for all costs for which the Employer might become liable in contesting such claim.

35

Clause –19 :: The contractor shall obtain a valid licence under the Contract Labour (R&A) Act, 1970, and the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Central Rules, 1971, before the commencement of the work, and continue to have a valid license until the completion of the work. The contractor shall also abide by the provisions of the Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act, 1986. The contractor shall also comply with the provisions of the building and other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment & Conditions of Service) Act, 1996 and the building and other Construction Workers Welfare Cess Act, 1996. Any failure to fulfill these requirements shall attract the penal provisions of this contract arising out of the resultant non-execution of the work. Clause –19 A :: NO labour below the age of eighteen years shall be employed on the work. Clause -19 B :: PAYMENT OF WAGES :: a) The contractor shall pay to labour employed by him either directly of through sub-contractors, wages not less than fair wages as defined as per the provisions of the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act 1970, and the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Central Rules, 1971 wherever applicable. Such wages paid shall not less than the wages fixed by the state and/or Central Employer under the Minimum Wages Act applicable to the work. b) The contractor shall, notwithstanding the provisions of any contract to the contrary, cause to be paid fair wage to labour indirectly engaged on the work, including any labour engaged by his sub-contractors in connection with the said work, as if the labour had been immediately employed by him. c) In respect of all labour directly or indirectly employed in the works for performance of the contractor's part of this contract, the contractor shall comply with or cause to be complied with the Contractor's Labour Regulations made by Employer and or the Employer (State and Central) from time to time in regard to payment of wages, wage period, deductions from wages, recovery of wages not paid and deductions unauthorisedly made, maintenance of wage books or wage slips, publication of scale of wages and other terms of employment, inspection and submission of periodical returns and all other matters of the like nature or as per the provisions of the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970, and the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Central Rules, 1971, wherever applicable. d) (i) The Employer and/or his Engineer-in-Charge concerned shall have the right to deduct from the moneys due to the contractor any sum required or estimated to be required for making good the loss suffered by a worker or workers by reason of non-fulfillment of the conditions of the contract for the benefit of the workers, non-payment of wages or of deductions made from his or their wages which are not justified by their terms of the contract or non-observance of the Regulations. (ii) Under the provision of Minimum Wages (Central) Rules 1950, the contractor is bound to allow to the labour directly or indirectly employed in the works one way rest for 6 days continuous work and pay wages at the same rate as for duty. In the event of default the Employer and or Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right to deduct the sum or sums not paid on account of wages for weekly holidays to any labour and pay the same to the persons entitled thereto from any money due to the contractor by the Employer In cases where the state Government or Government of the Union of India where all inclusive minimum daily wages are fixed and such wages are inclusive of wages for the weekly day of rest, the question of extra payment for weekly holiday would not arise.

36

e) The contractor shall comply with the provisions of the payment of Wages Act, 1936, Minimum Wages Act, 1948, Employees Liability Act, 1938, Workmen's Compensation Act, 1923, Industrial Disputes Act, 1947, Maternity Benefits Act, 1961, and the Contractors Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act 1970, or the modifications thereof or any other laws relating thereto and the rules made thereunder from time to time. f) The contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Employer against payments to be made under and for the observance of the laws aforesaid and the Contractors' Labour Regulations without prejudice to his right to claim indemnify from his sub-contractors. g) The laws aforesaid shall be deemed to be a part of this contract and any breach thereof shall be deemed to be a breach of this contract. h) Whatever is the minimum wage for the time being, or if the wage payable is higher than such wage, such wage shall be paid by the contractor to the workmen directly without the intervention of Jamadar and that Jamadar shall not be entitled to deduct or recover any amount from the minimum wage payable to the workmen as and by way of commission or otherwise. The Contractor shall ensure that no amount by way of commission or otherwise is deducted or recovered by the Jamadar from the wage of workmen. Clause -19 C :: IN respect of all labour directly or indirectly employed in the work for the performance of the contractor's part of this contract, the contractor shall at his own expense arrange for the safety provisions as per Government and Employer's safety Code framed from time to time and shall at his own expense provide for all facilities in connection therewith. In case the contractor fails to make arrangement and provide necessary facilities as aforesaid he shall be liable to pay a penalty of Rs.200/- for each default and in addition the Engineer-in-Charge shall be at liberty to make arrangement and provide facilities as aforesaid and recover the costs incurred in that behalf from the contractor. Clause -19 D :: THE contractor shall submit by the 4th and 19th of every month, to the Engineer-in-Charge a true statement showing in respect of the second half of the preceding month and the first half of the current month respectively. (1) the number of labourers employed by him on the work.

(2) their working hours,

(3) the wages paid to them,

(4) the accidents that occurred during the said fortnight showing the circumstances. (5) the number of female workers who have been allowed Maternity Benefit according to Clause 19F

and the amount paid to them. Failing which the contractor shall be liable to pay to Employer a sum not exceeding Rs.200/- for each default or materially incorrect statement. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be final in deducting from any bill due to the contractor the amount levied as fine and be binding on the Contractor. Clause -19 E :: The contractor shall comply with or cause to be complied with all the rules framed by the State and or Central Government from time to time for the protection of health and sanitary arrangements for workers employed, in respect of all labour directly or indirectly employed in the works for the performance of the contractor's part of this contract.

37

Clause -19 F :: The Contractor shall maintain appropriate records for LEAVE and pay during leave and the same shall be regulated as follows :: 1. Leave (i) in the case of delivery - maternity leave not exceeding 8 weeks, 4 weeks up to and including the

day of delivery and 4 weeks following that day, (ii) in the case of miscarriage - upto 3 weeks from the date of miscarriage. 2. Pay (i) In the case of delivery - leave pay during maternity leave will be at the rate of the women's

average daily earnings, calculated on total wages earned on the days when full time work was done during a period of 3 months immediately preceeding the date on which she gives notice that she expects to be confined or at the rate of Rupee one only a day whichever is greater.

(ii) IN the case of miscarriage - leave pay at the rate of average daily earning calculated on the total

wages earned on the days when full time work was done during a period of 3 months immediately preceeding the date of such miscarriage.

Clause -19 G :: DEFAULT AS TO REGULATIONS/RULES :: (i) IN the event of the contractor(s) committing a default or breach of any of the provisions of Contractors' about Regulations and Model Rules for the protection of health and sanitary arrangements for the workers as amended from time to time or furnishing any information or submitting or filling any statement under the provisions of the above Regulations and Rules which is materially incorrect, the contractor shall without prejudice to any other liability pay to the Employer a sum not exceeding Rs.100/- for every default, breach or furnishing, making, submitting, filing such materially incorrect statements and in the event of the contractor(s) defaulting continuously in this respect, the penalty may be enhanced to Rs.50/- per day for each day of default subject to a maximum of 5 percent of the estimated cost of the work put to tender. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge / Employer shall be final and binding on the contractors. (ii) Should it appear to the Engineer-in-Charge/ Employer that the contractor(s) is/are not properly observing and complying with the provisions of the Contractor's Labour Regulations and Model Rules and the provisions of the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act 1970, and the Contract Labour (R & A) Central Rules 1971, for the protection of health and sanitary arrangements for work-people the Engineer-in-Charge/ Employer shall have power to give notice in writing to the contractor(s) requiring that the said Rules be complied with and the amenities prescribed therein be provided to the work-people within a reasonable time to be specified in the notice. If the contractor(s) shall fail within the period specified in the notice to comply with and/observe the said Rules and to provide the amenities to the work-people as aforesaid, the Engineer-in-Charge shall have the power to provide the amenities hereinbefore mentioned at the cost of the contractor(s). The contractor(s) shall erect, make and maintain at his/their own expenses and approved standards all necessary huts and sanitary arrangements required for his/their work-people on the site in connection with the execution of the works, and if the same shall not have been erected or constructed, according to approved standards, the Engineer-in-Charge/ Employer shall have power to give notice in writing to the contractor(s) requiring that the said huts and sanitary arrangements be remodeled and/or reconstructed according to approved standards, and if the contractor(s) shall fail to remodel reconstruct such huts and sanitary arrangements according to approved standards within the period specified in the notice, the Engineer-in-Charge/ Employer shall have the power to remodel or reconstruct such huts and sanitary arrangements according to approved standards at the cost of the contractor(s).

38

Clause –19 H :: CAMP :: Facility like toilets, water supply, rest rooms shall be provided for the labours as per labours regulations for similar works. Clause -19 - I :: COMPLIANCE AS TO EMPLOYEES' SERVICE :: THE Engineer-in-Charge/ Employer may require the contractor to dismiss or remove from the site of the work any person or persons in the contractors' employment who may be incompetent or misconduct himself or undesirable person and the contractor shall forthwith comply with such requirements. Clause –19- K :: ILLEGAL OCCUPATION :: The contractor shall undertake to see that the building under construction is not occupied by anybody unauthorisedly during construction, and is handed over to the Employer through his Engineer-in-Charge with vacant possession of complete building. If such building though completed is occupied illegally, then the Employer shall have the option to refuse to accept the said building/buildings in that position, and delay in acceptance on this account will be treated as delay in completion and for such delay a levy upto 5% of estimated cost put to tender may be imposed by the Employer whose decision shall be final both with regard to the justification and quantum and be binding on the Contractor. However, the Employer may request the contractor through a notice to remove the illegal occupation any time on or before construction and delivery. Clause - 20 :: COMPLIANCE WITH STATUTE :: THE Contractor shall comply with all the provisions of the Minimum Wages Act, 1948, Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act 1970, EPF & MP Act 1952, ESI Act and amendments from time to time and rules framed thereunder and other labour laws affecting contract labour that may be brought into force from time to time. Clause - 21 :: ASSIGNMENT :: The contract shall not be assigned or sublet without the written approval of the Employer. And if the contractor shall assign or sublet his contract, or attempt to do so, or become insolvent or commence any insolvency proceedings or make any composition with his creditors or attempt to do so, or if any bribe, gratuity, gift, loan, perquisite, reward or advantage pecuniary or otherwise, shall either directly or indirectly, be given, promised or offered by the contractor, or any of his servants or agent to any officer or person in the employ of the Employer in any way relating to his office or employment, or if any such officer or person shall become in any way directly or indirectly interested in the contract, the Employer shall have power to adopt any of the courses specified in Clause 3 hereof as he many deem best suited to the interest of the Employer and in the event of any of these courses being adopted the consequences specified in the said Clause 3 shall ensue. Clause - 22 :: REASONABLE COMPENSATION :: All sums payable by way of compensation under any of these conditions shall be considered as reasonable compensation to be applied to the use of the Employer without reference to the actual loss or damage sustained. Clause - 23 :: APPROVAL FOR CHANGE IN CONSTITUTION :: Where the contractor is a partnership firm, the previous approval in writing of the Employer shall be obtained before any change is made in the constitution of the firm. Where the contractor is an individual business concern such approval as aforesaid shall likewise be obtained before the contractor enters into any partnership agreement where under the partnership firm would have the right to carry out the works hereby undertaken by the contractor. If previous approval as aforesaid is not obtained, the contact shall be deemed to have been assigned in contravention of Clause 21 hereof and the same action may be taken, and the same consequences shall ensue as provided in the said Clause 21.

39

Clause - 24 :: DIRECTIONS AS TO WORK :: All works to be executed under the contract shall be executed under the direction and subject to the approval in all respects of the Engineer-in-Charge/ Employer who shall be entitled to direct at what point or points and in what manner are to be commenced, and from time to time carried on. Clause - 25 :: SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES AND ARBITRATION :: (i) It shall be accepted as an inseparable part of the contract that in matters regarding conditions &

clauses of contract, quality of materials, workmanship, removal or rejection of improper work, interpretation of the drawings and specifications, measurements of materials and/or items of work, mode of procedure and carrying out of the work, the decision of the Employer which shall be given in writing, shall be final, conclusive and binding on the contractor.

ii) (A) If the contractor considers any work demanded of him to be outside the requirements of the

contract, or considers any drawings record or decision given in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge on any matter in connection with or arising out of the contract or carrying out of work, to be unacceptable, he shall promptly within 15 days request the Accepting Authority in writing for written instruction or decision. Thereon, the Accepting Authority shall give his written instructions or decision within a period of two months from the receipt of the contractor's letter.

(B) Upon receipt of such written instructions or decision the contractor shall promptly proceed without

delay to comply with such instructions or decisions. If the Accepting Authority fails to give his instructions or decision in writing within a period of two months after being requested or if the contractor is dissatisfied with the instructions or decision of the Accepting Authority Employer, the Contractor may within 30 days appeal to the Appointing Authority who shall afford an opportunity to the contractor to be heard and to offer evidence in support of his appeal and give his decision in writing within a period of Thirty (30) days from the receipt of the contractor‟s request. If the contractor is dissatisfied with the decision of the appointing authority , then the contractor shall within a period of Thirty (30) days from receipt of the decision of the Appointing authority shall indicate his intention to refer the dispute to Arbitration, failing which the said decision of the Appointing authority shall be final and conclusive and not referable to adjudication by the Arbitrator.

iii) All disputes or differences in respect of which decisions have not been final, binding and

conclusive as above shall be referred for adjudication by the arbitration by a Sole Arbitrator appointed as follows:

Within Thirty (30) days of receipt of notice from any party to the contract for appointment of the Arbitrator the Appointing authority, in charge of the work (Schedule F) at the time of such appointment shall send to the contractor a panel of three names of persons who shall not presently be connected with the work. The contractor shall within fifteen (15) days of receipt of this list select and communicate to the Appointing authority the name of one person from the list who shall then be appointed as the sole arbitrator by the Appointing authority. If contractor fails to communicate his selection of name of the person, within Fifteen (15) days as stipulated, the Appointing authority shall without delay select one person from the list and appoint him as Sole Arbitrator. If the Appointing authority fails to send such a list within Thirty (30) days as stipulated, the contractor shall send a similar list to the Appointing authority within fifteen (15) days. The Appointing authority shall then select one person from the list and appoint him as the Sole Arbitrator within Thirty (30) days of the receipt of the list. If the Appointing authority fails to do so then the contractor shall communicate to the Appointing authority the name of one person from the list who shall then be the Sole Arbitrator.

40

If the Arbitrator so appointed is unable or unwilling to act or resigns his appointment or vacates his office due to any reason whatsoever another sole Arbitrator shall be appointed in the manner aforesaid. Such person shall be entitled to proceed with the reference from the stage at which it was left by his predecessor.

iv) It is term of this contract that the party invoking arbitration shall give a list of disputes with amounts claimed in respect of each such dispute along with the notice for appointment of arbitrator and giving reference to the rejection by the Appointing authority of the appeal and a copy of his notice(s) of intention to refer the dispute to arbitration of such disputes as mentioned in Part (ii) above failing which the notice for appointment of the Arbitrator shall not be treated as notice for appointing the arbitrator.

v) It is also a term of this contract that no person other than a person appointed by Appointing

authority, in charge of the work as aforesaid should act as arbitrator and if for any reason that is not possible, the matter shall not be referred to arbitration at all.

vi) It is also a term of the contract that if the contractor does not make any demand for appointment

of arbitration in respect of any claims in writing as aforesaid within 90 days of receiving the intimation from the Appointing authority that the final bill is ready for payment, the claim of the contractor shall be deemed to have been waived and absolutely barred and the Employer shall be discharged and released of all liabilities under the contact in respect of these claims. No party shall be entitled to bring any claim to arbitration if the arbitrator has not been appointed before the expiry of sixty days after defect liability period.

vii) The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions of the Indian Arbitration and

Conciliation ACT 1996 , or any statutory modification or re-enactment thereof and the rules made thereunder and for the time being in force shall apply to the arbitration proceeding under this clause.

viii) The Arbitrator may from time to time with the consent of the parties enlarge the time for making

and publishing the award. ix) It is also a term of this contract that the Arbitrator shall adjudicial on only such disputes as are

referred to him by the appointing authority and give separate award against every dispute and claim referred to him and in all cases where the total amount of the claims by any party exceed the amount specified in Schedule `F ' the arbitrator shall give reasons for the award separately for every dispute.

(x) It is also a term of the contract that any fees, TA, DA and other charges are payable to the

Arbitrator shall be paid by both the parties equally.

(xi) The venue of the arbitration shall be such a place as may be fixed by the Arbitrator in his sole discretion.

xii) It is also a term of the contract that the Arbitrator shall be deemed to have entered on the reference on the date of first hearing. The fees, and charges of the Arbitrator shall, if required to be paid before the award is made and published, be paid half and half by each of the parties. The cost of the reference and of the award (including the fees, if any, of the Arbitrator) shall be in the discretion of the Arbitrator who may direct to and by whom and in what manner, such costs or any part thereof shall be paid and fix or settle the amount of costs to be so paid.

xii) The award of the Arbitrator shall be final and binding on both the parties.

41

Clause - 26 :: INDEMNITY :: The Contractor shall keep and hold the Employer indemnified and harmless from time to time and at all times against all actions, prosecutions proceedings, claims, suits, liabilities (including statutory liability), penalties, demands, charges, costs (including legal costs) and expenses, damages, losses and any other expenses which may be caused to or suffered by or made or taken against the Employer arising out of : i) The breach, default or non-performance of undertakings, warranties, covenants or obligations by

the contractor , non-compliance of safety rules, regulations, instructions by the contractor and mishaps occurring at the site due to faulty work executed by the contractor

ii) Any contravention or Non compliance with any applicable laws, regulations, rules, statutory or legal requirements by the Bidder

Further, the Contractor shall indemnify, protect and save the Employer against all claims, losses, costs, damages, expenses, action suits and other proceedings, resulting from infringement of any law pertaining to patent, trademarks, copyrights etc. or such other statutory infringements in respect of the services offered by the contractor . All Indemnities shall survive notwithstanding expiry or termination of the contract and contractor shall continue to be liable under the indemnities. There is no limit to claims made by the Employer / third parties in case of infringement of Intellectual property rights or for claims relating to the loss of damage to real property and tangible personal property and for bodily injury or death and in these cases the liability will be unlimited ”. In Rs 200/- worth non-judicial stamp paper the Indemnity bond in the prescribed format covering the above points shall be submitted by the successful tenderer within 14 days of the issue of work order by the employer. Clause - 27 :: ESTIMATE :: When the estimate on which a tender is made includes lump sum in respect of parts of the work the contractor may be entitled to payment in respect of the items of work involved or the part of the work in question at the same rates as are payable under this contract for such items, or if the part of the work in question is not, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge capable of measurement, the Employer may at his discretion pay the lump-sum amount entered in the estimate, and the certificate in writing of the Employer shall be final and conclusive against the contractor with regard to any sum or sums payable to him under the provisions of the clause. Clause -28 :: ACTION WHERE NO SPECIFICATIONS ARE SPECIFIED:: In the case of any class of work for which there is no such specifications as referred to in Clause 11, such work shall be carried out in accordance with the Bureau of Indian Standards Specifications. In case there are no such specifications in Bureau of Indian Standards, the work shall be carried out as per manufacturers‟ specifications, if not available then as per District Specifications. In case there are no such specifications as required above, the work shall be carried out in all respects in accordance with the instructions and requirements of the Engineer-in-Charge. Clause - 29 :: LIEN :: (a) Whenever any claim or claims for payment of a sum of money arises out of or under the contract against the contractor, the Engineer-in-Charge or the Employer shall be entitled to withhold and also have a lien to retain such sum or sums in whole or in part from the security, if any deposited by the Contractor and for the purpose aforesaid, the Engineer-in-Charge or the Employer shall be entitled to withhold the security deposit, if any, furnished as the case may be and also have a lien over the same pending finalization or adjudication of any such claim. In the event of the security being insufficient to cover the claimed amount or amounts or if no security has been taken from the contractor, the Engineer-in-Charge or the Employer shall be entitled to withhold and have a lien to retain to the extent of such

42

claimed amount or amounts referred to above, from any sum or sums found payable or which may at any time thereafter become payable to the contractor under the same contract or any other contract with the Employer pending finalization or adjudication of any such claim. (b) Any sum of money due and payable to the contractor (including the security deposit returnable to him) under the contract may be withhold or retained by way of lien by the Engineer-in-Charge or the Employer or any other contracting person or persons through Engineer-in-Charge against any claim of the Engineer-in-Charge or the Employer or such person or persons in respect of payment of a sum of money arising out of or under any other contract made by the contractor with the Engineer-in-Charge or the Employer or with such other person or persons. (c) It is an agreed term of the contract that the sum of money or moneys so withheld or retained under the lien referred to above by the Engineer-in-Charge or the Employer will be kept withheld or retained as such by the Engineer-in-Charge or the Employer till the claim arising out of or under the contract is determined by the arbitrator (if the contracts governed by the arbitration clause) or by the competent court, as the case may be and that the contractor will have no claim for interest or damages whatsoever on any account in respect of such withholding or retention under the lien referred to above and duly notified as such to the contractor. For the purpose of this clause, where the contractor is a partnership firm or a limited company, the Engineer-in-Charge or the Employer shall be entitled to withhold and also have a lien to retain towards such claimed amount or amounts in whole or in part from any sum found payable to any partner/limited company as the case may be, whether in his individual capacity or otherwise. Clause -29 A :: RIGHT TO AUDIT/TECHNICAL EXAMINATION :: The Employer shall have the right to cause an audit and technical examination of the works and the final bills of the contractor including all supporting vouchers, abstract, etc., to be made even after payment of the final bill and if as a result of such audit and technical examination any sum is found to have been overpaid in respect of any work done by the contractor under the contract or any work claimed to have been done by him under the contract and found not to have been executed, the contractor shall be liable to refund the amount of over-payment and it shall be lawful for the Employer to recover the same from him in the manner prescribed in clause 29 or in any other manner legally permissible and if it is found that the contractor was paid less than what was due to him under the contract in respect of any work executed by him under it, the amount of such under payment shall be duly paid by the Employer to the contractor, without any interest thereon; Provided that the contractor shall not be entitled to payment of any sum paid short where such payment has been agreed upon between the Employer and Engineer-in-Charge on the one hand and the contractor on the other under any term of the contract permitting payment for work after assessment by the Employer and Engineer-in-Charge. Clause - 30 :: WATER SUPPLY The contractor(s) shall make his/their own arrangements for water required for the work and nothing extra will be paid for the same. This will be subject to the following conditions :: (i) That the water used by the contractor(s) shall be fit for construction purposes to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. (ii) The Engineer-in-Charge shall make alternative arrangements for supply of water at the risk and cost of contractor(s) if the arrangements made buy the contractor(s) for procurement of water are in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, unsatisfactory. Clause - 31 :: DELETED Clause - 32 :: ALTERNATE WATER SUPPLY :: (i) Where there is no piped water supply arrangement and the water is taken by the contractor from the wells or hand pump constructed by the Employer, if any, charge at 1 % (one percent) of the Gross value of the work shall be recovered from the contractor on that account. The contractor shall, however, draw water at such hours of the day that it does not interfere with the normal use for which the hand pumps and wells are intended. He will also be responsible for all damage and abnormal repairs arising out of his use, the cost of which shall be recoverable from him. The Engineer-in-Charge shall be the final authority

43

to determine the cost recoverable from the contractor on this account and his decision shall be binding on the contractor. (ii) The contractor shall be allowed to construct temporary wells or borewell in on employers land for taking water by pumping at his own cost, for construction purposes only after he has got permission of the Engineer-in-Charge in writing. No charges shall be recovered from the contractor on this account, but the contractor shall be required to provide necessary safety arrangements to avoid any accidents or damage to adjacent buildings, roads and caused due to construction and subsequent maintenance of the wells and shall restore the ground to its original condition after the wells are dismantled on completion of the work. Clause - 33 :: ARRANGEMENTS OF MACHINERY EQUIPMENT :: The contractor shall arrange at his own expense all tools, plant, machinery and equipment required for execution of the work. Clause - 34 :: CONTRACTORS SUPERINTENDENCE, SUPERVISION, TECHNICAL STAFF & EMPLOYEE :: (i) The contractor shall provide all necessary superintendence during execution of the work and as long thereafter as may be necessary for proper fulfilling of the obligations under the contract. The contractor shall immediately after receiving letter of acceptance of the tender and before commencement of the work, intimate in writing to the Employer the name, qualifications, experience, age, address and other particulars along with certificates, of the principal technical representative to be in charge of the work. Such qualifications and experience shall not be lower than specified in Schedule F. The Employer shall within 30 days of receipt of such communication intimate in writing his approval or otherwise of such a representative to the contractor. Any such approval may at any time be withdrawn and in case of such withdrawal the contractor shall appoint another such representative according to the provisions of this clause. Decision of the tender accepting authority shall be final and binding on the contractor in this respect. The work shall be started only after such a principal technical representative is appointed. If the contractor (or any partner in case of firm/company) who himself has such qualifications, it will not be necessary for the said contractor to appoint such a principal technical representative but the contractor shall disengage and appoint a responsible agent to represent him to be present at the work whenever the Contractor is not in a position to be so present. All the provision applicable to the Principal Technical representative under this clause will also be applicable in the case of contractor or his responsible agent. The Principal Technical representative and/or the contractor shall on receiving reasonable notice from the Engineer-in-Charge or his designated representative(s) in charge of the work in writing or in person or otherwise, present himself to the Engineer-in-Charge and/or at the site of work, as required, to take instructions. Instructions given to the principal technical representative or the responsible agent shall be deemed to have the same force as if these have been given to the contractor. The Principal Technical Representative and/or the contractor or his responsible authorised agent shall be actually available at site atleast on two working days every week, these days shall be determined in consultation with the Engineer-in-Charge as well as fully during important stages of execution of work, during recording of measurement of works and whenever so required by the Engineer-in-Charge by a notice as aforesaid and shall also note down instructions conveyed by the Engineer-in-Charge or his designated representative in the site order book and shall affix his signature in token of noting down the instructions and in token of acceptance of measurements. There shall be no objection if the representative/agent looks after more than one work and not more than three works in the same station provided these details are disclosed to the Engineer-in-Charge and he shall be satisfied that the provisions and the purpose of this clause are fulfilled satisfactorily. If the Engineer-in-Charge, whose decision in this respect is final and binding on the Contractor is convinced that no such technical representative or agent is effectively appointed or is effectively attending or fulfilling the provision of this clause, a recovery shall be effected from the Contractor as specified in Schedule `F' and the of the Engineer-in-Charge as recorded in the site order book and measurements recorded in Measurement Books shall be final and binding on the contractor.

44

Further if the Contractor fails to appoint a suitable technical representative or responsible agent and if such appointed person(s) or not effectively present or do not discharge their responsibilities satisfactorily, the Engineer-in-Charge shall have full powers to suspend the execution of the work until such date as a suitable agent is appointed and the Contractor shall be held responsible for the delay so caused to the work. Contractor shall submit a certificate of employment of the technical representative/responsible agent along with every on account bill/final bill and shall produce evidence if at any time so required by the Engineer-in-Charge. (ii) The contractor shall provide and employ on the site only such technical assistants as are skilled and experienced in their respective fields and such foremen and Supervisory staff as are competent to give proper supervision to the work. The contractor shall provide and employ skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled labour as is necessary for proper and timely execution of the work. The Engineer-in-Charge shall be at liberty to object to and require the contractor to remove from the works any person who in his opinion misconduct himself, or is incompetent or negligent in the performance of his duties or whose employment is otherwise considered by the Engineer-in-Charge to be undesirable. Such person shall not be employed again at works site without the written permission of the Engineer-in-Charge and the persons so removed shall be replaced as soon as possible by competent substitutes. Clause - 35 :: TAXES :: (i) Profession tax, Purchase tax, turnover tax or any other tax on materials and/or completed works unless otherwise specifically excluded in respect of this contract shall be payable by the contractor and Employer shall not entertain any claim whatsoever in this respect other than normal payment for completed item of work at the accepted rate. (ii) The contractor shall deposit royalty and obtain necessary permit for supply of the red bajri, stone, kankar etc. from local authorities. All the accepted rates for the work shall be deemed to include all such charges. (iii) If pursuant to or under any law, notification or order any royalty, cess, fee or the like becomes payable by the Employer and does not at any time become payable by the contractor to the State Government and/or the local authorities in respect of any material used by the contractor in the works then in such a case, it shall be lawful to the Employer and the Employer will have the right and be entitled to recover the amount paid in the circumstances as aforesaid from dues of the contractor. Clause - 36 :: TENDERED RATES :: (i) All tendered rates shall be inclusive of all taxes, royalties etc as stated in clause-35.I and payable under respective statutes. However, pursuant to the Constitution (Forty Sixth amendment) Act, 1982, if any further new tax royalties cess or levy is imposed by Statute, after the date of receipt of tenders, and the contractor there upon necessarily and properly pays such taxes/levies the contractor shall be reimbursed the amount so paid, provided such payments, if any, is not, in the opinion of the Employer (whose decision shall be final and binding on the contractor) attributable to delay in execution of work within the control of the contractor. GOODS & SERVICES TAX (GST) to be paid by the employer separately. (ii) The contractor shall keep necessary books of accounts and other documents for the purpose of this condition as may be necessary and shall allow inspection of the same by a duly authorised representative of the Employer and/or the Engineer-in-Charge and further shall furnish such other information/document as the Engineer-in-Charge may require from time to time. (iii) The contractor shall, within a period of 30 days of the imposition of any such further tax royalties, cess, or levy, pursuant to the constitution (Forty sixth Amendment) Act 1982, give a written notice thereof to the Employer and Engineer-in-Charge that the same is given pursuant to this condition, together with all necessary information relating thereto.

45

Clause - 37 :: REMOVAL OF DEBRIS The work (whether fully constructed or not) and all materials, machines, tools and plants, scaffolding, temporary buildings and other things connected therewith shall be at the risk of the contractor until the work has been delivered to the Employer and a certificate from Engineer in charge to that effect obtained. In the event of the work or any materials properly brought to the site for incorporation in the work being damaged or destroyed in consequence of hostilities or warlike operation, the contractor shall when ordered (in writing) by the Engineer-in-Charge to remove any debris from the site, collect and properly stack or remove in store all serviceable materials salvaged from the damaged work and shall be paid at the contract rates in accordance with the provision of this agreement for the work of clearing the site of debris, stacking or removal of serviceable material and for reconstruction of all works ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge, such payments being in addition to compensation upto the value of the work originally executed before being damaged or destroyed and not paid for. In case of works damaged or destroyed but not already measured and paid for, the compensation shall be assessed by the Engineer-in-Charge upto Rs.5,000/- and by the Employer concerned for a higher amount. The contractor shall be paid for the damages/destruction suffered and for the restoring the material at the rate based on analysis of rates tendered for in accordance with the provision of the contract. The certificate of the Engineer-in-Charge regarding the quality and quantity of materials andthe purpose for which they were collected shall be final and binding on the contractor. Provided always that no compensation shall be payable for any loss in consequence of hostilities or war-like operations (a) unless the contractor had taken all such precautions against air raid as are deemed necessary by the Engineer-in-Charge (b) for any material etc. not on the site of the work or for any tools, plant, machinery, scaffolding, temporary building and other things not intended for the work. IN the event of the contractor having to carry out reconstruction as aforesaid, he shall be allowed such extension of time for its completion as is considered reasonable by the employer. Clause - 38 :: APPRENTICES :: The contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Apprentices Act, 1961 and the rules and orders issued there under from time to time. The contractor shall also be liable for any pecuniary liability arising on account of any violation by him of the provisions of the said Act. Clause - 39 :: CLEARANCE CERTIFICATE :: Security Deposit of the work shall not be refunded till the contractor produces a clearance certificate from the Labour Officer. As soon as the work is virtually complete the contractor shall apply for the clearance certificate to the Labour Officer under intimation to the Engineer-in-Charge. The Engineer-in-Charge, on receipt of the said communication, write to the Labour Officer to this effect till six months after the date of completion, it will be deemed to have received the clearance certificate and the Security Deposit will be released if otherwise due. Clause - 40 :: DAMAGES :: THE Contractor shall be responsible for all injury to the work or workmen to persons, animals or things and for all damages to the structural and/or decorative part of property which may arise from the operations or neglect of himself or of any sub-contractor or of any of his or a sub-contractors employees, whether such injury or damage arise from carelessness, accident or any other cause whatsoever in any way connected with the carrying out of this contract. The clause shall be held to include interalia, any damages to buildings whether immediately adjacent or otherwise, and any damage to roads, streets, footpaths or ways as well as damages caused to the buildings and the works forming the subject if this contract by rain, wind or other inclemency of the weather. The contractor shall indemnify the employer and hold harmless in respect of all and any expenses arising from such injury or damages to persons or property as aforesaid and also in respect of any claim made in respect of injury or damage under any acts of compensation or damage consequent upon such claim.

46

THE Contractor shall reinstate all damage of every sort mentioned in this clause, so as to deliver the whole of the contract works complete and perfect in every respect and so as to make good or otherwise satisfy all claims for damages to the property or third parties. The contractor shall effect the insurance necessary and indemnify the employer entirely from all responsibility in this respect. The insurance must be placed with a company approved by the employer and must be effected jointly in the name of the contractor and the employer and the policy lodged with the latter. The scope of insurance is to include loss or damage to the work and workmen due to carelessness, accident including fire, earthquake, floods, etc., damage or loss to the contract itself till this is make over a complete state. Insurance is compulsory and must be effected from the very initial stage. The contractor shall also be responsible for anything which may be excluded from damage to any property arising out of incidents, negligence or defective carrying out of this contract. THE employer shall be at liberty and is hereby empowered to deduct the amount of any damages, compensations, costs, charges and expenses arising or occurring from or in respect of any such claim or damages from any sums due or to become due to the contractor. Clause - 41 :: INSURANCE :: CONTRACTOR‟S ALL RISK POLICY The contractor shall insure the works and keep them insured until the virtual completion of the contract against loss or damages by fire and/or earthquake, flood by paying required premium of the CONTRACTOR‟S ALL RISK POLICY (CAR) for the entire tendered cost covering the entire contract period. The insurance must be placed with a company approved by the Employer, in the joint names of the employer and the contractor for such amount and for any further sum if called to do so by the employer and lodge receipts of premiums paid with the employer within 21 days from the date of issue of letter of acceptance unless otherwise instructed. In default of the contract insuring as provided above, the employer on his behalf may so insure and deduct the premiums paid from any money due or which may become due to the contractor. The contractor shall as soon as the claim under the policy is settled or the work reinstated by the insurance company should they elect to do so, proceed with due diligence will the completion of the works in the same manner as though the damages has not occurred and in all respects under the conditions of the contract. The contractor in case of rebuilding or reinstatement after fire shall be entitled to extension of time for completion as the employer/architect may deem fit.

47

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

1 Scope : 1.1 The works to be governed by this contract shall cover Construction of the building as specified in

the schedule A & E along with all services, including all materials, labour, delivery and transportation up to destination, safe custody at site, insurance, erection, testing and commissioning of the entire works including obtaining statutory permissions for the water supply, sanitary services and electrical power.

1.2 The Contractor shall obtain all the permanent service connections as per required Electricity

power load, Electricity Power, Water and Sewerage connections and shall bear any incidental expenses as included in the items of work of the Tender Document.

1.3 The Contractor shall also be responsible to obtain all the Temporary service connections ie

Electricity Power, Water and Sewerage connections and shall bear any incidental expenses, fees, deposits, monthly consumption charges required for the construction work.

1.4 The works to be undertaken by the contractor shall inter alia include the following:

i. Preparation of detailed SHOP drawings and AS BUILT drawings wherever applicable.

ii. Obtaining of Statutory permissions where-ever applicable and required.

iii. Pre-commissioning tests as per relevant standard specifications, code of practice, Acts and Rules wherever required.

iv. Warranty obligation for the equipments and/or fittings/fixtures supplied by the contractor.

v. Contractor shall maintain all approved samples of all civil, plumbing and electrical samples in a specially designated store, which shall be under lock and key of the EIC. The contractor shall study all GFC drawings issued by the Client/Architect and seek any necessary clarifications regarding the drawings issued within one week of the receipt of the drawings. Any delay caused by non seeking of clarification within the stipulated time by the contractor for which the contractor shall be responsible.

vi. The detailed drawings shall be followed for the areas for which they have been provided.

The specific reference in the drawings and specifications to any material by trade name, make or catalogue number shall be construed as establishing standard, colour, shade, quality and performance to be followed and not as limited to that particular make. Contractor may offer other similar materials as per list of approved makes mentioned in the tender document.

vii. All samples of materials shall be got approved by the contractor by the Architect / RUDSET INSTITUTE within two weeks of the issue of the drawings. A fully furnished temporary site office of minimum 200 sqft to be provided by the contractor at the commencement of the project for the Engineer in charge of the Architect / RUDSET INSTITUTE .

1.5 All the hidden items such as reinforcement steel, electrical conduits, water supply lines, drainage

pipes, conduits, sewers etc. are to be properly tested as per the design conditions before covering and their measurements in measurement book duly test checked shall be deposited with Engineer in charge or his authorized representative, prior to hiding these items.

48

2 Precautionary measures: 2.1 Temporary barricading shall be provided at site by the contractor at his own cost. The barricading

physically define the boundaries of the plot for restricted entry to only those involved in the work and also to prevent any accident and also not causing any inconvenience to the traffic. Any further barricading as required for basement excavation at Site shall be provided by the contractor at his own cost. The barricading should be made in suitable size, shapes and number as directed by Engineer-in-charge without any extra cost. It shall be dismantled and taken away by the contractor after completion of the work at his own cost with the approval of Engineer-in-charge.

2.2 Contractor shall take all precautionary measures to avoid any damage to adjoining property. All

necessary arrangement shall be made at his own cost. 2.3 The contractor shall take all precautions to prevent his workmen and employees from removing

and damaging any Flora (tree/plant/vegetation) from the site. 2.4 The contractor shall take all precautions to avoid accidents by exhibiting necessary caution

boards day and night, speed limit boards, red flags, red lights and providing barriers. He shall be responsible for all damages and accidents caused to work due to negligence on his part. No hindrances shall be caused to traffic, during the execution of the work. In case of any accident of the labourers/ contractual staff, the entire responsibility will rest on the contractor and any compensation under such circumstances, if becomes payable, shall be entirely borne by the contractor.

2.5 The contractor, his authorized representative, workmen etc. shall strictly observe orders

pertaining to fire precautions prevailing in the area. 2.6 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent any nuisance or inconvenience to

the owners, tenants or occupants of the adjacent properties and to the public in general .The Contractor shall take all care, as not to damage any other adjacent property or other services running adjacent to the plot. If any damage is done, the same shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor shall use such methodology and equipments for execution of the work, so as to cause minimum environmental pollution of any kind during construction, to have minimum construction time and minimum inconvenience to road users and to the occupants of the buildings on the adjacent plot and public in general, etc. He shall make good at his own cost and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge any damage to roads, paths, cross drainage works or public or private property whatsoever caused, due to the execution of the work or by traffic brought thereon, by the Contractor. Further, the Contractor shall take all precautions to prevent any pollution of streams and waterways. All waste or superfluous materials shall be carted away by the Contractor, entirely to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. Utmost care shall be taken to keep the noise level to the barest minimum so that no disturbance as far as possible is caused to the occupants / users of adjoining buildings. No claim what so ever on account of site constraints mentioned above or any other site constraints not specifically stated here, shall be entertained from the Contractor. Therefore, the Contractors are advised to visit site and get first hand information of site constraints. Accordingly, they should quote their tenders. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

3 General cleanliness of the site and Stacking & Storage of Materials: 3.1 The site of work shall be always kept clean in general strictly adhering to approved job

layout/specifications. The Contractor shall take all care to prevent any water- logging at site. The waste water shall not be allowed to be collected at site. It may be directly pumped into the public drainage system with prior approval of the concerned authorities. For discharge into public drainage system, necessary permission shall be obtained from relevant authorities after paying the necessary charges, if any, directly to the authorities. The work shall be carried out in such a way that the area is kept clean and tidy. All the fees/charges in this regard shall be borne by the Contractor. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

49

3.2 The contractor shall take instructions from the Engineer-in-Charge regarding collection and stacking of materials at any place. No excavated earth or building rubbish shall be stacked on areas where other buildings, roads, compound wall, services etc are to be constructed. The stacking shall be done as per stacking plan. However, if any change is required, the same shall be done with the approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

3.3 For construction works which are likely to generate malba / rubbish, contractor shall dispose of

malba, rubbish & other unserviceable materials and wastes at his own cost to the dumping ground notified by local authorities and under no circumstances these shall be stacked / dumped even temporarily, outside the construction premises.

3.4 The contractor shall not stack building material/ malba on the road or on the land owned by any

other authority, as the case may be. In case, the Contractor is found stacking the building material/ malba as stated above, he shall be liable to pay the stacking charges as may be levied by local body or authority and also to face penal action as per the rules, regulations and bye-laws of the said body or authority. The Engineer-in-Charge shall be at liberty to recover the sums due but not paid to the concerned authorities on the above counts from any sums due to the contractor including amount of the Security Deposit or Retention Money in respect of this contract or any other contract.

3.5 The contractor shall construct suitable godowns, yard at the site of work for storing all other

materials so as to be safe against damage by sun, rain, damages, fire, theft etc. at his own cost and also employ necessary watch and ward establishment for the purpose at his cost.

4 Laboratory Equipment: 4.1 The contractor shall provide at his own cost suitable measuring tapes, weighing, surveying and

leveling and measuring arrangements as may be necessary at site for checking. All such equipments shall be got calibrated in advance from laboratory, approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account. Minimum equipments as required for field tests shall be provided at site without any extra cost to the Employer.

5. Setting Out of works 5.1 The contractor shall establish, maintain and assume responsibility for grades, lines, levels and

bench marks. Contractor shall report any errors or inconsistencies regarding grades, lines, levels, dimensions to the Engineer-in-Charge before commencing work. Commencement of work shall be regarded as the contractor‟s acceptance of such grades, lines, levels and dimensions and no claim shall be entertained at a later date for any errors found.

5.2 If at any time, any error in the respect of setting out appears during the progress of the work, the

contractor shall, at his own expense rectify such error if so required, to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

a) The contractor shall provide , protect and maintain temporary/ permanent benchmarks at

the site of work throughout the execution of the work. These bench marks shall be got checked by the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representatives. The work at different stages shall be checked with reference to bench marks maintained for the said purpose. All such reference points shall be in relation to the levels and locations, given in the Architectural and plumbing drawings. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

b) The approval by the Engineer-in-Charge, of the setting out by the contractor, shall not

relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities and obligation to rectify the errors/defects, if any, which may be found at any stage during the progress of the work or after the completion of the work.

5.3 The contractor shall be entirely and exclusively responsible for the horizontal, vertical and other

alignments, the level and correctness of every part of the work and shall rectify effectively any errors or imperfections therein. Such rectifications shall be carried out by the contractor at his own cost to the instructions and satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

50

5.4 The Contractor shall carry out survey of the work area, at his own cost, setting out the layout of building in consultation with the Engineer-in-Charge & proceed further. Any discrepancy between the architectural drawings and actual layout at site shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer-in-charge. It shall be responsibility of the Contractor to ensure correct setting out of alignment. Survey instruments only shall be used for layout, fixing boundaries, and centre lines, etc. including theodolites. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

6. Architectural, Structural and integrated service drawings : 6.1 Although tender drawings are made available with the Tender, the working & detailed architectural

drawings and structural drawings shall be issued as and when required according to the programme chart submitted by the contractor. It is the duty of the contractor to intimate the requirement

6.2 The work shall be carried out in accordance with the Architectural drawings and Structural

drawings, to be issued from time to time, by the Engineer-in-Charge. Before commencement of any item of work, the contractor shall correlate all the relevant architectural and structural drawings issued for the work, nomenclature of items, specifications etc. and satisfy himself that the information available there from is complete and unambiguous. The figures & the written dimensions of the drawing shall supersede the measurement by scale. The discrepancy, if any, shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer-in-Charge for immediate decision before execution of the work. The contractor alone shall be responsible for any loss or damage occurring by the commencement of work on the basis of any erroneous and/ or incomplete information and no claim, whatsoever shall be entertained on this account. The delay caused on account of non-timely action by the contractor in resolution of the differences whatsoever shall not be considered as valid ground for extension of time unless otherwise accepted by Engineer in charge.

6.3 The information and site data shown in the drawings and mentioned herein and also elsewhere in

the tender documents are being furnished for general information and guidance only. The Engineer-in Charge/ Employer shall not bear responsibility for lack of such knowledge and also the consequences thereof. The Engineer-in-charge/ Employer in no case shall be held responsible for the accuracy thereof or any interpretation/ or conclusions drawn there from by the contractor.

6.4 Before taking up the work, the contractor shall be provided with working drawings for various civil

and electrical services showing details of lay out plan including sectional elevations and the contractor shall plan and mobilize his resources as per the working drawings and as per the site conditions to facilitate convenient execution, installation as well as maintenance of these services. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

7. Scaffolding &Staging : 7.1 Wherever required for the execution of work, all the scaffolding shall be provided and suitably

fixed, by the contractor. The scaffolding shall be provided strictly with steel double scaffolding system, suitably braced for stability, with all the accessories, gangways, etc with adjustable suitable working platforms to access the areas with ease for working and inspection. Single scaffolding system is strictly prohibited and shall invite necessary action. It shall be designed to take all incidental loads. It should cater to the safety features for workmen. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account. It shall be ensured that no damage is caused to any structure due to the scaffolding.

8. Procurement of materials: 8.1 All material shall only be brought at site as per program finalized with the Engineer-in-Charge.

Any pre-delivery of the material not required for immediate consumption shall not be accepted and thus not paid for.

8.2 The contractor shall procure the required materials in advance so that there is sufficient time for

testing of the materials and approval of the same before use in the work.

51

9. Quoted Rates and other conditions for payment:

The rates quoted by the Contractor for the descriptions given in the Schedule of rates ( SOR ) are deemed to be inclusive of the following apart from other inclusions else where stipulated in these documents :

9.1 Site clearance, setting out work, profile, establishment of reference bench mark(s), taking spot levels, construction of all safety and protection devices, barriers, barricading, signage, labour safety, welfare, preparatory works, working during monsoon, working at all depths, height, lead, lift and location etc until / unless specified otherwise, and any other incidental works required to complete this work. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

9.2 For works below ground level the contractor shall keep that area free from water. If dewatering or

bailing out of water is required the contractor shall do it and nothing extra shall be paid except otherwise provided in the items of Schedule of quantities.

9.3 Any legal or financial implications resulting out of disposal of earth shall be sole responsibility of

the contractor. Nothing extra over the schedule shall be paid on this account. 9.4 All labour, material, tools and plants, temporary water, sewerage, electricity connection charges

& works and other inputs involved/ required in the execution of the item. 9.5 Conducting Tests materials and works wherever stipulated 9.6 Any cement slurry added over base surface (or) for continuation of concreting for better bond is

deemed to have been built in the items. 9.7 For completing the work in time, the Contractor might be required to work in two or more shifts

(including night shifts). No claim whatsoever shall be entertained on this account, not with-standing the fact that the Contractor may have to pay extra amounts for any reason, to the labourers and other staff engaged directly or indirectly on the work according to the provisions of the labour and other statutory bodies regulations and the agreement entered upon by the Contractor with them.

9.8 The Contractor shall arrange to give all notices as required by any statutory / regulatory authority

and obtain all requisite licenses wherever required and shall pay to such authority all the fees that is required to be paid for the execution of work. Nothing extra shall be payable on these accounts.

9.9 All ancillary and incidental facilities required for execution of work like labour camp, stores,

fabrication yard, offices for Contractor, watch and ward, temporary ramp required to be made for working at the basement level, temporary structure for plants and machineries, water storage tanks, installation and consumption charges of temporary electricity, telephone, water etc. required for execution of the work, liaison with municipal / statutory authorities etc., protection works, barricading, testing facilities / laboratory at site of work, facilities for all field tests and for taking samples etc. during execution or any other activity which is necessary (for execution of work and as directed by Engineer-in Charge), shall be deemed to be included in rates quoted by the Contractor for various items in the Schedule of quantities. Nothing extra shall be payable on these accounts.

9.10 Final testing of the installation:

The Contractor shall demonstrate trouble free functioning of all the Plumbing,sanitary, electrical and E & M installations and services. The Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representatives shall carry out final inspection of these various Plumbing, sanitary, electrical and E & M services and installations. Any defect(s) noticed during demonstration shall be rectified by the Contractor at his own cost to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

52

9.11 Contributions towards the EPF & ESI for the labour, employees engaged by the contractor

wherever applicable shall be paid by the Contractor, Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

9.12 All statutory deductions at source (TDS) as per the government rules shall be made. 10. Local laws: 10.1 The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed of all acts and laws of the Central & State

Governments, all orders, decrees of statutory bodies, tribunals having any jurisdiction or authority, which in any manner may affect those engaged or employed and anything related to carrying out the work. All the rules & regulations and bye-laws laid down by Collector / Municipal authorities etc. and any other statutory bodies shall be adhered to, by the contractor, during the execution of work. The Contractor shall also adhere to all traffic restrictions notified by the local authorities.

10.2 The contractor shall ensure that applicable permits mandated by the local bodies and in case

warranted for this work are obtained as required under the Applicable Laws. 10.3 The building work shall be carried out in the manner complying in all respects with the

requirements of relevant bye-laws of the local body and sanctioned plans under the jurisdiction of which the work is to be executed or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and nothing extra shall be paid on this account

11. Water Supply & Sanitary Installations & Testing:

The contractor shall give performance test of the entire installation(s) as per the STATE PWD / CENTRAL PWD standing specifications before the work is finally accepted and nothing extra whatsoever shall be payable to the contractor for the test.

12. Recording of Hindrances:- 12.1 Whenever any hindrance whether on part of Employer or on part of contractor, comes to the

notice of the Engineer in charge, the contractor should at once make a note of such hindrance in the register kept at site, and immediately make a report to the Engineer in charge within a week.

12.2 Each hindrance should be entered in the Hindrance Register, (as per Annexure 14) which

should be authenticated by the Engineer In charge and Contractor. The Employer shall review the Hindrance Register at least once in a month.

12.3 The hindrances on part of contractor are also to be entered in the Hindrance Register. 12.4 The hindrance register shall be submitted at the time of payment of each Running Account Bill. 13. Progress and monitoring of work: 13.1 The contractor shall submit the progress report for the work done during previous month to the

Engineer-incharge on or before 5th day of each month. The progress report shall contain the following, apart from whatever else may be required as specified:-

(i) Construction schedule of the various components of the work through a bar chart for the

next three months (or as may be specified), showing the inter milestones, targeted tasks and up to date progress. At least 3 digital photographs showing all the parts of construction site in soft copy has to be submitted in every monthly progress report.

(ii) Progress chart of the various components of the work that are planned and achieved, for the month as well as cumulative up to the month, with reason for deviations, if any in a tabular format.

(iii) The Contractor shall do proper sequencing of the various activities by suitably staggering the activities within various pockets in the plot so as to achieve early completion.

53

14. Project review meetings:

The contractor, immediately on award of work shall submit details of his key personnel to be engaged for the work at site. In addition, he shall furnish the Employer detailed organization involved with the work. Monthly Review Meetings: Shall be attended by Contractor / their representatives who can take independent decisions along with Engineer in charge and Bank‟s representatives.

15 Hardware and sanitary wares: 15.1 Engineer-in-Charge will take a decision regarding make of materials, model numbers of

equivalent Door/window hardware/ sanitary ware at the time of execution, in case the stipulated make or model mentioned, is not available. However, in case, the equivalent make or model so approved, is cheaper than the make or model already mentioned in Preferred makes list, the price adjustment will be made based on the difference in market rate.

16. Inspection & Audit of works: 16.1 In addition to the provisions of relevant clauses of the contract, the work shall also be open to

inspection by the RUDSET INSTITUTE/Banksinternal inspection and other Government authorities. The contractor shall at times during the usual working hours and at all times at which reasonable notices of the intention of the Engineer-in-charge/ Employer or other authorized officers as stated above to visit the works shall have been given to the contractor, either himself be present to receive the orders and instructions or have a responsible representative duly accredited in writing, to be present for that purpose.

16.2 Any instructions given by the above authorities shall be followed by the contractor. Further any

recoveries ordered by the above authorities shall be made from the amount payable to the contractor or such amounts shall be paid by the contractor to the RUDSET INSTITUTE .

17. Submission of Insurance policies:

No work shall be commenced by the Contractor unless he obtains the Insurance Policies as mentioned under Clauses of contract. Also, no payment shall be made to the Contractor / no permission for continuation of works on expiry of insurance policies unless renewed by the Contractor. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account. No claim of hindrance (or any other claim) shall be entertained from the contractor on these accounts.

18. Chasing work: The work should be planned in a systematic manner so that chase cuttings in the walls, ceilings and floors is minimized. Wherever absolutely essential, the chase shall be cut using chase cutting machines. Chases will not be allowed to be cut using hammer / chisel. The electrical boxes should be fixed in walls simultaneously while raising the brick work. The contractor shall ensure proper co-ordination of various disciplines viz. building works, sanitary & water supply & electrical installations etc.

19. Warranty or Guarantee period for specialized works: The warranty or Guarantee period for the works of water proofing and anti-termite shall be Ten(10) years from the date of completion of the works. The contractor shall make good / rectify the defects occurring during the above period. Security deposit equivalent to 10% of the value of the item shall be retained by RUDSET INSTITUTE for a period of warranty/guarantee. The warranty/ guarantee shall be provided by the principal company for both material & application.

20. External Laboratory :Wherever tests are stipulated for the Materials, concrete etc the same shall be tested at any government, semi government or NABL approved private laboratories.

21. Licensed agencies :The contractor shall engage licensed plumbers, electricians of required

class as per the statutory rules for the works related to plumbing , sanitary, electrical works. Prior approval of the Employer shall be obtained by producing the copy of the Licenses before commencing these works.

22. Maintenance of Registers

54

The Contractor will be required to maintain the following registers at site of work and should produce the same for inspection of the RUDSET INSTITUTE / Engineer in charge wherever desired by them. Type of Register to be maintained are : i) Register No. – I : Cement ii) Register No. – II : Steel iii) Register No. – III : Materials at Site Account iv) Register No. – IV : Secured advance on materials at site v) Register No. – V : Bulkage test of sand vi) Register No. – VI : Silt Test vii) Register No. – VII : Sieve analysis of fine aggregate viii) Register No. – VIII : Sieve analysis of coarse aggregate ix) Register No. – IX : Slump Test x) Register No. – X : Concrete Cube Test xi) Register No. – XI : Hindrance to work xii) Register No. – XII : Running Account Bill xiii) Register No. – XIII : Labour attendance xiv) Register No. – XIV : Labour Payment

55

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(CIVIL WORK) (BASIC)

1. Earth Work : 1.1. The earth work shall be carried out in all kinds of soils, except rock i.e. the excavation

requiring blasting operation. 1.2. Contractor shall clear the site from shrubs jungles etc. before starting the excavation. The

roots of trees and plants shall be removed completely. Rate includes cutting and uprooting of trees upto 30 cm. girth measured at one metre above ground level.

1.3. A masonary pillar shall be erected at a suitable location to serve as a Permanent Bench

Mark. All levels shall be taken from this Standard Bench Mark. The Bench Mark shall be checked and approved by the Engineer. The North Direction line shall also be made at the site. The Bench Mark and the North Direction Line shall be marked on the Plan.

1.4. The excavation shall be done true to levels slope, shape and pattern indicated by the

Engineer only the excavation shown on the drawings or as required by the Engineer shall be measured and recorded for payment.

1.5. The earth filling shall be done with excavated earth or earth obtained from other sources.

The earth shall be free from all roots, vegetations etc. and shall be approved by the Engineer. The filling shall be in layers not exceeding 20 cm. in depth. The earth filling includes compacting, dressing leveling watering etc. complete to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

1.6. Sand filling in plinth shall be done with sand of approved quality in a manner specified in the

earth filling. 1.7 Jungle clearance shall be done to cut and remove shrubs, vegetation, stumps, trees and

saplings upto 30 cm. Girth. The debris shall be disposed as mentioned in the tender items. 2. CEMENT MORTARS, PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE : 2.1. CEMENT MORTARS : 2.1.0. MATERIALS : 2.1.1. Water : 2.1.1.1. Water used for mixing and curing shall be potable water free from deleterious materials like

sugar, salt, oils, vegetable growth etc. water for curing shall not produce any stains on the exposed surface.

2.1.2 Cement : 2.1.2.1. One of the types of cement, given below; as specified shall be used. a) 33 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS:269-1989. b) 43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS:8112-1989. c) P.P.C. fly ash based cement conforming to BIS 1489……… may also be used for the

P.C.C/R.C.C. works. Any other type of cement shall be used only with the approval of Engineer / Consultant of the Project.

56

2.1.2.2. Different types of cement shall not be mixed together. In case more than one type of cement

is used in any work, a record shall be kept showing the location and the types of cement used.

2.1.2.3. Supply: The cement shall be packed in approved composite bags bearing the

manufacturer's name or his registered trade mark if any, an grade and type of cement, ISI Mark, Date of Packing etc.

2.1.2.4. Stacking and Storage : Cement in bags shall be stored and stacked in a shed which is dry;

leakproof and as moisture-proof as possible. Stacking shall not be more than 10 bags high to avoid lumping under pressure. In stacks more than 8 bags high, the cement bags shall be arranged in header and stretcher fashion i.e. alternately length-wise and cross-wise so as to tie the stacks together and minimise the danger of toppling over.

Different types of cement shall be stacked and stored separately. Storage of cement at the work site shall be at the contractor's expense and risk. Any

damage occurring to cement due to faulty storage in contractor's shed or on account of negligence on his part shall be the liability of the contractor.

2.1.3. Fine Aggregate : 2.1.3.1. Fine Aggregate shall be best quality locally available river sand obtained from approved

source. Passing through 4.75 mm. and generally conform to IS:383-1970. 2.1.4. Mortar : 2.1.4.1. The cement mortar shall be prepared by mixing cement and sand in proportion described in

the tender items by volume. 2.1.4.2. 50 kg. of cement shall be taken as 0.035 cubic metre. Sand shall be measured in boxes of

size 40x35x25 cm. in measures of its dry volume. 2.1.4.3. Preparation of mortar by placing drymixing, watering and water mixing in batches shall be

done as per standard Engineering practice under supervision of experienced Supervisors/Site Engineer generally following the provisions of relevent IS Codes 2250-1981. Cement mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of mixing of water.

2.2. CEMENT CONCRETE WORK : 2.2.0. The concrete shall be designated by volumetric proportion of its constituents as given in the

tender items. 2.2.1. Materials : 2.2.1.1 Water, Cement, Fine aggregate or sand shall be as specified in Cement Mortars. 2.2.1.2 . Coarse Aggregate: Coarse Aggregate shall be either crush stone or river gravels of sizes

as per tender items. The Coarse aggregate shall be obtained from approved quarries and shall be cubical in size, hard and free from deleterious materials. The coarse aggregate shall conform to IS 383-1970 and generally graded to conform IS 2386.

2.2.2. Proportioning: The Cement, Fine Aggregate and Coarse aggregate shall be mixed in

volumetric measure. For wet sand bulking shall be taken into account. Cement shall always be used in weight only. For R.C.C. works if Design Mix is specified in B.O.Q. items, contractor to furnish Mix Design of concrete of specified grade for approval of the Consultant of the Project.

57

2.2.3. Mixing: Concrete shall be mixed in mechanical mixers conforming to IS 1791-1985. 2.2.3.1. Hand Mixing: Hand mixing shall not be permitted normally. In exceptional circumstances

the Engineer shall permit hand mixing in writing. The hand mixing shall be done by adding 10% cement more as per Standard Engineering Practice.

2.2.4. Workability, Transportation, Placing &Compaction : The quantity of water shall be properly adjusted to produce adequate workability. Transportation of mixed concrete shall be as speedy as possible to place it without loss of

workability. Placing of concrete shall be done gently without segregation and disturbance of reinforcements. Compaction shall be done by mechanical vibration unless specifically permitted by the Engineer to undertake hand compaction.

Placing of concrete shall be done continuously to the required quantity in one pour without

any construction joint in between. If unavoidable construction joints shall be made as directed by the Engineer.

2.2.5. Curing : Two to three hours after concreting the exposed surface shall be kept damp and after 24

hours the exposed surface shall be continuously kept under wet condition by ponding, sprinkling or any other suitable method, upto 7 (seven) days. If masonary work is done over freshly laid concrete the masonary and concrete shall be cured upto 7 (seven) days.

2.2.6. Works Tests : Minimum compressive strength on works test for different concrete mixes shall be as

specified below for various grades prepared by volumetric proportions in table below. The work test shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer.

Concrete mix on Min. Compressive strength of 15 cm. cube in Kg/cm2 Kg/cm2 7 days 28 days 1:1:2 210 315 1:1-1/2:3 175 265 1:2:4 140 210 2.2.7. Damp Proof Course : 2.2.7.1 . Cement Concrete Layer : Cement concrete layer shall be of specified proportion and thickness. The concrete shall be

laid without honey combing. Curing of CC layer shall be done upto 7 (seven) days. Water proofing compound where specified shall be added to cement.

2.2.8. Under water concrete : Concrete shall not be deposited under water if it is practicable to de-water the area and

place concrete in the regular manner. 2.3. REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE : 2.3.1. Materials : 2.3.1.1. Water, Cement, fine and coarse aggregate shall be as already specified under the clauses

of Cement Mortars/Concrete.

58

2.3.1.2. Steel Reinforcement shall be (a) Mild Steel bars conforming to IS 432 (Pt. I) 1982, (b) High

Strength deformed steel bars conforming to ISI 786-1985 or any other approved type as specified in the respective tender items.

For R.C.C. works only S.D. TMT Bars for high strength reinforcement steel to be used. For proper earthquake resistance structure, reinforcement detailing for structural

members must conform to IS-13920 (Current). 2.3.1.3. All Steel Reinforcement shall be obtained only from the authentic and recognized source. 2.3.1.4. Steel Materials shall be of tested qualities as per IS Codes 432/1786/1566/1982. 2.3.1.5. Stacking and Storage : Steel for reinforcement shall be stored in such a way as to prevent distortion and corrosion and to cause minimum wastage. 2.4. FORM WORK :

The Form work shall be properly designed and shall be strong enough to withstand the dead and live loads and forces caused by ramming and vibrations of concrete and other incidental loads, imposed upon it during and after casting of concrete. The shape and size of concrete dimensions shall not be deviated to avoid bulging, loss of alignment level etc. beyond limits. It shall be made sufficiently rigid by using adequate number of ties and braces, screws jacks or hard wedges to avoid any settlement.

Forms shall be removable without damaging the concrete already laid. Care shall be taken

to see that no piece is keyed into the concrete. 2.4.1 Removal of Form work (Stripping Time) In normal circumstances and where ordinary portland cement is used, forms may generally

be removed after the expiry of the following periods : a) Walls, columns and vertical 24 to 48 hours as faces of all structural may be

decided by members the Engineer. b) Slab i) Spanning upto 4.5 M. 7 days ii) Spanning over 4.5 M. 14 days c) Beams and arches i) Spanning upto 6 M. 14 days ii) Spanning over 6 M. & upto 9 M. 21 days iii) Spanning over 9 M 28 days Work damaged through premature or careless removal of forms shall be reconstructed. The complete form work shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before the

reinforcement bars are placed in position. 2.5. MEASUREMENTS : 2.5.1. Where it is stipulated that the form work shall be paid for separately, measuements shall be

taken of the area of shuttering in contact with the concrete surface. Rate :The rate of the form work includes the cost of labour and materials required for all the

operations described.

59

2.6. REINFORCEMENT : Fabricated reinforcement bars shall be placed in position as shown in the drawings or as

directed by the Engineer. The bars crossing one another shall be tied together at every intersection with two strands of annealed steel wire 0.9 to 1.6 mm thickness twisted tight to make the skeleton of the steel work rigid so that the reinforce-ment does not get displaced during deposition of concrete.

2.6.1. Measurement : Reinforcement including authorised spacer bars and lappages shall be measured in length

of different diameters, as actually (not more than as specified in the drgs.) used in the work nearest to a centimetre and weight calculated diameter wise as per Table. Wastage and unauthorised overlaps shall not be paid for Annealed steel wire required for binding or tack welding shall not be measured, its cost being included in the rate of reinforcement.

TABLE Cross Sectional Area and Mass of Steel Bar

(As per IS:1786) Nominal size Cross Sectional Area Mass per metre Run mm. Sq.mm.Kg. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6 28.3 0.222 7 38.5 0.302 8 50.3 0.395 10 78.6 0.617 12 113.1 0.888 16 201.2 1.58 18 254.6 2.00 20 314.3 2.47 22 380.3 2.98 25 491.1 3.85 28 616.0 4.83 32 804.6 6.31 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.6.1.2. Rate : The rate for reinforcement shall include the cost of labour and materials required for

all operations described above such as cleaning of reinforcement bars, straightening, cutting, hooking, bending, binding, placing in position etc. as required or directed including tack welding on crossing of bars in lieu of binding with wires.

2.7. CONCRETING : 2.7.1. The proportion by volume shall be as specified. 2.7.2. Consistency : The concrete which will flow sluggishly into the forms and around the

reinforcement without any segregation of coarse aggregate from the mortar, shall be used. The consistency shall depend on whether the concrete is vibrated on or hand tamped.

2.7.3. PLACING OF CONCRETE : 2.7.3.1. Concreting shall be commenced only after Engineer-in-Charge has inspected the centering,

shuttering and reinforcement as placed and approved the same. Shuttering shall be clean and free from all shavings, saw dust, pieces of wood or other foreign material and surfaces shall be treated.

2.7.3.2. In case of concreting of slabs and beams, wooden plank or cat walks of chequerred MS

plates or bamboo chalies or any other suitable material supported directly on the centring by means of wooden blocks or lugs shall be provided to convey the concrete to the place of deposition without disturbing the reinforcement in any way. Labour shall not be allowed to walk over the reinforcement.

60

2.7.3.3. In case of columns and walls, it is desirable to place concrete without construction joints. The

progress of concreting in the vertical direction, shall be restricted to one metre per hour. 2.7.3.4. Concrete shall be deposited in its final position in a manner to preclude segregation of

ingredients. In deep trenches and footings concrete shall be placed through chutes or as directed by the Engineer. In case of columns and walls, the shuttering shall be so adjusted that the vertical drop of concrete is not more than 1.5 metres at a time.

2.7.3.5. It is necessary that the time between mixing and placing of concrete shall not exceed 30

minutes so that the initial setting process is not interfered with. 2.7.3.6. Freshly laid concrete shall be protected from rains by providing suitable covering. 2.7.4. COMPACTION : 2.7.4.1 Concrete shall be compacted into dense mass immediately after placing by means of mechanical vibrators designed for continuous operations. 2.8. FINISHING : 2.8.1 In case of roof slabs the top surface shall be finished even and smooth with wooden trowel, before the concrete begins to set. (a) Surface defects shall be rectified as directed by the Engineer. (b) The exposed surface of R.C.C. work shall be plastered with cement mortar 1:3 (1

cement : 3 fine sand) of thickness not exceeding 6mm to give smooth and even surface true to line and form. This shall be paid for separately as described in the items of work.

(c) The surface which is to receive plaster or where it is to be joined with brick masonry

wall, shall be properly roughened immediately after the shuttering is removed, taking care to remove the laitance completely without disturbing the concrete. The roughening shall be done by hacking. Before the surface is plastered, it shall be cleaned and wetted so as to give bond between concrete and plaster.

(d) The surface of RCC slab on which the cement concrete or mosaic floor is to be laid

shall be roughened with brushes while the concrete is green. This shall be done without disturbing the concrete.

2.9. MEASUREMENT : 2.10. Dimensions shall be measured nearest to a cm except for the thickness of slab which shall

be measured correct to 0.5 cm. The areas shall be worked out nearest to 0.01 sq.mt. The cubical contents shall be worked out to nearest 0.01 cubic metre.

2.11. Measurement shall be taken before any rendering is done in concrete

members.Measurement will not include rendering, the measurement of R.C.C. work between various units shall be regulated as below :

(a) Slabs shall be taken as running continuously through except when slab is monolithic with the

beam. In that case it will be from the face to face of the beam. (b) Beams shall be measured from face to face of columns and shall include haunches, if any,

between columns and beam. The depth of the beam shall be from the bottom of slab to the bottom of beam if beam and slab are not monolithic. In case of monolithic construction where slabs are integrally connected with beam, the depth of beam shall be from the top of the slab to the bottom of beam.

(c) The column measurement shall be taken through.

61

(d) Chajjas alongwith its bearing on wall shall be measured in cubic metre nearest to two places of decimal. When chajjas is combined with lintel, slab or beam, the projecting portion shall be measured as chajjas, built in bearing shall be measured as per item of lintel, slab or beam in which chajja bears.

(e) Where the band and lintels are of the same height and the band serves as lintel, the portion

of the band to be measured as lintel shall be for clear length of opening plus twice the over all depth of band.

2.12. RATE : 2.12.1. The rate includes the cost of material and labour involved in all the operations described

above except for the cost of centring, shuttering, finishing and reinforcement.

3.0. BRICK WORK :

3.1 General : Bricks shall be best quality locally available of uniform deep red colour, regular

in shape and size and shall have rectangular faces with sharp corners. The brick work shall conform to IS:2212-1993.

3.2 MATERIALS : 3.2.1. Bricks : Common burnt clay bricks shall be hand moulded or machine moulded. These

shall be provided with frog. Bricks made by extrusion process and brick tiles may not be provided with frogs. Each brick shall be marked (in the frog where provided) with the manufacturer's identification mark. The brick shall be of uniform size and best quality locally available.

The Engineer may at his description get sample of bricks tested for acceptance. The tests shall be as per Standard Practice for the following -

a) Water absorption. b) Dimension tolerance. c) Efflorescence. d) Compressive strength. 3.4. SOAKING OF BRICKS :

Bricks shall be soaked in water for a period of 4 to 6 hours before use in works. 3.5. LAYING : 3.5.1. Bricks shall be laid in English Bond unless otherwise specified. For brick work in half brick

walls, bricks shall be laid in stretcher bond. Half or cut bricks shall not be used except as closer where necessary to complete the bond closers in such cases, shall be cut to the required size and used near the ends of the walls. Header bond shall be used preferably in all courses in curved plan for ensuring better alignment.

3.5.2. In case of walls one brick thick and under, one face shall be kept even and in proper

plane, while the other face may be slightly rough. In case of walls more than one brick thick, both the faces shall be kept even and in proper plane.

3.6. JOINTS : The mortar joints shall be of 10mm thick and shall be uniform.

3.7. FINISHING OF JOINTS :

The face of brick work shall be finished flush. The face joints of the mortar shall be worked out while still green to give a finished surface flush with the face of the brick work.

62

3.8. CURING :

The brick work shall be constantly kept moist on all faces for a minimum period of seven days.

3.9. SCAFFOLDING :

Scaffolding shall be strong to withstand all dead, live and impact loads which are likely to come on them.

3.10 MEASUREMENTS : 3.10.1. Brick work shall be measured in cubic metres unless otherwise specified and as given in

the items of schedule of rates. Walls of half brick thick or less shall be measured in square meters.

3.10.2. No deductions or additions shall be done and no extra payment made for the following : Note : Where minimum area is defined for deduction of an opening, void or both, such areas shall refer only to opening or void within the space measured. a) Ends of dissimilar materials (i.e. joists, beams, lintels, posts, girders, rafters,

purlins, trusses, corbels, steps etc.); upto 0.1 sq.mtrs. in section; b) Opening upto 0.1 sq.mtr. in area. c) Wall plates, bed plates, and bearing of slabs, chajjas and the like, where thickness

does not exceed 10cm and bearing dones not extend over the full thickness of walls.

d) Cement concrete blocks as for hold fasts and holding down bolts; e) Iron fixtures, such as well ties, pipes upto 300mm diameter and hold fasts for

doors and windows; and f) Chases of section not exceeding 50 cm. in girth; g) Bearing portion of drip course, bearing of molding and cornice. Note : In calculating area of an opening, any separate lintel or sills shall be included with the size of the opening but end portions of lintel shall be excluded. Extra width of rebated reveals, if any, shall also be excluded. 3.11. The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour required for all the operations

described above except reinforcement if any and its encasement in cement mortar or cement concrete. The rate shall also include the following :

a) Raking out joints or finishing joints flush as the work proceeds. b) Preparing tops of existing walls and the like raising further new brick work. c) Rough cutting and waste for forming gables, splays and eaves and the like. d) Leaving holes for pipes upto 150mm dia and encasing hold fasts etc.

63

e) Rough cutting and waste for brick work curved in plan and for backing to stone or other

types of facing. f) Embedding in ends of beams, joists, slabs, lintels, sills, trusses etc. g) Beading wall plates, lintels, sills, roof tiles, corrugated sheets etc. in or on walls if not

covered in respective items and h) Leaving chases of section not exceeding 50cm in girth or 350 sq.cm. in cross section. i) Brick on edge courses, cut brick corners, splays reveals, brick work curved on plan

to a mean radius exceeding 6 m. 3.12 HALF BRICK WORK :

Brick work in half brick walls shall be done in the same manner as described above except that the bricks shall be laid in stretcher bond. Reinforced half brick wall providing 2 nos. 6mm dia M.S. Bar at every 4th layer.

3.12.1. Measurements : The length and height of the wall shall be measured correct to a cm. The area shall be calculated in sq.m.

3.12.2. Rate : The rate includes the cost of the materials and labour involved in all the operations

described above except reinforcement which is to be paid for separately. 3.13. BRICK FLAT SOLING :

For soling the bricks shall be picked slightly overburnt of approved brand, sound, hard, durable, dense, clean, free from soft spots, cracks, decay and other defects. Brick Bat shall not be used. All the fillings shall be watered and compacted to get maximum consolidation. All necessary trimming or filling for laying of the soling in line and required grade shall be done. The sub-grade shall be marked by stacks and strings for required depth for laying of soling. The cushioning as well as filling of joints shall be done with local sand.

The bricks shall be laid on flat (unless otherwise specified) touching each other. Brick shall be laid in parallel rows breaking bond or in herring bond pattern as directed by the representative of Employer/Consultant and firmly embedded true to line and filled with local sand.

3.13.1. Measurements : The length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. Area shall

be calculated in square metres correct to two places of decimal. 3.13.2. Rate : The rate includes the cost of the materials and labour involved in all the

operations. 4. SPECIFICATIONS FOR WOOD WORK : 4.1. DOOR, WINDOW AND VENTILATOR FRAMES : 4.1.1. Timber for door, window and ventilators frames shall be as specified. Frames shall have

smooth, well - planned (wrought) surfaces except the surfaces touching the walls lintels, still etc. which may be left clean sawn.

4.1.2. JOINTS :

The joints shall be at right angles when checked from the inside surfaces of the respective members. The joints shall be pressed in position. Each assembled door frame shall be fitted with a temporary stretcher and a temporary diagonal brace on the rebated faces. The joints shall be made as per local standard practice of timber jointing.

64

4.1.3. FIXING OF FRAMES :

The frames shall be got inspected and approved by the Engineer before being painted, oiled or otherwise treated and before fixing in position. The surface of the frames abutting masonry or concrete and the portions of the frames embedded in floors shall be given a coating of coal tar. Frames shall be fixed to the abutting masonry or concrete with holdfasts or metallic fasteners as specified.

4.1.4. MEASUREMENTS :

Wood work wrought, framed and fixed shall be measured for finished dimension without any allowance for the wastage or for dimensions beyond specified dimension without any allowance for the wastage or for dimensions beyond specified dimensions.

4.1.5. RATE :

The rate shall include the cost of material and labour involved in all the operations described above except the hold fasts or metallic fasteners which will be paid for separately.

4.2. PANNELLED, GLAZED OR PANELLED AND GLAZED SHUTTERS :

Paneled or glazed shutters for doors, windows, ventilators and cupboards shall be constructed in the form of timber frame work of stiles and rails with panel inserts of timber, plywood, block board, veneered particle board, fibre board wire gauze or sheet glass. The shutters shall be single or multipanelled, as shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

4.2.1. Frame Work : The timber shall be planed smooth and accurate to the required dimensions, as given in the drawing as per local Standard Practice.

4.2.2. Gluing of Joints :

Stiles and bottom rail shall be made out of one piece of timber only. Intermediate rail exceeding 200 mm in width may be out of one or more pieces of timber. The width of each piece shall be not less than 75 mm. Where more than one piece of timber is used for rails, they shall be joined with a continuous tongued and grooved joint glued together and reinforced with metal dowels at regular intervals not exceeding 200 mm.

4.2.3. Rebating :

The shutters shall be single-leaf or double-leaved as shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. In case of double leaved shutters, the meeting of the stiles shall be rebated by one third the thickness of the shutter. The rebating shall be either splayed or square type as shown in the drawings.

4.2.4. Panelling :

The panel inserts shall be either framed into the grooves or housed in the rebate of stiles and rails. Timber, plywood, hard board and particle board panels shall be fixed only with grooves. The depth of the groove shall be 12 mm and its width shall accommodate the panel inserts such that the faces are closely fitted to the sides of the groove.

4.2.5. Timber Panels :

Timber panels shall be preferably made of timber of large width; the minimum width and thickness of the panel shall be 150mm and 15mm respectively.

4.2.6. Plywood Panels :

Plywood boards used for panelling of shutters shall be BWP type or grade. Each panels shall be a single piece of thickness, 9mm for two or more panel construction and 12 mm for single panel construction unless otherwise specified.

65

4.2.7. Veneered Particle Board Panels :

Veneered Particle board used for panelling of shutters shall be Exterior Grade bonded with BWP type synthetic resin adhesive. Each panel shall be a single piece of thickness 12mm unless otherwise specified.

4.2.8. Glass Panels :

Glass panelling (Glazing) shall be done with sheet glass of ordinary quality as specified glazing in the shutters of doors, windows and ventilators of bath. WC and Lavatories shall be provided with frosted glass the weight of which shall be not less than 10 kg/sqm. Frosted glass panels shall be fixed with frosted face on the inside. Glass panels shall be fixed by providing a thin layer of putty conforming to IS:419-1)67 applied between glass pane and all along the length of the rebate and also between glass panes and wooden beading. Fixing of glass panes without beading shall not be permitted. Glazing shall be done after the shutters have been primed and prepared for painting, so that wood may not draw oil out of putty.

4.2.9. Finish : Panels of shutters shall be flat and well sanded to a smooth and level surface. 4.2.10. Beading :

Beadings in panelled shutter shall be provided where specified in architectural drawings or directed, by the Engineer. Each length of beading shall be single piece. Joints at the corners shall be mitred and exposed edges shall be rounded. Beading shall be fixed with headless nails at 75 mm intervals. For external shutters, the beading shall be fixed on the outside face.

4.2.11. Machine/Factory made Shutters :

Machine made shutters, where specified, shall be procured from an approved factory. Machines made shutters shall be brought to the site fully assembled but without any priming coat. Panel inserts of sheet glass and wire gauze may however be fixed at site.

4.2.12. Fixing of Shutters :

For side hung shutters of height upto 1.2 m, each leaf shall be hung on two hinges at quarter points and for shutter of height more than 1.2 m. each leaf shall be hung on three hinges one at the centre and the other two at 200 mm from the top and bottom of the shutters. Top hung and bottom hung shutters shall be hung on two hinges fixed at quarter points of top rail or bottom rail. Centre hung shutter shall be suspended on a suitable pivot in the centre of the frame. Size and type of hinges and pivots be as specified. Flap of hinges shall be neatly counter sunk into the recesses cut to the exact dimensions of flap. Screws for fixing the hinges shall be screwed in with screw driver and not hammered in. Unless otherwise specified, shutters of height more than 1.2 mm shall be hung on butt hinges of size 100 mm and for all other shutters of lesser height butt hinges of side 75 mm shall be used.

4.2.13. Fittings :

Fittings shall be provided as per schedule of fittings decided by Engineer. Cost of providing and fixing shutter shall include cost of hinges and necessary screws for fixing the same. All other fittings shall be paid for separately.

4.2.14. Wooden Cleats and Blocks :

Wooden cleats and blocks shall be fixed to doors and windows as directed by Engineer, as per size and shape approved by him.

66

4.2.14. Measurement : Framework and paneling shall be measured separately. 4.2.14.1 Frame work of Shutters :

The overall length and width of the framework of the shutters shall be measured nearest to a cm in fixed position (overlaps not to be measured in case of double leaved shutters) and the area calculated in square metres correct to two places of decimeter. No deduction shall be made to form panel openings of louvers. No extra payments shall be made for shape, joints and labour involved in all operations described above.

4.2.14.2. For paneling of each type or for glazed panel length and width of opening for panels

inserts or glazed panels shall be measured correct to a cm before fixing the beading and the area shall be calculated to the nearest 0.01 sqm. The portions of the panel inserts or glazed panel inside the grooves or rebates shall not be measured for payment.

4.2.15. RATE :

Rate includes the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operations described above. The frame work and paneling of each type or glazed panels shall be paid separately. The rate for frame work includes the cost of butt hinges and necessary screws as specified in 4.8.15. However, extra shall be paid for providing molded beading where specified. Nothing extra shall be paid for plain beading when specified in drawing.

4.3. FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS :

Flush door shutters of specified thickness shall have a solid core and may be of the decorative or non decorative (Paintable type as per IS:2202 (Part-I)-1991.

4.3.1. Width and height of the shutters shall be as shown in the drawings or as indicated by the

Engineer. All four edges of the shutters shall be square. The shutter shall be free from twist or warp in its plane. The moisture content in timbers used in the manufacture of flush door shutters shall be not more than 12 percent when tested according to IS:1708-1986.

The flush door shall be obtained from approved factory supported by adequate Test Certificates.

4.4. HOLDFASTS : 4.4.1. These shall be made from mild steel flat best make of approved quality as specified in the

drawings or locally available. The hold fast shall be forked and bent at right angles in opposite angles and embedded in cement concrete block of specified size mix. 1:3:6 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 12 mm nominal size).

4.4.2. Measurements :The hold fasts shall be measured in numbers. 4.4.3. Rate : It includes the cost of labour and material involved in all the operations described

above including fixing and cement concrete blocks. 4.5. FITTINGS : 4.5.0. Fittings shall be of mild steel, brass, aluminum or as specified. These shall be well made,

reasonably smooth and free from sharp edges and corners, flaws and other defects. Screw holes shall be counter sunk to suit the head of specified screws. These shall be of the following types according to the material used :

a) Mild Steel Fittings : These shall be bright satin finish black stone enameled or copper

oxidized (black finish), nickel chromium plated or as specified.

67

b) Brass Fittings : These shall be bright satin finished or nickel chromium plated or copper

oxidized or as specified. c) Aluminum Fittings : These shall be anodized to natural matt finish or dyed anodic

coating not less than grade AC 10 of IS:1868-1982.

Screws used for fittings shall be of the same metal and finish as the fittings. However, chromium plated brass screws or stainless steel screws shall be used for fixing aluminum fittings.

Fittings shall be fixed in proper position as shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. These shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be screws shall be driven home with screw driver and not hammered in. Recesses shall be cut to the exact size and depth for countersinking of hinges.

4.5.1. Butt Hinges : The shall be of the following types according to the material used. a) Mild steel butt hinges (medium) conforming to IS:1341-1992 b) Extruded aluminum alloy butt hinges conforming to IS:205-1992. 4.5.2. Parliament hinges : These shall be of mild steel, cast brass or as specified and

shall generally conform to IS:362-1991. 4.5.3. Spring hinges (single or double acting) :

These shall be single acting when the shutter is to open on one side only or double acting when the shutter opens on both side. These shall be made of M.S. or brass as specified and shall generally conform to IS:453-1973.

4.5.4. Sliding Door Bolts (Aldrops) : 4.5.4.1. M.S. Sliding door bolts : These shall be made of M.S. sheet and M.S. rods and shall

generally conform to IS:281-1991. These shall be copper oxidised (black finish) or as specified.

4.5.4.2. Aluminum Sliding Door Bolts : These shall be made of aluminum alloy and shall

generally conform to is 2681-1979. Aluminum sliding door bolts shall be anodized transparent or dyed as specified.

4.5.5. Tower Bolts :

These shall generally conform to IS:204 (Part I & Parts II) . Aluminum alloy tower bolts shall have bolt and barrel anodized. The anodic film may be either transparent or dyed as specified.

4.5.6. Pull Bolts Locks :

The fixing plate shall have four holes for fixing it to the door leaf, two of which shall be square to receive 6mm dia bolts with round heads and the remaining two shall receive machine screwed with lock nuts. The receiving plate shall be of the same width and thickness as the fixing plate and shall have 3 countersunk holes. When the bolt slides into wooden members, like the chowkat, which have a rebate, the receiving plate shall also be correspondingly shaped so as to fit into the rebate. The screws and bolts shall have the same finish as the main bolt.

68

4.5.7. Mortise Lock and Latch :

This should generally conform to IS:2209-1976. The size of the mortise lock shall be as specified.

4.5.8. Cupboard or Wardrobe Lock :

This should generally conform to IS:729-1979. It shall be made of cast brass and shall be of the best make of approved quality.

4.5.9. Handles (Doors and Windows) :

These should generally conform to IS:208-1987 and best make of approved quality. Door handles shall be of 100mm size and window handles of 75mm size unless otherwise specified.

4.10.10. Floor Door Stopper :

The floor door stopper shall conform to IS:1823-1980. The shape and pattern of stopper shall be approved by Engineer. It shall be of brass finished bright, chromium plated brass, anodised aluminium or as specified.

4.10.11. Universal Hydraulic Door Closer :

These shall be made of cast iron/aluminum alloy/zinc alloy and of shape and pattern as approved by the Engineer.

4.10.12. Hooks and Eyes :

These shall be mild steel or hard drawn brass as specified They should generally conform to IS:207-1964. All size of hooks and eyes shall be determined by the length of the hooks measured out to out.

4.10.13. Hasp and Staple Safety Type :

This shall be made of mild steel, cast brass or aluminum as specified. This shall generally conform to IS:363-1976.

Aluminium hasp and staples shall be anodized and anodic. Coating shall be less than grade AC-15 of IS : 1868-1982.

5. STEEL WORK : 5.1. Extent and Intent : The contractor shall provide all materials, labour and equipments

including all other materials tools and plants and consumables required to complete the works in every respect inclusive of Temporary erection works.

The contractor shall observe all safety measures for erection of structural steel work as covered in IS:7205.

5.2. Shop Drawings : The contractor shall be supplied with profile drawings showing sizes of

all structural members and typical connection details.

The contractor shall be required to prepare wherever necessary, detailed shop drawings giving complete information necessary for fabrication of structures. Fabrication shall not commence until the approval of the relevant drawings has been obtained from the Engineer. However the contractor is not relieved of the responsibility for accuracy of detailed dimensions shown there on and also for the overall responsibility for the fabrication and erection of the structure.

69

5.3. MATERIALS : 5.3.1 Steel : All finished steel shall be well and cleanly rolled to the dimensions and weight

specified by relevant BIS Codes subject to permissible tolerances as per IS:1852-1985. The decision of the Engineer rejecting any steel section on account of any defects shall be final and binding.

All structural steel shall be of tested quality and shall conform to the relevant BIS. The contractor shall submit manufacturers Test Certificate and take approval of the Engineer.

5.4. STEEL WORK IN SINGLE SECTIONS FIXED INDEPENDENTLY WITH CONNECTING PLATE : 5.4.1. Fabrication :

The steel sections as specified shall be straightened and cut square to correct lengths. The cut ends exposed to view shall be finished smooth. No two pieces shall be welded or otherwise jointed to make up the required length of a member without proper and prior approval of the Engineer.

Straightening, shaping to form the steel surfaces are to be painted with Red Oxide Zinc Chrome Primer conforming to IS2074 before placing in position.

5.4.2. Erection :

Steel work shall be hoisted and placed in position carefully without any damage, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

5.4.3. Measurements :

The work as fixed in place shall be measured in running metres correct to a millimetre and weights calculated on the basis of standard tables correct to the nearest kilogram. All other fixtures including bolts and nuts shall be taken separately as per Standard Practice and as directed by the Engineer.

5.4.4. Rate : Rate includes the cost of labour and materials required for all the operations. 5.5. Steel Work in Built up Section (Welded) shall be fabricated and erected in a similar

manner as directed by the Engineer. 5.5.1. Precautions :

All operations connected with welding and cutting equipment shall conform to the safety requirements given in IS:818-1968 for safety requirements and Health Provision in Electric and Gas welding and cutting operations.

5.6 TUBULAR TRUSSES : 5.6.1 Structural Steel Tube.

These shall be Conforming to the requirement of IS:1161-IS226.

Tubes shall be designed by their nominal bore. These shall be light, medium or heavy as specified depending upon the wall thickness having standard dimensions and weight as per IS.

70

5.6.2 Fabrication : 5.6.2.1 The component parts of the structure shall be assembled in such a manner that they are

neither twisted nor otherwise damaged and be so prepared that the specified cambers, if any, are maintained. The tubular steel work shall be painted with one coat of approved steel primer after fabrication.

5.6.2.2. Welding : Where welding is adopted it shall be as per IS:816-1969. 5.6.2.3. Caps and Bases for Columns :

The ends of all the tubes, for columns transmitting loads through the ends, should be true and square to the axis of the tubes and should be provided with a cap or base accurately fitted to the end of the tube and screwed, welded or shrunk on. The cap or base plate should be true and square to the axis of the column.

5.6.2.4. Sealing of Tubes :

When the end of a tube is not automatically sealed by virtue of its connection by welding to another member the end shall be properly and completely sealed, before sealing, the inside of the tubes should be dry and free from loose scale.

5.6.2.5 Flattened Ends :

In tubular construction the ends of tubes may be flattened or otherwise formed to provide for welded, riveted or bolted connections provided that the methods adopted for such flattening do not injure the material. The change of sections shall be gradual

5.6.2.6 Hoisting and Erection :

Tubular trusses shall be hoisted and erected in position carefully, without damage to themselves or other structure, equipment and injury to workman, as directed and to the satisfaction of Engineer.

The method of hoisting and erection proposed to be adopted shall be got approved from the Engineer. The contractor shall however be fully responsible, for the work being carried out in a safe and proper manner without unduly stressing the various members.

5.6.2.7 Measurements :

The work as fixed in place shall be measured in running metres correct to a centimeter and their weights calculated on the basis of standard tables correct to the nearest kilogram unless otherwise specified.

Weights of all other fixtures and bolt and nuts shall be added to the weight of respective items unless otherwise specified. No deduction shall be made for skew cuts.

5.6.2.8. Rate :

The rate shall include the cost of labour and materials involved in all the operations described above including application of one coat of approved steel primer, i.e. red oxide zinc chrome primer conforming to IS:2074 : 1979.

71

6.0. STEEL DOORS & WINDOWS ETC. :

The windows shall be obtained from approved specialized manufacturers. The frames of doors, windows, ventilators etc. shall be formed by cutting section to required lengths and mitred. The corners shall be welded to form a solid framed welded joints. Sash bars of units shall be tanned and riveted into the frames and where they interest the vertical tie shall be broached and the horizontal tie threaded through it, and the intersection closed by hydraulic pressure. For fixing steel hinges, slots shall be cut in the fixed frame and the hinges inserted inside and welded to the frame at the back. For fixing hinges to inside frame, the method described for fixing to outside frame may be adopted but weld shall be cleaned or holes made in the inside frame and hinge riveted. The hinge pin and washer shall be galvanised or aluminum alloy 51S-WP of suitable thickness.

The handle shall be mounted on handle plate which shall be welded to the opening frames. The handle shall have a two points nose which will engage with suitable tapered striking plate provided on the fixed frame.

Top hung and buttom hung ventilators shall be provided with two plain hinges, with peg stays of sufficient length as specified earlier.Centre hung ventilators shall be made with two outer frames, with mastic water-proof compound embedded between there two outer frames. Unless otherwise specified the ventilators shall be allow the shutter bottom half to open outside and the top half opening inside.

Steel windows and ventilators shall be fixed to brick or concrete surface as shown in drawing or with M.S. lugs of sizes 100 x 16 x 3 mm and to concrete work by means of 125 mm long counter sunk screw, or rawl plugs or other approved fastener after drilling into concrete with a power drill as specified in the item. The lug shall be grouted in concrete (1:2:4) mix of dimension as directed.

The frames should not be fixed in position until the structural work has been completed and the free deflection has taken place. The doors, windows etc. shall be erected in true plumb, line and level.

All steel doors, windows, ventilators shall be given a coat of anti-corrosive primer at the shop before delivery to site for erection but in no case prior to the materials have been inspected by the representative of Employer/Consultant.

Final painting shall be done after obtaining approval from the representative of Employer/Consultant/Consultant.

7.0. STEEL GRILL AND RAILINGS :

The grills and railings for windows, verandah and balcony etc. shall be of mild steel. The design of grills/railings and shape and sizes of various components shall be according to the drawings. Wherever grills integrated with windows are specified, they shall be manufactured at window manufacture's shop.

The edge angles and corners shall be cleaned and true to shape. The joints, if possible, shall be mechanically interlocked and neatly spot welded in such a way that the grill is rigid. Grinding of the joints to achieve a neat regular finish shall be done. The grills shall be fixed to true plumb, line and level as per drawing.

All grills, railings etc. after being fixed in position shall be cleaned off dust, dirt, rust and loops scales before applying a coat of protective zinc chromate primer.

72

8.0 ROLLING SHUTTER : These shall be fixed in position as shown in drawing.

Brackets shall be fixed on the lintel or under the lintel as specified with rawl-plugs, and screw bolts etc. The shaft along with the spring shall then be fixed on the brackets. The lath portion (shutter) shall be laid on ground and the side guide channels shall be bound with it with ropes etc. The shutter shall then be placed in position and top fixed with pipe shaft with bolts and nuts. The side guide channels and the cover frame shall then be fixed to the walls through the plate welded to the guides. These plates and bracket shall be fixed by means of steel screw bolts, and rawl plugs drilled in the wall. The plates and screw bolts shall be concealed in plaster to make their location invisible. Fixing shall be done accurately in a workmen like manner that the operation of the shutter is easy and smooth.

After being fixed in position, these shall be cleaned off dust, dirt, rust or scales before applying a protective coat of zinc chromate.

9. COLLAPSIBLE GATE :

T-iron rails shall be fixed to the floor and to the lintel at top by means of anchor bolts embedded in cement concrete of floor and lintel. The anchor bolts shall be placed approximately at 45 cm. centres alternatively in the two flanges of the T-iron. The bottom runner (T-iron) shall be embedded in the floor and proper groove shall be formed along the runner for the purpose. The collapsible shutter shall be fixed at sides by fixing the end double channels with T-iron rails and also by hold-fasts bolted to the end double channel and fixed in the masonry of the side walls on the other side.

In case the collapsible shutter is not required to reach the lintel, beam or slab level, a Tea-section suitably designed may be fixed at the top, embedded in masonry and provided with necessary clamps and roller arrangement at the top.

All the adjoining work damaged in fixing of gate shall be made good to match the existing work, without any extra cost.

After being fixed in position, these shall be cleaned off dust, dirt, rust or scales before applying a protective cost of zinc chromate.

10.0 ALUMINIUM : 10.1 Aluminium Sections.

Aluminium sections used for fixed/openable windows, ventilators, partitions, frame work & doors etc. shall be suitable for use to meet architectural designs to relevant works and shall be subject to approval of the Architect/Consultant for technical, structural, functional and visual considerations. The aluminium extruded sections shall conform to IS 733 and IS: 1285 for chemical composition and mechanical properties. The stainless steel screws shall be of grade AISI 304. The permissible dimensional tolerances of the extruded sections shall be as perIS 6477 and shall be such as not to impair the proper and smooth functioning / operation and appearance of door and windows. Aluminium glazed doors, windows etc. shall be of sizes, sections and details as shown in the drawings. The details shown in the drawings may be varied slightly to suit the standards adopted by the manufacturers of the aluminium work, with the approval of Architect/Consultant. Before proceeding with any fabrication work, the contractor shall prepare and submit, complete fabrication and installation drawings for each type of glazing doors, windows, ventilators and partition etc. for the approval of the Architect/Consultant. If the sections are varied, the contractor shall obtain prior approval of Architect/Consultant and nothing extra shall be paid on this account.

73

10.2 Anodising.

Standard aluminium extrusion sections are manufactured in various sizes and shapes in wide range of solid and hollow profiles with different functional shapes for architectural, structural glazing, curtain walls, doors, windows & ventilators and various other purposes. The anodizing of these products is required to be done before the fabrication work by anodizing/.electro coating plants which ensures uniform coating in uniform colour ad shades. The extrusions are anodized up to 30 micron in different colours. The anodized extrusions are tested regularly under strict quality control adhering to Indian Standard.

10.2 Powder Coating. 10.2.1 Material :The powder used for powder coating shall be Epoxy/polyester powder of make

approved by the Architect/Consultant. The contractor shall give detailed programme for powder coating in advance, to facilitate the inspection by Architect/Consultant or his authorized representative

10.2.2. Pre-Treatment : Each aluminium alloy extrusion or performed section shall be

thoroughly cleaned by alkaline or acidic solutions under the conditions specified by chemical conversion coating supplier and then rinsed. A chemical conversion coating shall be applied by treatment with a solution containing essentially chromate ions or chromate and phosphate ions as the active components as applicable. The amount of the conversion coating deposited depends on the type used by the conversion coating chemical supplier. The conversion coating shall be thoroughly rinsed either with the solution specified by the conversion coating chemical supplier or with de-mineralized water and then dried at the temperature for the time specified by the conversion coating chemical supplier. The contractor shall submit the detail specifications and application procedure for application of conversion coating for approval of Architect/Consultant. The metal surface after the conversion coating pretreatment and prior to the application of the coating shall be free from dust or powdery deposits.

10.2.3 Process :The polyester powder shall be applied by electrostatic powder spray method.

Before start of powder coating the contractor shall submit detail specification for application of polyester powder from manufacturer of the polyester powder for approval of Architect/Consultant. The powder coating shall be applied as per the specification approved by Architect/Consultant.

10.2.4 Thickness: The thickness of the finished polyester powder coating measured by micron

meter shall not be less than 50 micron nor more than 120 micron at any point. 10.2.5 Performance Requirements for the Finish

(i) Surface appearance: The finish on significant surfaces shall show no scratches when illuminated and is examined at an oblique angle, no blisters, craters; pinholes or scratches shall be visible from a distance of about 1 m. There shall not be any visible variation in the colour of finished surfaces of different sections and between the colours of different surfaces of same section.

(ii) Adhesion: When a coated test piece is tested using a spacing of 2 mm between each of the six parallel cuts (the cut is made through the full depth of powder coating so that metal surface is visible) and a piece of adhesive tape, approximately 25 mm x 150 mm approved by the Architect/Consultant is applied firmly to the cut area and then removed rapidly by pulling at right angles to the test area, no pieces of the finish other than debris from the cutting operation shall be removed from the surface of the finish.

10.2.6 Protection of Powder Coated / Anodizing Finish : It is mandatory that all aluminium

members shall be wrapped with self adhesive non-staining PVC tape, approved by Architect/Consultant..

74

10.2.7 Measurement: All the aluminium sections including snap beading fixed in place shall be

measured in running meter along the outer periphery of composite section correct to a millimeter. The weight calculated on the basis of actual average (average of five samples) weight of composite section in kilogram correct to the second place of decimal shall be taken for payment. (Weight shall be taken after anodizing). The weight of cleat shall be added for payment. Neither any deduction nor anything extra shall be paid for skew cuts.

10.2.7 Rate: The rate shall include the cost of all the materials, labours involved in all the operations as described in nomenclature of item and particular specification.

11.0. FLOORING : 11.1. General : All flooring shall be laid to the best practice. The flooring shall be laid to the

level except where slopes are called for on the drawings, in which case the slopes shall be uniform and arranged so as to drain into the indicated outlets. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that all the flooring, skirting and dados are perfectly matched for colour and finish as approved.

11.2. CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING : 11.2.1. Base Concrete : The base concrete shall be provided with the slope required for the

flooring. Floors in verandah, courtyard kitchens, baths shall have slope ranging from 1:36 to 1:48 depending upon locations as decided by the Engineer. Floor in water closet portion shall have slope of 1:30 or as decided by the Engineer to drain off washing water. Plinth masonry off-set shall be depressed so as to allow the base concrete to rest on it.

11.2.2. The flooring shall commence within 48 hours of the laying of base, failing which the

surface of base shall be roughened with steel wire brushes without disturbing the concrete. Before laying the flooring the base shall be wetted and smeared with a coat of cement slurry at 2 kg. of cement spread over an area of one sqm so as to get a good bond between sub-grade and flooring.

11.2.3. Where base concrete is not provided, the earth below shall be properly slope, watered,

rammed and consolidated. Before laying the flooring, it shall be moistened. 11.2.4. Measurements : Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm and area as laid

shall be calculated in square metres correct to two places of decimal. Length and breadth shall be measured before laying skirting, dado or wall plaster. No deduction shall be made for extra paid for voids not exceeding 0.20 sqm. Deduction for ends of dissimilar materials or other articles embedded shall not be made for areas not exceeding 0.10 sqm. Brick flooring when laid in diagonal herring bone bond or other pattern as specified or directed by the Engineer shall be measured separately.

11.2.5. Rate: The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the

operations described above, including application of cement slurry on base concrete or RCC slab and cleaning of base. Base concrete shall be paid for separately.

11.2.6. Laying of Flooring without strips : Cement concrete flooring are to be laid in alternate

panels as directed by the Engineer.

Shuttering : The panels shall be bounded by Timber shuttering with their top at proper level giving required slopes. The surface of the shuttering coming in contact with concrete shall be smeared with non sticking oil before concreting.

Concreting : The concreting shall be done in alternate panels in alternate days. While laying concrete, care shall be taken to see that the edges of the previously laid panels are not damaged and fresh mortar is not splashed over them. The joints between the panels should come out as fine straight lines;

75

11.2.7. Finishing : 11.2.7.1. The finishing of the surface shall follow immediately after laying and compacting the

concrete. The surface shall be left for some time, till moisture disappears from it or surplus water can be mopped up. Use of dry cement or cement and sand mixture sprinkled on the surface to stiffen the concrete or absorb excessive moisture shall not be permitted. Excessive toweling shall be avoided.

11.2.8. Curing : The curing shall be done for a minimum period of ten days. Curing shall not be

commenced until the top layer has hardened. Covering with empty gunnies shall be avoided as the colour of the flooring is likely to be bleached due to the remnants of cement dust from the bags.

11.2.9. Precautions : Flooring in lavaratories and bath room shall be laid only after fixing of

water closet and squatting pans and floor traps. Traps shall be plugged while laying the floors and opened after the floors are cured and cleaned. Any damage done to W.C.'s squatting pans and floor traps during the execution of work shall be made good.

11.2.10. Measurement : Length and breadth shall be measured before laying skirting dado or wall

plaster. No deduction shall be made nor extra paid for voids not exceeding 0.20 sqm. 11.3.1. Rate : The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the

operations including application of cement slurry on RCC slab or on base concrete including roughening and cleaning the surface.

11.3.2. Cement plaster in Risers of steps, skirting, Dado :

Skirting shall be flush with wall plaster or projecting out uniformly by 6mm from the wall plaster, as specified. The work shall be preferably carried out to the desired thickness with proper preparation of the surface to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

11.3.3. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT IN COURTYARD AND TERRACE ETC.

Specifications described shall hold good as far as applicable to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

a) The panels shall be of uniform size and no dimension of a panel should exceed 1.25

metre and the area of panel should not exceed 1.25 sqm for the thickness of panels upto 50 mm.

b) Concreting shall be done in alternate panels only curing, measurement and rates to the

similar to other cement plastering work. 11.4.6. Measurements : 11.4.6.1. Lengths and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm before laying skirting, dado or

wall plaster. The area as laid shall be calculated in sqm correct to two decimal places.

The thickness of the under layer shall be measured correct to a cm. The thickness of top layer shall not be less than that specified.

No deduction shall be made, nor extra paid for voids not exceeding 0.20 square metre. Deduction for ends of dissimilar materials or other articles embedded shall not be made for areas not exceeding 0.10 square metre. Nothing extra shall be paid for laying the floor at different levels in the same room or courtyard.

76

11.4.6.2. Terrazo (Marble Chips) flooring laid as floor borders, margins and similar bands upto 30

cm. width and on staircase treads shall be measured under the item of terrazo flooring but extra shall be paid for such work.

11.5. GLAZED TILE FLOORING : 11.5.1. White/Coloured Glazed Tiles :

The tiles shall be of approved make and shall generally conform to IS:777:1988. They shall be flat, and true to shape and free from blisters crazing, chips, welts, crawling or other imperfections retracing from their appearance.

The tiles shall be square or rectangular of nominal size as specified in the drawing. The contractor shall get the tiles approved from the Engineer before laying. The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed and glaze shall be either glossy or matt as specified. The underside of the tiles shall not have glazed or more than 5% of the area in order that the tile may adhere properly to the base, The edges of the tiles shall be preferably free from glaze. However, any glaze if unavoidable shall be permissible on only upto 50 percent of the surface area of the edges.

11.5.2. Preparation of surfaces and laying : 11.6.2.1. Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned,

wetted and mopped. The bedding for the tile shall be with cement mortar 1:3 ( 1 cement : 3 coarse sand) or as specified. The average thickness of the bedding shall be minimum 10 mm while the thickness under any portion of the tiles shall not be less than 5 mm.

11.5.2.2. Mortar shall be spread, tamped and corrected to proper levels and allowed to harden

sufficiently to offer a fairly rigid cushion for the tiles to be set and to enable the mason to place wooden plank across and squat on it.

11.5.2.3. Over this mortar beading neat grey cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be

spread at the rate of 3.3 kg of cement per square metre over such an area as would accommodate about twenty tiles. Tiles shall be soaked in water washed clean and shall be fixed in this grout one after another, each tile gently being tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. The joints shall be kept as thin as possible and in straight lines or to suit the required pattern.

11.5.2.4. The surface of the flooring during laying shall be frequently checked with a straight edge

about 2 m. long, so as to obtain a true surface with the required slope. 11.5.2.5. Where full size tiles cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size, and

their edge rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints.

Tiles which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter not less than 10 mm under the plaster, skirting or dado.

11.5.2.6. After tiles have been laid surplus cement slurry shall be cleaned off.

77

11.5.3. Pointing and Finishing :

The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement slurry with wire /coir brush or trowel to a depth of 2mm to 3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush pointed with white cement added with pigment if required to match the colour of tiles. The floor shall then be kept wet for 7 days. After curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.

11.5.4. Measurements :

Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm before laying skirting, dado or wall plaster and the area calculated in square metre correct to two places of decimal. Where coves are used at the junctions, the length and breadth shall be measured between the lower edges of the coves.

No deduction shall be made nor extra paid for voids not exceeding 0.20 square metre. Deductions for ends of dissimilar materials or other articles embedded shall not be made for areas not exceeding 0.10 square metre.

After where glazed tiles or different types of decorative tiles are used will be measured separately.

11.5.5. Rate : The rate for flooring shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations described above. Nothing extra shall be paid for the use of cut (sawn) tiles in the work.

Extra over and above the normal rate for white tiles shall be paid where coloured or any other type of decorative tiles have been used.

11.6.0. GLAZED TILES IN SKIRTING AND DADO : 11.6.1. The tiles shall be as per drawing and as specified in the drawing. The contractor shall get

the tiles approved from the Engineer before laying. 11.6.2. Preparation of Surfaces : The joints shall be raked out to a depth of atleast 15 mm in masonry walls.

In case of concrete walls, the surface shall be hacked and roughened with wire brushes. The surface shall be cleaned thoroughly, washed with water and kept wet before skirting is commenced.

11.6.3. Laying :

12 mm thick plaster of cement mortar 1;3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) mix or as specified shall be applied and allowed to harden. The plaster shall be roughened with wire brushes or by scratching diagonal at closed intervals.

The tiles should be soaked in water, washed clean, and a coat of cement slurry applied liberally at the back of tiles shall be tamped and corrected to proper plane and lines. The tiles shall be set in the required pattern and jointed. The joints shall be as fine as possible. Top of skirting or dado shall be truly horizontal and joints truly vertical except where otherwise indicated. Skirting and dado shall rest on the top of the flooring. Where full size tiles cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size and their edges rubbed smooth.

78

11.6.4. Curing and Finishing :

The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement grout with wire/coir brush or trowel to a depth of 2mm to 3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush, pointed with white cement added with pigments if required to match the colour of tiles. The work shall then be kept wet for 7 days.

After curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished work shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.

11.6.5. Measurements :

Length shall be measured correct to a cm. Height shall be measured correct to a cm in case of dado and 5 mm in the case of riser and skirting. The area shall be calculated in square metre, correct to two places of decimal.

11.6.6. Rates :

The rate shall include the cost of all material and labour involved in all the operations described above.

11.7. KOTA STONE IN FLOORING & SKIRTING. 11.7.1. Kota Stone Slabs :

The slab shall be of selected quality hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in texture, free from cracks, decay, weathering and flaws. They shall be hand or machine cut to the requisite thickness. They shall be of the colour indicated in the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.

The slabs shall have the top (exposed) face polished before being brought to site, unless otherwise specified. The slabs shall conform to the size required. Before starting the work the contractor shall get the samples of slabs approved by the Engineer.

11.7.2. Dressing :

Every slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel dressed on the sides to the full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be in full contact with it. All angles and edges of the slabs shall be true, square and free from chippings and the surface shall be true and plane.

11.7.2.1. Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the slabs are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted

and mopped. The bedding for the slabs shall be with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) or as given in the description of item.

11.7.2.2. The average thickness of the bedding mortar under the slab shall be 20 mm. and the

thickness at any place under the slabs shall not be less than 12mm. 11.7.2.3. The slabs shall be laid in the following manner :

Mortar of the specified mix shall be spread under the area of each slabs, roughly to the average thickness specified in the item. The slab shall be washed clean before laying. It shall be laid on top, pressed, tapped with wooden mallet and brought to level with the adjoining slabs. It shall then be lifted and laid a side. The top surface of the mortar shall then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows. The mortar is allowed to harden a bit and cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread over the same at the rate of 4.4 kg. of cement per sqm. The edges of the slab already paved shall be buttered with grey cement with or without admixture of pigment to match the shade of the stone. The slab to be paved shall then be lowered gently back in position and tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly bedded in level with and close to the adjoining slabs with as fine a joint as possible. Subsequent slabs shall be laid in the same manner. After each slabshas

79

been laid, surplus cement on the surface of slabs shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of seven days. The surface of flooring as laid shall be true to levels, and slopes as instructed by the Engineer.

11.7.3 Polishing and Finishing :

Slight unevenness at the meeting edges of slabs shall then be removed by fine chiseling and finished. Except that cement slurry with or without pigments shall not be applied on the surface before each polishing.

11.7.4. Measurements :

Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. before laying skirting dado or wall plaster. No. deductions shall be made/nor extra paid for voids not exceeding 0.20 square metre. Deductions for ends of dissimilar or other articles embedded shall not be made for areas not exceeding 0.10 square metre. Nothing extra shall be paid for laying the floor at different levels in the same room. Steps and treads of stairs paved with Kota Stone slabs shall also be measured under the items of Kota Stone flooring or as specified against the schedule item.

11.7.5. Rates :

The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations described above.

11.7.6. KOTA STONE IN RISERS OF STEPS, SKIRTING AND DADO :

In case Kota Stone work in riser of steps, skirting and dado in general the same procedure as above shall be followed with variations as specified by Engineer as given in the description of item/drawings.

11.8 MARBLE FLOORING. 11.8.1 Marble

The tiles are laid in floor just as other tiles floors. The surface of the floor is rubbed and polished with the help or power driven polishing machine.

11.8.2 Dressing of Slabs.

Every stone shall be cut to the required size and shape, fine chisel dressed on all sides to the full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be fully in contact with it. The tope surface shall also be fine chisel dressed to remove all waviness. In case machine cut slab are used, fine chisel dressing of machine.

The thickness of the slabs shall be 20, 30 or 40mm as specified in the description of the item. Tolerance of +3 percent shall be allowed for the thickness. In respect of length and breadth of slabs a tolerance of +2 percent shall be allowed.

11.8.3 Laying: 11.8.3.1 Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the slabs are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted

and mopped. The bedding for the slabs should be with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand, or with lime mortar (1 lime putty : 1 surkhi : 1 coarse sand) as given in the description of the item.

11.8.3.2 The average thickness of the bedding mortar under the slab shall be 20mm and the

thickness at any place under the slab shall be not less than 12mm.

80

11.8.3.3 The slabs shall be laid in the following manner : Mortar of the specified mix shall be spread under the area of each slab, roughly to the

average thickness specified in the item. The slab shall be washed clean before laying. It shall be laid on top, pressed, tapped with wooden mallet and brought to level with the adjoining slabs. It shall be lifted and laid aside. The top surface of the mortar shall then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows. The mortar is allowed to harden a bit and cement slurry or honey like consistency shall be spread over the same at the rate of 4.4 kg. of cement per sq.m. The edges of the slab already paved shall be buttered with grey or white cement with or without admixture of pigment to match the shade of the marble slabs as given in the description of the item.

The slab to be paved shall then be lowered gently back in position and tapped with wooden

mallet till it is properly bedded in level with and close to the adjoining slabs with as fine a joint as possible. Subsequent slabs shall be laid in the same manner. After each slab has been laid, surplus cement on the surface of the slabs shall be cleaned off. The flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of seven days. The surface of the flooring as laid shall be true to levels, and, slopes as instructed by the Architect/Consultant.

Due care shall be taken to match the grains of slabs which shall be selected judiciously

having uniform pattern of Veins/streaks or as directed by the Architect/Consultant. 11.8.3.4 The slabs shall be matched as shown in drawings or as instructed by the

Architect/Consultant. 11.8.3.5 Slabs which are fixed in the floor adjoining the all shall enter not less than 12mm under

the plaster skirting or dado. The junction between wall plaster and floor shall be finished neatly and without waviness.

11.8.8.4 Polishing and Finishing .

Slight unevenness at the meeting edges of slabs shall then be removed by fine chiseling and finished in the same manner as specified. Except that cement slurry with or without pigments shall not be applied on the surface before each polishing.

11.9. VITRIFIED TILES IN FLOORING AND SKIRTING. 11.9.1 Vitrified Tiles.

The tiles shall generally conform to latest IS Standards shall be procured by the contractor, They shall be flat, true to shape and free from cracks, crazing, spots, chipped edges and corners. The glazing shall be of uniform shade and color shall be as shown in the drawings. The tiles shall be of specified size and thickness as per drawing. The tolerance on facial dimension value shall be +/1.0mm and +/0.5mm in thickness. The tope surface of the tiles shall be glazed. The glazed shall be either glossy or matt as specified. The underside of the tiles shall be completely free glazed in order that the tile may adhere properly to the base. Type edges of the tiles shall be preferably free from glaze, however, and glazed if unavoidable, shall be permissible on any one edge of the tile.

11.9.2 Laying.

TheVitrifiedtilesshall belaidoverferrowcement slab& itshall becleaned,wettedMortar ofspecifiedmix shallbespreadtorequiredthicknessoverasmallarea.Theslab,washedclean,shallbelaidonthemortar, pissedtapped,withawoodenmallet,andbrought torequiredlevelThetilesshallbelaidasperthepattern shownonthedrawingsorasapprovedbyConsultant/Project-in-charge.

81

Itshallthen beremovedandlaidaside.Thetopofthemortarshallthenbycorrectedbyaddingfreshmortar athollows.Themortaristhenallowedtohardenandcementslurry ofpastelikeconsistencyshallbespread overthesameattherateof1bagpersqmt.area.Theedgesofthetilealreadylaidshallbebutteredwith slurry ofcement andpigmenttomatchtheshade ofslabs.Thetiletobelaidshall thenbeplacedbackin position, pressedandproperlybeddedinlevelwithadjoiningtileswithasfineajointaspossible.Othertiles arealsolaidinsimilarmannertocorrectlevelswithfinejoints.Thesurplus slurry onthesurfaceshallbe cleanedoff.Thetilesshallbesoakedinwater,washedclean,andacoatofcementslurryappliedliberallyat thebackoftilesandsetinthebeddingmortar.Thetiles shallbetampedandcorrected toproperplansand lines.

Thetilesshallbesetinrequiredpatternandbuttjointed.Thejointsshallbeasfineaspossible.Wherefull sizetilescannotbefixedthese shallbecuttotherequiredsizeandtheiredgesrubbedsmooth.

10.9.3 CURING AND FINISHING

The joints shall be cleaned off of the grey cement grout with soft wire brush or trowel to a depth of 2mm to 3mm and all dust and loose mortar removed Joints shall then be flush pointed with white cement added with pigment if required to match the color of tiles. The surface shall then be kept wet for 7 days. After curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished work shall not sound hollow when tapped with wooden mallet.

12. ROOFING : 12.1. CORRUGATED GALVANISHED STEEL SHEET ROOFING : 12.1.1. C.G.S. Sheets : These shall be of the thickness specified in the description of the Item

and shall conform to IS:277. They shall be obtained from TATA, SAIL or any Standard Manufacturer as approved by the Engineer.

12.1.2. Purlings : Purlins shall be as specified in the drawing and description of the Tender item.

The top surfaces of the purlins shall be uniform and plane. They shall be painted before fixing the sheeting. Embedded portions of wooden purlins shall be coal tarred with two coats.

12.1.1.1. Sheets shall be fixed to the purpling or other roof members such as hip or valley rafters

etc. with galvanized J or L hook bolts and nuts, 8mm diameter, with bitumen and G.I. Limpet washers or with a limpet washer filled with white lead as directed by the Engineer. While J hooks are used for fixing sheets on angle iron purling, and L hooks are used for fixing to R.S. joists, timber or precast concrete purling. The length of the hook bolt shall be varied to suit the particular requirements. The bolts shall be sufficiently long so that after fixing they project above the top of the nuts by not less than 10mm the grip of J or L hook bolt on the side of the purling shall not be less than 25 mm. There shall be a minimum of three hook bolts placed at the ridges of corrugations in each sheet on every purl in and their spacing shall not exceed 30 cm. coach screws shall not be used for fixing sheets to purling.

12.1.1.2. The galvanized coating on J or L hooks, and bolts shall be continuous and free from

defects such as blisters, flux stains, drops, excessive projections or other imperfections which would impair serviceability. The j or L hooks, washers etc shall be got approved by the Contractor from the Engineer before fixing.

12.1.2. Wind Tie : Wind ties shall be of 40 x 6 mm flat iron section or of other size as specified.

82

These shall be fixed at the eaves of the sheets. The fixing shall be done with the same hook bolts which secure the sheets to the purling. The ties shall be paid for separately unless described in the item of roofing.

12.1.2.1. Finish : The roof when completed shall be true to lines, and slopes and shall be leak

proof. 12.1.3. Measurement : 12.1.3.1. The length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm Area shall be worked out in

sq.m correct to two places of decimal. 12.1.3.2. The superficial area of roof covering shall be measured on the flat without allowance for

laps and corrugations. Portion of roof covering overlapping the ridge or hip etc. shall be included in the measurements of the roof.

12.1.3.3. Roof with curved sheets shall be measured and paid for separately. Measurements shall be taken on the flat and not girthed

12.1.3.4. No deduction in measurement shall be made for opening upto 0.4 sqm. and nothing extra

shall be allowed for forming such openings. For any opening exceeding 0.4 sq,m in area, deduction in measurements for the full opening shall be made and in such cases the labour involved in making these openings shall be paid for separately. Cutting across corrugation shall be measured on the flat and not girthed. No additions shall be made for laps cut through.

12.1.4. Rate : The rate shall include the cost of all the materials and labour involved in all the

operations described above including a coat of approved steel paint on overlapping of C.G.S. sheets. This includes the cost of roof sheets, galvanised iron J or L hooks, bolts and nuts, galvanised iron seam bolts and nuts, bituminous and galvanised iron limpet washers etc.

12.2. RIDGES AND HIPS OF PLAIN GALVANISED STEEL SHEET: 12.2.1. Ridges and Hips : Ridges and hips of C.G.S. roof shall be covered with ridge and hip

sections of plain G.S. sheet with a minimum lap of 20 cm on neither side over the C.G.S. sheets. The end laps of the ridges and hips and between ridges and hips shall also be not less than 20 cm. The ridges and hips shall be of 60 cm overall width plain G.S. sheet, 0.6 mm or 0.8 mm thick as given in the description of the item and shall be properly bent in shape.

12.2.2. Measurement : The measurements shall be taken for the finished work in length along

the centre line of ridge or hip, as the case may be correct to a cm. The lap in ridges and hips and between ridges and hips shall not be measured.

12.2.3. Rate : The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials specified above,

including painting, cost of seam bolts and any extra G.I. hook bolts, nuts and washers, required.

12.3. PARTICLE BOARD/A.C. SHEET CEILING : 12.3.1. Boards : 12.3.1.1. Particle Board : The specifications for particle board shall be as given in the drawing and

tendered item. 12.3.1.2. A.C. Sheets : The specification for A.C. sheets shall be same as per IS and shall be of

approved brand. 12.3.2. Frame : Timber frame of the class of wood section specified in the description of the

83

relevant item for the frame or as ordered by the Engineer shall be provided. The scantlings shall be so arranged that the boards can be fifed to form the panel arrangements required as per drawings or as ordered by the Engineer.

12.4. RAIN WATER SPOUTS : 12.4.0. The sectional area of rain water spouts provided shall be generally at the rate of 1 square

cm per 50 square decimeter of roof area drained. No spout shall be less than 50 mm. in diameter. The spacing of spouts shall be arranged to suit the position of openings in the wall. The type spouts may be G.I. as specified in the drawing. The slope of spout shall be 1 in 6 to outside or specified in the drawing or by Engineer.

12.6 LAYING AND JOINTING OF G.I. PIPES (EXTERNAL WORK) 12.6.0 The specifications described in 18.4 shall apply, as far as applicable. 12.6.1 Trenches

The galvanised iron pipes and fittings shall be laid in trenches. The widths and depths of the trenches for different diameters of the pipes shall be as in Table. .

TABLE

Dia of pipe (mm)

Width of trench (cm)

Depth of trench (cm)

15 to 50 30 60

65 to 100 45 75

At joints the trench width shall be widened where necessary. The work of excavation and refilling shall be done true to line and gradient in accordance with general specifications for earth work in trenches. When excavation is done in rock, it shall be cut deep enough to permit the pipes to be laid on a cushion of sand minimum 7.5 cm deep.

12.6.2 Cutting and Threading

Where the pipes have to be out or rethreaded, the ends shall be carefully filed out so that no obstruction to bore is offered. The end of the pipes shall then be carefully threaded conforming to the requirements of IS 554 with pipe dies and tapes in such a manner as will not result in slackness of joints when the two pieces are screwed together. The taps and dies shall be used only for straightening screw threads which have become bent or damaged and shall not be used for turning of the threads so as to make them slack, as the later procedure may not result in a water tight joint. The screw threads of pipes and fitting shall be protected from damage until they are fitted.

12.6.3 Jointing

The pipes shall be cleaned and cleared of all foreign matter before being laid. In jointing the pipes, the inside of the socket and the screwed end of the pipes shall be oiled and rubbed over. Teflon Tape should be used on threads instead of „Dhaaga/ Safeda‟. The end shall then be screwed in the socket, Tee etc. with the pipe wrench. Care shall be taken that all pipes and fittings are properly jointed so as to make the joints completely water tight and pipes are kept at all times free from dust and dirt during fixing. Burr from the joint shall be removed after screwing. After laying, the open ends of the pipes shall be temporarily plugged to prevent access of water, soil or any other foreign matter.

12.6.4 Thrust Blocks (Fig. 18.8)

In case of bigger diameter pipes where the pressure is very high, thrust blocks of cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate of 20 mm nominal size) of adequate size and shape shall be provided on all bends to transmit the hydraulic thrust to the ground, spreading it over a sufficient areas, depending upon the type of soil met with.

12.6.5 Painting

84

The pipes shall be painted with two coats of anticorrosive bitumastic paint of approved quality. 12.6.6 Testing of Joints

The pipes and fittings after they are laid and jointed shall be tested to hydraulic pressure of 6 Kg/sq.cm (60 meter). The pipes shall be slowly and carefully charged with water allowing all air to escape and avoiding all shock or water hammer. The draw off taps and stop cocks shall then be closed and specified hydraulic pressure shall be applied gradually. Pressure gauge must be accurate and preferably should have been recalibrated before the test. The test pump having been stopped, the test pressure should be maintained without loss for at least half an hour. The pipes and fittings shall be tested in sections as the work of laying proceeds, having the joints exposed for inspection during the testing. Pipes or fittings which are found leaking shall be replaced and joints found leaking shall be redone, without extra payment.

12.6.7 Trench Filling

The pipes shall be laid on a layer of 7.5 cm sand and filled up to 15 cm above the pipes. The remaining portion of the trench shall then be filled with excavated earth. The surplus earth shall be disposed off as directed.

12.6.8 Measurements

The lengths shall be measured in running metre correct to a cm for the finished work, which shall include G.I. pipe and G.I. fittings such as bends, tees, elbows reducers, crosses, plugs, sockets, nipples and nuts, but exclude brass or gun metal taps (cocks), valves, unions, lead connection pipes and shower rose. All pipes and fittings shall be classified according to their diameters, method of jointing and fixing substance quality and finish. In case of fittings of an equal bore the pipe shall be described as including all cuttings and wastage. In case of fittings of unequal bore the largest bore shall be measured. Note: G.I. unions shall be paid for separately in external work as well as in internal work.

Digging and refilling of trenches shall either be measured separately as specified in the appropriate clauses of excavation and earth work or clubbed with main item.

12.6.9 Rate

The rate shall include the cost of labour and materials involved in all the operations described above. The rate shall not include excavation in trenches, painting of pipes and sand filling all round the pipes, unless otherwise specified.

12.7 POLYPROPYLENE RANDOM CO-POLYMER (PP-R) PIPES 12.7.1 The PP-R is a bonded, multilayer pipe consisting of different layers of the pipe:-

(a) The inner-most layer of the pipe to be Anti – bacterial to prevent bacteria growth inside pipe surface.

(b) The middle layer to be of plain PP-R which is neither in contact with Water and nor under direct effect of the atmospheric conditions.

(c) The outer-most layer to be of U.V. stabilized PP-R to prevent the pipe surface

from sunlight under exposed atmospheric conditions. The pipes should in general be conforming to the requirements of IS 15801 except that specified with in nomenclature of the item. The pipes should have smooth inner surface with non-contracting diameters. The pipes shall be cleanly finished, free from cracks and other defects. The pipes shall be clean and well cut along ends after taking into consideration the desired length, using the pipe scissors.

The Polypropylene used for manufacturing the pipe shall conform to the requirements of IS 10951 and IS 10910. The specified base density shall be between 900 kg/m3 and 910 kg/m3 when determined at 27°C. The resin should

85

be mixed with sufficient quantity of colour master batches. The colour master batch should be uniform throughout the pipe surface. The standard dimension ratio (SDR) i.e. ratio of the nominal outer diameter of a pipe to its nominal wall thickness should be 7.4/11 as given in the item.

12.7.2 Fittings Plain fittings, Chrome plated brass threaded fittings and Valves shall be as per nomenclature of item or as directed by engineer- in- charge. (a) The plain fittings shall be Polypropylene Random Copolymer and comply with all the

requirements of the pipes. The plain fittings shall comprise of Socket, Elbow, Tee, Cross, Reducer socket, Reduction Tee, End Cap, Crossover, Omega, Threaded Plug and wall clamps in available sizes.

(b) The Chrome Plated Brass threaded fittings shall be Chrome Plated Brass threaded piece molded inside Polypropylene random copolymer fitting. The maternal shall comply with all the requirements of the pipes. The Chrome plated Brass threaded fittings shall comprise of Socket, Elbow and Tee (Male & Female) in available sizes. These are the fittings for C.P. connections and for continuations from existing Galvanized Irion Pipes and fittings.

(c) The valves shall be Polypropylene Random Copolymer Valves. The valves

comprise of Gate Valve, Ball Valve, Concealed stop valve and Chrome Coated Valve in available sizes.

The Valves sizes availability in Polypropylene Random Copolymer is as follows:- (i) Gate Valve - 20 mm to 63 mm (ii) Ball Valve - 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm & 63 mm (iii) Concealed Stop valve - 20 mm & 25 mm (iv) Chrome Coated Valve - 20 mm & 25 mm However, the other Brass/Bronze Valves can be connected to Polypropylene Random pipes using C.P. Brass threaded fittings of desired sizes.

12.7.3 Laying and Jointing of Pipes and Fittings

The specifications described in 18.4 shall apply as far as possible. The pipes and fittings shall run in wall chase as specified. Pipes shall run only in vertical or horizontal alignment as far as possible. The installation of pipes is similar to that of the metal pipes with the only difference in the jointing procedure. The jointing of the PP-R pipes and fittings are done by fusion welding by means of a welding machine. The marking on pipe shall carry the following information:- c) Manufacturer‟s name/ trade mark d) PPR pipe e) SDRf) f) Out side diameter and minimum wall thickness g) Lot No. / Batch No. containing date of manufacturing. And machine number.

86

12.7.4 The out side diameter of pipes, tolerance in the same and ovality of pipe shall be as given

in Table below.

TABLE Outside Diameter, Tolerance and Ovality of Pipes

Sl. No.

Nominal Size

Outside Diameter Tolerance (Only positive tolerance)

Quality

DN mm mm mm

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(i) 16 16.0 0.3 1.2

(ii) 20 20.0 0.3 1.2

(iii) 25 25.0 0.3 1.2

(iv) 32 32.0 0.3 1.3

(v) 40 40.0 0.4 1.4

(vi) 50 50.0 0.5 1.4

(vii) 63 63.0 0.6 1.6

(viii) 75 75.0 0.7 1.6

(ix) 90 90.0 0.9 1.8

(x) 110 110.0 0.9 2.2

1. The values specified for tolerance on outside diameter have been calculated as 0.009DN,

rounded off to the next higher 0.1 mm subject to minimum of 0.3 mm. No negative tolerances are allowed.

2. The basis for the values specified for ovality is:

(a) For nominal outside diameters ≤ 75 mm, the tolerance equals (0.008 DN+1.0) mm, rounded to the next higher 0.1 mm, with a minimum value of 1.2 mm. (b) For nominal outside diameters ≥ 75 mm and ≤ 250 mm, the tolerance equals 0.20 DN, rounded to the next higher 0.1 mm. (c) For nominal outside diameter > 250 mm, the tolerance equals 0.35 DN, rounded to the next higher 0.1 mm.

12.7.5 Wall Thickness

The minimum and maximum wall thickness of pipes shall be as given in Table 18.14 below:-

TABLE

Sl.No. Nominal Size

SDR 11 SDR 7.4

DN Min. Max Min. Max.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(i) 16 - - 2.20 2.70

(ii) 20 1.90 2.30 2.80 3.30

(iii) 25 2.30 2.80 3.50 4.10

(iv) 32 2.90 3.40 4.40 5.10

(v) 40 3.70 4.30 5.50 6.30

(vi) 50 4.60 5.30 6.90 7.80

(vii) 63 5.80 6.60 8.60 9.70

(viii) 75 6.80 7.70 10.30 11.60

(ix) 90 8.20 9.30 12.30 13.80

(x) 110 10.00 11.20 15.10 16.90

87

Note: The wall thickness tolerances have been calculated on the following basis: (a) Limit deviation=0.1e + 0.2 mm rounded up to the nearest 0.1 mm. (b) A local increase in wall thickness of up to +0.2e is permissible for e up to 10 mm and up to 0.15e for e greater than 10 mm. The mean of the measurement shall, however, still lie within the given limit deviations.

The quality of each installation system ultimately depends on the tightness, stability and lifetime of its connections. The pipe of the desired length is cut using the pipe scissors. The proper heating piece is taken and mounted on the welding machine. The welding device is switched on - Control lamp and switch lamp will lit. When ready, control lamp gets off, which means that welding temperature of 260 Degrees ±10 Degrees Celsius has been reached. The pipe end and the fitting to be welded are heated on the welding machine. Before heating the fitting and the pipe, the dirty welding tools, pipe and fitting are cleaned with a cloth. When heated up (with heating time as per the Table shown below), the pipe and the fitting is removed from the welding machine and the two pieces connected together by applying a little pressure without twisting. The joint is allowed to cool down for a few seconds. The welding process is that safe because the properly heated part of Polypropylene create a homogeneous connection

Guidelines for Welding PP-R Pipes and Fittings (DVS Guideline 2207, Part II)

Outer diameter of pipe(mm)

Heating Time (Seconds) Cooling Period (Minutes)

16 5 2

20 5 2

25 7 2

32 8 4

40 12 4

50 18 4

63 24 6

75 30 8

90 30 8

The same procedure shall be adapted for exposed as well as concealed fittings. The Crossovers may be used wherever the overlapping of the PP-R pipes is required. The fixing shall be done by means of Wall Support Clamps keeping the pies about 1.5 cm clear of the wall where to be laid on the surface. Where it is specified to conceal the pipes, chasing may be adopted. For pipes fixed in the shafts, ducts etc. there should be sufficient space to work on the pipes with the usual tools. Pipe sleeves shall be fixed at a place the pipe is passing, through a wall or floor for reception of the pipe and allow freedom for expansion and contraction and other movements. Fixed supports prevent any movement of the pipe by fixing it at some points. Fittings are used in creating the fixed points. Fixed supports must not but installed at bending parts and the direction changes must be done in the pipe itself. In between the fixed supports some arrangements must be done to compensate any potential elongation or shrinkage in the pipe length. For exposed straight pipes having length more than 5 meters, to compensate the expansion an expansion piece must be used.

12.7.6 Piping Installation Support

Piping shall be properly supported by means of wall support clamps as specified and as required, keeping in view the proper designing for expansion and contraction. Risers shall be supported at each floor with clamps. Due to high coefficient of thermal expansion the heat losses though the pipes is highly reduced. Therefore, for internal Bathroom hot geyser water distribution lines, the insulation is often not required.

88

12.7.7 Installation of Water Meter and Valves

PP-R lines shall be cut to the required lengths at the position where the meter and Valves are required to be fixed. Suitable C.P. Brass threaded fittings shall be attached to the pipes. The meter and Valves shall be fixed in a position by means of connecting pipes, jam nut and socket etc. The stop cock shall be fixed near the inlet of the water meter. The paper disc inserted in the ripples of the meter shall be removed. And the meter shall be installed exactly horizontally or vertically in the flow line in the direction shown by the arrow cast on the body of the meter. Care shall be taken to not to disturb the factory seal of the meter. Wherever the meter shall be fixed to a newly fitted pipeline, the pipeline shall have to be completely washed before fitting the meter.

12.7.8 Testing

All water supply system shall be tested to Hydrostatic pressure test. Maximum operating pressure at varying degree of temperature is given in Table

TABLE

Sl.No. Temperature SDR 11 SDR 7.4

Pressure MPa Pressure MPa

(i) 10 1.91 3.02

(ii) 20 1.63 2.58

(iii) 30 1.37 2.17

(iv) 40 1.15 1.84

(v) 50 0.98 1.55

(vi) 60 0.82 1.28

(vii) 70 0.62 0.98

(viii) 80 0.39 0.62

(ix) 95 0.27 0.4

The pressure test is performed in 3 steps being preliminary test, main test and final test. For the preliminary test a pressure which is 1.5 times higher than the possible working pressure is applied and this is repeated two times in 30 minutes with intervals of 10 minutes. After a test period of 30 minutes, the test pressure must not be dropped more than 0.6 bar and no leak must occur. Main test follows the preliminary test. Test time is two hours, in doing so the test pressure taken from the preliminary test must not have fallen more than 0.2 bar. After completion of these tests, the final test comes which has to be done under a test pressure of 10 bars and 5 bar in the interval of 15 minutes. Between the respective test courses, pressure has to be removed. All leaks and defects in joints revealed during the testing shall be rectified and got approved at site by retest. Piping required subsequent to the above pressure test shall be retested in the same manner. System may be tested in sections and such sections shall be entirely checked on completion of connection to the overhead tanks or pumping system or mains. In case of improper circulation, the contractor shall rectify the defective connections. He shall bear all expenses for carrying out the above rectifications including the tearing up and refinishing of floors and walls as required. After commissioning of the water supply system, contractor shall test each valve by closing and opening it a number of times to observe if it is working efficiently. Valves which are not working efficiently shall be replaced by new ones.

89

12.7.9 Measurements

The net length of pipes as laid or fixed shall be measured in running meters correct to a cm for the finished work, which shall include PP-R pipe and fittings including plain fittings and Chrome Plated Brass. Threaded fittings. Deductions for the length of valves shall be made. The cost includes cutting chases in the masonry wall and making good the same, trenching, refilling and testing of joints. The cost of gate valves/ wheel valves/union shall be paid for separately.

12.8 CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (CPVC) PIPES.

12.8.1 CPVC pipes & fittings used in hot & cold potable water distribution system shall conform to requirement of IS 15778. The material from which the pipe is produced shall consist of chlorinated polyvinyl chlorides. The polymer from which the pipe compounds are to be manufactured shall have chlorine content not less than 66.5%. The internal and external surfaces of the pipe shall be smooth, clean and free from grooving and other defects. The pipes shall not have any detrimental effect on the composition of the water flowing though it.

Diameter and wall thickness of CPVC pipes are as per given in Table below.

TABLE

Sl. No.

Nomi- nal Size

Nominal Outside Diameter

Mean Outside Diameter

Outside Diameter at any point

Wall thickness

Class 1, SDR 11 Class 3, SDR 17

Min

Max Min Max Avg. Max

Min Max Avg. Max

Min Max

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

i. 15 15.9 15.8 16.0 15.8 16.0 2.2 1.7 2.2 - - -

ii. 20 22.2 22.1 22.3 22.0 22.4 2.5 2.0 2.5 - - -

Iii 25 28.6 28.5 28.7 28.4 28.8 3.1 2.6 3.1 - - -

iv. 32 34.9 34.8 35.0 34.7 35.1 3.7 3.2 3.7 - - -

v 40 41.3 41.2 41.4 41.1 41.5 4.3 3.8 4.3 - - -

vi 50 54.0 53.9 54.1 53.7 54.3 5.5 4.9 5.5 - - -

vii 65 73.0 72.8 73.2 72.2 73.8 - - - 4.8 4.3 4.8

viii 80 88.9 88.7 89.1 88.1 89.7 - - - 5.9 5.2 5.9

ix 100 114.3 114.1 114.5 113.5 115.1 - - - 7.5 6.7 7.5

x 150 168.3 168.0 168.6 166.5 170.1 - - - 11.1 9.9 11.1

Notes

1. For CPVC pipes SDR is calculated by dividing the average outer diameter of the pipe in mm by the minimum wall thickness in mm. If the wall thickness calculated by this formula is less than 1.52 mm, it shall be increased to 1.52 mm. The SDR values shall be rounded to the nearest 0.5.

12.8.2 Dimensions of Pipes

The outside diameter, outside diameter at any point and wall thickness shall be as given in above Table.

12.8.2.1 Diameter : The outside diameter and outside diameter at any point as given in Table shall be measured according to the method given in IS 12235 (part 1).

90

12.8.2.2 Diameter at any point : The difference between the measured maximum outside diameter and measured minimum outside diameter in the same cross-section of pipe (also called tolerance on ovality) shall not exceed the greater of the following two values: (a) 0.5 mm, and (b) 0.012 dn rounded off to the next higher 0.1 mm.

12.8.2.3 Wall Thickness : The wall thickness of the pipes shall be as given in Table 18.16. Wall

thickness shall be measured by any of the three methods given in IS 12235 (part 1). To check the conformity of the wall thickness of the pipe throughout its entire length, it is necessary to measure the wall thickness of the pipe at any point along its length. This shall be done by cutting the pipe at any point along its length and measuring the wall thickness as above. Alternatively, to avoid destruction of the pipe, non destructive testing methods such as the use of ultrasonic wall thickness measurement gauges shall be used at any four points along the length of the pipe.

Tolerance on Wall Thickness

(a) For pipes of minimum wall thickness 6 mm or less, the permissible variation between the minimum wall thickness (eMin) and the wall thickness at any point (e), (e - eMin) shall be positive in the form of +y, where y=0.1 eMin+0.2 mm.

(b) For pipes of minimum wall thickness greater than 6mm, the permissible variation

of wall thickness shall again be positive in the form of +y, where y would be applied in two parts.

(c) The average wall thickness shall be determined by taking at least six

measurements of wall thickness round the pipe and including both the absolute minimum and absolute maximum measured values. The tolerance applied to this average wall thickness from these measurements shall be within the range 0.1 eMin+0.2 mm (see above Table).

(d) The maximum wall thickness at any point shall be within the range 0.15eMin (see

above Table). (e) The results of these calculations for checking tolerance shall be rounded off to the

next higher 0.1 mm.

12.8.2.4 Effective Length (Le) : If the length of a pipe is specified, the effective length shall not be less than that specified. The preferred effective length of pipes shall be 3, 5 or 6 m. The pipes may be supplied in other lengths where so agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.

12.8.3 Pipe Ends

The ends of the pipes meant for solvent cementing shall be cleanly cut and shall be reasonably square to the axis of the pipe or may be chamfered at the plain end.

12.8.4 Physical and Chemical Characteristics

12.8.4.1 Visual Appearance : The colour of the pipes shall be off-white. Slight variations in the appearance of the colour are permitted. The internal and external surface of the pipe shall be smooth, clean and free from grooving and other defects.

12.8.4.2 Opacity : The wall of the plain pipe shall not transmit more than 0.1 per cent of the visible

light falling on it when tested in accordance with IS 12235 (Part 3). 12.8.4.3 Effect on Water : The pipes shall not have any determinate effect on the composition of

the water flowing through them, when tested as per 10.3 of IS 4985.

91

12.8.4.4 Reversion Test : When tested by the method prescribed in IS 12235 (Part 5/ Sec 1 and

Sec 2), a length of pipe 200 ±20 mm long shall not alter in length by more than 5 per cent. 12.8.4.5 Vicat Softening Temperature : When tested by the method prescribed in IS 12235 (part

2), the Vicat softening temperature of the specimen shall not be less than 110°C. 12.8.4.6 Density : When tested in accordance with IS 12235 (Part 14), the density of the pipes

shall be between 1450kg/m3 and 1650kg/m3. 12.8.5 Mechanical Properties 12.8.5.1 Hydrostatic Characteristics : When subject to internal hydrostatic pressure test in

accordance with the procedure given in IS 12235 (part 8/Sec 1), the pipe shall not fail during the prescribed test duration. The temperatures, duration and hydrostatic (hoop) stress for the test shall conform to the requirements given in Table 18.17. The test shall be carried out not earlier than 24 h after the pipes have been manufactured.

12.8.5.2 Thermal Stability by Hydrostatic Pressure Testing : When subject to internal

hydrostatic pressure test in accordance with the procedure given in IS 12235 (Part 8/Sec 1) and as per requirement given in Table, the pipe shall not burst or leak during the prescribed test duration.

12.8.5.3 Resistance to External Blow at 0°C : When tested by the method prescribed in IS 4985,

with classified striker mass and drop height as given in Table 18.18, the pipe shall have a true impact rate of not more than 10 per cent.

12.8.5.4 Flattening Test : When tested by the method prescribed in IS 12235 (part 19), pipe shall

show no signs of cracking, splitting and breaking. 12.8.5.5 Tensile Strength : When tested by the method prescribed in IS 12235 (Part 19), the

tensile strength at yield shall not be less than 50 MPa at 27 ± 2°C. 12.8.6. Marking 12.8.6.1 Each pipe shall be clearly and indelibly marked in ink/paint or hot embossed on white

base at intervals of not more than 3 m. The marking shall show the following: (a) Manufacturer‟s name or trade-mark (b) Outside diameter, (c) Class of pipe and pressure rating, and (d) Bath or lot number

12.8.7.2 BIS Certification Marking : Each pipe may also be marked with the Standard Mark. 12.8.8 Fittings

The fittings shall be as follows: (a) Plain CPVC solvent cement fittings from size 15 mm to 160 mm. (b) Brass threaded fittings. (c) Valve from size 15 mm to 160 mm (d) Brass Threaded Fittings: All types of one end brass threaded male/female adaptors in various fittings like coupler, socket, elbow, tee are available for transition to other plastic/metal piping and for fixing of CP fittings. Ball, Gate valves in CPVC are available in all dimensions. All fittings shall carry the following information: (1) Manufacturer‟s name/trade mark. (2) Size of fitting

12.8.9 Piping Installation Support and Spacing 12.8.9.1 Concealed Piping: Pipes can be concealed in chases. The pipes and fitting are to be

pressure tested prior to concealing the chases. To maintain alignment of CP fittings while joining, all alignment of fittings and pipe shall be done correctly. DO NOT USE NAILS FOR HOLDING OF PIPES IN THE CHASES.

92

12.8.9.2 External Installations: For pipes fixed in the shafts, ducts etc. there should be sufficient

space to work on the pipes. Pipes sleeves shall be fixed at a place the pipe is passing through a wall or floor so as to allow freedom for expansion and contraction. Clamping of the pipe is done to support it while allowing the freedom for movement. All pipes exposed to sunlight shall be painted with a water based acrylic paint emulsion to enhance UV protection. Pipes in trenching shall be laid in accordance to the Good Plumbing practices followed for Metal piping.

12.8.10 Testing

All water supply systems shall be tested to hydrostatic pressure test. The pressure tests are similar to the test pressure used for other plastic/metal pipes. System may be tested in sections and such section shall be entirely checked on completion of connection to the overhead tank or pumping system or mains.

12.8.11 Measurements The net length of pipes as laid or fixed shall be measured in running meters correct to a cm for the finished work, which shall include CPVC pipe and fittings including plain and Brass threaded fittings and jointing solvent cement.

13. FINISHING : 13.1. CEMENT PLASTER : 13.1.1. Scaffolding : Scaffolding shall be stable, sound and strong and shall be got approved

from Engineer in advance. 13.1.2. Preparation of Surface : The joints shall be raked out properly. Dust and loose mortar

shall be brushed out. Efflorescence if any shall be removed by brushing and scrapping. The surface shall then be thoroughly washed with water, cleaned and kept wet before plastering is commenced.

In case of concrete surface if a chemical retarded has been applied to the form work, the surface shall be roughened by wire brushing and all the resulting dust and loose particles cleaned off and care shall be taken that none of the retarders is left on the surface.

13.1.3. Mortar :The mortar of the specified mix shall be used. 13.1.4. Application of Plaster : 13.1.4.1. Ceiling plaster shall be completed before commencement of wall plaster. 13.1.4.2. Plastering shall be started from the top and worked down towards the floor. All putlog

holes shall be properly filled in advance of the plastering as the scaffolding is being taken down. To ensure even thickness and a true surface. The surfaces of these gauging patches shall be truly in the plane of the finished plaster surface adequate gauging plaster patches are to fixed first as directed by the Engineer.

The wall plastering shall then be taken up to bring the surface to smooth with specified thickness by using wooden straight edge as directed.

Finally the surface shall be finished off true with trowel or wooden float according as a smooth or a sandy granular texture is required. Excessive troweling or over working the float shall be avoided.

93

13.1.4.3. All corners, arises, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case

may be and shall be carefully finished. Rounding or chamfering corners, arises, provision of grooves at junctions etc. where required shall be done without any extra payment. Such rounding, chamfering or grooving shall be carried out with proper templates or battens to the sizes required.

13.1.4.4. When suspending work at the end of the day, the plaster shall be left, cut clean to line

both horizontally and vertically. When recommencing the plastering, the edge of old work shall be scrapped cleaned before plaster is applied to the adjacent areas, to enable the two to properly joint together. Plastering work shall be closed at the end of the day on the body of wall and not nearer than 15 cm to any corners or arises. It shall not be closed on the body of the features such as plaster bands and cornices, nor at the corners of arises. Horizontal joints in plaster work shall not also occur on parapet tops and copings as these invariably lead to leakages.

No portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on. 13.1.5. Curing : Curing shall be started 24 hours after finishing the plaster. The plaster shall be

kept wet for a period of seven days. 13.1.6. Precaution : Any cracks which appear in the surface and all portions which sound hollow

when tapped, or are found to be soft or otherwise defective, shall be cut out in rectangular shape and redone as directed by the Engineer.

13.1.7. Measurements : 13.1.7.1. Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm and its area shall be calculated in

square metres correct to two places of decimal. 13.1.7.2. Thickness of the plaster shall be exclusive of the thickness of the key i.e. grooves, or

open joints in brick work. 13.1.7.3. The measurement of wall plaster shall be taken between the walls or partitions (the

dimensions before the plaster shall be taken) for the length and from the top of the floor or skirting to the ceiling for the height. Depth of coves or cornices if any shall be deducted.

13.1.7.4. Plaster over masonry pilasters will be measured and paid for as plaster only. 13.1.7.5. Rate : The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the

operations described above. 13.2. CEMENT PLASTER WITH A FLOATING COAT OF NEAT CEMENT: 13.2.0. The cement plaster shall be of specified thickness finished with a floating coat of neat

cement as described in the item. 13.2.1. Specifications for this item of work shall be same as described in 12.1 except for the

additional floating coat which shall be carried out as below.

When the plaster has been brought to a true surface with the wooden straight edge it shall be uniformly treated over its entire area with a paste of neat cement and rubbed smooth, so that the whole surface is covered with neat cement coating. The quantity of cement applied for floating coat shall be 1 kg per sqm. Smooth finishing shall be completed with trowel immediately and in no case later than half an hour of adding water to the plaster.

94

13.3. 15 MM CEMENT PLASTER : 13.3.1. Mortar : The mix and type of fine aggregate specified in the description of the item shall

be used for the respective coats. Generally the mix of the finishing coat shall not be richer than the under coat unless otherwise described in item.

13.3.2. Application : 13.3.2.1 The plaster shall be applied in two coats i.e. 12mm under coat and then 6mm finishing

coat and shall have and average total thickness of not less than 15 mm. 13.3.2.2 15mm under coat : This shall be applied as specified except that when the plaster has

been brought to a true surface a wooden straight edge and the surface shall be left rough and furrowed 2mm deep with a scratching tool diagonally both ways, to form key for the finishing coat. The surface shall be kept wet till the finishing coat is applied.

13.3.2.3. 10mm finishing coat : The finishing coat shall be applied after the under coat has

sufficiently set but not dried and in any case within 48 hours. 13.3.3. Specifications for curing, finishing, precautions, measurements and rate shall be as

ordinary cement plaster. 13.4. 10 MM CEMENT PLASTER ON CEMENT CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE WORK/MASONARY WORK. 13.4.1. Scaffolding : Stage scaffolding shall be provided for the work and shall be approved by

the Engineer. 13.4.2. Preparation of Surface : Projecting burrs of mortar formed due to the gaps at joints in

shuttering shall be removed. The surface shall be scrubbed clean with wire brushes. In addition concrete surfaces to be plastered shall be pock marked to ensure a proper key for the plaster. The mortar shall be washed off and surface, cleaned of all oil, grease etc. and well wetted before the plaster is applied.

13.4.3. Mortars : Mortar of the specified mix using the types of sand described in the item shall

be used. 13.4.4. Application : To ensure even thickness and a true surface, gauge of patch plaster

intervals shall be provide in both directions to serve as guides for the plastering. Surface of these gauged areas shall be truly in the plane of the finished plaster surface. The plaster shall be then applied in a uniform surface to arrived at specified. The surface shall be finished true with a trowel or with wooden float to give a smooth or sandy granular texture as required. Excess toweling or over working of the floats shall be avoided. The plastering and finishing shall be completed within half and hour of adding water to the dry mortar.

Plastering of ceiling shall not be commenced until the slab above has been finished and centering has been removed.

13.4.5. Thickness : The average thickness of plaster shall not be less than 10 mm. The

minimum thickness over any portion of the surface shall not be less than 9 mm. 13.4.6. Curing : The specifications shall be same as for plastering work.

95

13.4.7. Measurements : 13.4.7.1. Length and breadth shall be measured correct a cm. and its area shall be calculated in

sq.m. correct to two places of decimal. Dimensions before plastering shall be taken. 13.4.7.2. Thickness of plaster shall be exclusive of the thicknes of the day i.e. depth or pock marks

and hacking. 13.4.8. Rate : The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the

operations described above. 13.5. WHITE WASHING WITH LIME : 13.5.1. Scaffolding : 13.5.1.1. Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected as directed by the Engineer. 13.5.1.2. Where ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied on their tops to avoid

damage or scratches to walls. 13.5.2. Preparation of Lime Wash : 13.5.2.1. The lime wash shall be prepared from fresh stone white lime. The lime shall be thoroughly

slaked on the spot, mixed and stirred with sufficient water to make a thin cream. This shall be allowed to stand for a period of 24 hours and then shall be screened through a clean coarse cloth. 40 gm of gum dissolved in hot water, shall be added to each 10 cubic decimeter of the cream. The approximate quantity of water to be added in making the cream will be 5 litres of water to one kg of lime.

13.5.2.2. Indigo (Neel) upto 3 gm per kg of lime dissolved in water, shall then be added and stirred

well. Water shall then be added at the rate of about 5 litres per kg. of lime to produce a milky solution.

13.5.3. Application : 13.5.3.1. The white wash shall be applied with moon brushes to5 the specified number of coats. 13.5.3.2. Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the nest one is applied. Further each coat shall

be inspected and approved by the Engineer before the subsequent coat is applied. No portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on.

13.5.3.3. For new work, three or more coats shall be applied till the surface presents a smooth and

uniform finish through which the plaster does not show. 13.5.4. Measurements : 13.5.4.1. Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm and area shall be calculated in

sqm correct to two places of decimals. 13.5.4.2. Measurements for jambs, soffits and fills etc. for openings shall be as specified. 13.5.4.3. Corrugated surfaces shall be measure flat as fixed and the area so measured shall be

increased by the following percentages to allow for the girthed area. Corrugated asbestos cement sheet ------------- 20% Semi Corrugated asbestos cement sheet -------- 10% 13.6. WHITE WASHING WITH WHITING : 13.6.1. Preparation of Mix : Whiting (ground white chalk) shall be dissolved in sufficient quantity

96

of warm water and thoroughly stirred to form a thin slurry which shall then be screened through a clean coarse cloth. Two kg of gum and 0.4 kg of copper sulphate dissolved separately in hot water shall be added for every cum of the slurry which shall then be diluted with water to the consistency of milk so as to make a wash ready for use.

13.6.2. Other specifications described in white washing in lime. 13.7. COLOUR WASHING : 13.7.1. The mineral colour, not affected by lime, shall be added to white wash. Indigo (Neel) shall

however, not be added. No colour wash shall be done until a sample of the colour wash of the required tint or shade has been got approved from the Engineer. The colour shall be of even tint or shade over the whole surface. If it is blotchy or otherwise badly applied, it shall be redone by the contractor.

For new work, the priming coat shall be of white wash with lime or with whiting as specified in the description of the item. Two or more coats, shall then be applied on the entire surface till it represents a smooth and uniform finish.

The finished dry surface shall not be powdery and shall not readily come off on the hand when rubbed.

13.7.2. Other specifications same as white washing with lime. 13.8. OIL EMULSION (OIL BOUND) WASHABLE DISTEMPERING : 13.8.1. Materials : Oil emulsion (Oil Bound) washable distemper (IS:428) of approved brand and

manufacture shall be used. The primer where used as on new work shall be cement primer or distemper primer as described in the item. These shall be of the same manufacture as distemper. The distemper shall be diluted with water or any other prescribed thinner, in a manner recommended by the manufacturer. Only sufficient quantity of distemper required for day's work shall be prepared.

13.8.2. Preparation of the Surface : 13.8.2.1. For new work the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, old white or colour wash by

washing and scrubbing. Unevenness, patches etc. shall be made good to make the surface smooth.

13.8.3. Application : 13.8.3.1. Distempering : For new work, the primer coat has to be supplied and dried for at least

48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand papered to make it smooth for receiving the distemper. All loose particles shall be dusted off after rubbing. One coat of distemper properly diluted with thinner (water or other liquid as stipulated by the manufacturer) shall be applied with brushes in horizontal strokes followed immediately by vertical ones which together constitutes one coat.

The subsequent coats shall be applied in the same way. Two or more coats of distemper as are found necessary shall be applied over the primer coat to obtain an even shade.

A time interval of at least 24 hours shall be allowed between successive coats to permit proper drying of the preceding coat.

13.9. CEMENT PRIMER COAT : 13.9.0. Cement primer coat is used as a base coat on wall finish.

97

Primer coat shall be preferably applied by brushing and not by spraying. New plaster patches in old work should also be treated with cement primer before applying oil emulsion paints etc.

13.9.1. Preparation of the Surface : 13.9.1.1. The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, dirt etc. to give a smooth surface. The

cement primer shall be applied with a brush on the clean dry and smooth surface. The surface shall be finished as uniformly as possible leaving no brush marks. It shall be allowed to dry for at least 48 hours, before oil emulsion paint is applied.

13.10. CEMENT PAINT : 13.10.1. Material : The cement paint shall be approved brand and manufacture. 13.10.2. Preparation of Surface :

For new work, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mortar dropping, dirt dust, algae, grease and other foreign matter by brushing and washing. Pitting in plaster shall be made good and a coat of water proof cement paint shall be applied over patches after wetting them thoroughly.

13.10.3. Preparation of Mix : Cement paint shall be mixed in such quantities as can be used up

within an hour of its mixing as otherwise the mixture will set and thicken, affecting flow and finish. Cement paint shall be mixed with water as per manufacturer's instructions.

The lids of cement paint drums shall be kept tightly closed when not in use.

In case of cement paint brought in gunny bags, once the bag is opened the contents should be consumed in full on the day of its opening. If the same is not likely to be consumed in full, the balance quantity should be transferred and preserved in an airtight container.

13.10.4. Application : 13.10.4.1. The solution shall be applied on the clean and wetted surface with brushes or spraying

machine. The solution shall be kept well stirred during the period of application. The method of application of cement paint shall be as per manufacturer's specification. The completed surface shall be watered after the day's work.

13.10.4.2. The second coat shall be applied after the first coat has been set for at least 24 hours.

Before application of the second or subsequent coats, the surface of the previous coat shall not be wetted.

13.10.4.3. For new work, the surface shall be treated with three or more coats of water proof

cement paint as found necessary to get a uniform shade. 13.10.5. Precaution : Water proof cement paint shall not be applied on surfaces already treated

with white wash, colour wash, distemper dry or oil bound, varnishes, paints etc. It shall not be applied on gypsums, wood and metal surfaces.

13.10.6. The specifications in respect of scaffolding, protective measures, measurements and rate

shall be as described under white washing. 13.11. PAINTING : 13.11.1. Materials : Synthetic enamel paint of approved brand and manufacture shall be used.

If for any reason, thinning is necessary in case of ready mixed paint, the brand of thinner recommended by the manufacturer or as instructed by the Engineer shall be used.

98

13.11.2. Commencing Work : Painting shall be started after the Engineer has inspected the items of work and given his approval to commence the painting work. Painting of external surface should not be done in adverse weather condition like hail storm and dust storm.

13.11.3. Preparation of Surface : The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and dusted off. The

prepared surface shall have received the approval of the Engineer after inspection, before painting is commenced.

13.11.4 Application : 13.11.4.1. Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the paint shall be stirred thoroughly in its

containers, when applying also, the paint shall be continuously stirred in the smaller containers so that it consistency is kept uniform.

13.11.4.2 The painting shall be laid on evenly and smoothly by means of crossing and laying

off, the latter in the direction of the grains of wood. The crossing and laying off consists of covering the area over with paint, brushing the surface hard for the first time over and then brushing alternately in opposite direction, two or three times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction at right angles to the same. In this process, no brush marks shall be left after the laying off is finished. The full process of crossing and laying off will constitute one coat.

13.11.4.3 On painting steel work, special care shall be taken while painting over bolts, nuts, rivets,

overlaps etc. 13.11.4.4 Brushes and Containers : After work, the brushes shall be completely cleaned of paint

and linseed oil by rinsing with turpentine. 13.11.6. Measurements : 13.11.6.1. The length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. The area shall be calculated

in sqm (correct to two places of decimal), except otherwise stated. NOTE : Components of trusses, compound girders, stanchions , lattices and similar work shall be

given in sq.metres irrespective of the size or girth of members. Priming coat of paint shall be included in the work of fabrication.

13.11.6.2. In measuring painting, varnishing, oiling etc. of joinery and steel work etc. the coefficients

as indicated in following tables shall be used to obtain the area payable. The coefficients shall be applied to the areas measured flat and not girthed

99

TABLE EQUIVALENT PLAIN AREAS OF UNEVEN SURFACE ___________________________________________________________________ S.No. Description of work How measured Multiplying Coefficients 1 2 3 4

I. WOOD WORK DOORS, WINDOWS ETC. 1. Paneled or framed and Measured flat 1.30 (for braced doors, windows (not girthed in- each side) etc. cluding chowkhat or frame edges, chocks, cleats etc. shall be deemed to be included in the item. 2. Ledged and battened or - do - ledged, battened and braced doors, windows etc. 3. Flush doors etc. - do - 1.20 (for each side) 4. Part paneled and part - do - 1.00 (for glazed or gauzed doors, each side) window etc. (Excluding painting of wire gauze portion) 5. Fully glazed or gauzed - do - 0.80 (for doors, windows etc. each side) (Excluding painting of wire gauze portion) 6. Fully ventioned or - do - 1.80 (for louvered doors, windows each side) etc. 7. Trellis (or Jaffri) work Measured flat over- 2 (for one way or two way. all, no deduction painting shall be made all over) for open spaces, supporting members shall not be measured separately.

100

8. Carved or enriched work Measured flat. 2 (for each side) 9. Weather boarding Measured flat ` 1.20 (for not girthed each side) supporting frame work shall not be measured separately. 10. Wood shingle roofing Measured flat (not 1.10 (for girthed) each side) 11. Boarding with cover Measured flat 1.05 (for fillets and match (not girthed) each side) boarding. 12. Tile and slate batte- Measured flat 0.80 (for ning over all no deduc- all tions shall be painting made for over) open spaces. II. STEEL WORK DOORS,WINDOWS ETC. : 13. Plain sheeted steel Measured flat (not 1.10 (for doors or windows. girthed) inclu- each side) ding frame edges etc. 14. Fully glazed or gauzed - do - 0.50 (for steel doors and windows each side) (excluding painting of wire gauze portion) 15. Partly panelled and partly - do - 0.80 (for glazed or gauze doors each side) and windows (Excluding painting of wire gauze portion) 16. Corrugated sheeted steel - do - .25 (for doors or windows each side) 17. Collapsible gates Measured flat . 50 (for painting all over 18. Rolling shutters of Measured flat 1.10 (for interlocked laths. (size of opening) each side) all over: jamb guides, bottom rails and locking arrangement etc. shall be included in the item (top cover shall be measured separately) III. GENERAL : 19. Expended metal, hard Measured flat over- 1

101

(for drawn steel wire fabric all : no deduction paint of approved quality, shall be made for all grill works and gra- open spaces : ing over) in guard Bars, balustrades, supporting members railing partitions and shall not be measu- MS Bars in windows frames. red separately. 20. Open palisade fencing and - do - 1 (for gates including standards, (see Note No. 12) paint braces, rails stays etc. all in timber or steel. over) 21. Corrugated iron sheeting - do - Measured 1.14 in roofs,

side cladding flat (Not girthed) (for etc. each side) 22. AC corrugated sheeting in - do - 1.20 roofs, side cladding etc. (for each side 23. AC semicorrugated sheeting - do - 1.10 in roofs, side cladding (for etc. or Nanital pattern each using plain sheets. side) 24. Wire gauze shutters - do - 1.00 including painting of wire (for gauze. each side) Explanatory notes for Table-1. 1) Measurements for doors windows etc. shall be taken flat (and not girthed) over all including

chowkhats or frames, where provided. Where chowkhats and frames are not provided, the shutter measurements shall be taken.

2) Where doors, windows etc. are of composite types other than those included in Table-I the

different portion shall be measured separately with their appropriate coefficients, the centre line of the common rail being taken as the dividing line between the two portions.

3) The coefficients for door and windows shall apply irrespective of the size of frames and shutter

members. 4) In case steel frames are used the area of doors, windows shutters shall be measured flat

excluding frames. 5) When the two faces of a door, window etc. are to be treated with different specified finishes,

measurable under separate items, the edges of frames and shutters shall be treated with the one or the other type of finish as ordered by the Engineer and measurement of this will be deemed to be included in the measurement of the face treated with that finish.

6) In the case where shutters are fixed on both faces of the frames, the measurement for the door

frame and shutter on one face shall be taken in the manner already described, while the additional shutter on the other face will be measured for the shutter only excluding the frame.

102

7) Where shutters are provided with clearance at top or/and bottom each exceeding 15 cm. height,

such openings shall be deducted from the overall measurements and relevant coefficient shall be applied to obtain the area payable

8) Collapsible gates shall be measured for width from outside to outside of gate in its expanded

position and for height from bottom to top of channel verticals. No separate measurements shall be taken for the top and bottom guide rails rollers, fittings etc.

9) Coefficients for sliding doors shall be the same as for normal types of doors in the table.

Measurements shall be taken outside to outside of shutters, and no separate measurements shall be taken for the painting guide rails, rollers, fittings etc.

10) Measurements of painting as above shall be deemed to include painting all iron fittings in the

same or different shade for which no extra will be paid. 11) The measurements of guard bars, expanded metal, hard drawn steel wire fabric of approved

quality, grill work and gratings, when fixed in frame work, painting of which is once measured else where shall be taken exclusive of the frames. In other cases the measurements shall be taken inclusive of the frames.

12) For painting open palisade fencing and gates etc., the height shall be measured from the bottom

of the lowest rail if the palisades do not go below it, (for from the lower end of the palisades, if they project below the lowest rail), upto the top of rails or palisades whichever are higher, but not up to the top of standards when the latter are higher than the top rails of the palisades.

13.11.6.3. Width of molded work of all other kinds, as in hand rails, cornices, architraves shall be

measured by girth. 13.11.6.4. For trusses, compound girders, stanchions, lattice girders, and similar work, actual areas

will be measured in sq. metre and no extra shall be paid for painting on bolt heads, nuts, washers etc. even when they are picked out in a different tint to the adjacent work.

13.11.6.5. Painting of rain water, soil, waste, vent and water pipes etc. shall be measured in running

metres of the particular diameter of the pipe concerned. Painting of specials such as bends, heads, branches, junctions, shoes, etc. shall be included in the length and no separate measurements shall be taken for these or for painting brackets, clamps etc.

13.11.6.6. Measurements of wall surfaces and wood and other work not referred to already shall be

recorded as per actual. 13.12.6.7. Flag staffs, steel chimneys, aerial masts, spires and other such objects requiring special

scaffolding shall be measured separately. 13.12.7. Rate : Rates shall include cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations in

the particular specifications given under the several items. 13.13. PAINTING PRIMING COAT ON WOOD, IRON OR PLASTERED SURFACES 13.13.1. Primer : 13.13.1.1. The primer for wood work, iron work or plastered surface shall be as specified in the

description of item. This shall be of approved brand as approved by the Engineer. 13.13.2. Preparation of Surface : 13.13.2.1. Wooden surface : The wood work to be painted shall be dry and free from moisture.

The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned. All unevenness shall be rubbed down smooth with sand paper and shall be well dusted. Knots, if any shall be covered with preparation of red lead made by grinding red lead in water and mixing with strong glue sized and used

103

hot. Appropriate filler material conforming to IS:345 with same shade as paint shall be used where specified. The surface treated for knotting shall be dry before paint is applied. After obtaining approval of Engineer for wood work, the priming coat shall be applied before the wood work is fixed in position. After the priming coat is applied, the holes and indentation on the surface shall be stopped with wood putty. Stopping shall not be done before the priming coat is applied as the wood will absorb the oil in stopping and the latter is therefore liable to crack.

13.13.2.2. Iron & Steel Surface : All rust and scales shall be removed by scrapping or by brushing

with steel wire brushes. Hard skin or oxide formed on the surface of wrought iron during rolling which becomes loose by rusting, shall be removed.

All dust and dirt shall be thoroughly wiped away from the surface and the surface should be dry.

13.13.2.3. Plastered Surface : The surface shall ordinarily not be painted until it has dried

completely. Trial patches of primer shall be laid at intervals and where drying is satisfactory, painting shall then be taken in hand. Before primer is applied, holes and undulations, shall be filled up with plaster of Paris and rubbed smooth.

13.13.3. Application : The primer shall be applied with brushes, worked well into the surface and

spread even and smooth. The painting shall be done by crossing and laying as described under painting work.

13.13.4. Treatment on Steel for Aggressive Environment: 13.13.4.1. A second coat of ready mixed red oxide zinc chromate primer may be applied where

considered necessary in aggressive environment such as near Industrial Establishment and Coastal regions where the steel members are prone to corrosion. The second coat (which shall be paid for separately) is to be applied after placing the member in position and just before applying paint. The second coat of primer is not necessary in case of painting with synthetic enamel paint as it is applied over an under coat of ordinary paint.

13.13.4.2. The specifications described under shall hold good so as they are applicable. 13.14. PAINTING READY MIXED PAINT OVER G. S. SHEETS : 13.14.0. Ready mixed paint, suitable for painting over G.S. sheets, of approved brand and

manufacture and of the required shade shall be used. G.S. sheets shall be painted with a priming coat of one coat of red oxide zinc chromate paint.

13.14.1. Preparation of Surface : 13.14.1.1. Painting New Surface : The painting of new G.S. sheets shall not usually be done till the

sheets have weathered for about a year.

Before painting on G.S.sheets, rust patches shall be completely cleaned with coarse emery paper and brush.

13.14.2. Application : The number of coats to be applied shall be as in the description of item. The second or additional coats shall be applied when the previous coat has dried. 13.14.3. The specifications described in shall hold good so far as they are applicable. 13.15. PAINTING CAST IRON RAIN WATER, SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPES AND FITTINGS : 13.15.1. The primer shall be of approved brand and manufacture as specified in the item.

104

Paint shall be anti-corrosive bitumastic paint, aluminum paint or other type of paint as specified In the description of the item.

13.15.2. Painting New Surface : 13.15.2.1. Preparation of Surface : The surface shall be prepared for priming coat painting. 13.15.2.2. Application : The number of coat of painting over the priming coat shall be as stipulated

in the description of the item. The application of paint over priming coat shall be carried out as specified.

13.15.2.3. Measurements : Measurements will be taken over the finished line of pipe including

specials etc. as per the tender items.

Specials and fittings such as holder bat clamps, plugs etc. will not be measured separately.

13.15.2.4. Rate : The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the

operations described above, including painting of all specials and fittings. 13.15.2.5. Specifications described in shall hold good as far as they are applicable. 13.16. VARNISHING : 13.16.0. Ordinary copal varnish or superior quality spray varnish shall be used. The work includes

sizing of transparent wood filler. 13.16.1. Varnish (conforming to IS:347) for the finishing and undercoats shall be of the approved

manufacturer. 13.16.2. Varnishing on New Surfaces : 13.16.2.1. Preparation of Surface : New wood work to be varnished shall have been finished

smooth with a carpenter's plane. Knots shall be cut to a slight depth. Cracks and holes shall be cleaned of dust. The knots, cracks etc. shall then be filled in with wood putty made as follows : The fillings when dry shall be rubbed down with a carpenter's file and then the entire surface shall be rubbed down perfectly smooth with medium grained and fine sand papers and wiped with dry clean cloth so that it presents uniform appearance.

13.16.2.2. Sizing or Transparent Wood Filler Coat : The surface shall then be treated with either

glue sizing or with transparent wood filler coat as stipulated in the description of item. 13.16.2.3. Application of Varnish : The number of coats to be applied shall be as stipulated in the

description of the item.

Preferably the undercoat shall be with a flatting varnish. The top coat shall be given with stipulated brand of finishing varnish.

The varnish shall be applied liberally with a full brush and spread evenly with short light strokes to avoid frothing. If the work is vertical the varnish shall be crossed and recrossed and then laid off, latter being finished on the upstrokes so that varnish, as it sets, flows down and eliminates brush marks, the above process will constitute one coat. if the surface is horizontal, varnish shall be worked in every direction, with light quick strokes and finish in one definite direction so that it will set without showing brush marks. In handling and applying varnish care should be taken to avoid forming froth or air bubbles. Brushes and containers shall be kept scrupulously clean.

105

Rubbing down and flatting the surface shall be done after each coat except the final coat with fine sand paper.

Any varnish left over in the small container shall not be poured back into the stock tin, as it will render the latter unfit for use.

Special fine haired varnishing brushes shall be used and not ordinary paint brushes. Brushes shall be well worn and perfectly clean.

13.16.2.4. Other details shall be as specified as far as they are applicable. 13.17. ACRYLICEMULSIONPAINTING: 13.17.1 Workmanship: 13.17.2. Scaffolding:

Whereverscaffoldingisnecessary,itshallbeerectedondoublesupportstiestogetherbyhorizontalpieces, overwhichscaffolding plankswillbefixedNoballies,bamboosorplanksshallrestonortouchthesurface whichisbeingwhitewashedWhereladdersareused,piecesofoldgunny bagsshallbetiedontheirtopsto avoiddamageor scratchestowalls.

13.17.3 Preparationof surface:

Preparationofsurfaceshallingeneralbeinaccordancewith,exceptthatanyunevenessshallbemadegood byapplyingputty(whitecementbased)mixedwith water includinguptheundulationandthensand papering the sameafteritisdry.

13.17.4 Preparationofpaint

Thepaintmix,shallbecontinuously stirredwhileapplyingformaintaining uniformconsistency. Numberof coatsshallbeasperitemdescription. Thepaintingshallbelaidevenlyandsmoothly bymeans ofcrossing andlayingoff.Thecrossingandlayingoffconsistsofcoveringthearea withpaint,brushingthe surfaceard atfirst,thenbrushingalternatively inoppositedirection2/3timesandthenfinallybrushinglightlyina direction atrightanglestothesame.Inthisprocess,nobrushmarks,nohairmarksnoclogging ofpaint puddlesshallbepermitted.The fullprocessofcrossingandlayingoffwithconstituteonecoat. The paint shall be applied by means of brush or roller. Beforestarting paintingwithplastic emulsion paint,thepreparedsurfaceshallbereactedwithtwocoatsof primerconsistingofcementprimerwhitingand plasticemulsion paintshallstartonlyafterthe precedingcoat hasbecomesufficientlyhard toresist brushmarking.Subsequentcoatsof plastic emulsionpaintshallalsobe startedaftertheprecedingcoatisdriedbyevaporationofwatercontent.

Thesurfaceoffinishingshallpresentaflat,velvetssmoothfinish,evenanduniform shadewithoutpatches, marks,paintdropsetc.

13.17.5 Precautions:

i. Brushesshall be quickly washed in water immediatelyafter use and kept immersedin water duringbreakperiodstopreventthepaintfromhardeningonthebrush.Oldbrushes,ifusedshall becompletelydriedofturpentine/oilpaintsbywashinginwarmsoap water.

ii. No oil base puttied shall be used in filling cracks / holes. iii. Washing of painted surface shall not be done within 3-4 weeks of application.

106

13.17.6 Protectivemeasures

Surfaceofdistemperingoverexistingdistemperedsurface,theexistingdistemperingshallbescrappedby steelscrapersleavinga cleansurface.

Allnailsshallberemoved.Pittinginplastershallbemadegoodwithplasterofparismixedwithdry distemperofcolourto beused.The surfacethenshallberubbeddownagainwithafinegrade sand paper and madesmooth.Acoatofdistemper shallbeappliedoverthepatches. Thesurface shallbeallowedto drythoroughlybeforetheregularcoatofdistemperisallowed.

Thesurfaceaffectedbymoss, fungus,algaeefflorescenceshallbetreatedinaccordancewithIS2395.

14. MISCELLANEOUS BUILDING WORKS : 14.1. CEMENT CONCRETE PLINTH PROTECTION : 14.1.0. Plinth protection shall be provided, as specified, to required width. It comprises of 5 cm.

thick cement concrete 1:3:6 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) over 7.5. cm bed of dry brick aggregate 40 mm nominal size, grouted with fine sand. The outer edge shall be lined with 2nd class bricks laid on edge and joints laid in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 fine sand). Plinth protection shall be laid with a minimum outward slope of 1 in 50.

14.1.1. Preparing Ground : The ground, where plinth protection is to be laid shall first be

prepared to the required slope. The high portions of ground shall be excavated, hollows and depressions filled upto the required level with the excavated earth and watered and rammed to give uniform outward slope. Preparation of any area involving cutting and filling upto a depth of 15 cm. shall not be paid for separately. Cutting and filling beyond 15 cm shall be paid for separately. The bed shall be watered adequately and rammed with iron rammers. Surplus earth, if any, obtained shall be disposed of within a lead of 50 metres or as directed by the Engineer.

14.1.2. Brick Edging : The edging shall be of bricks of class specified in the item. The

specifications of bricks shall be as described in Sub-Head Brick Work. Trenches of required depth and width shall first be made along the edge of the plinth protection to receive the bricks for edging. The bed of trenches shall be compacted to a firm and even surface. The bricks shall be laid true to line in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 fine sand ) with length parallel and abutting the plinth protection. The top face of the brick edging shall be in one level, to conform to the finished level of the plinth protection adjacent to the edging. After the concreting is done, no portion of the brick edging shall protect above the adjacent concrete surface. Cement mortar shall conform to the specifications described in Sub-Head Cement Mortar.

14.1.3. Sub-Grade : The sub-grade shall consist of a bed of dry brick aggregate of 40 mm

nominal size. Brick aggregate shall be spread evenly over the prepared surface to 7.5 cm depth (unconsolidated) and given a minimum outward slope of 1 in 50. The aggregate shall be carefully laid and packed, bigger size being placed at the bottom. The brick aggregate shall be consolidated dry with heavy iron rammers. After the brick aggregate has been consolidated the surface shall be checked with a straight edge and any depressions etc. filled up and consolidated. The aggregate shall then be grouted evenly with fine sand @ 0.06 cubic metres/10 sq. metre area, adequately watered to ensure filling of the voids by sand and again rammed with heavy iron rammers. The finished surface shall give uniform appearance.

107

14.1.4. Cement Concrete Topping : After the sub-grade has been compacted and prepared as in 9.1.3., 5 cm thick cement concrete 1:3:6 ( 1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size as specified in the item) shall be laid in one operation as described in except that the top shall not be finished with neat cement slurry but shall be finished with only wooden floats. The concrete surface shall not be finished with mortar. The length of each panel shall not be more than 5m. The finished surface shall have a minimum outward slope of 1 in 50.

14.1.5. Curing : Specification shall be as described in Sub-Head Concrete. 14.1.6. Measurement : The length and breadth of cement concrete topping shall be measured

correct to a cm. and the area calculated in square metre correct to two places of decimal. No deduction shall be made nor anything extra paid for any openings for pipes etc. upto 0.1 sqm. Brick edging shall be measured in running metre correct to a cm and paid for separately.

14.1.7. Rate : The rate shall include cost of materials and labour described in all the above

operations except for brick edging which will be paid for separately. 15. PRE CONSTRUCTION ANTI-TERMINATE TREATMENT : 15.0. The work should be executed through a specialized firm approved by the representative

of Employer/Consultant. Approved of such firm shall be obtained from the representative of Employer/Consultant before commencement of work.

15.1. Guarantee : 10 (ten) years guarantee should be submitted on non-judicial stamp paper

as per the proforma attached. The guarantee shall be signed by the main contractor and the specialized who have executed the work. In the unlikely even of any treatment becoming necessary subsequently during the guarantee period, required inspection and treatment shall be carried out free of cost.

15.3. Instructions to Contractor for quoting rates : Tenderer should include in his rates

given in Schedule of Quantities in sq.m. area all the stages of treatment as mentioned above. Where the rates of application of the chemical, has not been specified clearly the rates should be governed so that during the guarantee period no trouble may arise. Payment will be made on the plinth area measurement and the rate for the same should include all the stages of work as mentioned above and no extra on this account will be entertained. The work should be executed in stages according to the progress and in co-ordination with the general building and other contractors. Idle labour, if any, for the same shall not be entertained.

108

STONE WORKS. a) General : 1. Quality :

Some required for masonry work shall be obtained only from quarries approved of in writing by the Executive Engineer. It shall be of the best quality available in the quarries and shall be of uniform colour and texture, hard, durable, tough and able to withstand severe weather conditions. It shall be free cracks, flaws and holes, veins, weathering or other defect. It shall be quarried in such a way as to be most suitable for the particular type of word for which it is required.

2. Method of laying stone: a) Stratified stone shall be laid on their natural beds i.e. with the lines of stratification at right angles

to the line of pressure. b) All stone shall be built in courses perpendicular to the pressure which the masonry will bear. In

battered walls the beds of stones and the plane of courses are to be at right angles to the batter and not horizontal.

c) Where the structure is composed of courses of stones of different depths the courses of larger

stones are to be at bottom and the depth of courses gradually decreased towards the top of the structure.

3. Bond :

The face stones shall be laid header and stretcher alternately (unless otherwise ordered in writing by the Executive Engineer), the headers being arranged so as to come as early as possible in the middle third of the stretchers above and below. At least two clear courses must intervene between any two vertical lines of joints and this bond shall be maintained throughout the entire mass of the masonry.

4. Size of stone : The stone shall be laid in regular courses not less than 300mm in height and all the courses shall be of the same height unless otherwise specified. No stone shall be less in breadth than in height or less than twice its height. No tapered stones or hollow backed ones will be permitted on the work and all stones shall have approximately the same surface area at the back as at the front. The backs of stone may however be left roughly hammer dressed.

5. Headers : In structure 750mm thick and under the headers shall run right through the structure. In deeper structures a line of headers from back to front will be used. No head may be less in length than the depth of the course 450mm.

6. Dressing Stone : All stone must be dressed, hammered or otherwise prepared before being placed in position and no dressing will be permitted after the stones are in position.

7. Watering during construction and while curing :

Great care must be taken to keep masonry in progress of construction constantly damp.When work is left off for the day, troughs shall be formed, by means of fillets of mortar 50mm high all round the unfinished work and shall be kept fillets with water. Vertical orinclined surfaces must be frequently watered from a rose headed can. Water shall not bedashed with violence against new work as this washes out the mortar. Should the work be delayed owing to holidays, Sundays or for any other reason, the contractor must makeadequate arrangements for keeping the work wet, and shall continue to do so for at leastten days or for such longer time as the Executive Engineer may direct, after the stonework has been completed.

109

8. Bed plates etc. : Bed plates are to be laid in all cases under the ends of beams, girders, roof trusses etc. In all important cases cut stones or concrete blocks, plain or reinforced as specified will be used and care must be taken than no lime mortar is in contact with steel or iron work. No additional rates will be paid for such cut stones or concrete blocks.

9. Beam, Joints etc. be set in recesses : The ends of all beams, girders, roof trusses etc. shall be situated in recesses having a clear space of 37mm round the sides and ends. To compensate for the labour in cutting no deduction will be made in the measurements for masonry on account of the recesses.

10. Fixture to be built in as work proceeds : All necessary fixtures shall be built in as the work proceeds and in the case of metal fixtures these shall be embedded in cement mortar and never in lime mortar. Wooden blocks will also be built in as specified, shown in the planar as ordered by the Executive Engineer from time to time.

11. Size of joints : All joints are to be kept as thin as the particular type of masonry permits and no joint should exceed 6mm in thickness in the cheaper classes of masonry or 3mm in better class of work such as ashlars. No dressing of the stone so as to give a thin joint on the face only will be permitted.

12. Dowels in coping etc.: Where so specified or as instructed by the Executive Engineer from time to time copings be dowelled or cramped. Course of pillars, skew-backs etc. Will be dowelled or cramped to the course below. Dowels and cramps will be on the hardest stone procurable or of cropper set in pure lime or cement as ordered. Iron or steel cramps are strictly prohibited.

(b RANDOM RUBBLE : 1. Laying and fitting :

Every stone shall be laid so as to form neat and close joints and if necessary the faces must be hammer or chisel dressed to ensure close joint work. Joints must not exceed 9mm in thickness. Face stones shall be laid without any pins, spills or wedges on the face.

2. Size of stones :

No stones shall have a greater height than the face width nor shall it have a greater height than the length tailing into the structure. Stones shall be roughly chisel dressed uniform in colour and with the exception of the through stones, of approximately equal size. All stones shall be carefully laid and solidly bedded in mortar and shall tail back and bond thoroughly into the interior.

3. Through stones : One header or through stone at least shall be inserted in every square yard of face surface and all such stones shall be marked on the face for purpose of identification. In structures of 600mm or less in depth through stones shall run from the face to the back and in structures of greater depth a line of header from face to back shall be laid each stone overlapping the adjacent one by at least 150mm.

4. Bond :

All stones shall be laid to break join as much as possible and no long line of vertical of slightly staggered joint will be permitted.

110

5. Quoins : Quoins will be provided and laid as specified for such work under „Coursed Rubble‟.

(c) UNCOURSED RUBBLE. 1. Dressing.

Stones will be used on the work as received from the quarry after rough hammer shaping. 2. Bond :

The stone shall be carefully laid so as to break joint as much as possible and shall be solidly bedded in mortar with close joints. No joints shall exceed half an inch in thickness. Spells and chips shall be wedged into the work where necessary or possible so as to avoid thick beds or joints or mortar. No hollow spaces or dry pickets will be permitted in the work, every stone being set flush in the mortar, smaller stones used in the filling being carefully selected so as to fit roughly the space between large ones and where one stone an be provided for so fillings, it will not be permitted to use several small ones.

3. Face stone :

Face stones shall be laid without pinnings on the face and as far as possible without any pinnings. They shall be selected from their greater size, uniform colour and suitability for bedding. They shall be laid so as to tail back and bond well into the structure and shall not be greater height than face, bread the or depth of tailing into the structure and shall not be of greater height than face, bread the or depth of tailing into the structure, Fifty percent of the stones shall be of at least 0.0283 cubic metre bulk and at least twenty five percent shall be header bonding into the structure not less than 375mm.

4. Through stones : At least one through stone shall be used on each 0.836 sq.metre of face of the structure and each shall have a face area of not less than 0.047 sq.metre. They shall have a length of at least 600mm for all the work of 600mm greater depth and not less than the width of the structure if the latter is under 600mm. For work over 600mm in width a line of headers shall be used in place of through stones and shall run from front to back of the structure each stone overlapping the adjacent one by at least 150mm.

111

B. ROAD. 1. GENERAL

The specifications for road work shall be taken in the following order of precedence : i) Description of items in the Bill of Quantities. ii) Detail specifications given in this contract. iii) CPWD/IRC Specifications. iv) Sound Engineering Practice.

2. MATERIALS : 2.1 Granular Sub-Base.

The material to be used for the work shall be natural sand, moorum, gravel, crushed stone or combination thereof depending upon the grading required. Materials like crushed slag, crushed concrete, brick metal and kankar may be allowed only with the specific approval of the Engineer. The material shall be free from organic or other deleterious constituents and conform to one of the three grading given inTable-400-1 of MoRT&H

While the gradings in Table-400-1 of MoRT&H are in respect of close-graded granular sub-base materials, one each for maximum particle size of 75mm, 53mm and 26.5mm, the corresponding gradings for the coarse-graded materials for each of the three maximum particle sizes are given at Table-400-2 of MoRT&H.

2.2 Aggregate - Fine : These shall be clean, hard, durable, uncoated, dry and free from injurious,

soft or flaky pieces and organic or deleterious substance.

The sum of the percentages of all deleterious material shall not exceed 5%. Tests for estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities shall be done as per IS:2386 (Pt. II).

2.3 Binding Material : The quantity of binding material used in each layer shall be sufficient to fill up the finer voids between broken stone and screening while rolling. If earth cut from the sub-grade formation is of moorum type, the same shall be used as Binding material. The type and quantity of the binding material shall be as per the direction of the Engineer to produce dense mass of road crust and to leave a thin film of binding material over the WBM after we rolling.

2.4 Screenings : Screening to fill voids in the coarse aggregate shall generally consist of the same

material as the coarse aggregate.

If screenings are from broken stone/crushed stone type as far as possible shall conform to the approved gradings.

2.5 Kerb Stone : Kerb stone of precast cement concrete 1: 1.5 :3 (1 cement : 1.5 coarse sand : 3 stone aggregate 20 mm normal size) setting in position with cement mortar 1:1.5 (1 cement : 1.5 coarse sand) complete as detailed drawing.

3. EARTH WORK IN ROAD CONSTRUCTION : 3.1. Earth work shall be done for the following categories.

a) Earth work in cutting upto sub-grade level. b) Earth work in fillings in embankments.

3.2. Earth work in Cutting :

Where the formation level of the road is lower than the ground level, cutting shall be done, up to the formation level. The formation shall be provided with adequate camber/cross slope, side drains as shown in the drawings and as directed by the Engineer.

Surplus earth from cutting shall be utilised for filling in the embankments if found suitable and not having deleterious or organic material more than 5%. Earth obtained from cutting not used for filling shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer.

112

3.3. Measurements : Measurements for cutting shall be taken from the cut section of the

road. For ascertaining depth, the level of the existing earth shall be taken at suitable internal across the section before start of excavation; so as to arrive at a accurate depth of cutting. The volume of earth shall be calculated by average method or any standard method as directed by the Engineer. No deduction shall be made for camber or cross slope provided on the sub-grade. Excess excavation done by and the profile of road section and without the approval of Engineer shall not be measured.

3.4 Rates :The rate shall be inclusive of labour for cutting, transporting filling in embankments or elsewhere including near any tools and tackles, rolling etc. complete for the item of work within the lead and lift as mentioned in the tender items.

4. EARTH WORK IN FILLING IN EMBANKMENTS :

4.1. Preparation of the Existing Ground Surface : The existing ground surface and shall be much

clean and level by remaining grass, roots free stumps and such deleterious materials and loose top soil to a depth of 15 to 25 cm. as directed by the Engineer.

4.2. Source of Supply :

The material used in embankment shall be obtained either from cutting high ground or from borrow pits as directed by the Engineer. Where it becomes necessary to borrow filling materials from temporarily acquired cultivable lands, the depth of borrow pits shall not exceed 45 cm. The top soil to a depth of 15 cm. shall be stripped and stacked aside. Thereafter soil shall be dug out to a further depth not exceeding 30 cm. and used in forming the embankment. The top soil shall then be spread back on the land.

4.3. Workmanship : 4.3.1. Density Measurement and Acceptance Criteria

When density measurements reveal any soft areas in the embankment, the Engineer shall direct that these be compacted further. It in spite of that the specified compaction is not achieved the material in the soft areas shall be removed and replaced by approved materials and compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

4.3.2 Earth Filling and Compactions : Before commencement of the filling the top line and the side slope, i.e. complete sectional profile shall be demarcated by Bamboo begs and strings at suitable intervals road, junctions as shown by the Engineer.

4.3.3.. Embankment material shall be laid in 20 cm. layers which shall be continuous and parallel to the finished grade..

4.3.4. Dressing :The embankment shall be dressed neatly in accordance with the designed section and grade after it has been completed and thoroughly consolidated wooden or steel template shall be used to provide road camber and cross slope accurately. The top and slopes shall be protected from any damage, and maintained till the work is completed and handed over to the Engineer.

4.4. Measurements : The quantity of earth work shall be measured according to the earth

profile of the road cross section at suitable intervals as directed by the Engineer. For compacted earth with power roller of 6.5 to 10 ton capacity, the quantity of earth work computed shall not be reduced.

113

4.5. Rates :The rate shall be inclusive of labour for cutting, transporting filling in embankments or elsewhere including near any tools and tackles, rolling etc. complete for the item of work within the lead and lift as mentioned in the tender items.

5. SUB-GRADE : Preparation and Consolidation. 5.1 Preparation of Sub-Grade : The surface of the formation for a width of sub-base which shall be

15 cm. more on either side of base course, shall first be cut to a depth to the combined depth of sub-base and surface courses below the proposed finished level (due allowance being made for consolidation). It shall then be cleaned of all foreign substances. Any rule or soft yielding patches that appear due to improper drainage conditions, traffic hauling or from any other cause, shall be corrected and the sub-grade dressed off parallel to the finished profile.

5.2 Consolidation : The sub-grade shall be consolidated with a power road roller of 8 to

12 tonnes. The roller shall run over the sub grain till the soil is evenly and densely consolidated and behaves as an elastic mass (the roller shall pass a minimum of 5 runs on the sub-grade). All undulations in the surface that develop due to rolling shall be made good with material or quarry spoils as the cases may be and the sub-grade is rerolled.

5.3 Surface Regularity : The finished surface shall be uniform and conform to the lines,

grades and typical cross section shown in the drawings. 6. GRANULAR SUB-BASE : 6.1 Materials :The materials to be used for granular sub-base and shoulder construction shall be

natural sand gravel, or naturally occurring materials approved by the Engineer. The materials shall be free from organic or other deleterious constituents. It shall be well graded and as far as possible, be within the grading limits.

6.2. Workmanship:

6.2.1. Preparation of Sub-Grade : Immediately prior to the laying of sub-grade, the sub-grade already

finished shall be prepared by removing all vegetation and other extraneous matter lightly sprinkled with water if necessary and rolled with one pass of 8-10 tonne smooth wheeled roller.

The sub-base materials then shall be spread on the prepared sub-grade with the help of a drag spreader, motor grade or other approved means. The thickness of the loose layers shall be so regulated that the maximum thickness of the layer after consolidation does not exceed 150 mm. Water shall then be added to the loose materials by sprinkling from a hose line, truck mounted water tanker or by other approved means so as to bring the moisture content at the time of compaction within the range 1% above to 2% below the O.M.C determined in accordance with I.S. 2720 (Part-VII) while adding water due allowance shall be made for evaporation losses.

After water has been added the materials shall be processed by mechanical or other approved means if so directed by the Engineer-in-Charge until the layer is uniformly wet. Immediately thereafter, rolling shall be started with 8-10 tonne smooth wheeled roller or other approved plant Rolling shall commence at the edges and progress to wards the centre longitudinally except that on super elevation portion it shall progress from the lower to the upper edges paralleled to the centre line of the pavement. Each pass or roller shall uniformly overlap not less than one third of the track made in the preceding pass. During rolling the grade and camber shall be checked and any high spots or depressions which become apparent, corrected by removing or adding fresh materials.

114

6.3. Measurements : The length and breadth shall be taken to the nearest centimeter.

The depth of consolidated layer shall be computed to nearest half centimeter by taking average of depths at the centre and at 30 cm. from the left and right edges at cross section taken at 100 metre interval or less as decided by the Engineer by making small pits. The consolidated cubical contents calculated in cubic metres correct to two places of decimal.

6.4 Rate : The rate shall include all the materials (supplying and stacking, labour, tools and plants) involved in constructing sub-grade, sub-base and base complete as per satisfaction of the Engineer.

7 FACTORY MADE CEMENT CONCRETE INTERLOCKING PAVER BLOCK. 7.1 Base :

Interlocking paver block to be fixed on the bed 50mm or specified otherwise thick of coarse sand of approved specification and filling the joints with the sand of approved type and quality or as specified and as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

7.2. Interlocking Paver Block :

Factory made precast paver block of M-30 or otherwise specified grade to be used. Paver blocks to be of approved brand and manufacturer and of approved quality. strength as prescribed by manufacturer and as per direction of Engineer-in-Charge for the grade specified to be tested as per method mentioned in specification of subhead cement concrete of APWD/CPWD Specification.

7.3. Measurement & Rates. Area provided with paver block to be measured in sq.m. Correct upto two places of

decimal. The rate include the co

115

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SITE DEVELOPMENT WITH EARTH FILLING WORK.

1. SITE CLEARANCE:

Before the earth work is started, the area coming under cutting and filling shall be cleared of shrubs, rank vegetation, grass, brushwood, trees and saplings of girth upto 30 cm. Measured at a height of one metre above ground level and rubbish removed area outside the periphery of the under clearance. The roots of trees and saplings shall be removed to a depth of 60 cm. below ground level or 30 cm. below formation level or 15 cm. below sub-grade level, whichever is lower, and the holes or hollows filled up with the earth, rammed and leveled.

The trees of girth above 30 cm. Measured at a height of one metre above ground shall be cut only after permission of the Engineer is obtained in writing. The roots of trees shall also be removed as specified .

Existing Structures and services such as old buildings, culverts, fencing, water supply pipe lines, sewers, power cable, communication cable, drainage pipe etc. within or adjacent to the area if required to be diverted/removed, shall be diverted/dismantled as per directions of the Engineer and payment for such diversion/dismantling works shall be made separately.

In case of Archaeological monuments within or adjacent to the area, the contractor shall

provide necessary fencing alround such monuments as per the directions of the Engineer and protect the same properly during execution of works. Payment for providing fencing shall be made separately.

2. SETTING OUT AND MAKING PROFILES :

A masonry pillar to serve as a bench mark will be erected at a suitable point in the area, which is visible from the largest area. This bench mark shall be constructed and connected with the standard bench mark as approved by the Engineer. Necessary profiles with strings stretched on pegs, bamboos or `burjis‟ shall be made to indicate the correct formation levels before the work is started. The contractor shall supply labour and material for constructing bench mark, setting out and making profiles and connecting bench mark with the standard bench mark at his own cost. The pegs, bamboos or `Burjis‟ and the bench mark shall be maintained by the contractor at his own cost during the excavation to check the profiles.

The ground levels shall be taken at 3 to 15 metres intervals (as directed by the Engineer) in

uniformly sloping ground and at closer intervals where local mounds, pits or undulations are met with. The ground levels shall be recorded in field books and plotted on plans. The plans shall be drawn to a scale of 5 metres to one cm. or any other suitable scale decided by the Engineer. North direction line and position of bench mark shall invariably be shown on the plans. These plans shall be signed by the contractor and the Engineer or their authorized representatives before the earth work is started. The labour required for taking levels shall be supplied by the contractor at his own cost.

3. FILLING :

The earth used for filling shall be free from all roots, grass, shrubs, rank vegetation, brush wood , trees, saplings and rubbish.

Filling with excavated earth shall be done in regular horizontal layers each not exceeding 20

cm. in depth. All lumps and clods exceeding 8 cm. in any direction shall be broken. Each layer shall be watered and consolidated with steel rammer or ½ tonne roller. Where specified , every third and topmost layer shall also be consoli-dated with power roller of minimum 8 tonnes. The top and sides of the filling shall be neatly dressed. The contractor shall make good all substance and shrinkage in each fillinfgs, embankments, traverses etc. during execution and till the completion of work unless otherwise specified.

116

4. MEASUREMENT :

The length and breadth of excavation or filling shall be measured with a steel tape correct to the nearest cm. The depth of cutting or height of filling shall be measured, correct to 5mm. by recording levels before the start of the work and after the completion of the work. The cubical contents shall be worked out to the nearest two places of decimal in cubic metres.

In case the ground is fairly uniform and where the site is not required to be leveled, the Engineer may permit the measurements of depth of cutting or height of filling with steel tape, correct to the nearest cm. In case of borrow pits, diagonal ridges, cross ridges or deadmen, the position of which shall be fixed by the Engineer, shall be left by the contractor to permit accurate measurements being taken with steel tape on the completion of the work. Deduction of such ridges and dead men shall be made from the measurements unless the same are required to be removed later on and the earth so removed is utilized in the work. In the later case nothing extra will be paid for their removal as subsequent operation.

5. RATES : Rates for earthwork shall include the following :

a) Excavation and depositing excavated material as specified. b) Handing of antiquities and useful materials as specified. c) Protection as specified. d) Site Clearance as specified. e) Setting out and making profiles as specified. f) Forming (or leaving) dead men or `Tell Tales‟ in borrow pits and their removal after

excavations. g) Lead and lift as instructed/directed by Engineer.

117

SPECIFICATION SANITARY FIXTURES 1. General : 1.1. All sanitary fittings and fixtures shall be installed in a neat workman like manner true to levels

and heights in correct position as shown in the drawing and indicated in the tender items. 1.2. Care shall be taken not to damage other building items. Damage if occurred shall be made

good by the contractor at his cost to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. 2. Indian W.C. 2.1. Unless otherwise specified all Indian W.C. Pan shall be Orissa type provided with C.I. P or S

trap as shown in the drawing or as indicated in the tender items. 2.2. The flushing CISTERN shall be of capacity and type as per the tender items and located as

shown in the drawings. 2.3. W.C. and the trap shall be fixed with cement concrete and the flush pipe shall be rubber

jointed with the W.C. 3. European W.C./Anglo Indian Dual Purpose Universal Pan. 3.1. European W.C. of approved make and quality shall be with low level HDPE CISTERN of

capacity as described in the tender items, with P or S trap as required. 3.2. The W.C. shall be fixed such that the seat remains always in vertical position without falling

over the W.C. and connected to soil pipe with proper alignment and level with cement concrete water light joints.

4. Wash Basin 4.1. Wash Basin shall be white glazed vitreous china of approved type and shape as per size

given in the tender items/drawings. 4.2. Wash Basin shall be fixed to walls securely with CI or other approved type of brackets,

provided with overflow plug and chain as indicated in the tender items. 4.3. Unless otherwise mentioned in the drawings the basins shall be fixed with level and plumb at

a height of about 79 cm. at rim level as finally approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. 5. Sinks 5.1. Sinks shall be of type, make, size and shape with or without drawing board as mentioned in

the tender items, and shall be fixed at appropriate location and height given in the drawing after finally approved by the Engineer.

5.2. Each sink shall be fixed over C.I. Brackets or supporting brick masonry walls, and fitted with

CP waste, chain and plug having water tight joints, as directed by the Engineer. 6.0. Mirrors 6.1. Mirrors shall be 5.5 m. thick of approved quality and make. Size shall be as shown in the

drawing or as given in the tender items. 6.2. Mirrors shall be fixed with 6mm thick Asbestos Cement backing and chromium plated

screws on walls in places as directed by the Engineer. 7. Shower 7.1. Bath Room Shower shall be approved type as indicated in the tender specification. Shower

shall be fitted with G.I. pipe fittings as shown in the drawings and directed by the Engineer. 8. Accessories 8.1. Other accessories for bathroom fittings shallbe as indicated in the tender items or as

approved by the Engineer.

118

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING AND SANITARY WORKS I. PLUMBING WORK: SPECIAL CONDITIONS. 1. Scope. 1.1. The Plumbing works include complete installation of water supply both internal and external

upto service mains, sewerage system from user points, upto the 1st manhole /septic tank inside the compound, vent. pipes etc. inclusive of all materials, labour and tools and appliances, transportation etc. complete as directed.

2. Extension of works 2.1. Work shall be executed as per the tender specifications detailed plumbing drawings, items

given in the schedule of quantities as approved. 2.2. The Plumbing works shall be carried out keeping complete co-ordination with the other

agencies working in the building. 2.3. All ambiguities, omissions etc. shall be cleared from the Engineer before start of work. 2.4 The contractor shall be issued two sets of drawing one of which shall always be kept as

reference. 2.5. Notwithstanding anything mentioned any where, the Plumbing works shall be carried out as

a whole to make the services available for use without any defects leakage, stoppage etc. warranty cards given by the manufacturer shall be handed over to the Engineer.

3. Materials 3.1. Only I.S.I. Marked materials conforming with the tender specification shall be used. If

however ISI marked materials are not available the best quality material shall be used. 3.2. All materials inclusive of ISI Marked materials shall be got approved from the Engineer by

submitting samples before execution of works. Samples of specials and fittings shall be kept as exhibits at the premises of work for ready reference.

3.3. Contractor shall submit manufacturers tests certificate if required, by the Engineer, tests

shall be carried out as per relevant IS Specifications. 3.4. Engineer may if required carry out tests of supplied materials for which contractor shall assist

the owner as deem necessary. 4. Testing 4.1. The installed plumbing works for water supply sewerage and drainage shall be tested

against leakage, blockage, obstructions fittings etc. as per IS provisions or standard Engineering Practice before acceptance of work. The test shall be carried out without any extra cost.

119

5. Rates 5.1. Rates quoted must be for complete items inclusive of all Materials, Labour, Transportation,

Tools and Plants, all taxes levied at the time of tendering, all supporting materials and works, probable cost of testing etc. complete to do all the item of works to put the system in working condition.

5.2. Rates quoted shall be for all heights, levels, depths, positions etc. as mentioned in the

drawings and as required by the Engineer. 6. Order of Precedence In case of any ambiguity the following order of precedence will prevail. a) Item of work, specification, special conditions, drawings given in the tender

documents. b) I.S. Code/Specification. c) CPWD Specification d) Sound Engineering Practice.

120

WATER SUPPLY 1. General. 1.1. The work shall be done to completely install the water supply system as given in the

drawings, tender specification and schedule of quantities inclusive all material, labour, equipments consumables etc. complete including connection to water supply mains, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

1.2. Pipes and fittings shall be laid truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as necessary in a neat

workmanship like manner. 2. Materials. 2.1. All pipes shall be galvanized steel tubes conforming to IS 1239. Unless otherwise specified

all pipes shall be medium grade. Fittings shall be as per IS 1879 (Part-I to X), having manufacturers trade work/ISI marked on them.

2.2. All underground pipes shall be laid in trenches of width as minimum needed to work

conveniently having a minimum cover of 60 cm. 2.3. At other places overground, the pipes shall be fixed with clamps fixed to walls tightly to

ensure the alignment and rigidity of the pipe work. 3. Painting. 3.1. All pipes above ground shall be painted with two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved

shade over one coat of primer. The underground pipes shall be painted with two coats of bitumastic paint as mentioned in the tendered items.

4. Testing 4.1. The entire installation shall be tested after connection to the over head tank/main supply

system against leakage damage etc. Defects if any shall be rectified by the contractor at his cost.

4.2. Defective valves shall be replaced by the new good quality ones and tested without

additional cost. Rejected valve shall be taken away by the contractor. 5. Measurements 5.1. In pipe shall be measured in metres inclusive of tees, bends, sockets unions etc. exclusive

of valves, stop locks and taps etc. Other works viz. E/W, C.C. painting etc. shall be paid separately.

5.2. Rates shall be inclusive of cost of material, labours, transport, taxes etc. complete as given

in the tender items.

121

MANDATORYTESTS

1. Themandatorytestsshallbecarriedoutwhenthequantityofmaterialsto

incorporateinthe workexceedstheminimumquantityspecified.

2. Optionaltestsspecifiedoranyothertests,shallbecarriedoutincaseofspecializedworksor

importantstructures asperdirectionoftheArchitect/

Consultant..

3. Testingcharges,includingincidentalchargesandcostofsamplefortesting

shallbebornebythe contractorforallmandatorytests.

4. Testing charges for optional tests shall be reimbursed by the Department.

However, the incidentalchargesandcostofsamplefortestingshallbeborn by

thecontractor.

5. In case of non-IS materials, it shall be the responsibilityof the contractor

to establishthe conformity of materialwith relevant IS specification by

carrying outnecessarytests. Testing chargesincludingincidentalcharge

andcostofsamplefortestingshallbebornebythecontractor forsuchtests.

THEMANDATORYTESTSSHALLBEASFOLLOWS:

Material

Test

Field/

laboratory

test

Testprocedure

Minimumquantity

ofmaterial/Work

for carryingout

thetest

Frequencyoftesting

Reinforcedcementconcretework

Water for

construction

purposes

Ph value Limits of

Acidity Limits of

Alkality Percentage

of solidsChlorides

Suspended matter

Sulphates Inorganic

solids Organic

solids

Lab IS 3025 Waterfromeach

source

Beforecommencement of

work &thereafter:

Mandatory-Oncein one

year fromeachsource;

Optional:oncein3months

fromeachsource;

Municipalsupply- optional.

Reinforced

cement

concrete

b)slumptest Field IS:1199 a) 20

cu.m.forslabs,

beams and

connected columns.

b) 5 Cu.m in

caseofcolumns

a) 20 cu.m. Partthere of

or morefrequently

asrequired by

theEIC/Consultant

b)Every5Cu.m.

c)cubetest Lab IS:516 a)20 cu.m.In

slab,beams,&co

nnected

columns.

b) 5 cum in

columns

a)every20cumofaday's

concreting

.(Ref. asper

frequency

ofsampling).

b)Every5cum.

Ready

mixed

cement

concrete

(IS-4926

)

Cubetest Lab IS-516 and as

per para 6.3.2 of

IS-4926-2003

50cum Oneforevery50cumof

productionorevery

50batches,

whicheveristhegreater

frequency

Note:forallothersmallitemsandwhereRCCdoneinadayislessthan5cum,testmaybecarried outasrequiredby Architect/Consultant.

EIC/Consultant

122

Material

Test

Field

/ laboratory

test

Test

procedure

Minimum

quantity of material / Work for carrying out

the test

Frequency of testing

Mortars:

Lime

Chemical&

physical properties

oflime

Laboratory IS;6932(part 1

to x)

5M.T. 10M.T.orpartthereofas

decidedby the

EIC/Consultant

Sand BulkingofSand Field 20CU.M. Every 20 cu.m or part

there of or more

frequently as decided by

EIC/Consultant

Siltcontent Field IS:383 20CU.M. Every 20 cu.m or part

there of or more

frequently as decided by

EIC/Consultant

Particle size and

distribution

Fieldor

Laboratoryas

decidedby

the

EIC/Consultant

IS:383 40CU.M. Every 40 cu.m. offine

aggregate / sand

required in RCC. Work

only

OrganicImpurities Field ..DO. 20CU.M. Every 20 cu.m. or part

thereof or more

frequently as decided by

theEIC/Consultant

Chloride&sulphate

contenttests

Optional Onceinthreemonths.

Cement Testrequirement Fineness

(m2/kg)

IS 4031

(Part-II)

Eachfreshlot Every 50 MT or part

thereof

Normal

consistency

IS 4031

(Part-IV)

Setting time

(minute)

a) Initial

b) Final

IS 4031

(Part-V)

Soundnessa)L

e-Chat

expansion(mm

)

b)Autoclave(%)

IS 4031(Part-

III)

Compressive

strength(Mp)

a) 72+/-1

hrb)168+/-2hr

IS 4031(Part-

VI)

123

Material

Test

Field

/ laboratory

test

Test

procedure

Minimum

quantity of material / Work for carrying out

the test

Frequency of testing

Stone

Aggregate a) Percentage

of soft ordeleterious

materials

Generalvisual

inspection/Lab

testwhere

requiredbythe

EIC/Consultant

IS2386Part

II

One test for

each source One test for eachsource

Particle size

distribution

Field /Lab - 10cu.m Every40cum.Orpart

thereofand

OnceinthreemonthsforeachsourceforcoarseandfineaggregatesrequiredinRCCworks,foraminimum

quantity-10cumforcoarseaggregate and40cumfor fineaggregate.

a) Estimation of

Organicimpurities

Field /Lab IS2386Part

II

10Cum -do-

b) SpecificGravity Field /Lab IS 2386 10Cum -do-

a) Bulk Density Field /Lab IS 2386 10Cum -do-

b) Aggregate

crushingstrength

Field /Lab IS 2386 10Cum -do-

c) Aggregate

impactvalue

Field /Lab IS 2386 10Cum -do-

Timber Moisture Field(by

moisturemeter

)

Laboratorytest

as requiredby

EIC/

Consultant

1Cu.M. Every one Cum orpart

thereof

Flush

Door

Endimmersiontest

Knifetest

Adhesiontest

Laboratory IS: 2202 (Part

1) &Part II

26shutters As per sampling and

testing as instructed by

theEIC/Consultant

Aluminium

dooror

window

fittings

Thickness of

anaodic

coating

Laboratory IS:5523 If the cost of

fittings exceedRs.

20,000/-

Rs.20,000/-

orpartthere of as

required

bytheEIC/Consultant.

Bricks Testing of bricks /

brick tiles for

dimensions

Compressive strength

Water absorption

Efflorescence

Laboratory IS 3495

PartIto

IV

No of bricks to

be selected & bricks

lot

20 : 2001 to 10000

32 : 10001 to

35000.

50 : 35001 to

50000

20 : for every

addl.

50000 or part

thereof

If < 2000, As per

decision of the

EIC/Consultant

Permissible defective

bricks in the sample

1

2

3

124

LISTOFAPPROVEDMAKES/AGENCYOFMATERIALS

(FORCIVILWORK)

Sl.No. MATERIALS APPROVEDMAKE/APPROVEDAGENCY

1. Antitermiteemulsifiableconcentrate AsperCPWD/PWDspecificationsandISImarked

2. Damp proof materials / water proofing compound

Impermo,Duraseals,Acco-proof,CICOetc., Duraseed,STP,GESilicon,Pidilite.Fosroc,Sika

3. Reinforcementsteel Tata,SAIL, Essar Steel, Jindal Steel , Shyam Steel, RINLasapproved (Primarymanufacture)

4. Structuralsteelsection Tata,SAIL, Nezone, RINLasapproved (Primarymanufacture) 5. Portlandcement Lafarge,ACC,Ultratech,Star, MAXasperI.S.455as approved

6. Whitecement JKwhite,Birlawhite

7. Aluminumglazingsection Hindalco.Indal,Jindal

8. Al.Glazingfabrication Asapprovedby Architect/Consultant

9. Anodisedaluminumhard warefittings Everite,Sigma,Opel,NU-LITE,Jyothi,Allen I.S.IMarked

10. Locks Godrej,Harrison

11. Doorclosers Dorma/Godrej

12. Floatglass Asahifloat,Modifloat,HindustanGlassCompany,

13. FloorspringforAlu.Door& Doorcloser

Dorma/Godrej

14. Wiremesh SterlingEnterprises,Trimurtyweldedmesh

15 False Ceiling Saint Gobain, Arms strong,USG Boral

16. Distemper Berger,Asianpaints,Nerolacasapproved

17. Syntheticenamelpaint J&N,Berger,Shalimar,Asianpaints,Nerolac,ICI asapproved 18. Plasticemulsionpaint Asianpaints,Berger, Nerolac,ICI,J&N,Shalimar

19. Waterproofcementpaint Snowcem,Asianpaints,Nerolac,Bergerasapproved

20. Glazedceramictiles Johnson,Somany,Kajaria, Orient

21. Unglazedceramictiles Bell,Kajaria,Somany,Johnson, Orient

22. Ceramicbordertiles3”wide Johnson,Somany,Kajaria,Orient

23. Cementconcretetiles Eurocon,Pavit,Duracrete

24. Bitumen Indianoil,Hindustanpetroleum,BharatPetroleum

25. ChemicalImpregnatedWater Proofing/BrickcobaWater ProofingAgencies

OverseasWaterProofingCo.,Hindustanwater Proofing,IndianWaterProofing,National WaterProofing,SIKA,FOSHROCKS.

26. Flushdoors Anchor,Kitply,Greenply,Moyur, Woodcraft,Alpro, I.S.I.Marked

27. Laminates Decolam,Greenlam,Formica,National ,

28. Mirror Modi,SaintGobain,Atul

29. Electronicautomaticdoor Dormaorequivalent

125

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIALS (WATER SUPPLY & SANITARY WORKS)

Sl.No. MATERIALS APPROVEDMAKE/APPROVEDAGENCY

1 Vitreous China Sanitaryware Parryware/CERA/Hindware/Jaquar make

2 Plastic seat for W.C. Pan Commander/Admiral/Parryware/Rainbow

3 Automatic Flushing Cistern Parryware Make

4 Glass Shelf Sona make

5 Towel Rail, Towel Rack, Towel Ring, Toilet Paper Holder &Bottle Trap

Jaquar make

6 Stainless Steel Sinks AMC/MetalCraft/Pioneer/ Parryware Parryware/Neelkanth.

7 C. P. Fittings ESSCO/Jaquar/Agmeco 8 C. P. Accessories Sona/Agmeco/ Ess-Ess 9 Bib Cock Essco make (Delux/Sumthing spl./Tropical)

10 Pillar Cock Agmeco (classic)

11 G.I pipe with GI fitting TATA/SAIL (Medium)

12 C.I. Soil, Waste & Vent pipes and fittings

ALC/AMC/CICCO

13 PVC SWR pipes and fittings Supreme/Prince.

14 Gunmetal Valves (Full way) ZOLOTO/SCUD/FBI/SATYAM/SANT. 15 Bib and Stop Cock (Brass) ZOLOTO/TAWI

16 Moulded Plastic Water Tanks Sintex,Ocean,Tuskar, Polycon.

17 C.I. Manhole Cover Super/Swastic/Rathi.

126

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

ELECTRICAL WORKS

127

Contents

1 WIRING DEVICES

2 WIRES AND CABLES

3 BUS DUCT

4 PANEL BOARDS

5 CIRCUIT BREAKER

6 CONDUIT SYSTEM, CABLE TRAY, CABLE LADDER

AND TRUNKING INSTALLATION

7 EARTHING SYSTEM

8 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

9 LUMINAIRES (LIGHT FITTINGS) AND LAMPS

10 11 KV DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER

11 MAINS FAILURE STANDBY GENERATING SYSTEM

(D.G. SETS)

12 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT

13 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

14 PREAMBLE TO BILL/ SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES

15 ACCEPTABLE MAKES OF MATERIALS – ELECTRICAL

128

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. WORK DESCRIPTION

A. The drawings for the lighting and power points indicate approximate positions of all lighting

fittings, switches, power outlet points, isolating switch points and the like. The actual positions of

all fittings, switches, the wiring details and cable routes shall be co-ordinated with other trades on

site and submitted for the approval of the Engineer. All time and cost required adjusting the

layout or adjusting the completed installation to Engineer satisfaction and to suit site co-

ordination is included in the Contract.

B. During the exact positioning of lighting and power points, due consideration shall be given to the

operational requirements of the installation, the selection of the most accessible routes for wiring

and the convenience of switching.

C. No additional cost will be entertained should the final positions be relocated within the same

room or not more than five (5) metres away from the original locations due to any requirement.

D. For the purpose of this Specification and related Drawings, each lighting and small power point

circuits shall in general be coded with a prefix to indicate the corresponding distribution board

number; details on the circuit way and phase shall be submitted for the approval of Engineer.

E. Certain types of electrical equipment or systems involving sudden changes, or low frequency or

of direct electric current such as fluorescent lamps, contactors, etc. shall be fitted with radio and

television interference suppression components suitable to meet the levels specified in BS 800

“Limits of Radio Interference”.

F. This section included the specification of the following :

1. Distribution boards

2. Miniature circuit breakers

3. Earth leakage circuit breakers

4. 6A Switch Socket Outlet

5. 16A Switch Socket Outlets

6. Shaver Outlets

7. Isolating Switches

8. Conduit Boxes

9. Contactors

10. Dimmers Switch

11. Time Switch

12. Cooler Control Units

13. Water Heater Switches

14. Bell Push Switches

129

1. STANDARDS

G. The complete wiring installation shall be engineered according to manufacturer data and

constructed in accordance with the latest revision of the IS and the appropriate BS/IEC

H. In the adoption of standards and requirements, the Contractor shall take the following

precedence:

1. Engineer‟s decision;

2. Local codes of practice;

3. Drawings;

4. Specification;

5. International standards and requirements.

1.2. SUBMISSION

A. All technical submissions shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the respective stages of

construction.

B. As a minimum requirement, the submission shall include the following:

1. Equipment catalogues submission with manufacturer‟s data;

2. Sample submission include all wiring accessories;

3. Shop Drawings of the lighting and power positions, circuit numbers, cable routings, switching

arrangement, mounting height, etc. The positions and mounting heights shall be coordinated

with other services. Fixing details of all wiring accessories shall also be included.

4. Drawings showing the installation details.

5. Labeling system

6. Builder‟s works requirement.

PART 2 – PRODUCT

2.1. LIGHTING POINT INSTALLATION

A. The various types of light fittings to be supplied and installed are described in the drawings and

the Schedule of Lighting Fittings on Drawing

B. Surface mounted light fitting shall terminate at a junction box having entries appropriate to the

run of conduit and shall be complete with porcelain/ PVC connector suitable for the size and

number of connections to be made at the point and the wiring required to connect the specified

fitting. Wiring to the light fittings within the false ceiling spaces shall be by means of heat resistant

(butyl or silicon rubber insulated to BS 6500) cables i.e. between the junction box and the lamp

holder/terminal blocks, in flexible conduits.

C. At every light fitting an approved type earthing terminal shall be provided for connection of the

circuit protective conductor of the final circuit.

D. Ferrous metalwork shall be of minimum thickness of 1mm. treated against corrosion by

galvanizing after welding or be lead primer or other approved process. Metalwork shall be

painted with one priming coat, one under-coat and two top coats finished stove-enamelled matt

white, unless otherwise specified.

E. Cables used for internal wiring of the lighting fittings shall be of appropriate type and size and

number. Conductor shall be of size not less than 1.5 sq.mm. single core or the equivalent. The

insulation of the cables shall be able to withstand throughout the life of the fitting the maximum

temperature to which it will be subject in normal use without deterioration which could affect the

safety of the fitting.

130

F. Cables within the lighting fittings shall be neatly bundled by nylon self locking cable ties; wiring

shall be properly routed and secured away from control gear etc. wherever possible.

G. All cable terminations within the light fittings shall be suitably shrouded to the approval of the

Engineer.

H. All lighting fittings shall be self-supporting complete with the appropriate fixing accessories such

as clips, supporting brackets, suspension sets, nuts, washers, screws etc. for the proper

installation of the fittings on different types of ceiling panels. Suspension sets shall be of

adjustable type suitable to carry the weight of the lighting fittings and unless otherwise stated or

indicated on Drawings, the suspension sets shall be generally 900 mm in length; exact lengths

required shall suit site situations.

I. All lamps complete with control gear necessary in operational condition shall be provided

together with the lighting fittings as specified.

2.2. SWITCHES

A. Lighting switches, unless otherwise specified, shall be single pole, quick make and slow-break,

silent switch action type with solid silver alloy contacts and totally enclosed switch action for flush

or surface mounting as required.

B. Lighting switches shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor service according to location, housed in

standardized purpose manufactured galvanized steel boxes completed with conduit knockouts

made up into single or multi-gang units employing a grid switch system of fully interchangeable

components at standardized fixing centres of matching switches of different types and ratings but

of identical dimensions, push buttons, neon indicator lamps, blanking units, grids, steel boxes

and plates all capable of integration into standard composite assemblies in any combination as

required.

C. Grids shall be adjustable for variation in depth of plaster and for squaring errors and of the same

type for surface or flush mounting.

D. Switches in mechanical plant rooms and electrical sub-stations and switch rooms shall be of the

metal clad type approved by the Engineer, mounted in flush or surface conduit boxes as

specified elsewhere.

E. Switches located on brick or concrete walls shall be mounted in horizontal arrangement in plaster

depth steel boxes or in galvanized steel boxes using box suspension straps and cover plates.

Countersunk screws shall be provided for fixing to the conduit boxes.

F. Switches for external use shall be of weatherproof construction with IP65 rating, unless otherwise

specified.

G. Samples of all switches, conduit boxes and plaster depth boxes shall be submitted to the

Engineer for approval prior to installation.

H. Samples shall be rated for 6 Amps (minimum light switch rating 6A), 16 Amps or 20 Amps as

determined by circuit load which for inductive lighting circuit shall be assessed at twice the steady

state connected load current, one way or two ways as indicated on the drawings and fixed

generally at a height of 1200 mm from floor level and where located in rooms the switch shall,

where possible be located on the inside of the room on the handle side of the door as close to

the door as is practicable.

I. An earthing terminal, connected to the earth continuity terminal shall be provided and connected

to the circuit protective conductor at every lighting switch positions.

J. Single pole switches shall be connected to break the phase wire of the supply; the neutral wire

shall not be routed through switch boxes.

K. Switches which are mounted in the same location shall be of multi-gang type, of the maximum

number of gangs available.

L. All switches used shall be of approved or prescribed items as required by local Authorities.

131

M. Circuit from different phase and circuit from emergency power should have separate switch plate.

2.3. ISOLATION SWITCH

A. Isolating switches shall be of the current ratings and number of poles (generally double pole for

single phase and 4-pole three phases) as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Isolating switches shall be of the totally enclosed pattern, metal-clad or polycarbonate with

positive quick-make and quick-break action.

C. Switches shall be capable of passing and also interrupting their full rated current safety and

without damage.

D. Ferrous materials shall be galvanised, switch handles shall be interlocked to prevent opening the

cover with the switch "ON".

2.4. 6 AMP SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS

A. Switch socket outlets shall be as per BS1363 single pole 6 Amp 3 round pin shuttered outlets,

one or two gang for indoor service except otherwise specified and either surface or flush

mounting according to location.

B. Switches shall be of the quick-make slow break type with silent, totally enclosed switch action

and solid silver alloy contacts. Switched socket outlets for indoor use shall be housed in suitable

galvanized steel boxes to BS 4662 with conduit knockouts. Types and finishes of socket plates

shall match those for the lighting switches.

C. Generally switch socket outlets shall be positioned 300 mm above floor level except in plant

rooms, kitchen, etc. where they shall be positioned 1400 mm above floor level or 150 mm above

counters or benches whichever is suitable.

D. Switch socket outlet in all mechanical plant rooms, electrical switch rooms shall be of the metal

clad type, with recessed or protected switch dolly, mounted in flush or surface conduit boxes as

specified elsewhere.

E. All switch socket outlets used shall be of an approved quality.

2.5. 16 AMP SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS

A. 16 Amp switch socket outlets shall be 3 pin round type to BS 546 shuttered, of a finished similar

to 6 Amp switch socket outlets and flush mounted in galvanised steel conduit boxes to BS 4662

requirements.

2.6. WEATHERPROOF ISOLATOR

A. Weatherproof enclosure shall be of the high impact, water resistant to IP65. The isolator provided

shall complete with lockable device. Isolators shall be double-pole, 4-pole as specified.

2.7. LIGHTING DIMMERS SWITCH

A. Lighting dimmer switch shall be the solid state, variable load, Thyristor controlled type suitable for

controlling fluorescent and or incandescent lighting circuits operating at 230V ± 6% 50Hz single

phase AC supply.

B. Dimmer switch shall be manufactured to eliminate TV and radio frequency interference in

compliance with IS.

C. The ratings of the dimmer units shall be suitable for lighting circuit specified on Drawing.

2.8. TIME SWITCHES

A. Time switches shall be self-contained units suitable for mains operation. All units shall have a

self-starting synchronous motor with a single-pole fuse in the motor circuit, a 3-way terminal

block and a thirty-six (36) hours spring reserve complete with an automatic solar dial.

132

B. When fitted, the solar dial shall be capable of switching ON at sunset and OFF at sunrise

throughout the year by control of a secondary calendar dial with month and day settings, and the

automatic switching time shall be adjustable.

C. Time switches shall be encased in a dust-tight metal casing have a hinged front cover with a

clear Perspex window. The casing shall be effectively earthed.

D. A manual bypass switch shall be incorporated with the time switch to facilitate maintenance of

the latter.

2.9. MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER

A. The MCB shall be suitable for manual closing and opening and automatic tripping under overload

and short circuit. The MCB shall also be trip free type.

B. Single pole/three pole versions shall be furnished as required.

C. The MCB shall be rated for 10 KA fault level.

D. The MCB shall be suitable for its housing in the lighting boards and shall be suitable for

connection at the outgoing side by tinned cable lugs and for bus-bars connection on the incoming

side.

E. The terminal of the MCBs and the open and close conditions shall be clearly and indelibly

marked.

F. The MCB shall generally conform to IS: 8828.

2.10. EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER

A. ELCB shall be 4 pole 415 volts 50Hz, 30-300mA sensitivity. These shall be of approved make.

The rating of the ELCB shall be as required. These shall be suitable for manual closing and

opening and automatic tripping under earth fault circuit of 30-300mA as specified in item of work.

B. The enclosure of the ELCB shall be moulded from high quality insulating material. The material

shall be fire retardant, anti tracking, non-hygroscopic, impact resistant and shall with stand high

temperature.

C. All parts of switching mechanism shall be non-greasing, self lubricating material so as to provide

consistent and trouble free operation.

D. Operation of ELCB shall be independent of mounting position and shall be trip free type.

2.11. LIGHTING/SMALL POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

A. Distribution boards shall be of standard make with MCBs as per approved make given.

Distribution boards shall be constructed out of steel sheet all weld enclosure with double door

IP42 protection and shall be powder coated.

B. Ample clearance between the conductors of opposite pole, between conductors and sheet steel

body shall be maintained in order to obviate any chance of short circuit. Removable conduits

entry plates shall be provided at top and bottom to facilitate drilling holes at site to suit individual

requirements.

C. Also on additional/separate adopter box of suitable length and size shall be provided to

accommodate wires and cables. No. of conduits etc. and nothing shall be payable on this

account.

D. The MCBs shall be mounted on high grade rigid insulating support and connected by electrolytic

copper bus bars.

E. Each incoming MCB isolator shall be provided with solder-less cable sockets for crimping.

F. Phase separation barriers made out of arc resistant materials shall be provided between the

phases. Bus bars shall be colour coded for phase identification.

133

G. Distribution boards shall be recessed in wall niche or if required mounted on the surface of the

wall with necessary clamp bolts etc.

H. The mounting height shall not exceed 1200mm from finished floor level. Distribution board shall

be provided with proper circuit identification name plate and danger sticker/plate as per

requirements.

I. All the distribution boards shall be provided with engraved name plates with „lighting‟, „power‟ or

„UPS‟ with DB Nos., as the case may be.

J. Each DB shall be provided with a circuit list giving details of each circuit. All the outgoing circuit

wiring shall be provided with identification ferrules giving the circuit number & phase.

K. Each distribution board shall have a separate neutral connection bar and a separate earth

connection bar mounted within the DB each having the same number of terminals as the total

number of outgoing individual circuits from the distribution board. Conduit & cable armouring

shall be bonded together & connected to the distribution board earth bar.

L. Where oversized cables are specified due to voltage drop problems, it shall be contractors

responsibility to ensure that satisfactory terminal arrangements are provided without an extra

cost.

2.12. TELEPHONE OUTLETS

A. Telephone outlets where called for shall be single or twin of the flush mounted type suitable to

receive the plug-in telephone cable lead to the approval of the Telecom. The finishes of the

telephone outlet plates at various areas shall be as specified for lighting switches.

2.13. WATER COOLER DRINKING FOUNTAIN SWITCHES

A. Water cooler switches shall be flush-mounted having double pole AC switch rated at 20 amps

and marked “water cooler”.

B. Associated connector units shall be provided next to the water cooler.

C. The switches and the connector shall be IP65 waterproof rating.

2.14. BELL PUSH SWITCHES

A. Bell push switches shall be flush-mounted having a single-pole AC switch rated at 6 amps and

marked with bell symbol.

2.15. SHAVER OUTLETS

A. Shaver outlets shall comprise a 20VA continuously rated double wound isolating transformer to

provide an earth-free AC supply at mains frequency, complete with self resetting thermal

overload device filled in the primary circuit an insulated voltage selector switch to provide either

115 or 230 volt output, one ON-OFF switch and one universal socket outlet suitable for British,

American, Continental and Australian razor plugs, all contained in a recessed sheet steel box

with insulated moulded front plate suitable for flush, mounting and suitably inscribed to give a

clear indication of the voltages available at the outlet and the service of the outlet.

2.16. COOLER CONTROL UNITS

A. Cooler Control Units shall be flush mounted having a double pole AC switch rated at 30 amps

complete with pilot indicating lamps and a self adhesive plastic identification label mounted on a

removable chassis contained within steel box finished aluminium stoved enamel provided with

conduit knockouts and earthing terminals. The cover plates shall be of the same finish as those

specified for the lighting switches.

B. Associated connector units shall be provided adjacent to the cooler units.

C. Wirings between the cooler control units and associated connector units shall be provided in

concealed conduits.

134

2.17. WATER HEATER SWITCHES

A. Water heater switches shall be flush mounted having double pole AC switch rated at 20 amps

fitted with pilot lamp and marked “water heater”. The cover plates shall be of the same finish as

those specified for the other switches. Associated connector units shall be provided next to the

water heater units.

2.18. POWER SUPPLY FOR LIGHTING AT WET CONDITION

A. Residual Current Circuit Breakers shall be provided individually for each circuits serving lighting

subject to wet condition.

135

WIRES AND CABLES Chapter 1.

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. WORK DESCRIPTION

A. The design manufacture, testing and supply of single core PVC insulated 1.1 KV grade stranded

twisted wires under this specifications shall comply with latest edition of following standards.

IS-3961: Current rating for cables.

IS-5831: PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.

IS-694: PVC insulated cables for working voltage up to and including 1100 volts.

IEC-54 (I): PVC insulated cable.

B. Copper/Aluminium stranded twisted conductor PVC insulated wires shall be used in conduit as

per item of work. Aluminium for power cables and copper for control cables shall be used.

C. The wires shall be colour coded R Y B, for phases, Black for neutral and Green for earth.

D. Progressive automatic in line indelible, legible and sequential marking of the length of cable in

meters at every one-meter shall be provided on the outer sheath of cable.

E. The design, manufacture, testing and supply of the cable under this specifications shall comply

with latest edition of following standards:

IS: 8130: Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords.

IS: 5831: HRPVC/HR PVC insulation and LSZH sheath of electric cables.

IS: 3975: Mild steel wires, strips and tapes for armouring cables.

IS: 3961: Current rating of cables.

F. The routing and the minimum rated current carrying capacity of the LV power cables shall be as

indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall consider the manufacturer data and engineering

the cable sizing to ensure it suit the conditions, viz grouping, ambient temperature etc., and for

making any necessary adjustment to the Engineer‟s approval.

G. All LV cables for normal power/control circuitries within buildings shall be copper conductor with

XLPE insulated and PVC sheathed, denoted as XLPE/PVC cable or copper conductor with PVC

insulated, denoted as PVC cable as specified.

H. All LV cables for emergency power circuitries serving emergency lightings, Building Management

System (BMS), Fire Protection System, Security Systems, emergency communication systems,

and sump pump system and fire lifts etc. with back-up from standby generator sets or UPS

systems or incoming and outgoing from the Emergency Main Switchboard shall be fire resistant

cables as required.

I. Cablings in service ducts, open trenches, direct-laid underground in soil shall be by means of

armoured cables. Non-armoured cables shall be laid in conduits, trunkings or tray/ladder for

mechanical protection.

1.2. STANDARDS

A. Complete cabling shall be manufactured and constructed in accordance with the latest revision of

the following standards :

1. IS: 694: HRPVC/XLPE insulated (heavy duty) electric

cables for working voltage up to and including

1100 volts.

2. IS:424-1475 (F-3): Power cable-flammability test.

3. IS:7098 (I): Specification for cross-linked polyethylene

insulated LSZHPVC sheathed cable for working

136

voltage up to 1.1 KV.

4. IS:1554: Specification for PVC insulated (heavy duty)

electric cables for working voltages up to and

including 1100 volts.

5. AS TMD:2863: Standard method for measuring the minimum

oxygen concentration to support candle-like

combustion of plastics (Oxygen Index).

6. ASTMD:2843: Standard test method for measuring the density

of smoke from the burning or decomposition.

7. IEEE:383: Standard for type of tests Class-IE, Electric

cables, field splices and connections for power

generation station.

8. ASTME:662/IEC:

754(x):

Standard test method for specific optical density

of smoke generated by solid materials

9. IS:1041 8: Cable drums.

10 IS-1081 0: Testing method of cable.

11. IS-6121: Cable glands.

12. IS-9537: Rigid steel conduit.

B. The manufacturing of the cable shall also conform to the requirements of all relevant local codes,

as applicable, together with the additional requirements referred to in this Specification and

Drawings, whichever is the more stringent and acceptable to the Engineer.

C. In the adoption of standards and requirements, the Contractor shall take the following

precedence:

1. Engineer‟s decision;

2. Local codes of practice;

3. Drawings;

4. Specification;

5. International standards and requirements.

1.3. SUBMISSION

A. All technical submissions shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the respective stages of

construction.

B. As a minimum requirement, the submission shall include the following:

1. Equipment submission with manufacturer‟s data

2. Sample submission

3. Shop Drawings of the cable routings showing the co-ordinated routing of cables, arrangement

on cable trays, methods of fixing of cable trays and cables, etc. All conduits including

concealed conduit routing drawings shall also be included

4. Cable test reports and IS Certification

5. Builder‟s works requirement

6. Cable schedule indicate the following data include:

a. Cable code and type and installation method

b. Cable feed from and serve to

137

c. Cable route length and voltage drop

d. Cable capacity and

e. Upstream protection breaker rating The cable schedule shall be prepare in according to

the cable manufacturer‟s data..

PART 2 – PRODUCT

2.1. LV CABLES

1. The cables shall be suitable for laying in racks, ducts, trenches conduits and under-ground

buried installation with uncontrolled back fill and chances of flooding by water.

2. They shall be designed to withstand all mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses under

steady state and transient operating condition.

3. The aluminium/copper wires used for manufacturing the cables shall be true circular/sector in

shape before stranding and shall be of uniformly good quality, free from defects. The

conductor used in manufacture of the cable shall be of H2 grade.

4. The cable should withstand 2.5 KA for 1 Sec. with insulation armour insulated at one end.

Bidder shall furnish calculation in support of capability to withstand the earth fault currents.

The current carrying capacity of armour and screen (as applicable) shall not be less than the

earth fault current values and duration.

5. The fillers and inner sheath shall be of non-hygroscopic fire retardant materials and shall be

suitable for the operating temperature of the cable. Filler and inner sheath shall not stick to

insulation and outer sheath.

6. Progressive automatic in line indelible, legible and sequential marking of the length of the

cable in metres at every one metres shall be provided on the outer sheath of all cables and at

every 5 metre „LSZH marking in case of „LSZH cables.

7. Strip/Wire armouring following method (b) mentioned in IS: 3975 shall only be acceptable.

For single core cable aluminium wire armouring shall be used.

8. Allowable tolerance on the overall diameter of the cables shall be + 2mm.

9. The normal current rating of all HRPVC/XLPE insulated cables shall be as per IS: 3961.

10. A distinct inner sheath shall be provided by pressure extrusion process for all multicore

armoured and unarmoured cables as per IS: 5831.

11. Outer sheath shall be provided by extrusion process as per IS: 5031.

12. The breaking load of armour joint shall not be less than 95% of that armour wire. Zinc rich

paint shall be applied on armoured joint surface.

13. In plant repairs to the cables shall not be accepted.

14. All the cables shall be supplied in non-returnable drums as per IS: 10418.

15. In Case of LSZH Cables

The outer sheath of cables shall have an oxygen index of not less than 29 as per ASIMD :

2863.

The maximum acid gas generation by weight as per IEC:754 (i) shall not be more than

20% for outer sheath material of all cables. Bidder shall also guarantee the maximum

theoretical acid gas generation with 20% by weight of outer sheath.

The cables outer sheath shall meet the requirement of light transmission of 40%

(minimum and shall be tested as per ISTMD:2843). In case the test for light transmission

is conducted as per ASTME:662. The bidder shall furnish smoke density values as per

this standard and shall co-relate the anticipated light transmission when tested as per

ASTMD:2843.

138

The cable shall pass the fire resistance test as per SS:42, 41, 475 (I) and flammability test

as per EEE:383.

A. Inspection:

All cables shall be inspected on receipt of the same at site and checked for any damage during

transit.

B. Joints in Cables:

The contractor shall take care that the cables received at site are distributed to various locations

in such a manner as to ensure maximum utilization and avoidance of cable jointing. Cable shall

be rechecked before cutting in lengths, where the joints are unavoidable, and the location of such

joints shall be got approved from the Owner/Consultant. The joints shall be done by qualified

jointer strictly in accordance with manufacturer‟s instruction/drawings.

C. Joint Boxes for Cables:

The cable joint boxes shall be of appropriate size suitable for type of cable of particular voltage

rating.

D. Cable Joints:

1. All cable joints shall be made in suitable, approved cable joints boxes, on the jointing of

cables in the joint box and the filling in of compound shall be done in accordance with

manufacturer‟s instructions and in an approved manner. All straight through joints shall be

done in epoxy mould boxes with epoxy resins. Straight through joints shall not be permitted

unless the length of run is in excess of cable drum.

2. End terminations of cables more than 1.1 KV grade shall be done with epoxy mould boxed

and epoxy resin. Cable glands shall be 1.1KV grade double compression type and made to

tin plated heavy-duty brass casting and machine finished. Glands shall be of robust

construction capable of clamping cable and cable armour, firmly without injury of cable.

3. All washers and hardware shall be made of brass tinned. Rubber components used in the

glands shall be made of neoprene of tested quality.

4. Cable lugs shall be tinned copper/aluminium solder less crimping type conforming to IS: 8309

suitable for aluminium or copper conductor.

5. Crimping of terminals shall be done by using Corrosion inhibitory compound, with crimping

tool.

6. Fire resistant paint has to be applied 1 Meter on either side of cable joint.

7. The contractor shall liaise fully with all other contractors to achieve an efficient and properly

coordinated installation where equipment has to be re-positioned due to lack of site liaison;

no extra cost shall be incurred by the client.

2.2. H.T. CABLE (XLPE) (33 KV)

A. The cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) cable shall be aluminium conductor PVC outer sheath

steel strip armoured over inner sheath construction. XLPE cable shall conform to testing in

accordance with IS:7098 (Part-I) 1977 and (Part-II) 1973. The screaning shall be done on

individual cover. The armouring applied over the common covering shall be flat steel wires. Each

and every length of cable shall be subjected to routine test.

B. The termination and jointing techniques for XLPE cables shall be by using heat shrinkable or

push on cable jointing kits.

C. While laying underground cables in ducts care should be taken so that any underground

structures such as water pipes, sewerage lines etc. are not damaged. Any telephone or other

cable coming in the way shall be properly protected as per instructions of the Engineer-in-charge.

The H.T. cable shall be laid at least 1200mm for cable upto 33 KV(E) below the ground level in a

trench 450mm wide.

139

D. After laying and jointing work is completed a high POT test shall be performed in presence of

Engineer and test results submitted for approval in order to ensure that they have not been

damaged during or after the laying operation. In case, the test results are unsatisfactory, the cost

of all repairs and replacement and all extra work of removal and relaying will be made good by

the contractor without any extra cost. Note: All other procedure will be followed as per L.T.

cables.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. ERECTION OF CABLES

A. Notwithstanding the cable routes indicated on the Drawings the Contractor shall be entirely

responsible for the supply of correct lengths of the cables to be installed and for all allowances

for connecting and terminating the cables to the switchgears and transformers respectively

B. The Contractor shall submit proposed cable routes including details of supports for the cables for

approval before installation. The cable shall not be run in places other than corridor,

passageway, electrical riser or other designated areas subject to the Engineer‟s approval. The

cost of support shall be deemed to have included in the Contract.

3.2. CABLE PULLING

A. Winching of cables through ducts/pipes shall only be carried out with the approval of the

Engineer in which event a pulley eye shall be attached to the conductors. Cable shall be run in

neat and orderly manner to allow space for future cabling and maintenance and under no

circumstances and cable shall be run diagonally across a room, cable basement, corridor, etc.

B. A cable sheath stocking may be employed or cables where no undue stress in the sheath is likely

to occur.

C. Care shall be taken to ensure that the draw strain is applied to the armouring and protected

during drawing against damage.

3.3. CABLE LAYING

A. The cable drum shall be placed on jacks before unwinding the cable. Great care shall be

exercised in laying cables to avoid forming links. At all changes in directions in horizontal &

vertical places, the cable shall be bent with a radius of bend not less than 8 times the diameter of

cable.

B. The cable of 1.1KV grade shall be laid not less than 750mm below ground level in a 375mm wide

trench (throughout), where more than one cable is to be laid in the same trench, the width of the

trench shall be increased such that the interaxial spacing between the cables except where

otherwise specified shall at least be 150mm minimum or as per site requirements or as approved

by the Engineer-in-charge. Where single core cables are used in multiphase systems, the cables

shall be installed in trefoil where possible.

C. In case the cables are laid in vertical formation due to unavoidable circumstance the depth per

tier shall be increased by 200mm (minimum). Cable shall be laid in reasonably straight line,

where a change in direction takes place a suitable curvature shall be i.e. either 20 times the dia

meter of the cable or the radius of the bend shall not be less than twice the diameter of the cable

drum or whichever is less. Minimum 3 meter long loop shall be provided at both sides of every

straight through joint & 3 meters at each end of cable or as directed at site.

D. Greater care shall be exercised in handling the cable in order to avoid forming „Kinks‟. The cable

drum shall in-verbally conveyed on wheels and the cable unrolled in right direction as indicated

on the drum by the manufacturer. The cable shall be pulled over rollers in the trench steadily and

uniformly without jerks and strains.

E. Cables laid in trenches in single tier formation, 10 cms. All around sand cushioning be provided

below and above the cable before a protective cover is laid. For every additional vertical tier. The

30cm of sand cushion be provided over the initial tier. The cable shall be protected by 2nd class

bricks of size not less than 230x115x75mm, stone tiles/RCC curved channel be placed on top of

140

the sand breadth wise for the full length of the cable and where more than one cable is to be laid

in the same trench the brick shall cover all cables and project at least 8 cms over the outer sides

of the end cables.

F. Filling of trenches shall be done after the sand cushioning and laying of tiles or bricks are carried

out to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge (Refer drawing). Back fill for trenches shall be

filled in layer not exceeding 150 mm. Each layer shall be properly rammed & consolidate before

laying the next layer.

G. PVC pipe shall be provided for all road crossing. The size of the pipe shall be according to the

cable and a minimum 100mm dia. pipe shall be provided. The pipe shall be laid in ground with

special arrangement and shall be cement jointed and concreting with 1:5:10 shall be made as per

relevant IS with latest amendment. Nothing extra shall be paid on this account. Location of

cables laid directly underground shall be indicated by cable marker at an interval of 30 meters &

with change of direction. Aluminium strip cable tag of 20mm wide with engraved tag no. shall be

provided at both ends of cable.

H. Where the cables are to be laid in ducts (pucca trenches) in side the building, they will have to be

laid on MS rack/ on MS cable trays grouted in walls trenches. Cables sizing through floors shall

be protected from mechanical damage by a steel channel to a height of one meter above the

floor where cable pass through wall they shall be sleeved with PVC/steel conduit.

I. Where the cables are laid in open (in building) along walls, ceiling or above falseceiling, cable

rack (ladder type) or cable tray shall be provided. The size of the cable tray or rack shall depend

on the number of cables to pass over that rack. Cable tray/rack shall be properly supported

through wall/ceiling according to the site conditions. Cable laid on tray & riser shall be neatly

dressed &clamped at an interval of 1000 mm & 750mm for horizontal & vertical cable run

respectively either side at each bend of cable. All power cables shall be clamped individually &

control cables shall be clamped in groups of three or four cables. Clamps for multicore cables

shall be fabricated of 25x3 GI flats. Single core power cable shall be laid in trefoil formation &

clamped with trefoil clamps made of PVC/fibre glass.

J. Cable openings in wall/floor shall be sealed by the contractor suitably by hession tape & bitumen

compound or by any other proven to prevent ingress of water.

K. After the cables are laid, shall be tested as per IS and the results submitted to

Architects/Engineer and in case the results found unsatisfactory, all the repairing/ replacing of

cables will be done by the contractor free of charge.

3.4. INTERNAL WIRING

A. All the wiring installation shall be as per IS:732 with latest amendment. PVC insulated copper

conductor cables as specified in bills of quantity shall be used for sub-circuit runs from the

distribution boards to the points and shall be pulled into conduits. They shall be twisted copper

conductors with thermoplastic insulations of 1100 volts grade. Colour Code for wiring shall be

followed.

B. Looping system of wiring shall be used, wires shall not be jointed. Where joints are unavoidable,

they shall be made through approved mechanical connectors with prior permission of the

consultant. No reduction of strands are permitted at terminations. No wire smaller than 1.5

sq.mm shall be used and shall be as per B.O.Q. Wherever wiring is run through trunkings or

raceways, the wires emerging from individual distributions shall be bunched together with cable

straps at required regular intervals. Identification ferrules indicating the circuit and DB number

shall be used for submains, subcircuit wiring. The ferrules shall be provided at both end of each

submain and sub-circuit.

C. Where single phase circuits are supplied from a three phase and a neutral distribution board, no

conduit shall contain the wiring fed from more than one phase. In any one room in the premises

where all or part of the electrical load consists of lights, fans and/or other single phase current

consuming devices, all shall be connected to the same phase of the supply. Circuits fed from

distinct sources of supply or from different distribution boards or through switches or MCBs shall

141

not be bunched in one conduit. In large areas and other situations where the load is divided

between two or three phase, no two single phase switches connected to different phase shall be

mounted within two meters of each other.

D. All splicing shall be done by means of terminal blocks or connectors and no twisting connection

between conductors shall be allowed.

E. Industrial sockets shall be of polycarbonate and deeply recessed contact tubes. Visible scraping

type earth terminal shall be provided. Socket shall have self adjustable spring loaded protective

cap. Socket shall have MCB/ELCB/RCCB as specified in the schedule of work.

3.5. Fire Seal System

A. All the floor/wall opening provided for cable crossing shall be sealed by fire seal system.

B. The fire proof sealing system shall fully comply with the requirements of relevant IS/BS:476 Part-

B. The fire proof seal system shall have minimum one hour fire resistance rating.

C. The fire proof seal system shall be physically, chemically, thermally stable and shall be

mechanically secured to the masonary concrete members. The system shall be completely gas

and smoke tight, antirodent and anti-termite.

D. The material used in fire proof seal system shall be non-toxic and harmless to the working

personnel.

E. Type of fire proof seal system shall be foaming type or flamemastic type compound or approved

equivalent.

F. After laying and jointing work is completed, high voltage test should be applied to all cables to

ensure that they have not been damaged during or after the laying operation and that there is not

fault in the jointing.

G. Cables for use on low and medium voltage system (1.1KV grade cables) should withstand for 15

minutes a pressure of 3000V DC applied between conductors and also between each conductor

and sheaths. In the absence of pressure testing facilities it is sufficient to test for one minute with

a 1000V insulation tester In case the test results are unsatisfactory the cost of repairs and

replacements and extra work of removal & laying will be made good by the contractor.

H. Cable shall be installed so that separations shown in the table below are observed.

1. HV Cable (33 KV) - HV Cable (33 KV) 50 mm

2. ELV & LV 230 V/433 V - ELV & LV cable 230 V/433 V 50 mm

3. HV cables (33 KV) - ELV & LV cables 230 V/433 V 300 mm

4. LV cables 433 V - Telephone/Instrument cable 350 mm

5. All cables - All hot pipe work 200 mm

3.6. FACTORY TESTS

A. Each type of cable specified shall be fully type tested according to IEC 502 and the appropriate

British Standards. The types and sizes of cables required are shown on the Drawings.

B. Should the Engineer require it, the Contractor shall submit reports issued by a national or

international testing authority on type test that have been successfully performed on the cable for

his approval.

C. The type test shall include the following test:

1. Partial discharge test;

2. Bending test, plus partial discharge test;

3. Tan d measurement as a function of the voltage and capacitance measurement;

4. Tan d measurement as a function of the temperature;

142

5. Heating cycle test plus partial discharge test ;

6. Impulse withstand test, followed by a power frequency voltage test;

7. Medium-voltage alternating current test;

8. Type test (non-electrical) as stipulated in IEC 502, Table VI.

D. Cable routine test shall be conducted at factory in accordance with IEC 502 for the following

tests: Measurement of the electrical resistance of conductors. Partial discharge test, 4-hour MV

test.

3.7. SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. The Contractor shall supply all necessary testing equipment for site testing. When required,

these testing equipment shall be calibrated at the expense of the Contractor at a recognized

national laboratory.

B. The Contractor shall engage an Authorised Medium Voltage Testing Engineer who is recognised

by SEB to perform all site tests.

C. In addition to SEB‟s requirements and those recommended by the manufacturer, the following

tests shall be carried out:

1. Continuity test,

2. Earth test,

3. Polarity test,

4. Insulation resistance test,

5. DC high voltage test. The test voltage shall be in accordance with SEB‟s requirements and

Engineer‟s approval.

143

BUS DUCT Chapter 2.

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and setting to work of a

totally enclosed, non-ventilated type of housing, low impedance insulated Aluminium bus duct

system.

B. Bus duct shall be of totally enclosed with independent copper earth bar, low impedance having

minimum rating as indicated in the Drawings and Specification with all necessary fittings, tap-off

units, supporting devices and manufacturer recommended accessories to complete the

installation as a whole.

C. Ratings and the indicative routings of bus duct shall be as indicated on the Drawings. It is solely

the responsibility of the Contractor to carry out site survey, co-ordinated and check the location of

these facilities and make any necessary adjustment modifications to the Engineer‟s approval.

1.2. STANDARDS

A. The bus duct shall be low impedance solid rectangular bus bars/ Trunking made of totally

enclosed extruded aluminium housing with electro-tin plated hard drawn high conductivity copper

to BS 1433 to BS 1432.

B. The bus duct shall be type-tested assemblies (TTA) as defined in BS 5486: Part 1 (IEC439-1),

manufactured and tested by a specialist bus duct manufacturer to BS 5486: Part 2 (IEC 439 – 2)

or UL 857.

C. Material and installation shall comply with BS7671, SEB regulations and any other recommended

practices, Standards of ANSI, IEEE, NEMA and UL.

D. BS: 381C/BS4800 - Specification for colours for identifications, coding & special Purpose

E. BS: 1432 - Specification for copper for electrical purposes, High conductivity Copper rectangular

conductors with drawn or rolled edges.

F. BS: 2757 -Methods for determining the thermal classification of electrical insulation.

G. IEC: 60529/EN60529 -Specification for degrees of Protection Provided by enclosure (IP code )

H. IEC: 60439/EN60439 Part: 1 Section for low voltage switchgear & control gear assembled.

Specification for type tested & partially type tested assemblies.

I. IEC: 60947/EN 60947- 1-2, 3-4 Specification for low voltage switchgear & control gear etc.

Technical & installation Requirements.

J. The bus duct and associated equipment shall be certified for the category of duty specified

hereafter, in particular, with regards to fault conditions and temperature rise limits.

K. The manufacture of various components and accessories, including the plug-in units, shall be as

recommended by the bus duct manufacturer to ensure compatibility of the components.

L. The bus duct shall be of SEB approved type and the Contractor is required to submit project

reference list for the Engineer‟s review.

1.3. SUBMISSION

A. All technical submission shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the respective stages of

construction.

B. As a minimum requirement, the submission shall include the following:

1. Equipment submission with manufacturer‟s data such as resistance per metre, reactance per

metre, mV/A/m, contact resistance per joint, etc.;

2. Test certificate for short circuit capacity and IP rating;

3. Shop drawings for construction details of bus duct arrangements, spring hangers, wall

144

flanges, floor flanges, plug-in boxes, etc.;

4. Bus duct routing drawings showing the co-ordinated routing of the bus duct, setting out lines

of the bus ducts relative to building grids, locations of bus duct joints, suspension and fixing

units, etc.;

5. Weight of equipment

6. Builder‟s works requirement.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL

A. Bus duct shall be factory fabricated epoxy insulated totally enclosed, vermin and insect proof,

non-ventilated type suitable for three phase four wire system with full sized Busbar for phases

and neutral.

B. Bus duct complete with plug-in units shall be type-tested to National Electrical Manufacturer‟s

Association (NEMA) Standard (No. BU-1972) and U/L 857 and shall be able to withstand a short

circuit condition equivalent to 50 kA 3 sec or not less than the type-tested short circuit capacity of

the corresponding switchboards.

C. Bus duct shall be insulated to Class B i.e. 85°C temperature rise above ambient temperature of

45°C but maximum operation temperature should not exceed 95°C.

D. Eddy current heating shall be taken into account while designing the enclosure.

E. A complete bus duct assembly shall comprise the following:

1. Cable and box

2. Hangers

3. Plug-in/feeder Busbar

4. Plug-in/tap-off box

5. Elbow

6. Off set

7. Transposing unit

8. End cap

9. Fire barrier

10. Expansion joints

11. Integral earth

F. Fire resistance bus duct shall be insulated with double layers of mica and silicone rubber on the

bus bars. All jointing parts shall be protected with fire protective enclosure. Test certificate for fire

resistant bus duct shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Fire resistance bus duct shall

be provided for all circuit incoming and outgoing from the Emergency Main Switch Board.

G. All bus duct and the associated fittings shall be minimum IP44 rating within Electrical room and

Electrical riser. At car park, outdoor or plant room areas shall be weatherproof type to IP 65 in

accordance to IEC 529. Weatherproof bus duct shall incorporate gaskets; drain holes, etc.

suitable for outdoor use. All the plug-in, joint and accessories shall be special box-up to

manufacturer detail to the same IP rating as the bus way.

H. Minimum 2 nos. of hanger/support shall be provided for every 2m run of bus duct. Extra number

of hangers will be required for joints. The bus duct shall be so supported that no visible stress

shall be apparent from either unbalanced plug-in units. Vertical floor support shall be complete

with spring hanger.

145

I. All joints shall be the one-bolt removable/isolating type with through-bolts that can be checked for

tightness without de-energizing the system. It shall be possible to make up a joint from one side

in the event the bus duct is installed against the wall or ceiling. The joint shall be so

manufactured so as to allow removal of any length without disturbing adjacent lengths. Belleville

spring shall be provided to give positive pressure over complete contact area. Plug-in feeder

shall use identical parts.

J. The bus duct system shall be capable of being mounted in any position without de-rating. Plug in

and feeder sections shall be interchangeable without the use of special adapter joint covers.

K. The complete bus duct system shall be capable of withstanding the short circuit capacity of the

electrical installation without damaging by the electrical, mechanical and thermal stress under

fault condition of a service voltage of 440V 50Hz.

L. Bus duct shall have rated insulation voltage and rated operating voltage of 650V respectively.

2.2. BUSDUCT

A. The bus duct shall be of integrated one (single circuit) up to 2500 A and inter living type (Double

circuit) above 2500 Amps.

B. The bus duct conductor shall be Aluminium with 99.999 purity as per BS-1432. Adequately rated

& supported by non-tracking moulded insulator spaced at suitable intervals. The complete

assembly shall be capable of withstand the maximum mechanical stresses to which it may be

subject to under fault conditions.

C. The bus bar connections shall be constructed in accordance with the requirement of IEC- 60439-

1 or EN-60439-1 forgoing Part of switchboards & on current carrying capacity & limits of

temperature rise.

D. The current density of bus bars shall be considered as 0.8 Amps/ Sq.mm.

E. The clearances between phase and neutral shall be as per BS 162; Bus bars shall be separated

& supported with approximate clearances in air in addition to the requirements of providing full

insulation. The material for phase identification shall be non-colour fading and adhesive label

shall not be used.

F. The bus duct shall be provided with three phase or three phases and neutral as indicated on

drawing and BOQ.

G. Non-deteriorating neoprene type gaskets shall be provided. The gaskets used for outdoor portion

of the bus duct shall be non-deteriorating due to hostile climate conditions and direct exposure to

sunlight.

H. Bus bar supports shall be made of high quality insulating material such as FRP/DMC, SMC/Fibre

glass araldite etc. The insulating material shall be treated against fungus. Surface of insulators

shall be highly glazed and treated to minimize accumulation of dust.

I. Flanged ends shall be provided to facilitate connection of bus ducts both at the transformer and

switch gear end & switch gear to switchgear end. All hardware such as bolts, nuts, spring and

plain washers shall be supplied along with bus duct to connect it at both ends.

J. Reinforcement/stiffeners shall be provided for the covers from inside on which supporting lugs

are provided.

K. Flexible connectors shall be provided at the end terminations, both at transformer end and switch

gear end and at intermediate places depending upon length and configuration of the bus duct.

The connectors shall preferably be laminated to cater for linear expansion of bus bars. The

material of flexible shall be same as bus bars. If different materials are used care shall be taken

to prevent bimetallic corrosion.

L. Earth bus of size made of Aluminium as mentioned in B.O.Q shall be fitted outside the bus duct

throughout the length of the bus duct Two Nos. of terminals shall be brought out at ends of the

earth bus to facilitate connection of earthling lead externally.

146

M. A cross over chamber with sufficient number of links and supports shall be provided in

accordance with system required. The cross over chamber shall effect change of phase

sequences to match with respective phase sequences in the end equipment. The links, insulators

and fasteners shall be located such that across the replacement/ tightening is available for all

parts.

N. Suitable fabricated adapter box with flexible links shall be provided wherever specified to

interface with the termination arrangement on the end equipment connection. Bidder shall design

the adapter box to suit exact requirements of the end equipment with adequate clearance and

accessibility for end connections. All necessary links, supports, fasteners and washers shall be

included in the scope of supply.

O. The bus duct enclosure shall be fabricated for CRCA sheet steel of minimum size of 2mm.

P. Bus bars and insulating supports shall withstand successfully thermal and dynamic stresses

resulting from the circuit currents mentioned in the Data Sheets for the duration, so specified.

Bus duct shall be able to with stand short circuit level of 50 KA for 1 sec.

Q. The bus duct assembly enclosure shall be dust and vermin proof with 1P-44 protection & IP-65

for outdoor installation. Adequate access shall be available for inspection/ replacement/

Tightening of bus bars and their support/fish plate etc.

R. All steel fabrication work shall be powder coated of approved shade.

PART 3 – EXECUTION – TESTING & COMMISIONING

3.1. GENERAL

A. Store bus duct in clean dry area. Bus duct shall not be delivered or installed until building is

enclosed and dry.

B. Clean conducting surfaces and install bus in accordance with manufacturer‟s installation

instructions. Torque all connections. Adjust spring hangers to equally distribute load.

C. Provide 10 cm high concrete curb around bus duct floor penetrations.

D. Provide a spring suspension hanger at each floor and not more than every 4 vertical meters.

E. Provide expansion fittings in accordance with manufacturer‟s recommendations.

F. Provide listed fire stop fittings at floor and wall penetrations.

3.2. DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Fully, dimensioned, scale drawing showing general arrangement, assembly, installation,

configuration, clearance, creepage distances and interfacing details at both ends shall be

submitted for approval.

B. Calculations for bus bar capacity to carry rated current with specified maximum operating

temperature.

C. Short time thermal and dynamic withstand capacity under specified fault level, Heat loss

calculations & Voltage drop calculations.

3.3. TEST

A. The bus duct shall be tested and inspected at fabrication shape in accordance with the relevant

IS/ BS requirement for type and routine tests.

B. After installation the following tests shall be performed before energising the bus duct.

• High voltage withstands test for 1 min.

• Megger test

147

3.4. INSPECTION

A. The Purchaser reserves the right to witness all routine tests at manufacturer‟s works prior to

despatch to prove compliance with Specification. All expenses for conducting these tests shall be

borne by the Bidder .Metering/testing equipment of approved range and accuracy class shall be

arranged by the Vendor.

3.5. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT

A. The bus duct unit rate shall be based on per meter length basis measured along the longitudinal

axis from flange to flange (centre line measurement} irrespective of horizontal/ vertical runs,

bends, crossover chamber and adapter panel. The per meter rates shall be inclusive of bend,

crossover box and adapter box flexible end coupler etc.

3.6. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Quality Assurance shall follow the requirements of Owner documents as applicable. QA

involvement will commence at enquiry and follow through to completion and acceptance thus

ensuring total conformity to Purchaser‟s requirement.

3.7. DEVIATIONS

A. Deviation from specifications must be stated in writing at the quotation stage.

B. In the absence of such a statement, it will be assumed that the requirements of the specifications

are met without exception.

148

PANEL BOARDS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. WORK DESCRIPTION

A. This specification covers the „General Requirements‟ for the design, manufacture, supply

performance, inspection, testing and commissioning including supply of indoor type low voltage

switch boards up to 1000 V including necessary termination, cabling and bus work required for

satisfactory operation .

B. The Panel boards included, distribution boards and control panels shall be built in accordance

with IEC 439 “Factory Built Assemblies for Low Voltage” or BS 5486 “Factory-built Assemblies of

Switchgear and Control Gear for Voltage up to and including 1000 AC and 1200V DC.

C. All factory built assemblies subject to rain or wet conditions or located outside electrical switch

room shall be weatherproof constructed to IP 65, able to withstand high impact strength of 60

KN/m2 (min.), temperature resistant, flame retardant and corrosion resistant.

D. Specific requirements shall be in accordance with single line diagram/specification & BOQ.

E. The technical parameters of switchgear equipments, transformers etc. shall be referred.

1.2. STANDARDS

A. All equipment, material and components shall comply with the requirements of the latest editions

of Indian Standards with updated amendments. Standards and Regulations applicable in the

area where equipment is to be installed shall also be followed.

B. The equipment offered complying with other standards, these standards shall be equal to or

superior to those specified and full details of the differences shall be furnished along with the

tender.

C. The Panel boards shall be engineered and constructed in accordance with the latest revision of

the following Indian and British standards:

1. IS 13947 : A.C. Circuit Breakers

2. IS 3427 : Metal enclosed Switchgear & Control Gear

3. BS 162 : Safety Clearances

4. IS 2705 : Current Transformers

5. IS 3156 : Voltage Transformers

6. IS 3202 : Code of Practice for climate proofing of electrical equipment

7. IS 375 : Marking & Arrangement for Switchgear Bus Bars, main connections

and auxiliary wiring.

8. ARE 722 : A.C. Electric Meters

9. IS 1248 : Direct acting Electrical Indicating Instruments

10. IS 3231 : Electrical Relays for Power System Protection

11. IS 2544 : Epoxy Cast Resin Insulators

12. IS 5082 : Electrolytic Copper/ Aluminium

13. IS 5792 : High Voltage HRC fuses

14. BS 88 : Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and including 1000V AC and 1500V

DC.

15. BS 89 : Direct acting electrical indicating analogue electrical measuring

instruments and their accessories.

16. BS 142 : Electrical protective relays

149

17. BS 159 : Busbar and Busbar connection

18. BS 1433 : Copper for electrical purposes. Rods and bars.

19. BS EN 60898 : Circuit-breakers for over current protection for household and similar

installations.

20. BS 3938 : Current transformers

21. BS EN 60947-2 : Low-voltage switchgear and control gear, Part 2 circuit-breakers.

22. BS 4794 : Control switches (switching devices, Part 1 including contactor relays,

for control and auxiliary circuits, for voltages up to and including 1000V

AC and 1200V DC). General requirements.

23. BS 5419 : Air-break switches, air-break disconnectors, and fuse combination units

for voltages up to and including 1000V AC and 1200V DC.

24. BS 5420 : Degrees of protection of enclosures of switch Part I great Part I and

control gear for voltages up to and including 1000V AC and 1200V DC.

25. BS 5424 : Control gear for voltages up to and including 1000V AC and 1200V DC

– Part 1 Contactors.

26. BS 5486 : Low-voltage switchgear and control gear Part 1 assemblies. Part I:

Requirement for type tested and partially type tested assemblies.

27. BS 5685 : Electricity meters – Part I: Class 0.5, 1 and 2 single phase and poly

phase, single-rate and multi-rate watt-hour meters.

28. BS 5992 : Electrical relays

29. BS 6004 : PVC insulated cables, (nonarmoured), for electric power and lighting.

30. BS 6231 : PVC insulated cables for switchgear and control gear wiring.

31. IS 3043/ BS7430 : Earthing

D. BS/IEC or IS not mentioned above but are applicable to this installation shall also apply.

E.

1.3. SUBMISSION

A. Detailed co-ordination with other services, shop drawings for various electrical layouts such as

equipment layout and earthing layouts, including equipment installation and cable termination

details etc. prior to start of work.

B. Such drawings shall show the proposed method of construction of the cubicles, method of

supporting equipment and Busbar, full details of Busbar layout, method of support, electrical

control wiring diagrams, equipment weight, colors, and surface treatment.

C. The drawings shall also incorporate a full list of proposed materials. The construction shall not

commence until the drawings are approved for construction.

D. Factory and site testing procedures and report formats shall also be included.

E. Preparation of bill of materials for Different Items as mentioned in Schedule of Quantities.

F. Lighting/power panel schedule.

G. Interconnection drawing.

H. Protection co-ordination drawings/tables for complete power system.

I. Shop inspection and testing procedures.

J. Field testing and commissioning procedures.

150

K. Preparation of as built drawings for the services the contractor is rendering. Any other

work/activity which is not listed above; however is necessary for completeness of electrical

system.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. PANEL BOARD

A. The switch boards shall be cubicle type, suitable for indoor installation, floor mounting and free

standing. The design shall be totally enclosed, dust - tight, damp-proof and vermin proof offering

degree of protection not less than IP-42.

B. Separate segregated compartments shall be provided for circuit breakers, bus bars, cable box,

voltage transformers, wire ways, relays, and instrument and control devices. Switchgear cubicles/

modules shall be provided with hinged doors in front with facility for padlocking door handles.

C. Vent openings shall be covered with grills so arranged that hot gases cannot be discharged

through them in a manner that can injure the operating personnel. These vent openings shall be

vermin proof.

D. All panels shall be of same height, width and depth. Panels shall be bolted together to form a

continuous flush front switch board, suitable for front of board operation.

E. The switchgear cubicles shall be rigid and robust in design and construction, fabricated out of

CRCA sheet steel. Cubicles shall be made from rigid welded structural frames made of structural

steel sections or of pressed/formed sheet steel of not less than 3mm thickness. The frames shall

be enclosed by sheet steel of at least 2mm thickness, smoothly finished, leveled and free from

flaws. Stiffeners shall be provided wherever necessary.

F. All doors, panels, removable covers shall be provided with non deteriorating (neoprene) gaskets

all around the perimeter.

G. All doors shall be removable and supported by concealed type hinges. The hinges shall be

strong and braced to ensure freedom from sagging, bending and general distortion of panel or

hinged part.

H. Floor mounted cubicles shall be provided with a 75mm high channel base frame. The total height

of the cubicle shall not exceed 2400mm, keeping in view the operating height of top switch

should not exceed 1750mm from FFL including base channel.

2.2. BUSBARS & BUSBAR CHAMBER

A. Three phase bus bars shall be of high conductivity electrolytic Aluminium as stated in B.O.Q.

B. The bus bars shall be air insulated and housed in a separate compartment, segregated from all

other compartments.

C. Bus bars & bus bar connections shall be of uniform cross section shall be suitable for carrying

rated current continuously and short circuit current for specified duration without overheating. The

bus bars connections shall be adequately supported on insulators to withstand dynamic stresses

due to short circuit current specified. Normal operating temperature for bus bars shall be 85 Deg

C. Short circuit rating of the bus bars shall be 20 to 50 KA for 1 sec as per BOQ.

D. All bus bar joints and bus tap joints shall be silver or tin plated. Joints shall be bolted type and

shall be insulated. Spring/Lock washers shall be provided to ensure good contact on the joints.

E. Direct access to accidental contact with bus bars and primary connections shall be avoided by

providing shrouds. All apertures and slots shall be protected by barriers to prevent accidental

shorting of bus bars. To provide a tight seal between cubicles, bushings or insulating panels shall

be provided for bus bars crossing from one cubicle into another.

151

F. All insulating materials used shall be non-hygroscopic and shall be treated for preventing fungus

growth. Surface of insulators shall be highly glazed and treated with silicone compounds to

minimize accumulation of dust, condensation and tracking.

G. All bus bars shall be color coded as per IS:375.

2.3. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CTs)

A. Current transformers shall be of suitable ratio, burden & class/accuracy as specified in Single

Line Diagram.

B. Current transformers shall conform to latest edition to relevant standards. The Current

transformers shall be epoxy resin cast with bar Primary or ring type.

C. The design and construction shall be sufficiently robust to withstand thermal and dynamic

stresses due to the maximum short circuit current of the circuit.

D. The current transformer shall preferably be capable of being left open circuited on the secondary

side with primary carrying rated full load current, without overheating or damage. Short time

current rating and rated withstand time shall be same as corresponding C.B.

E. CT core laminations shall be of high grade silicon steel.

F. Secondary terminals of CT shall be brought out to a terminal block which will be easily accessible

for testing and external connections. Facility shall be provided for short circuiting and earthing of

CT secondary leads through a removable and accessible link with provision for attaching test

link.

G. Rating plate details and terminal markings shall be according to the latest edition of relevant

Indian Standard specification.

H. Current transformers (core) shall be used for metering and protection.

2.4. POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS (PTs)

A. Potential Transformers shall conform to latest edition of relevant standards.

B. Potential transformers shall be dry, cast epoxy resin type. The PTs shall be of single phase

construction.

C. The PTs shall be capable of operating continuously at 110% of the rated voltage without any

damage. When star - star connection is required in non-effectively or ungrounded system, the

PTs shall be suitable for continuous operation with a persistent phase to ground fault.

D. Maximum temperature rise of the transformer at rated burden and with rated primary voltage and

frequency shall not exceed 40 Dig‟s above an ambient of 45 Dig‟s.

E. HRC Fuses shall be provided secondary side. It shall be possible to replace PT fuses easily

without having to de-energies the main bus bars. Prospective interrupting current rating of the

fuses shall be same as the system fault level.

F. Voltage transformer ratio, output and class shall be as specified in the drawing & BOQ. Name

plate as per relevant standards shall be provided on the PT.

2.5. PROTECTIVE RELAYS

A. Relays type and numbers shall be in accordance with the protective scheme specified or as per

drawings and B.O.Q.

B. Relays shall be enclosed in rectangular shaped cases, suitable for flush mounting only, dust tight

covers projecting from the front cover panel. The case shall be dust tight, damp proof and

tropicalised.

C. Relays shall be accessible for setting from the front. Access to setting devices shall be possible

only after removal of front cover.

152

D. Protective relays shall be draw out type. Where it is not possible to provide protective relays of

the draw out pattern, fixed type relays with facilities for plugging in a portable test plug shall be

provided. Necessary test plugs shall be furnished along with the relays.

E. Relays shall be provided with positive action self reset type with indicator. The indicator/s shall be

visible from the front.

F. Relays conform to relevant standards in all respects.

G. Relays shall be provided with minimum two pairs of self or hand reset type contacts as specified.

Auxiliary relays shall have the number of NO and NC contacts as specified in data sheet.

2.6. SAFETY/ PROTECTION & INTERLOCKS/FEATURES

Following interlocks and features shall be incorporated for equipment protection and personnel

safety under mal-operation. No deviations on these interlocks and safety features are allowed.

These interlocks and safety features shall be fail-safe, positive and full-proof.

A. It shall not be possible to plug-in or isolate a closed circuit breaker. An attempt to do so shall trip

the breaker. (In case of breakers with vertical isolation, this will apply to raising and lowering).

There shall be a positive locking facility to prevent closing of circuit unless it is in Service or Test

position.

B. Closing and opening operations shall be possible only in discrete, well defined Test and Service

positions and not in any position midway. An extension adapter cable with plugs and sockets

shall be preferably be provided so that the closing and opening operation of the circuit breaker

can be done in fully withdrawn position outside the cable.

C. Slow operation of circuit breakers shall be possible only in the circuit breaker in Test or Isolated

position.

D. Isolating switches if provided shall be interlocked with respective circuit breakers to prevent them

making or breaking the current.

E. 1 no. bus earthing truck shall be supplied with each panel to earth the out going cable of the VCB

breaker.

F. Automatic safety shutters for all openings which will lead to access to the live parts of the

switchgear upon withdrawal or any operation the switchgear components/parts shall be provided,

preferably with a padlocking facility.

G. Spring of motor operated spring charged mechanism shall not discharge until they are fully

charged and charging means are fully disconnected.

H. Where key interlocking is employed, tripping of a closed circuit breaker shall not occur if any

attempt is made to remove the trapped key from the mechanism.

I. Any other interlocks which manufacturer may deem to be required for safety and specifically

specified separately required for the system shall be included.

J. All terminals, connections which may be live and exposed for accidental contact shall be

adequately shrouded.

K. Components within cubicles shall be properly labeled to facilitate testing.

2.7. EARTHING

A. The switch board shall be provided at the bottom throughout its entire length with an earth bus of

copper of adequate size to carry the fault current for the duration same as short time rating of the

circuit breaker. Earth bus shall have two earthing connection facility at its both ends of earthing

conductor.

B. All non-current carrying metal parts, frames and equipment mounted in the switch board shall be

bonded to earth bus.

153

C. Earthing of moving carriage of draw out equipment shall be achieved by scraping earthing

device. The earthing device shall maintain positive earth continuity in all Service Test and

Isolated positions.

D. It shall be possible to connect each circuit or set of three phase bus bars to earth either through

earthing trucks or through the circuit breakers.

E. One earthing trolley suitable for earthing of cables & bus bars for all circuit breakers of the same

type/rating shall be provided.

2.8. INSTRUMENT & METERS

A. Electrical indicating instruments shall be digital type with zero adjustment, probe from outside the

cover.

B. Multi function meter of CL 1.0 accuracy with RS 485 port shall be provided.

C. Instruments/meters shall be suitable for flush mounting on the panel with flanges protecting

outside the panel.

D. All meters shall be industrial grade with accuracy of class 1.0 unless specifically indicated.

2.9. CONTROL WIRING

A. All wiring for control, protection, alarm and indicating circuits on all equipment shall be carried out

with at least 650V grade, PVC insulated, stranded, copper, 1.5 Sq.mm conductors.

B. All wiring shall be run on the sides of the panels and shall be neatly bunched and cleared without

affecting access to equipment mounted in the panel. Where wiring enters or passes through

compartments containing HT apparatus then they shall be in earthed metallic conduits or ducts.

C. All wiring shall be taken to terminal blocks without joints or tees in their run.

D. All wiring shall be colour coded as follows:

• Instrument Transformer AC circuit - Red, Yellow & Blue determined by the Phase with which

the wire is associated.

• AC Phase Wire - White

• AC Neutral - Black

• DC Circuits - Grey

• Earth connections - Green

E. Engraved core identification ferrules, marked to correspond with the wiring diagram shall be fitted

to each wire. Ferrules shall fit tightly on the wires, without falling off when wire is removed.

Ferrules shall be of white colour with black lettering. Each wire shall be identified by letter to

denote its function followed by a number to denote its identity at both ends.

F. All wiring for external connections shall be brought out to individual terminals on a readily

accessible terminal block.

G. All unused auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker and relays shall be wired up to terminal block.

154

2.10. FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Indicating Lamps

1. LED type indicating lamps shall be provided everywhere except where low voltage filament

type with series resistor called for.

2. Lamp covers shall be provided with interchangeable coloured lenses of Perspex or equivalent

unbreakable material. The lenses shall not discolour in course of time due to heat of the

lamp.

3. Bulbs and lenses shall be interchangeable and replaceable from the front.

4. Following colours shall be used for the function indicated:

Red - Circuit Breaker „ON‟

Green - Circuit Breaker „OFF‟

White - Continuous trip supply supervision

Amber - Auto trip

Blue - Spring charged

R.Y.B - Potential indication

B. Push Buttons

1. All push buttons shall be push to actuate the contact type.

2. Start & Stop push buttons shall be colored green and red respectively. Reset push buttons

shall be yellow in color and test push buttons shall be blue in color. All other push buttons

shall be black in color.

3. Emergency stop push buttons shall be lockable in the operated position, i.e. push to operate

and key to release type. Push buttons for emergency stop shall be recessed/shrouded type to

avoid accidental operation.

C. Control & Selector Switches

1. Control and Selector switches shall be of rotary type, having enclosed contacts accessible

only after removal of cover.

2. All control and selector switches for circuit breakers and instruments shall be mounted on the

front of the panel. Control switches for space heater/s and control supplies shall be mounted

inside the panel.

3. Circuit Breaker control switches shall be provided with pistol grip handles. Selector switches

shall be provided with round, knurled handles. All handles shall be black in color. Properly

designated escutcheon plates clearly marked to show the operating positions shall be

provided on all switches.

4. Circuit breaker control switches shall normally have three position close - Normal - Trip with

spring return to normal position. Switch operating mechanism shall prevent the switch from

being operated twice successively in the same direction. Circuit breaker control switch shall

have one NONC contact along with other contacts as required.

5. All other instruments and selector switches shall have stay put contacts.

6. Contacts of all control and selector switches shall be rated for 10 Amps at 240V AC or 20

Amps at 220V dc (inductive break). Switch for space heater supply and control voltage supply

shall normally be two pole rated for 25A A.C.

D. Control Terminal Blocks

1. Box - clamp type, 650V grade line up terminals of minimum 2.5 Sq.mm size shall be

provided. Connection to terminals shall be from front.

155

2. Not more than one wire on each side shall be connected on any terminal. Where duplication

of terminals block/s is necessary, suitable solid bonding links shall be incorporated.

3. Terminal blocks at different voltage shall be segregated into groups and distinctly labelled.

4. Current transformer secondary leads shall be brought to terminal blocks having facility for

short circuiting and grounding the secondary.

5. Terminals shall be numbered for identification and grouped according to function. Engraved

back on white PVC labels shall be provided on the terminal blocks describing the function of

the circuit.

6. Separate terminal stems shall be provided for internal and external wiring.

7. Control terminal blocks shall be so located that control cables are fully segregated from

power cables. Suitable insulated or earthed metal race ways shall be provided for control

wiring. Separate unrolled removable gland plate shall be provided for the control cables at the

bottom of each panel.

8. Minimum 10% of total number spare terminals shall be provided for future use.

2.11. NAME PLATES AND LABELS

A. One Name plate giving designation of the MV switchboard shall be affixed prominently on top of

the switch board. Details of designation will be specified.

B. Labels giving following details shall be affixed on each feeder panel: i. Feeder No. ii. Equipment

reference no. & Description iii. Rating (HP/KW/KVA/Amp.)

C. All components whether mounted inside or on the door shall be permanently and clearly labelled

with reference number/letter or their function. Rating of fuse shall be part of fuse designation.

Paper labels, stickers or labels fixed with adhesives are not acceptable. All labels shall be

properly fixed by screws with provision to prevent distortion due to expansion.

D. All labels shall be non-corroding, preferably laminated plastic or rear engraved Perspex with

white letters on black background.

E. Labels for feeder panel designation fixed on front side shall be fitted with chrome plated, self

tapping, and counter sunk head screws. These labels shall be of identical size to permit

interchange.

2.12. SPACE HEATERS

A. Adequately rated anti-condensation space heaters shall be provided in each cubicle.

B. Space heater/s shall be trip type, rated with operation voltage of 240V, 50 Hz. AC supply.

C. Each space heater shall be complete with a 2P MCB, 10KA and a control thermostat.

D. The space heater shall be rated for maintaining the panel inside temperature 10 Deg.C above

outside ambient temperature.

2.13. CUBICLE LIGHTING

A. Each cubicle shall be provided with interior lighting by means of CFL light fixture. An ON/OFF

switch/door switch shall be provided. The lighting fixture shall be suitable for operation from a

240V single phase, 50 Hz. A.C. supplies.

2.14. AUXILIARY SUPPLY

A. Auxiliary supply for control, indication, space heater etc. shall be made available at one point on

the switch board. Vendor shall provide suitable auxiliary supply in the switch board.

2.15. FUSES

A. Fuses shall be HRC cartridge link type (Diazed Fuses are not acceptable) and shall be provided

with operation indicator which shall be visible without removal of fuses from service.

156

B. Fuses shall be pressure fitted type and shall preferably have ribs on the contact blades to ensure

good line contact.

C. It shall be possible to handle fuses during off load conditions with full voltage available on the

terminals. Wherever required fuse pullers shall be provide. The fuse bases shall be so located in

the modules to permit insertion of fuse pullers and removal of fuse links without any problems.

D. Mounting of fuse fitting shall ensure adequate dissipation of heat generated and shall facilitate

inspection and easy replacement of fuse.

2.16. CONTACTORS

A. The contactors shall be air break type, equipped with three main contacts and minimum 2 NO + 2

NC auxiliary contacts. The main contacts of a particular contactor shall have AC 3 ratings for

unidirectional motors & AC 4 for reversible motors.

B. The auxiliary contacts shall be rated for minimum 5 Amps at 240V AC and 1.3 Amps at 110V DC

(Inductive load).

C. Unless specified otherwise, the coil of the contactor shall be suitable for operation on 240V, +

10% and – 15% 1 PH, AC supply. The contactor drop off voltage shall be between 15% to 65%

of the rated coil voltage.

2.17. SINGLE PHASING PREVENTOR (SPP)

A. Unless specified otherwise SPPs shall be provided in all motor starter modules with contactor

rating of 200 Amps and above. The SPP shall be of the current operated type and shall operate

on the principle of sensing negative sequence component of current.

B. In case of single phasing, the SPP shall operate after a time delay of 2 to 3 secs. The relay shall

be of the hand reset type and visual indication of the relay operation shall be available.

C. The SPP shall be suitable for protection of the non-reversible and reversible motors. The relay

operation shall be independent of the loading and RPM of the motor prior to the occurrence of

single phasing.

2.18. CABLE TERMINATION

A. The switch board panel shall be complete with suitable cable end termination for XLPE insulated

cables. Cable and sealing box shall preferably be mounted inside the panel. For XLPE cables

adequate space and clearances shall be made for heat shrinkable termination e.g. Raychem or

cold flowing stress grading joints.

B. Two earthing terminals shall be provided in each panel in cable box/cabling chamber for earthing

armour/screen.

C. Where more than one core is terminated on each phase, links suitably designed and properly

supported shall be provided to avoid unnecessary bending of cable cores without decreasing the

length of insulated cable tail. Electrical clearances which would normally be required when using

one core per phase shall be maintained.

D. Where core balance type current transformers are provided on switchgear feeder circuit cable/s

for earth fault protection sufficient space, clearance and support, mounting arrangement shall be

provided for the CT.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. All panel boards shall be inspected & tested in the presence of Owner/ Consultant‟s

representative and certified by the installation Engineer that it is safe before supply is energized,

and that all the equipment comply with the requirements of the Specification.

B. B. Generally such tests in the factory and repeated at site are as follows:

157

1. All routine tests specified in relevant Indian/British Standards shall be carried out on all circuit

breakers.

2. Test for protective relay operation by secondary injection method.

3. Operation of all meters.

4. Secondary wiring continuity test

5. Insulation test with 1000 Volts mugger, before and after voltage test.

6. HV test on secondary wiring and components on which such test is permissible (2 KV for one

minute)

7. Simulating external circuits for remote operation of breaker, remote indicating lights and other

remote operations, if any.

8. Measurement of power required for closing/trip coil of the breaker.

9. Pick up and drop out voltages for shunt trip and closing coils.

10. CT Polarity test.

11. Power frequency voltage withstand test.

12. Earth continuity tests;

13. Check of clearance and creep age distances;

14. Tests to prove correct operation of controls, interlocks, tripping and closing circuits,

indications, etc.;

15. Interfacing test with BMS control function

16. All other tests required by the Engineer to verify compliance with the Specification.

C. Triplicate sets of all principal test records and test certificates are to be supplied for all the tests

carried out in accordance with the Specification to the Engineer for approval before dispatch from

the factory.

D. All costs, materials, equipment, labour, etc. necessary for the execution of the testing shall be

included in this portion of work.

3.2. DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION

A. The Vendor shall furnish following drawings/documents in accordance with enclosed

requirements:

1. General Arrangement drawing of the Switchboard, showing front view, plan, foundation plan,

floor cut-outs/trenches for external cables and elevations, transport sections and weights.

2. Sectional drawings of the circuit breaker panels, showing general constructional features,

mounting details of various devices, bus bars, current transformers, cable boxes, terminal

boxes for control cables etc.

3. Schematic and control wiring diagram for circuit breaker and protection including indicating

devices, metering instruments, alarms, space heaters etc.

4. Terminal plans showing terminal numbers, ferrules markings, device terminal numbers,

function etc.

5. Relay wiring diagrams. 6. Equipment List.

B. Vendor shall furnish required number of copies of above drawings for Purchaser‟s review,

fabrication of switch boards shall start only after Purchaser‟s clearance for the same. After final

review, required number of copies and reproducible shall be furnished as final certified drawings.

C. The information furnished shall include the following:

1. Technical literature giving complete information of the equipment.

158

2. Erection, Operation and Maintenance Manual complete with all relevant information, drawings

and literature for auxiliary equipment and accessories, characteristics curves for relays etc.

3. A comprehensive spare parts catalogue.

3.3. TOOLS

A. One complete set of all special or non-standard tools required for installation, operation and

maintenance of the switch board shall be provided. The manufacturer shall provide a list of such

tools individually priced with his quotation.

3.4. SPARES

A. The manufacturer/tendered shall also supply a complete list of commissioning spares and tools.

The same shall be included in the bid price. No extra payment shall be made on account of non-

availability of spares during commissioning.

3.5. TRANSPORTATION

A. Panel boards are not allowed to be delivered to site until the electrical room or switch room is in a

clean and acceptable condition with lockable doors.

B. Panel boards, transported to site shall be fully covered with weatherproof covers and

transportation eye bolts shall be provided for handling at site.

C. Panel boards, which are poorly packed and result in signs of corrosion, will be rejected.

D. All necessary measures to cover and protect the panel boards at site shall be provided. Such

measures shall include a complete PVC blanket over the whole panel boards.

3.6. REJECTION OF PANELBOARDS

A. Deviation from specification must be stated in writing at the quotation stage.

B. In absence of such statement, it will be assumed that the requirements of the specifications are

met without expectation.

C. If any of the above tests fail to comply with the requirements of this Specification in any respect

whatsoever at any stage of manufacture, test, erection or on completion at site, the Engineer

may reject the item or defective component thereof, whichever is considered necessary, and

after adjustment or modification as directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit that item

for further inspection and/or test. In the event of the defective item being of such nature that the

requirements of this Specification cannot be fulfilled by adjustment or modification, such item is to

be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

Delivery of panel boards on site without significant cable connection (Say 80%) shall not entitle

progress payment certified for material delivery on site.

159

CIRCUIT BREAKER

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. SCOPE

A. Circuit breaker including Air-circuit breaker (ACB), Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB),

Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB) and Residual Current Circuit Breakers (RCCB / RCD) shall be

provided according to the specification.

B. All breakers shall be capable of withstanding the electrical, mechanical and thermal stress of the

prospective fault level experience. The prospective fault levels of the various breakers shall be

verified according to result in short circuit/co-ordination study specified in specification Section

11002.

C. The drawings, specification and BOQ complement each other and which is shown or called for

one shall be interpreted as being called for on both. Material, if any, which may not have been

specified but fairly required to make a complete assembly of switch gear as shown on the

drawing, specifications shall be construed as being required and no extra charges shall be

payable on this account.

1.2. STANDARDS

A. All equipment, material and components shall comply with the requirements of the latest editions

of Indian Standards with updated amendments. Standards and Regulations applicable in the

area where equipment is to be installed shall also be followed.

B. The equipment offered complying with other standards, these standards shall be equal to or

superior to those specified and full details of the differences shall be furnished along with the

tender.

C. The Panel boards shall be engineered and constructed in accordance with the latest revision of

the following Indian and British standards:

1. IS/IEC: 60947-2 : Air circuit breaker/molded case circuit breaker.

2. IS: 3156 : Voltage transformers.

3. IS: 2705 Part-I, II &III 1964 : Current transformers for metering and protection with

classification burden and insulation.

4. IS: 9224 : Low voltage fuse and protection.

5. IS: 3231 : Specification for electrical relays for power system protection.

6. IS:8623 : Specification for factory built assemblies of switchgear and

control gear for voltage unto and including 1000-V AC/1200 V-

DC.

7. IS: 4237 : General requirements for switch gear and control gear for

voltage not exceeding gear.

8. IS: 2147 : Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage

switch gear and control gear.

9. IS: 1018 : Switchgear and control gear selection/ installation and

maintenance.

10. IS: 1248 : Direct acting electrical indicating instruments.

11. IS: 375 : Arrangement for switchgear, bus bars, main connections,

auxiliary wiring and marking.

12. IS: 2959 : AC contactors for voltage not exceeding 1000V.

13. IS: 5578 : Guide for marking of insulated conductors.

160

14. IS: 11050 : Guide for forming system of marking and identification of

conductors & apparatus terminal.

15. IS: 1248 : Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring

instruments and testing accessories.

16. IS: 6005 : Code of practice for phosphating of iron & steel.

1. BS EN 60898 IEC 898 : Circuit breakers for over current protection for household and

similar installations. 2.BS EN 60947-

2. IEC 947-2 : Low-voltage switchgear and control gear, Part 2 circuit

breakers.

3. BS 54193. : Air-break switches, air-break disconnectors, and fuse

combination units for voltage up to and including 1000V AC and

1200 VDC.

4. BS 5486 : Low-voltage switchgear and control gear Part 1 assemblies.

Part 1 requirement for type tested and partially type tested

assemblies.

5. BS 4293 : Residual Current Circuit Breaker

D. D. BS/IEC or other National standards not mentioned above but are applicable to this installation

shall also apply.

1.3. SUBMISSION

A. A component list and catalogues.

B. Preparation of bill of materials for Different Items as mentioned in Schedule of Quantities.

C. Factory and site testing procedures and report formats shall also be included.

D. Protection co-ordination drawings/tables for complete power system.

E. Shop inspection and testing procedures.

F. Field testing and commissioning procedures.

G. General Arrangement drawing of the Switchboard, showing front view, plan, foundation plan,

floor cutouts/trenches for external cables and elevations, transport sections and weights.

H. Sectional drawings of the circuit breaker panels, showing general constructional features,

mounting details of various devices, bus bars, current transformers, cable boxes, terminal boxes

for control cables etc.

I. Schematic and control wiring diagram for circuit breaker and protection including indicating

devices, metering instruments, alarms, space heaters etc.

J. Terminal plans showing terminal numbers, ferrules markings, device terminal numbers, function

etc.

K. Relay wiring diagrams.

L. Equipment List.

M. Vendor shall furnish required number of copies of above drawings for Purchaser‟s review,

fabrication of switch boards shall start only after Purchaser‟s clearance for the same. After final

review, required number of copies and reproducible shall be furnished as final certified drawings.

N. The information furnished shall include the following:

1. Technical literature giving complete information of the equipment.

2. Erection, Operation and Maintenance Manual complete with all relevant information, drawings

and literature for auxiliary equipment and accessories, characteristics curves for relays etc.

161

3. A comprehensive spare parts catalogue. Any other work/activity which is not listed above;

however is necessary for completeness of electrical system.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Air circuit breakers shall be metal clad, flush mounted, horizontal draw out isolation, air break

type complying to IS/IEC 60947-2. Air circuit breakers shall have a rupturing capacity of not less

than short circuit current experienced at location of installation for 1 second certified by ASTA or

other recognized testing authorities.

B. The breaker shall be provided with variable microprocessor based releases for over load, short

circuit and earth fault protection (and shall be compatible with PC) and shall be in conformance

with this specifications.

C. All air circuit breakers (ACBs) shall be of draw-out type encased in metal clad housings. The

manufacturing of the breaker shall be such that there is no compulsory safety clearance imposed

around the breakers, in order to optimise the switchboard space requirement.

D. The ACBs shall be so manufactured that they comprise of main and arcing contacts of adequate

ratings and housed in reinforced polyester casings, offering double insulation from the front face

and ensuring no possibility of “Flashover” between phases. The main contacts shall have double-

actions in each pole and all contacts shall be silver-plated and replaceable.

E. Arc chutes with stainless steel filters shall be provided on each pole of the breaker as an efficient

means of arc control. The filters must be effective to minimize the diffusion of ionized gas outside

the breaker when the contacts open on short circuits. This manufacturing detail must be effective

at all levels of current for which the breaker is manufacture to operate. Any arc created as a

result of the opening of the breaker‟s contacts during fault conditions shall be completely

contained in the chute without any possibility of a “Flashover” between poles or to adjacent

earthed metallic parts.

F. The draw out version of ACBs shall have three indicated positions as follows:

a. The breaker is fully racked-in with all the main & auxiliaries engaged.

b. Connected: The breaker is fully racked-in with all the main & auxiliaries engaged.

c. Tested: The breaker is racked out and with the main disconnected, but all auxiliaries are still

connected.

d. Disconnected: The breaker is fully withdrawn and all circuits disconnected.

G. A clear means of Positive Contact Indication (PCI) shall be provided by a mechanical flag marked

“ON” or “OFF” to indicate the circuit breakers contact positions. The stored energy mechanism

shall also have clear indications marked “CHARGE” or “DISCHARGE” to reflect its status.

H. Safety shutters shall be provided to all draw out breakers in order to inhibit inadvertent access

(degree of protection IP20) to the “live” clusters when the breakers are in the “Test” or

“Disconnected” positions. It must be possible to padlock the safety shutters in the SHUT position.

I. Auxiliary switches shall be equipped for each breaker for indication, alarm and control purposes.

Auxiliary switches shall be robust, with double break-action, easily accessible for maintenance

and having adequate current ratings to carry the connected load. Each breaker shall have

provision for extending the number of auxiliary switches to cover future alarm or signalling circuit

requirements. All auxiliary circuitry wiring shall be connected on the front face of the breaker on a

set of disconnecting terminals to facilitate the automatic disconnection of auxiliary circuits when

the breaker is in the “Disconnected” position.

J. Circuit breakers shall be manufactured for optimum performance with minimum maintenance.

The mechanical endurance (C-O cycles) without maintenance shall be at least 12500 cycles for

breakers up to 1600A, 10000 cycles for breakers from 2000A to 4000A and 5000 cycles for

162

5000A and 6300A breakers. The electrical endurance (C-O cycles) at 440V without maintenance

shall be 10000 cycles for breakers up to 1600A, 8000 cycles for breakers of 2000A, 5000 cycles

for breakers of 2500A to 4000A and 1500 cycles for 5000A and 6300A breakers.

K. The circuit breakers shall be equipped with electrical motor operating mechanisms for automatic

charging of the stored energy spring mechanism. However, this shall not prohibit the breakers to

be operated manually, if required. Closing operations can be initiated either from the local push

button on the front face of the circuit breaker or by remote control. The closing coils shall be rated

at 230 v AC. After closing, the stored energy spring mechanism shall immediately be recharged

automatically by the motor, so as to be ready for next closing operation when the breaker trips.

L. Normal manual opening of the circuit breaker shall be accomplished either from the local push

button on the front face of the circuit breaker or by means of a trip coil. The trip coil must be

capable of carrying continuous rated current, i.e. being permanently energized, for electrical

interlocking purposes. The tripping mechanism shall be robustly built and stable without

possibility of being inadvertently operated by shock or jerk. The trip coil shall be manufactured

such that the plunger operates immediately when activated, without having undue delay for the

building up of the coil‟s magnetic field. Regardless of all circumstances, the speed of closing and

opening shall be independent of the operator.

M. The operating mechanism, carriage and hinged panel shall be so interlocked that it is not

possible to withdraw the circuit breaker while it is in the closed position. Closing of circuit breaker

in between service and disconnected position is also not possible and vice versa.

N. Provision shall be made so that it is possible to operate the circuit breaker mechanism when it is

in the disconnected position.

O. The main circuit breakers for the incoming supply and the bus-tie (couple) breaker shall be

mechanically and electrically interlocked such that only two of the three circuit breakers can be

closed at any one time. The mechanical interlock shall be achieved by means of Ronis keys and

electrical interlock by means of a permanently energized coil. The system shall be so arranged

that the withdrawal of any one circuit breaker shall in no way effect the operation of the others.

P. Pad locking facilities shall be provided for each breaker so that breaker operation can be locked

in a particular position if so indicated.

Q. The tests to verify the characteristics of circuit breaker shall include type tests, routine tests and

special tests.

1. Type test shall include:

a. Verification of temperature rise unit

b. Verification of dielectric properties

c. Verification of rated short-circuit making and breaker current

d. Verification of mechanical operation and endurance

2. Routine test shall include:

a. Mechanical operation tests

b. Calibration of releases

c. Dielectric tests

R. Other tests, which are to be carried out on request of the relevant authorities, shall be done on

the Vendor‟s account. Vendors must submit type test certificates issued by ASEFA, ASTA or

other recognized testing authorities together with the Technical documents or upon request.

163

2.2. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB)

A. The MCCB shall comply with IS/IEC 60947-2. The MCCB shall be provided with over current

protection by means of thermal and magnetic tripping element.

B. All MCCB tripping mechanism shall be ambient temperature compensated. MCCB of frame sizes

greater than 150 amps shall be equipped with continuously adjustable magnetic pick up setting.

MCCBs used for incoming main feeders shall in addition be provided with continuously

adjustable rated current settings in the range of 50 to 100% rated current.

C. The MCCBs shall have quick make and quick break mechanism independent of the operating

speed. The tripping mechanism shall be mechanically “trip free” from the handle so that the

handle cannot be closed against fault conditions. All MCCBs should have isolation feature and

line load reversibility.

D. The MCCB shall be provided with door interlock handles. All handles shall be large and robust to

carry out the switching operation with ease. The handle shall clearly indicate the “ON”, “OFF” and

“TRIP” positions. The handle shall be able to be locked in the “ON” or “OFF” positions. When

locked in the “ON” position it shall still be possible for the handle to indicate “TRIP” when the

MCCB has tripped. An interlock release mechanism shall be provided to enable the door to be

opened when the MCCB is locked in the “ON” position.

E. Multi-pole MCCB shall have a common-trip bar so that a fault condition on any one pole of the

MCCB will cause all poles to trip simultaneously.

F. The MCCB interrupting capacity shall be not less than that indicated on the drawings and back

up discrimination/ cascading charts should be submitted of the OEM. G. MCCBs of ratings 200A

and above shall be of Busbar termination type, adaptable for use with bolts and cable lugs.

G. Automatic change over MCCBs shall be of the motorised type, fully withdrawable, with both

mechanical and electrical interlock. The transfer operation shall be controllable by an adjustable

time delay of between 0.1 to 30 sec. The actual transfer time of the MCCBs shall not exceed 2

sec. The motor mechanism shall utilise universal motor with electromagnetic clutch and shall be

equipped with full handles to allow manual operation of the MCCB. All automatic change over

MCCBs shall have a minimum mechanical life of 10,000 operations.

H. MCCB when used for motor protection shall have characteristics suitable for the motor starting.

Standard range MCCB shall not be substituted for motor protection circuits.

I. All fully withdrawable MCCB shall have interlocks to prevent withdrawal when the MCCB is “ON”.

J. All main moulded case circuit breaker shall be provided with at least 2 pairs N/O and N/C

auxiliary contact.

K. Indicating lamps shall be of the panel mounting, LED type and shall have execution plates

marked with its function wherever necessary. The colour of the lamp cover shall be red for „ON‟

and green for „OFF‟ indicating lamps shall be provided with series resistor.

2.3. MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

A. MCBs shall comply with IEC 898:1995. They shall be of the current limiting type having a sealed

ambient temperature independent thermal magnetic tripping mechanism providing overload and

short circuit protection. All MCBs shall be of 35mm D/N symmetrical rail mounted type.

B. The breaking capacity of MCBs shall be at least equal to the prospective fault level at the point

installation, unless back-up by a current limiting upstream breaker of the same make.

C. The MCB operating mechanism shall be mechanically trip free from the operating handle so as to

prevent the contacts from being held closed against short circuit and overload conditions. It shall

be of the automatic resetting type.

D. The individual operating mechanism of each pole of a multi-pole MCB shall be directly linked

within the MCB casing and not with the operating handles.

164

E. The operating handle shall betr“ of the toggle type with possibility for mounting of padlocking

facility.

F. Each pole shall be provided with bi-metallic thermal element for overload protection and

magnetic element for short circuit protection.

G. It shall be possible to fit on site auxiliaries like shunt-trip coil, under-voltage release, ON/OFF

switch or alarm switch.

2.4. RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS (RCCB)

A. RCCB shall comply with BS 4293 and shall be of the current operated type.

B. The RCCBs shall be manufactured to trip within 0.1 second for 30 mA.

C. The RCCBs shall be of 2-pole construction for single phase and 4-pole construction for 3 phases.

D. All RCCBs shall be complete with test buttons.

E. All RCCBs shall be batch tested and bear the appropriate test label of approval to SEB

requirement.

F. All RCCBs shall be of high sensibility type as appropriate and as specified in the drawing. They

shall be of surge proof manufacture to prevent nuisance tripping due to transient over voltage.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. All Switch gears shall be inspected & tested in the presence of Owner/ Consultant‟s

representative and certified by the installation Engineer that it is safe before supply is energized,

and that all the equipment comply with the requirements of the Specification.

B. All routine tests specified in relevant Indian/British Standards shall be carried out on all circuit

breakers.

1. Test for protective relay operation by primary or secondary injection method.

2. Operation of all meters.

3. Secondary wiring continuity test

4. Insulation test with 1000 Volts megger, before and after voltage test.

5. HV test on secondary wiring and components on which such test is permissible (2 KV for one

minute)

6. Simulating external circuits for remote operation of breaker, remote indicating lights and other

remote operations, if any.

7. Measurement of power required for closing/trip coil of the breaker.

8. Pick up and drop out voltages for shunt trip and closing coils.

9. CT Polarity test.

10. Tests to prove correct operation of controls, interlocks, tripping and closing circuits,

indications, etc.;

11. Interfacing test with BMS control function.

12. All other tests required by the Engineer to verify compliance with the Specification.

C. Vendor shall provide all facilities such as power supply, testing instruments and apparatus

required for carrying out the tests.

D. Required copies of test certificates for all the tests carried out along with copies of type test

certificates and certificates from Sub-Vendor for the components procured from them are to be

submitted before dispatch of switch boards.

165

3.2. TOOLS

A. One complete set of all special or non-standard tools required for installation, operation and

maintenance of the switch board shall be provided. The manufacturer shall provide a list of such

tools with his quotation.

3.3. SPARES

A. The manufacturer/tenderer shall also supply a complete list of commissioning spares and tools.

The same shall be included in the bid price. No extra payment shall be made on account of non-

availability of spares during commissioning.

3.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Quality Assurance shall follow the requirements of Owner/ Consultant as applicable.

B. Quality Assurance involvement will commence at enquiry and follow through to completion and

acceptance thus ensuring total conformity to Purchaser‟s requirements.

3.5. DEVIATIONS

A. Deviation from specification must be stated in writing at the quotation stage.

B. In absence of such a statement, it will be assumed that the requirements of the specifications are

met without exception.

C. If any of the above tests fail to comply with the requirements of this Specification in any respect

whatsoever at any stage of manufacture, test, erection or on completion at site, the Engineer

may reject the item or defective component thereof, whichever is considered necessary, and

after adjustment or modification as directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit that item

for further inspection and/or test. In the event of the defective item being of such nature that the

requirements of this Specification cannot be fulfilled by adjustment or modification, such item is to

be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

166

CONDUIT SYSTEM, CABLE TRAY, CABLE LADDER AND TRUNKING

INSTALLATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. WORK DESCRIPTION

A. This section describes the supply and installation of wiring facilities systems include conduits,

cable trays, cable ladder and Trunking system, c/w associated fittings and accessories.

B. All cables run above the suspended false ceiling, concealed in walls, columns, or on surface shall

be supported by conduits, cable tray and Trunking or cable ladder system. No free slinging cable

is allowed.

C. The cable routes as shown in the drawings shall be used as a guide only. Prior to the installation,

the cable routes shall be coordinated with other services. Uncoordinated and inaccessible routes

after other services are installed, shall be relocated at the expense of the Contractor.

D. All conduits, trunking, cable trays and cable ladders shall be earthed in accordance to IS: 4043.

1.2. STANDARDS

A. The complete wiring facilities system shall be manufactured, supplied, installed and tested in

accordance with the latest revision of the India-Delhi standards and the appropriate BS/IEC

include:

1. Steel Conduit and Fitting Accessories IS:9537 (Part-II)/ BS4568 & BS731

2. PVC Conduit and Fitting Accessories IS-9537/1983 (Part-III)/BS6099 & BS4607

3. Cable Tray BS729

4. Cable Ladder BS729

5. Cable Trunking BS4678

B. The complete wiring facilities system shall also conform to the requirements of all relevant local

codes, as applicable, together with the additional requirements referred to in this Specification

and Drawings, whichever is the more stringent and acceptable to the Engineer.

C. In the adoption of standards and requirements, the Contractor shall take the following

precedence:

1. Engineer‟s decision;

2. Local codes of practice;

3. Drawings;

4. Specification;

5. International standards and requirements

1.3. SUBMISSIONS

A. All technical submissions shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the respective stages of

construction. Routing of installation Sample with proprietary factory-made accessories, elbows,

risers, reducers, tees, crosses, etc.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. STEEL CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES

A. Steel Conduit

1. All conduits shall be of heavy gauge solid drawn ERW welded manufactured out of 16

(1.6mm) gauge MS Sheet up to 32mm dia and of 14 (2 mm) gauge for sizes higher than this.

2. Both inner and outer surfaces shall be smooth without burrs, dents and kinks.

167

3. Conduits shall be black stove enamelled inside and outside. The cross section of conduit

shall be uniform throughout.

4. The welding shall be uniform such that welded joints do not yield when subjected to flattening

test. Welded joint shall not break when threaded or bent at an angle.

5. Conduit shall conform to specifications of IS: 9537 (Part-II) and the capacity of conduits shall

be in accordance with the standards and shall never be exceeded.

6. The minimum size of the conduit shall be 19/20mm dia.

7. Care shall be taken to ensure that all conduits are adequately protected while stored at site

prior to erection and no damaged conduit shall be used.

B. Fittings

1. Samples of conduit fittings shall be submitted for approval prior to installation.

2. Fittings shall be those intended for use with screwed conduits and shall comply with IS 9537.

However, bends, elbows and tees shall not be installed.

3. Boxes and cover plates that are installed outdoors shall have fixing lugs exterior to the box so

that fixing screws do not enter the box interior.

4. Adaptors used with flexible conduits shall conform to IS: 9537.

C. Circular Boxes

1. Circular boxes shall be of malleable cast iron, galvanized and of standard pattern with

spout(s). When used for connecting lengths of conduits, circular boxes shall be provided with

cover plates of similar make that are complete with brass fixing screws.

D. Rectangular Boxes

1. Rectangular boxes (adaptable boxes) shall be of mild steel not less than 2.4 mm gauge and

galvanized. When used as junction boxes, lids of the same gauge with brass fixing screws

shall be used.

E. Boxes for Accessories

1. Boxes for accessories shall be suitable for surface mounting or recessed mounting according

to the requirements. Surface mounted boxes and accessories shall be metal clad pattern.

Recessed boxes and accessories shall be complete with insulated moulded type cover plates

conforming to IS: 5133 Part I-1969.

F. Covers

1. All covers for boxes, etc shall be made of galvanized steel of 1.2 mm thickness.

2.2. PVC CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES

A. PVC Conduit

1. 1. All conduits shall be high impact rigid 2mm thickness PVC heavy duty type and shall

comply with I.E.E. regulations for non-metallic conduit 2mm thick as per IS-9537/1983 (Part-

III).

2. All sections of conduit and relevant boxes shall be properly cleaned and glued by using epoxy

resin glue and the proper connecting pieces.

3. Inspection type conduit fittings such as inspection boxes, drawn boxes, fan boxes and outlet

boxes shall be M.S. or otherwise mentioned.

4. Conduit shall be terminated with adopter/PVC glands as required.

B. PVC Conduit Accessories

1. Accessories used for conduit wiring shall be of an approved type complying to IS: 3837-

1966.

168

2. All accessories used shall be of standard white or black colour, identical to conduit used.

3. Plain conduits should be jointed by slip type of couplers with manufacturer‟s standard sealing

cement.

4. All conduit entries to outlet boxes, Trunking and switchgear are to be made with adaptors

female thread and male bushes screwed.

5. PVC-switch and socket boxes with round knockouts are to be used. The colours of these

boxes and the conduits shall be the same.

6. Standard PVC circular junction boxes are to be used with conduits for intersection, Tee-

junction, angle-junction and terminal. For the drawing-in of cables, standard circular through

boxes shall be used.

7. Samples of accessories shall be submitted for approval prior to installation.

8. All jointing of PVC conduits shall be by means of adhesive jointing. Adequate expansion

joints shall be allowed to take up the expansion of PVC conduits.

2.3. CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Layout

1. The conduit layout and conduit routes shall be submitted for approval. Allowance for

adjustments due to site conditions shall be provided with no extra cost.

2. Conduit routes shall be chosen for easy, straight runs with a minimum of bends and

crossings. Generally they shall follow the structure of building, running at right angles or in

parallel to floors and ceilings. Conduits shall be kept within 300 mm of floors and ceilings

when running parallel to them.

3. Outlet boxes for housing accessories shall be used as draw boxes. The total number of draw

boxes shall be kept to a minimum and shall be provided so that conduit runs do not exceed

12 m or have more than two right angle bends.

4. All conduits shall be kept clear of gas and water pipes. In particular, conduits shall be at least

150 mm away from gas pipes. Where proximity to these pipes is unavoidable, they shall be

effectually segregated e.g. using rubber or other insulating material to prevent appreciable

voltage differences at possible points of contact. Segregation from extra low voltage circuits

and telecommunication circuits shall also apply unless these are wired to the same voltage

requirements as lighting and power circuits.

5. Conduits from different distribution boards shall not be connected to the same junction box.

Each run of conduit shall be assembled complete with draw-in-wires.

B. Joints and Terminations

1. Electrical and mechanical continuity shall be maintained throughout all conduit joints and

terminations. Conduit threads shall be thoroughly cleaned and the conduits tightly screwed.

The conduit system shall be watertight after installation.

2. Conduits shall be connected using couples or via boxes. With a coupler, the ends of the

conduit shall butted close together and the running coupler is screwed tightly on and

tightened by a locknut.

3. Conduits terminating into boxes provided with spouts shall be threaded so that there are no

exposed threads. For boxes with no spouts, the termination shall be made using a brass bush

and a coupler. The conduit is pushed through the knockout or drilled entry and the bush is

screwed tightly onto its end. The coupler is screwed to butt firmly against the exterior wall of

the box.

4. Where conduits are not jointed or terminated in boxes, they shall be terminated in a screwed

brass bush.

169

5. In all joints and terminations, conduit threads shall not be exposed. Where this cannot be

avoided as in a running coupler, the exposed threads shall be coated with red lead paint to

seal against the ingress of water.

C. Bends

1. Conduits shall only be bent cold with an approved type of bending block or bending machine,

without altering the dimensions of their sections.

2. All conduit bends shall be such as to permit compliance to the requirements for bends in

cables to as stated in the BS 7671.

3. Bends shall be made with as large a radius as the position of the conduit within the building

permits. Where the bend is more than 90 degree, circular or rectangular junction boxes are to

be used for connecting conduits.

D. Cabling

1. The conduit system must be completely installed and free of obstructions and sharp corners

before any cables are drawn in. Conduits shall be thoroughly swabbed to remove moisture

and dirt immediately prior to the drawing in of cables.

2. Cables shall be drawn without crossing each other and shall not be pulled against the walls of

the draw boxes. Slack cables shall left in all draw boxes.

3. Cables shall be continuous throughout conduit lengths and no joints are permitted. There

shall be no kink in cables, neither any cut, abrasion or chink in the cable insulation.

4. The same conduit shall carry the lead and return conductors bunched together. However, the

same conduit shall not house cables from different distribution boards.

5. Cables for power and lighting circuits and extra low voltage systems shall not be drawn into

the same conduit. Lighting and power final circuits shall be run in separate conduits except,

where an adaptable box is employed as final distribution point, a number of final circuits may

be grouped together in larger conduits between the distribution board and the adaptable box

provided that all final circuits in one conduit are of the same phase. In the case of three phase

circuits, all three phases including neutral, if any, shall be drawn into the same conduit.

6. Conduits shall not constitute the earth continuity path for the electrical circuit. A separate

circuit protective conductor shall be installed within the conduit. The whole conduit system

shall be effectively earthed.

7. Flexible conduits shall also have a separate earthing conductor installed within the tubing and

connected at conduit ends. Flexible conduits in general shall not be used for more than 3m

length.

8. Maximum number of PVC insulated 650/1100 V grade/copper conductor cable conforming to

IS:694-1990

Nominal 20mm 25mm 32mm 38mm 51mm 64mm

Cross- Sectional

area of Conductor

in Sq.mm

S B S B S B S B S B S B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

1.50 5 4 10 8 18 12 - - - - - -

2.50 5 3 8 6 12 10 - - - - - -

4 3 2 6 5 10 8 - - - - - -

6 2 - 5 4 8 7 - - - - - -

10 2 - 4 3 6 5 8 6 - - - -

170

16 - - 2 2 3 3 5 5 10 7 12 8

25 - - - - 3 2 5 3 8 6 9 7

35 - - - - - - 3 2 6 5 8 6

50 - - - - - - - - 5 3 6 5

70 - - - - - - - - 4 3 5 4

Note:

i. The above table shows the maximum capacity of conduits for a simultaneous drawing in of

cables.

ii. The columns heads „S‟ apply to runs of conduits which have distance not exceeding 4.25 m

between draw in boxes and which do not deflect from the straight by an angle of more than

15 degrees. The columns heads „B‟ apply to runs of conduit which deflect from the straight by

an angle of more than 15 degrees.

iii. Conduit sizes are the nominal external diameters.

E. Access and Drainage

1. The conduit system shall be rewirable, that is, draw boxes must be accessible for the

purpose. Where boxes are concealed, their covers shall be flushed with the finished surface.

2. The need for accessibility notwithstanding, the conduit system shall be protected against the

ingress of water and impurities. When installed, conduits shall be kept dry and free of debris

with approved pipe plugs or caps. Such plugging is especially essential prior to pouring

concrete for concealed installation. As for boxes, they shall be covered by steel plates prior to

concreting.

3. When installed outdoor, and in situations liable to condensation of moisture, conduits shall be

arranged to be self draining, so that water may drain to low points which are fitted with a drain

plug. Conduits laid under concrete floors shall have watertight floor-traps of approved detail

for access of these drainage points.

4. Conduits run on surfaces other than structural steel members shall be secured using

galvanized space bar saddles and brass fixing screws. Spacing of saddles shall not exceed

1.2 m for conduit sizes up to and including 25 mm and 1.8 m for sizes 32 mm and above.

5. Conduits run on structural steel shall be secured using girder clips or an approved clamp.

These conduits and those run in the vicinity of structural steel shall be bonded to the

steelwork using an efficient and permanent metallic connection. The conduits shall not in any

way be under mechanical stress.

6. All conduit boxes except loop-in patterns shall be fixed direct to the building structure in

addition to the support provided by the conduits.

7. Conduits terminating into surface boxes shall be secured by a minimum of 3 saddles at not

less than 32 mm, 150 mm and 300 mm respectively from the box.

8. Conduits shall be painted with an approved paint to blend with visual environment. A zinc rich

undercoat shall be provided before painting the final coat.

2.4. CABLE TRAY

A. Cable tray shall be of perforated type and constructed a minimum 2.0 mm hot dipped galvanized

mild steel for outdoor damp condition, and epoxy coated electro-galvanized mild steel for indoor

installation. All cable trays shall be installed in a straight run parallel to walls where possible.

B. Cable trays shall be supported by electro-galvanized „U‟ channel with galvanized threaded rod for

indoor suspended tray and hot-dipped galvanized for area subject to weather.

171

C. All hangers shall be installed at 1 metre intervals and shall be primed and painted to match with

the surrounding building finish approved by the Engineer.

D. For cable tray that are exposed to the weather, a hot-dip galvanized covers of 1.5mm gauge

steel, flush fixing type with gasket, shall be installed on top of the tray.

E. Depending on the size of cable trays spare space of 25% shall be maintained for future

expansion.

F. Copper earth link bar shall be fixed at every joint of the cable tray run.

2.5. CABLE LADDER

A. All cable ladders and accessories installed indoors shall be heavy-duty epoxy coated electro-

galvanized mild steel type. All cable ladders installed outdoors shall be heavy-duty hot dipped

galvanized hot rolled mild steel. Thickness of the mild steel shall not be less than 2 mm.

B. Cable ladder shall have a 150 mm high longitudinal side member for ladders width of 800 mm or

above and 120 mm high longitudinal side member for ladder width less than 800 mm.

C. The rugs shall be at least 50 mm wide, with slots of 25 mm x 10 mm at 25 mm intervals covering

the length of the rungs. The rungs shall be space at 300 mm apart along straight lengths of the

ladder.

D. All nuts, bolts and washers for clips and brackets shall be zinc plated. Each a“cable ladder shall

be in standard manufacturer‟s length and supplied complete with coupling sets consisting of

fishplates, spined bolts, nuts and locking washers.

E. The complete cable ladder installation shall be provided with all necessary proprietary factory-

made elbows, risers, reducers, tees, crosses, drop-outs, etc. and any site fabricated items will

not be permitted.

F. Separate flexible earth continuity connectors of at least 16mm2 copper jumpers shall be installed

between the ladder sections.

G. All cables ladders shall be supported from the ceiling concrete slab, steel structures or sidewalls

using a frame system, with overhead hangers, support channels, hanger rods or angle brackets,

beam clams and ceiling brackets.

H. Fixings and supports shall be installed at regular intervals not exceeding 1000 mm and 150 mm

from all bends, tees, inter-sections and risers.

I. When cable ladder is refined to install across structure expansion joints, the ladder shall be in

two sections between supports installed on either side of the expansion joint.

J. The ladder sections shall than be jointed with expansion joint fishplates, bolts, nuts and washers

installed in elongated holes permitting a lengthwise movement of 25 mm from the initial fastening

position.

K. For cable ladder that are exposed to the weather, a hot-dip galvanized covers of 1.5mm gauge

steel, flush fixing type with gasket, shall be installed on top of the ladder.

L. Copper earth link bar shall be fixed at every joint of the cable ladder run.

2.6. CABLES TRUNKING

A. Cable trunking shall be manufactured from 1.6 mm minimum electro-galvanized mild sheet steel

to BS4678 finished in oven-baked electrostatically coated epoxy power coating with color to the

Engineer‟s choice.

B. All trunking shall have removable lids extending over their entire lengths. Lids shall be fixed at

interval not exceeding 1 metre by means of brass steel screws which and protected against

corrosion by a finish of zinc coating or equivalent to zinc coating.

C. Factory-made bends, joints, elbow, riser, tee, reducer and accessories with same material shall

be provided throughout the installation for trunking.

172

D. Trunking space factor shall be in compliance with latest IS standards.

E. Copper earth link bar shall be fixed at every joint of the cable trunking run. Note: All items

mentioned in this section shall be manufactured to comply with the specifications of National

Electrical Code (NEC) and National Electrical Manufacturer‟s Association (NEMA)

173

EARTHING SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. WORK DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the engineering, supply, installation, testing, commissioning and setting to

work of the complete earthing network for individual earthing systems, circuit protective

conductors and bonding conductors. A complete earthing network comprising cables, copper

tapes, electrodes and earth bonding of all relevant necessary non-current carrying metal parts of

equipments/ apparatus shall have connected as required.

B. The system shall have a common earthing system as described in the Specification and as

shown on the Drawings. Individual earthing systems shall be provided as follows as per drawing.

Earth main MV/LV/Generator Electrical Earthing shall have 2 connection to the earthing system:

1. MV Electrical Earthing

2. LV Electrical Earthing

3. Generator Earthing

4. ELV Earthing

5. Data Communication Earthing

C. Sufficient numbers of electrodes interconnected by Cooper/ GI (as per BOQ) to form earthing

mat so that the overall earth resistance shall be less than 1 ohm for each individual earthing mat.

D. The number of earth electrodes of the earthing mat are indicated on the drawings as minimum.

The Contractor shall test the resistivity of soil at site. Exact number of earth electrodes shall be

determined by the Contractor to achieve the earth resistance value subject to Engineer approval.

The complete earthing installation include earth plate, earth mat detail to achieve the earth

resistance value shall be included in the Contract.

E. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer or his representative before driving Plate/ pipe earthing

into the ground so that he may supervise the operation. Driving shall be carried out only in the

presence of the Engineer or the representative and all earthing plates/ pipes shall be submitted

for the examination before use.

1.2. STANDARDS

A. Complete earthing system shall be engineering and constructed in accordance with the latest

revision of the following standards and the appropriate BS/IEC: 1.

1. IS: 3043 : Earthing

2. BS6651 : Lightning Protection System

3. IEC 61024-1-2 : Lightning Protection System

B. The detail of the Earthing System shall also conform to the requirements of all relevant local

codes, as applicable, together with the additional requirements referred to in this Specification

and Drawings, whichever is the more stringent and acceptable to the Engineer.

1.3. SUBMISSION

A. All technical submissions shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the respective stages of

construction.

B. As minimum requirement, the submission shall include the following:

1. Shop Drawings and Sample Submission;

2. Builder‟s work requirements;

3. Testing procedures and report format for testing of the earth electrodes and/or earth strips;

174

4. Soil resisting test report with calculation report for the details of the earthing system detail

including quantity and layout of earth electrodes and/or earth strips to achieve the required

earth resistance. The report shall be endorsed by the Contractor‟s Installation Engineer who

supervise and endorse the installation upon completion;

5. Proposed details of earthing system including quantity and layout of the earth electrodes

and/or earth strips according to the calculation result.

PART 2 – PRODUCT

2.1. GENERAL

A. The resistance between earthing system and the general mass of earth shall not be greater than

1 ohm.

B. The earth loop resistance to any point in the electrical system shall not be in excess of 0.5 ohms

in order to ensure satisfactory operation of protective devices.

C. The resistance to earth shall be measured at the following:-

1. At each electrical system ground or system neutral ground.

2. At one point on each grounding system used to ground electrical equipment enclosures.

3. At one point on each grounding system used to ground wiring system enclosures such as

metal conduits and cable sheaths or armoured.

D. All earthing conductors shall be of high conductivity copper/ G.I. as per B.O.Q. and shall

protected against mechanical damage. The cross-sectional area of earth conductors shall not be

smaller than half that of the largest current carrying conductor. However, the contractor shall use

the sizes specified in the bill of quantities of the Tender. Common earth mats of resistivity of less

than one (1) ohm, shall be constructed below the lowest floor structure prior to any ground work

construction. The earth mats shall comprise the complete earth electrodes, earth strips/grids,

earth inspection chambers, earth leads, main earth terminals, earth test link boxes at ground

level, etc. Each individual earthing system shall have earth leads connecting its main earth

terminal directly to an earth electrode underground as specified.

E. All earthing products/accessories shall be according to IS standards.

F. The mating surface of all tapes at joints etc shall be cleaned before clamping and all joints shall

be riveted, joint with proper connector or exothermic welded. All connections to electrical

apparatus shall be made by a bolted connection in a visible and accessible position

2.2. PIPE EARTH ELECTRODE

A. G.I. pipe shall be of medium class 100mm dia and 3m in length.

B. G.I. Pipe electrode shall be cut tapered at bottom and provided with holes of 12mm dia drilled not

less than 7.5cm from each other upto 2m of length from bottom.

C. The electrode shall be buried in the ground vertically with its top not less than 20cm below

ground level.

D. Clamping of the earth leads to the earth rod shall be made by earth clamp. The clamps shall be

capable of providing a high pressure contact between the earth rod and the earth leads to

achieve a low contact resistance.

E. When two or more electrodes are driven to form a group, the heads of the electrodes in the group

shall be bonded to each other by means of a 25 mm x 3mm GI/ Copper strip, laid at a depth of at

least 600 mm in soil.

F. All earth electrode penetrations through basement water proofing membranes shall be provided

with manufacturer‟s recommended water seal insert sleeve approved by Engineer. The

installation of the water seal insert sleeve shall be under the supervision and endorsed by the

manufacturer‟s representative to ensure the installation comply with the manufacturer installation

detail.

175

2.3. PLATE EARTH ELECTRODE

A. The plate earth electrode shall consist of copper plate or G.I. plate as per item of work. The plate

electrode shall be buried in ground with its faces vertical and top not less than 4.5m below

Ground level. The plate shall be filled with charcoal dust and common salt filling, extending 15cm

around it‟s on all sides.

B. A watering pipe of 50mm dia of medium class G.I pipe shall be provided.

C. The top of the pipe shall be provided with a funnel and a G.I. mesh screen for watering the earth.

In the case of pipe electrode a removable plug shall be provided.

D. The earthing lead from electrode onwards shall be suitably protected from mechanical injury by a

suitable dia medium class G.I. pipe in case of wire and size according to strip size.

E. The overlapping of strips at joints shall done in approved manner

a. GI strips shall be riveted with rivets/ bolted and welded.

b. Copper strips shall be riveted with rivets/ bolted brass nuts, bolts and washers and brazed.

F. The protection pipe within ground shall be buried at least 30 cm deep (to be increased to 60cm in

case of road crossing and pavements).

G. The portion within the building shall be recessed in walls and floors to adequate depth.

H. In the case of plate earth electrode the earthing lead shall be securely bolted to the plate with two

bolts, nuts, check nuts and washers.

I. In case of pipe electrode, it shall be connected by means of a through bolt, nuts and washers and

cable socket.

J. Main earthing conductor is taken from the earth electrode with which the connection is to be

made.

K. No earth pit shall be fixed within 1.5 M of a wall of foundation. The location of the earth electrode

will be such where the soil has reasonable chance of remaining moist. Effort shall be made to

locate them in grass lawns or near flower beds or water taps.

2.4. EARTH INSPECTION CHAMBER

A. Earth electrode shall be fitted with a heavy-duty pre-cast concrete inspection chamber/pit

complete with heavy-duty cover as specified on drawings.

B. For earth electrodes located outside or on the apron of the building, earth inspection chambers

shall extend to a depth of not less than 300 mm below finished ground level and kept free of soil.

For earth electrodes located inside building, earth electrodes shall be buried not less than 100

mm below the floor slab structure. Each earth electrode shall be clearly marked „SAFETY

ELECTRICAL EARTH CONNECTION – DO NOT REMOVE.

C. The chamber and cover shall be heavy duty detail to consider the traffic load at the location of

installation. The cover shall be recessed cover to receive the Architectural floor finish at the

location of installation.

2.5. EARTH STRIP

A. Earth strips/grids shall be of bare GI/ Copper strips of 25 mm x 3 mm as specified.

B. Earth strips shall be riveted or joint with proper connector to earth electrodes underground below

the floor slab structure, and shall be buried not less than 300 mm below the floor slab structure.

C. In order to minimise the mutual inductance between strips, earth strips shall be positioned at a

distance not less than 6m apart unless otherwise specified.

176

PART 3 – EARTH BONDING

3.1. CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR

A. Circuit protective conductor (CPC) is a system of conductors joining together all exposed

conductive parts and connecting them to the main earth terminal.

B. The purpose of circuit protective conductor is to provide a path for earth fault circuit so that the

protective device will operate to remove dangerous potential differences during a fault condition.

C. The circuit protective conductors shall take the form of separate cable with a sheath in

green/yellow color or copper tape of minimum size 25mm x 3mm.

D. All exposed non-current carrying metal parts of light fittings, switchgears, motors, enclosures, etc.

shall be effectively earthed by circuit protective conductors for earth continuity protection.

E. For equipment where an earth terminal is provided, the earth continuity wire shall be firmly

clamped. Where no earth terminal is provided, the exposed metal part shall be cleaned of paint

and surface rust before welding the earth continuity lead. F. The minimum size of the principal

protective conductors shall be in accordance with to the current edition of IS: 3043/ BS7671 and

BS7430.

F. The external earth terminal on the outside of the end panel of any switchboard shall be

connected to the main earth bar provided in two independent points.

G. Circuit protective conductors shall be provided in electrical and mechanical rooms and along the

routes for the bonding of all exposed conductive parts and extraneous conductive parts. A

suitably sized earth terminal shall be provided at each zone of the building for this purpose.

H. All exposed conductive parts shall be effectively connected in an approved manner to the

principal protective conductors. The circuit protective conductors shall be single core copper

cables or high conductivity annealed copper tapes specified. Unless otherwise specified, the

minimum cross sectional area of the circuit protective conductors shall be selected in accordance

with IS:3043/ BS7671:

177

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. WORK DESCRIPTION

A. The work to be done under this section comprises the engineering, supply and installation

necessary for the complete installation of the Lightning Protection System.

B. The Lightning Protection System shall be installed generally in accordance with BS6651 and IEC

61024-1-2 and additional requirements of this specification. The system shall be of the Faraday-

cage type and shall consist of air terminations, down conductors, joints and bonds, testing joints,

earth terminations and earth electrodes. The general arrangement shall be as indicated on the

Drawings.

C. The lightning protection system shall comprise:- 1. Air Terminations; 2. Down Conductors; 3.

Joints and Bonds; 4. Test Links 5. Earth Terminations.

D. Lightning protection system employing steel structural and reinforcement system as part of the

down conductors shall be adopted as per Drawing specified. All requirements in the specification

included cast-in re-bar down conductors shall be applied unless otherwise specified.

1.2. STANDARDS

A. Complete installation shall be engineering and constructed in accordance with the latest revision

of the following standards and the appropriate BS/IEC : IS 2309 - Lighting Protection System

BS6651 - Protection of Structures against Lightning AS 1768 - Lightning Protection BS 7671 -

Electrical Installation IEC 61024-1- 2 - Lightning Protection System

B. The detail of the lightning protection system shall also conform to the requirements of all relevant

local codes, as applicable, together with the additional requirements referred to in this

Specification and Drawings, whichever is the more stringent and acceptable to the Engineer.

C. In the adoption of standards and requirements, the Contractor shall take the following

precedence:

1. Engineer‟s decision;

2. Local codes of practice;

3. Drawings;

4. Specification;

5. International standards and requirements.

1.3. SUBMISSION

A. All technical submissions shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the respective stages of

construction. B. As a minimum requirement, the submission shall include the following:

1. Equipment submission with manufacturer‟s data;

2. Sample submission;

3. Shop Drawings showing the co-ordinate routing of air terminations, down conductors bonding

to re-bar and foundation earth terminations, methods of fixing etc.

4. Builder‟s works requirement.

5. Proposal on testing procedures and report format for testing of the Lightning Protection

System.

6. Detail of the Contractor‟s installation Professional Engineer who supervise and endorse the

installation for occupation permit application.

178

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.1. AIR TERMINATION

A. The Contractor shall supply and install an air termination system consisting of continuous

horizontal conductors.

B. The conductors shall comprise of 25mm x 3mm GI/ Copper tape unless otherwise specified,

located as shown on the Drawings and securely fixed in place to the building structure. Wherever

possible, the horizontal conductors shall be continuous lengths.

C. Where saddled to masonry, the fixing screws shall be set in expansion type plugs contained in

properly formed holes.

D. All roof conductors are to be secured at intervals not exceeding 900mm.

E. The Drawings showing the various roof levels of the building indicate the general arrangement

and layout of the air termination system. The Contractor shall ensure that the whole of the air

termination system is installed over its total route of the roof areas maintaining absolute electrical

continuity.

F. Provision shall be made with suitable fittings to allow for expansion and contraction of the

horizontal conductors.

G. 500mm height vertical GI/ Copper air terminal shall be provided for the Air Termination network

fixing next to masonry material at the highest points and any connection to down conductor.

H. Air termination on the vertical side of the building above 45mm as required by BS6651 shall be

provided with maximum 30m spacing and minimum 2 points. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the

installation detail to allow for bonding of the curtain wall to the embedded down-conductor re-bar

to Engineer satisfaction and comply with BS6651 requirement. All additional materials and

installation as required shall be included in the Contract.

2.2. DOWN CONDUCTOR

A. The down conductor routes shall be embedded in colour as indicate on drawing and shall be as

direct as possible.

B. The bonding conductor at roof conductor shall be of soft annealed GI/ Copper strip minimum size

25mm x 3mm. Where the conductors penetrate the roof, the holes shall be effectively sealed and

waterproof with proprietary sealant to the approval of the specialist roofing contractor.

C. All exposed metal running vertically external to the structure shall be bonded to the re-bar down

conductor. This shall be included but not limited to curtain wall frame, pipes, ducts and other

metal components running through the Buildings.

D. The down conductors shall be run according to the route as shown in the Drawings or as

required to BS6651 requirement.

E. The Sub-Conductor shall ensure that the proper material and equipment are used in accordance

with the manufacture‟s recommended installation.

F. Lightning protection system shall employing steel structural or reinforcement as down conductor

as per Drawing specified. Continuous re-bar down conductors shall be provided system to

ensure continuity and run along steel reinforcement with bonding at maximum 1m interval or

minimum two (2) points at each in-continuous steel structural member of reinforcement.

2.3. JOINTS AND BONDS

A. All joints and bonds shall be soundly secured and shall be of low resistance. The cross-sectional

area of the material used e.g. GI/ Copper shall not be less then the main conductor (i.e. 25mm x

3mm) unless otherwise specified.

B. Where possible, joints shall be kept as few as possible. All joints shall be carried out with

manufacturer‟s recommended compress type clamp. Two (2) screw minimum shall be provided

for each joint.

179

C. Bonding Points shall be carried out with manufacturer‟s recommended sets. Customer‟s self-

made items are not acceptable.

D. Joining of dissimilar metals shall be protected from moisture by applying recommended

compound on the material. Bi-metal joint shall be provided where dissimilar metals are used. E.

All junction and bonding clamps shall be phosphor bronze material.

2.4. TEST LINK

A. A test link shall be provided for testing earthing pit at ground floor. The test link shall be of

phosphor bronze and shall be located at 150mm above ground level in an easily accessible

position for testing.

B. The test link shall be protected from unauthorized interference. It shall be of an approved type

and shall not constitute an electrical resistance within the system.

C. Test clamps shall be provided at air termination network and Earth Termination for each down

conductor and so arranged that all parts of the network can be tested independently.

D. After installation and completion of testing, all test clamps shall be painted with bituminous paint

to prevent corrosion.

2.5. EARTH TERMINATION

A. Down Conductor re-bar will be bonded to foundation steel network. GI/ Copper tape 25mm x

3mm shall be interconnect all re-bar down conductor at the lowest ground level along the

perimeter of the building.

B. The maximum permissible earth resistance of the Lightning Protection System shall be 10 ohms.

Testing earth electrode shall be provided for earthing test.

C. All earth electrode penetrations through basement waterproofing membranes shall be provided

with manufacturer‟s recommended water seal insert sleeve approved by Engineer. The

installation of the water seal insert sleeve shall be under the supervision and endorsed by the

manufacturer‟s representative to ensure the installation comply with the manufacturer installation

details

D. The top of each electrode shall be protected from damage by placing it in a heavy duty pre-cast

concrete inspection chamber with heavy duty cover. The actual connection of the conductor to

the electrode shall be accessible and visible when cover is removed.

PART 3 – LIGHTNING PROTECTION EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING

3.1. METALLIC CURTAIN WALL BONDING

A. All elements of the façade shall be directly earthed to the structure for the purpose of lightning

protection. The Contractor shall make himself aware of the requirements under the latest revision

of the standard. All necessary connections, conductors, earthing connectors etc shall be deemed

to be included in this Contract.

B. The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Curtain Wall Supplier/Contractor for the exact interface

and bonding requirements. The curtain wall is to be electrically continuous and the installation

shall comply with BS6651. Tests shall be carried out by this Contractor to the satisfaction of the

Engineer to ensure electrical continuity as stipulated in the code.

C. Lightning protection bonding terminals along each re-bar down conductor shall be provided by

the Contractor at the lowest levels and roof levels for bonding with curtain walls. Intermediate

bonding terminals shall be provided at an interval of not exceeding 30m apart at each of the

vertical intervals as required by the standard lightning protection bonding terminals shall be

confirmed with the Curtain Wall Supplier/Contractor.

D. As a general practice, bonding points shall be provided and located on the internal face of the

claddings. A conductor shall be provided and installed by the Contractor for lightning protection

bonding at the down conductors.

180

E. The Curtain Wall Supplier/Contractor shall be required to confirm his details on the lightning

protection bonding of curtain walls. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to ensure all details

(both locations and quantity) agreed complied with BS6651.

F. All metal cladding components including panels, glazing frames, mullions, transoms, fixings and

support structures shall be fully bonded electrically to ensure electrical continuity of the building

development.

3.2. EQUIPMENT / STRUCTURE BONDING ON ROOF & OTHER EXTERNAL AREA

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for bonding of all metal equipment/structure on roof and

other exposed external area on flat roof and ground level, complete cabling by means of 25 x

3mm GI/ Copper tape up to the termination point provided by respective Contractor. Bonding

within the equipment for maintaining electrical continuity of all metal components will be provided

by the respective work in the Contract.

B. All metallic projections, chimneys, vent pipes, cooling towers, railings, antenna masts, fuel tanks,

etc. on or above the main surface of the roof and other external areas shall be bonded to and

form the part of the air termination network.

C. For equipment with plan area above 100sq.m, bonding shall be provided at distance not more

than 30m apart equally spaced along the perimeter of the equipment.

D. All bonding shall be to the nearest down conductor by most direct route available.

PART 4 – TESTING & COMMISSIONING

A. The Contractor shall arrange with the Engineer for inspection and testing of lightning conductor

system. Before the joint testing, the Contractor shall have conducted his own inspection and

testing to ensure that all requirements are met as specified. Test report certified by Contractor‟s

installation Professional Engineer shall be submitted to the Engineer. All equipment,

transportation, manpower and other necessary costs for the joint inspection and testing shall be

borne by the Contractor.

B. The system shall also be tested at not greater than twelve (12) months intervals for earth

resistivity, resistance to earth of the electrodes and electrical continuity of the system during the

course of building construction and DLP. The results of these tests shall be by the Contractor‟s

installation Professional Engineer compiled in report prepared by the Contractor.

C. The Contractor shall supply facilities for the recording of the test resultsreferred to above,

arranged in such a manner that comparisons can be readily made with earlier readings.

D. The Contractor shall submit a detailed layout drawing showing the positions of testing carry out

on site.

E. The record sheet and layout drawing shall be kept on site at all times during the course of

construction.

F. The Contractor shall carry out monthly inspection on the lightning protection system including the

earthing pits to ensure that the system is in good working order.

181

LUMINAIRES (LIGHT FITTINGS) AND LAMPS Chapter 3.

1.1. Scope:

The scope of this section comprises of Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of lighting

fixtures for internal lighting, wherever required, of the specified models.

Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, this section shall include luminaries, lamps

and accessories necessary and required for the installation.

Whether specifically mentioned or not, the luminaries and lamps shall be provided with all fixing

devices, terminal blocks, holders etc. as required.

1.2. General Requirements:

All the luminaries and lamps shall be of best quality and as per approved makes. Wherever

alternative makes are specified the choice of selection shall remain with the Engineer-in-Charge.

The luminaries and lamps shall be fixed in a neat work man like manner, true to level and in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

The luminaries and lamps shall be provided with such accessories as are required to complete

the item in working condition whether specifically mentioned in the specifications, drawings or

not.

1.3. Luminaries:

1. Luminaries shall comply with relevant IS.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, enclosure of luminaries shall provide a minimum degree of protection

of IP20 when located within buildings and IP 44 when located outside buildings, but luminaries

mounted externally; and less than 2 M above finished ground or paved level shall be IP 54 unless

specified in BOQ.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, luminaries, both with and without built-in ballast or transformers shall

be suitable for direct mounting on normally flammable surface.

4. Where specific requirements related to flame propagation and flammability of translucent covers

are indicated, certificates of tests shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge. The tests shall

comply with relevant IS.

5. Terminal blocks for connection of the supply cables shall be of adequate size for the size of

conductors forming the loop in wiring unless separate tails are required. Wherever indicated, the

terminal block shall incorporate a fuse of suitable type and rating.

6. Ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps shall have a maximum value of harmonics complying with

the colour headed “without H Marking" in Table VII of BS 288. Power factor correction shall be

provided and this shall not be less than 0.85 lagging unless otherwise indicated.

7. Translucent covers and reflective surfaces shall be clean at the completion of the works.

1.4. Applicable BIS standards:

The lighting and their associated accessories such as lamps, reflectors, housings, ballasts

etc. shall comply with the latest applicable standards, more specifically the following:

1.5. General and safety requirements for luminaries:

Tubular fluorescent lamps IS-1913 (Part–1)

Industrial lighting fittings with metal reflectors IS – 1977

Decorative lighting outfits IS – 5077

Bayonet lamp holders IS – 1258

BI-pin lamp holders for tubular fluorescent Lamps IS – 3323

Electronic Ballasts for fluorescent lamps –General

& safety requirement

IS – 13021 (Part–1)

182

Electronic ballasts for fluorescent lamps –

Performance requirement

IS – 13021 (part – 2)

Ballast for HP MV lamps IS – 6616

Tubular fluorescent lamps IS – 2418 (part–1 to 4)

Luminaries – general requirement IS – 10322 (part – 1)

Luminaries – constructional requirement IS – 10322 (part – 2)

Luminaries – screw and screw-less Termination IS – 10322 (part – 3)

Luminaries – methods of tests IS – 10322 (part – 4)

Particular requirement – general purpose

Luminaries

IS – 10322 (part-5 sec-1)

Particular requirement– recessed Luminaries IS – 10322 (part- 5/sec-2)

Particular requirement – luminaries for Road and

street lighting

IS – 10322 (part-5/sec-3)

Particular requirement – portable general Purpose

luminaries

IS– 10322 (part-5/sec-4)

Particular requirement – Food lighting IS– 10322 (part-5/sec-5)

High pressure Mercury Vapour lamps IS – 9900 (part-1)

Tungsten filament general electric Lamps IS – 418

1.6. Lamps:

1. Lamps shall be of the type and ratings as indicated.

2. All lamps shall be supplied and installed by the contractor unless otherwise directed.

3. Lamp caps shall be suitable for the lamp holders listed socket by means of a locking ring.

1.7. Support and Fixings:

1. Where fluorescent luminaries 1200 mm or more in length are supported directly by the conduit

system, they shall be fixed to two circular conduit boxes both of which shall form an integral part

of the conduit system.

2. Where the weight of a luminaire is supported by a conduit box or cable Trunking, the fixing of the

conduit box or Trunking shall be adequate for the purpose and approved by Engineer-in-Charge.

3. Luminaries fitted with tungsten filament lamps and having metal back plates shall not be fixed

directly to conduit box in which thermoplastic material is the principal load bearing member.

4. Support of luminaries from cable Trunking shall be by means of proprietary clamps or brackets.

5. Where luminaries are supported from the structure other than by the conduit system, the

supports shall be adequate for the purpose and approved by Engineer-in-Charge.

6. Luminaries mounted on or recessed into suspended ceilings shall not support luminaries unless

specifically shown and approved.

7. For wall mounted luminaries, the mounting height shall be 1900 mm above finished floor level,

measured to the centre of the conduit box, unless otherwise indicated.

1.8. Wiring Connections:

1. Where luminaries, are fixed at places other than circular conduit boxes or are supported by

pedants or chains, the final circuit wiring shall terminate at a terminal block in the conduit box.

183

2. Where luminaries having fluorescent tubes are fixed direct to circular conduit boxes, the final

circuit wiring may be terminated within the luminaries unless otherwise indicated. The wiring shall

enter each luminaire at the conduit entry nearest to the terminal block and where a loop in wiring

system is used, leave by the same entry; wiring shall not pass through a luminaries unless the

approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

3. Where luminaries are mounted on or recessed into a suspended ceiling, connection shall be by

flexible cord from a plug-in ceiling rose unless otherwise indicated. The plug-in ceiling rose shall

be located not more than 500 mm from the access in the ceiling and shall be firmly supported,

unless otherwise approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

4. Cables and flexible cords for final connections to luminaries shall be suitable for the operating

temperature of the luminaire.

5. The size of final connection cables or flexible cords shall be as indicated.

6. Cables and cords passing close to ballast within a luminaire shall be suitable for the operating

temperature of the ballast.

7. A protective conductor shall connect the earthing terminal or earthing contact of each luminaire to

an earthing terminal incorporated in the adjacent conduit box. Where the final connection is by

flexible cord, the protective conductor shall form part of the cord.

1.9. High Pressure Sodium Vapour and Metal Halide Luminaries

The high-pressure sodium vapour lamp fittings and components shall conform the general

requirements and to the requirements of IEC 662. They shall be of the integral type complete

with accessories such as chokes, capacitor, reflectors, igniters, suspension hooks or eyes,

suspension arrangements, the inserts or hooks, lamp, connectors, holders etc. complete. The

fittings shall be with vapour proofing arrangement.

The control gear box, and suspension brackets shall be epoxy powder coated.

The reflector shall be Electrochemically brightened, polished and Glaskote finish high purity spun

aluminium. The unit shall have the facility to receive vapour proofing arrangements.

The lamp holder shall be skirted type and of integral design. The material of the lamp holder shall

be glazed porcelain.

The holder shall be provided with a locking ring. The ring shall be of threaded type and made of

high-grade copper alloy duly electroplated. The centre contact pillar of the holder shall be made

out of stainless steel. The holder shall be provided with back up springs made of stainless steel.

The holder mounting arrangement shall be provided using an adjustable bracket to achieve

narrow or wide beam light distribution.

Vapour proofing arrangements shall be obtained by using gaskets and 5 mm thick heat resistant

toughened glass of high transmission quality mounted on a steel ring with hinged joint to facilitate

fastening to reflector. The gaskets shall be moulded from neoprene compound.

The suspension hook/ ring shall be made of cold drawn mild steel, rod forged to shape. The

arrangement for assembling the unit to the canopy shall include a collar and threaded end to

facilitate assembly-using nuts and check nuts. The hook /ring opening shall not be less than 30

mm clear to provide for the swing of luminary around suspension.

The lamp shall be of specified wattage at a nominal voltage of 220 V volts. The outer shell of the

lamp shall be made of hard glass. The discharge tube shall be made out of translucent poly

crystalline Aluminium Oxide positioned so as to have a floating construction near the lamp end to

avoid stress development.

184

The ignition arrangement shall consist of electronic type of igniter for ensuring instant striking of

discharge and shall be of external type. Bimetallic types built in igniters are not acceptable.

For HPSV lamps, the colour-rendering group of the lamp shall be 3 and the colour-rendering

index shall not be less than 21.

For Metal Halide lamps, the colour-rendering group of the lamp shall be 3 and the colour-

rendering index shall not be less than 65.

185

11 KV DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER Chapter 4.

1.1. SCOPE

Design , manufacture, factory testing , supplying and commissioning of 11000 / 415 volts step

down, oil filled, core type, copper wound distribution transformer as per specifications

1.2. STANDARD

The design, manufacture and performance of transformer shall confirm to the Indian Standard IS

2026 and its latest edition

1.3. RATING

Suitable for continuous rating

1.4. CONNECTIONS & VECTOR GROUP

Delta on high voltage side and star on low voltage side with neutral terminal brought out for solid

earthing corresponding to the vector group dyn11.

1.5. SYSTEM OF SUPPLY

3 phase, 50 Hz., 11 KV effectively earthed system

1.6. TAPPINGS

Off circuit tap changing on HV side. The tapings to be provided for variation on HV side +/- 7½%

in steps of 2.1/2% each. The tap changing switch shall be provided with locking device and an

indication plate

1.7. TEMPERATURE RISE

Continuously for full load, temperature rise not exceeding 45°C by thermometer in oil / 55°C by

resistance in winding over an ambient of 50°C.

1.8. TYPE: Outdoor / indoor.

1.9. TERMINALS

Single gland trifurcating cable box with brass cone wiping gland shall be suitable for 3 core XLPE

insulated armoured aluminium conductor cable on HV side.

The cable box with glands on 433 side shall be suitable for single core/three core PVC insulated,

armoured aluminium conductor cables.

Cable compound wherever required is included in the cost of terminations.

1.10. COOLING

Natural cooling by means of pressed/round tubes around transformer tank. The radiators shall be

detachable with top and bottom shutoff valve and air release plug on each radiator top.

1.11. INSULATION – OIL

1.12. EARTHING

Two separate earthing terminals to be provided at the bottom of the tank on both sides.

1.13. FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES

The following accessories and fittings shall be provided Lifting lugs. The arrangement for lifting

the active part out of the transformer tank along with the cover by means of all lifting lugs with out

disturbing the connections.

A. SWIVEL TYPE ROLLERS

The transformer to be provided with the 4 nos. Bidirectional rollers fitted on cross channels to

facilitate the movement of transformer in both directions.

186

B. OIL CONSERVATOR

The transformer to be provided with an oil conservator with welded end plates. It is to be bolted

to the cover and can be dismounted for purpose of transport. It has to be provided with oil level

gauge with marking for minimum 'level' and an oil filling hole with the cap which can be used for

filtering oil. For draining purpose a plug is to be provided. A connection pipe between the

conservator and the main tank is to provided which projects inside the conservator.

C. Thermometer pocket

D. Rating and diagram plate

E. AIR RELEASE VALVE

An air release valve is to be provided on the top of the tank cover to facilitate the release of the

entrapped air and filling of oil.

F. BREATHER

The transformer to be provided with an indicating dehydrating silicagel breather of sufficient

capacity.

G. DRAIN – CUM - OIL FILTER VALVES :

The transformer to be provided with a drain-cum-oil filter valve at the bottom of the tank.

H. OFF-CIRCUIT TAP CHANGER :

An externally, hand operated off-circuit tap changer with handle, having a position indicating plate

and locking device etc. filter valve at top.

I. Explosion vent.

J. Double float Buchholz Relay with alarm and trip contacts

K. 6” winding temperature indicator with alarm and trip contacts

L. 6” oil temperature indicator with alarm and trip contacts

M. Marshalling box/ junction box

N. First filling of oil.

1.14. WINDING

The transformer shall be copper wound

1.15. CORE

The magnetic core shall be made up of cold rolled grain oriented low loss steel stampings.

1.16. DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS

3 copies of manual of complete instruction for the installation, operation, maintenance and

repairs, circuit diagram, foundation and trenching details shall be provided with the transformers

1.17. DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS

3 copies of manual of complete instruction for the installation, operation, maintenance and

repairs, circuit diagram, foundation and trenching details shall be provided with the transformers

1.18. TESTING

The transformer shall be subject to the following tests at the factory before despatching the same

and the test certificates shall be furnished :

A. Measurement of winding resistance

B. Ratio polarity and phase relationships

C. Load losses

D. Impedance voltage

187

E. No load losses and no load current

F. Insulation resistance

G. Induced over voltage withstand

H. Separate source voltage withstand

The cost of performing above tests shall be included in the equipment cost

1.19. Copy of heat run test and impulse test carried out on a similar transformer during the last three

years shall be submitted

188

MAINS FAILURE STANDBY GENERATING SYSTEM (D.G. SETS)

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. WORK DESCRIPTION

This specification is intended to cover supply, installation, testing and commissioning of D.G.

Sets and associated equipment/ materials, panels, cables etc.

1.2. SCOPE OF WORK:

The scope of work shall include under this specification design, manufacture, supply, loading,

unloading, storage, installation, testing and commissioning of D.G. Sets with alternators and

associated equipment/ materials, panels, cables etc. including labor, tools, tackles and plants,

hardware and consumables, steel fabrication and items as described below:

Silent Diesel engine & alternator set complete with base frame, acoustic container and

accessories.

Engine mounted/ separately mounted engine control integrated panel duly wired up to

terminal box for engine safeties, EFC Governor with solid state potentiometers, sensors and

protection for inter facing with PLC.

Fuel oil system including day service oil tank, piping, valves, filters etc. from engine to service

day oil tank. Return fuel line with fuel cooler and piping with accessories up to day service

tank or collecting point as called for.

Lube oil system with piping etc. (Pre-lube oil pump with controllers as required).

Cooling system with engine mounted radiators.

Exhaust emission shall meet pollution norms (CPCB & SPCB) with or without catalytic

converter and residential silencer, exhaust piping with mineral wool insulation and aluminium

cladding as called for.

Steel fabricated structure/support/hanger including fixing, grouting and bolting etc. Painting of

steel work.

L.T. / Control cabling.

Auxiliary control panel.

The bidder shall also indicate in his offer the time schedule for routine maintenance/ overhauling

operations necessary for continuous satisfactory operation of D.G. Set.

The item rate shall remain valid for variation to any extent of the estimated quantities given in the

Schedule of Quantities.

1.3. FEE, PERMITS & TESTS:

The contractor shall obtain all sanctions and permits required for the running of DG sets from all

the relevant authorities. All actual fees payable in this regard will be reimbursed against

receipt/documentary proof (evidence). On completion of the work, the supplier shall obtain N.O.C

from concerned authorities including SEB, Chief Electrical Inspectorate, of State. The original of

the same shall be delivered to the employer through Consultants.

The Owner shall have full power regarding the equipments/ materials get tested by authorized/

recognized independent agency at the contractor‟s expense in order to prove their soundness

and adequacy. The contractor will rectify the defects/ suggestions pointed out by independent

agency through Owner at contractor‟s expense.

The installation shall comply in all respects with the requirements of Indian Electricity Act 1910,

Indian Electricity Rules (IER) 1956 and other related Laws and Regulations (for F.F. etc.) as

189

amended up to date, there under and special requirements, if any, of the State Electricity Boards

etc. The contractor shall be liable to furnish the list of authorized licensed persons/ employed/

deputed to carry out the works/ perform the assigned duties to fulfill the requirement of Rule No.3

of IER 1956 as amended up to date.

1.4. CODES & STANDARDS:

The design, manufacture, inspection, testing and performance shall comply with all the currently

applicable statutes, safety codes, relevant Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), British Standards

(BS), International Electro Technical Commission (IEC) publication, NEMA & VDE Standards

amended up to date.

The design engineering, manufacturing and the installation shall be in accordance with

established codes, sound engineering, practices and specifications. Further, the same shall

conform to the statutory regulations applicable in the country. Contractor shall obtain all

approvals from statutory authorities, e.g. Electrical inspector, pollution control boards, SEB or any

other agency as applicable before commissioning of electrical system.

Some of the relevant Indian and British Standards are listed below.

Indian Electricity Act.

Indian Electricity Rules.

Factory Act.

Any other standard may be followed provided it is equivalent or more stringent than the

standards specified above.

In case of any deviation/conflict of this specification with the codes & standards, the following

order of precedence shall govern

1. Engineer‟s decision.

2. Local codes of practice

3. Drawings.

4. Specifications

5. International standards & requirements.

1.5. DESIGN:

The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering practices, to

ensure satisfactory performance and service life. The equipment offered by the contractor shall

be complete in all respects. Any materials or accessories, which may not have been specifically

mentioned, but which are usual and necessary for the completion of the system and satisfactory

& trouble free operation and maintenance of the equipment shall be provided without any extra

cost to the Owner. This shall also include spares for commissioning of the equipment.

This specification defines the basic guidelines to develop a suitable electrical system as

necessary for the Complex. All data required in this regard shall be taken in to consideration to

develop a detailed engineering for the system. Site conditions as applicable are mentioned

elsewhere.

Compliance with these specifications and/or approval of any of the Contractor‟s documents shall

in no case relieve the Contractor of his contractual obligations.

All work to be performed and supplies to be made be as a part of contract shall require specific

approval/review of Owner or his authorized representative

The engineering activities shall comprise the submission for approval of the following from

190

Consultants/Owner

1.6. BIDDER SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR:

Detailed co-ordination with other services, shop drawings for various electrical layouts such

as equipment layout, cabling layouts, earthing layouts, including equipment installation and

cable termination details etc. prior to start of work.

Preparation of bill of materials for cabling, earthing and miscellaneous items etc.

Cable schedules.

Interconnection drawing.

Protection co-ordination drawings/ tables for complete power system.

Shop inspection and testing procedures.

Field-testing and commissioning procedures.

Preparation of as built drawings.

Bidder shall also be responsible for:

Any other work/activity which is not listed above, however is necessary for completeness of

electrical system

Bidder shall clearly understand and quote accordingly:

To ensure that all clauses given in this part of the specifications shall also apply to all other

electrical works of other segments. The bidder shall bring to the notice of the Owner the

differences, if any, and get the same clarified failing which the Owner may impose the more

stringent of the specification/ clauses at the sole risk and costs of the contractor.

1.7. DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION PERIOD:

A. The contractor shall be allowed admittance to the site on the date of commencement as described

in the General Conditions and he shall thereupon and forthwith begin the works and shall regularly

proceed with and complete the same on or before the date of completion subject, nevertheless to

the provisions for the extension of time. The time being the essence of the contract, the Contractor

will adhere to the time, progress chart and project schedule and will give proportional

output/progress in proportional time

1.8. SCHEDULE AND MANNER OF OPERATIONS:

A. Time being the essence of this Contract, the Contractor will be expected to furnish all labour and

materials in sufficient quantities and at appropriate times, expedite and schedule the work as

required and so manage the operation that the work will be completed within the time stated in the

Contract.

1.9. PROJECT SCHEDULE:

A. The contractor will have to submit a detailed project schedule.

1. For various items of works to be carried out by him.

2. For various associated works to be carried out by other agencies. so that the work gets

completed with in the contractual completion time. This schedule shall be submitted by the

contractor in Microsoft project software format. The contractor shall follow this schedule

meticulously and shall also coordinate/ follow up with other agencies to expedite the works

associated with his own work. Liquidity damages clause will become applicable for any delay

in completion of the work.

191

B. The contractor will submit within 7 days of the award of work, a detailed schedule of program of

work. C. No additional payment will be made to the contractor for any multiple shift work or other

incentive methods contemplated by him in his work schedules even though the time schedule is

approved by the Consultant/Engineer-in-Charge.

1.10. DESIGN CONDITIONS:

Design ambient: 45 Deg. C maximum dry bulb temperature & 2 Deg. C minimum dry bulb

temperature Altitude: 300 m above sea level Relative Humidity: 98% maximum Site Environment:

Normal.

1.11. COORDINATION OF WORK

A. Contract documents establish scope, materials and quality but are not detailed installation

instruction.

B. Coordinate work with related trades and furnish, in writing, any information necessary to permit the

work of related trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible conflict or delay.

C. The drawings show the general arrangement of equipment and appurtenances. Follow these

drawings as closely as the actual construction and the work of other divisions will permit. Provide

off-sets, fittings, and accessories which may be required but not shown on the drawings.

Investigate the site, and review drawings of other divisions to determine conditions affecting the

work, and provide such work and accessories as may be required to accommodate such

conditions.

D. The locations of thermostats, switches, panels and other equipment indicated on the drawings are

approximately correct. Exercise particular caution with reference to the location of panels,

thermostats, switches, etc., and have the precise and definite locations accepted by the Engineer

before proceeding with the installation.

E. The drawings show only the general run of services and approximate location of equipment,

outlets, panels, etc. Any significant changes in location of equipment, outlets, panels, etc.,

necessary in order to meet field conditions shall be brought to the determine attention of the

Engineer for review before such alterations are made. Modifications shall be made at no additional

cost to the Contract.

F. Carefully check space requirements with other division works to ensure that equipment can be

installed in the space allotted.

G. Wherever work interconnects with work amongst different installation, coordinate with other trades

to insure that they have the information necessary so that the Contractor may properly install the

necessary connections and equipment. Identify items requiring access in order that the Ceiling

Trade will know where to install access doors and panels.

H. Consult amongst installation so that, wherever possible, motor controls and distribution equipment

are of the same manufacturer.

I. Furnish and set sleeves for passage of risers through structural masonry and concrete walls and

floors and elsewhere as required for the proper protection of each riser passing through building

surfaces.

J. Provide fire stopping around all pipes, conduits, ducts, sleeves, etc, which pass through fire

compartments.

K. Provide required supports and hangers for equipment suitably so as not to exceed allowable

loading of structures.

L. Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional detail drawings to scale to

coordinate the work with the work of other trades. Detailed work shall be clearly identified on the

drawings as to the area to which it applies. Submit these drawings to the Engineer for review. At

completion include a set of these drawings with each set of record drawings.

M. Coordinate with the local utility companies/authorities for their requirements for service connections

and provide all necessary provisions, grounding, materials, equipment, labour, testing, and

appurtenances.

192

N. Before commencing works, examine adjoining works on which this work is in any way affected and

report conditions which prevent performance of the works. Become thoroughly familiar with actual

existing conditions to which connections must be made or which must be changed or altered. W.

The Contractor is responsible to any modifications required due to service not properly coordinated.

1.12. EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. Prior to the submitting of bids, visit the project site and become familiar with all conditions affecting

the proposed installation and make provisions as to the cost thereof.

B. The Contract Documents do not make representations regarding the character or extent of the sub-

soils, water levels, existing structural, mechanical and electrical installations, above or below

ground, or other sub-surface conditions which may be encountered during the work, based on

examination of the site or other information. Failure to examine the drawings or other information

does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for satisfactorily completion of the work.

1.13. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Where ever required provide trenches details, duly approved by the consultant with all relevant

section etc. as per IS codes to the Civil contractor, minimum before 1 month of laying the pipes,

etc. Co ordinate with the civil contractor during the excavation, and ensure that the excavation and

backfilling is being properly done as per requirement.

B. Where ever it is asked by the Owner/ consultant for providing trenches in contractor‟s scope. It is

deemed that the cost of the pipe is inclusive of trench digging and backfilling. The following points

needs to be taken care of while making the trenches.

C. The trench shall be of widths necessary for the proper execution of the work. Grade bottom of the

trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support the work on undisturbed soil at every

point along its entire length. Except where rock is encountered, do not excavate below the depths

indicated. Where rock excavations are required, excavate rock to a minimum over depth of four

inches below the trench depths indicated on the drawings or required. Backfill over depths in the

rock excavation and unauthorized over depths with loose, granular, moist earth, thoroughly

machine tamped to a compaction level of at least 95% to standard proctor density or 75% relative

density or as specified by the Engineer. Wherever unstable soil that is incapable of properly

supporting the work is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove soil to a depth required and

backfill the trench to the proper grade with coarse sand, fine gravel or other suitable material.

D. Excavate trenches for utilities that will provide the following minimum depths of cover from existing

grade or from indicated finished grade as required by local authorities.

E. Trenches should not be placed within 3 meters of foundation or soil surfaces which must be resist

horizontal forces.

F. Do not backfill until all required tests have been performed and installation observed by the

Engineer. Comply with the requirements of other sections of the specifications. Backfill shall consist

of non-expansive soil with limited porosity. Deposit in 15 cm layers and thoroughly and carefully

tamp until the work has a cover of not less than 30 cm. Backfill and tamp remainder of trench at 30

cm intervals until complete. Uniformly grade the finished surface.

1.14. CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. All kinds of cutting and repairing of brick Walls or Partitions, etc. for the proper routing of pipe, shall

be in the scope of the contractor. However, cutting and repairing of RCC wall, or ceiling shall be in

the scope of civil contractor.

B. Where cutting, channelling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings or other surfaces is

necessary for the proper installation, support or anchorage of conduit or other equipment, layout

the work carefully in advance. Repair any damage to the building, piping, equipment or defaced

finish plaster, woodwork, metalwork, etc., using skilled trade people of the trades required at no

additional cost to the Contract.

193

C. Provide slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs as required.

Where these openings are not provided, provide cutting and patching to accommodate penetrations

at no additional cost to the Contract.

1.15. SEALING OF PENETRATIONS

A. Air Tight Seals

1. All penetrations through the building fabric subject to suction or pressurization shall be sealed

airtight.

B. Holes in Roof

1. Roof penetrations for passage of conduits or circular PVC and PVC Cables shall be sealed

watertight using a flexible polypropylene conical sleeve manufacturer to seal the cable to the

roof structure, regardless of the roof profile.

2. All sharp metal edges, which may come in contact with the cable, shall be suitably bushed.

C. Fire Rated Penetrations Where services penetrate any fire rated barrier, the Contractor shall seal

the penetration with the use of an appropriate material to ensure the integrity of the fire barrier. The

Contractor shall seal the cable enclosures through fire rated barriers to ensure the integrity and

rating of the fire barrier.

D. Acoustic Penetrations Where services penetrate acoustic barriers, sealant shall be supplied and

installed to maintain the acoustic separation at least equal to the barrier penetration.

1.16. MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Verify exact locations and mounting heights with the Engineer before installation.

1.17. SUPPORTS

A. Support work in accordance with the best industry practice. Provide supports, hangers, auxiliary

structural members and supplemental hardware required for support of the work.

B. Provide supporting frames or racks extending from floor slab to ceiling slab for work indicated as

being supported from walls where the walls are incapable of supporting the weight. In particular,

provide such frames or racks in electric closets and equipment room.

C. Provide supporting frames or racks for equipment which is installed in a free standing position.

D. Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty support

system steel members, rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately braced to form a

substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to assure a workmanlike arrangement of all

equipment mounted on them.

E. Adequate support of equipment (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall not

depend on ducts, pipe, electric conduits, raceways, or cables for support.

F. Equipment shall not rest on or depend for support on suspended ceiling media (tiles, lath, plaster,

as well as splinters, runners, bars and the like in the plane of the ceiling). Provide independent

support of equipment. Do not attach to supports provided for ductwork, piping or work of other

trades.

G. Provide required supports and hangers for equipment so that loading will not exceed allowable

loading of structure. Equipment and supports shall not come in contact with work of other trades.

1.18. FASTENINGS

A. Fasten equipment to building in accordance with the best industry practice.

B. Where weight applied to the attachment points is 45 kg or less, conform to the following as a

minimum:

1. Wood : Wood screws

2. Concrete and solid masonry : Dash Fastener of appropriate ratings -HILTI/FISHER

194

3. Solid metal : Machine screws in tapped holes or with welded studs

C. Where weight applied to the building attachment points exceeds 45 kg, but is 135 kg or less,

conform to the following as a minimum:

1. At concrete slabs provide 60 cm x 60 cm x 13 cm steel fishplates on top with through bolts.

Fishplate assemblies shall be chased in and grouted flush with the top slabs screed line,

where no fill is to be applied.

2. At steel decking or sub-floor for all fastenings, provide through bolts and threaded rods. The

tops of bolts and rods shall be set at least one inch below the top fill screed line and grouted

in. Suitable washers shall be used under bolt heads or nuts. In cases where the decking or

sub-floor manufacturer produces specialty hangers to work with his decking or sub-floor such

hangers shall be provided.

D. Where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 135 kg, coordinate with and obtain the

approval of Engineer and conform to the following as a minimum:

1. Provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging between building structural steel

elements to establish fastening points. Bridging members shall suitably weld or clamped to

building steel. Provide threaded rods or bolts to attach to bridging members.

E. For items which are shown as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastening to the building

construction element above is not possible, provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging

tying to the building structural elements.

F. Wall mounted equipment may be directly secured to wall by means of steel bolts. Groups or arrays

of equipment may be mounted on adequately sized steel angles, channels, or bars.

1.19. IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify equipment with permanently attached black phenolic nameplates with 13 mm high white

engraved lettering. Identification shall include equipment name or load served as appropriate.

Nameplates shall be attached with cadmium plated screws; peel and stick tape or glue on type

nameplates is unacceptable.

B. Services runs shall be properly identified as per the requirements in the Contract.

C. See individual section for additional identification requirements.

1.20. PROHIBITED LABELS AND IDENTIFICATIONS

A. In all public areas, tenant areas, and similar locations within the project, the inclusion or installation

of any equipment or assembly which bears on any surface any name, trademark, or other insignia

which is intended to identify the manufacturer, the vendor, or other source(s) from which such

object has been obtained, is prohibited.

B. Required test lab certification labels shall not be removed nor shall identification specifically

required under the various technical sections of the Specifications be removed.

1.21. EQUIPMENT PADS AND ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Provide all details with proper sections for the equipment pads and anchor. The equipment pads

casting and making provision for anchor fastening shall be as per the final UNALTERED drawing

duly approved by the consultant, shall be in the scope of Civil contractor. However, the Contractor

shall ensure the proper coordination with the civil contractor.

B. All equipment pads for all vibrating equipments shall have cork vibration pads sandwiched between

the finish surface and the bottom surface of required thickness suggested by the civil consultant, to

ensure that the minimum vibration can travel below.

C. Provide galvanized anchor bolts for all equipment placed on concrete equipment pads, inertia

blocks, or on concrete slabs. Provide bolts of the size and number recommended by the

manufacturer of the equipment and locate by means of suitable templates. Equipment installed on

195

vibration isolators shall be secured to the isolator. Secure the isolator to the floor, pad, or support

as recommended by the vibration isolation manufacturer.

D. Where equipment is mounted on gypsum board partitions, the mounting screws shall pass through

the gypsum board and securely attach to the partition studs. As an attached to 15 cm square,

galvanized metal back plates which are attached to the gypsum board with an approved non-

flammable adhesive. Toggle bolts installed in gypsum board partitions are not acceptable.

1.22. MISCELLANEOUS:

A. A site order book will be maintained at site, which will be in the custody of the Owner, or his

representative and all instructions given to the contractor will be recorded in the site order book and

the same has to be signed by the contractor to comply with the instructions given therein.

B. After completion of the work the whole installation shall be tested by the contractor in the presence

of the Consultant/Engineer-in-Charge. The tests shall comply the following I.E.E. Regulations and

shall be submitted along with the final bill:

1. The result of the insulation test shall comply with the I.E.E. Regulations 1101 to 1108A and

1008B as may be applicable.

2. Test shall be carried out to ascertain that all the non-linked SP switches have been

connected to the phase conductor.

3. The continuity test of the earthing system shall comply with I.E.E. Regulations 1108 to 1109

to the latest addition.

C. If the result of the above tests does not comply with the I.E.E. Regulations, the contractor shall be

bound to rectify the faults so that the required results are obtained.

D. The contractor shall be responsible to provide all the necessary testing instruments, such as

megger insulation tester, earth tester multi-meter, AVO meter etc for carrying out the above tests.

E. The work will not be considered as complete and taken over by the employer till all the components

of the work after being completed at site in all respects have been inspected/ tested by the

Consultant/Owner to his entire satisfaction and a completion certificate issued by the

Owner/Consultant to this effect.

F. Shop drawing for electrical work e.g. equipment, cable earthing and conduit layout for all systems

shall be prepared by the contractor and got approved before starting of the work.

G. At the completion of the work and before issuance of certificate of virtual completion, the contractor

shall submit 6 sets of drawing and two tracing of each drawing to Owner of each layout drawings

drawn at approved.

H. Contractor‟s Superintendence:

1. The contractor shall provide all necessary superintendence during the execution of the works

and as long thereafter as the engineer may consider necessary. The contractor or his

competent and authorized agent or representative approved of in writing by the owner/

Engineer (which approval may at any time be withdrawn) is to be constantly on the works and

shall give his whole time to the superintendence of the same. Such authorized agent or

representative shall receive on behalf of the contractor, directions and instructions from the

Engineer-in-charge or his representative.

2. The contractor shall provide detailed organization of the execution team deployed for the

works with names and CV‟s, of all key staff before the commencement of work and get it

approved of in writing by the Owner/ Consultant. Contact telephone or pager numbers for

emergency and/or twenty-four (24) hour call shall also be included.

3. If in any case of withdrawal of any worker/ technician/Engineer from the execution team, the

replacement of the same shall be done with equivalent qualification, and shall be approved in

writing by the Owner/ Consultant.

196

PART 2 – PRODUCT, TESTING & COMMISIONING

2.1. DESIGN CRITERIA

Electrical Details for Incoming Supply:

Supply Voltage: as approved by SEB

Fault Level (Sym.) at supply point (Designated): MVA (to be confirmed from State Electricity

Board by Bidder).

Neutral: Grounded

Voltage Regulations: + 10%

Frequency Regulations: + 3%

Combined Regulations: + 10%

LT Power Distribution System:

Voltage: 415 V

Frequency: 50 Hz

Neutral: Grounded

Short Circuit Fault withstand capacity: 35 to 50 KA for 1 sec., as per BOQ and specifications

Control supply for Electrical System:

The various supply voltage to be used in the control panels for the main equipment shall be

as under:

Spring charge motor: 230 V AC or 240 V DC (Universal Motor)

Closing/ Trip Coil: 24 C DC

Alarm/ Indication/ Relays: 24 V DC

Heaters: 230 V AC

Painting of Panels:

Powder coating of approved shade as per Specification. (Refer clause of painting)

Painting of Cable Trays and Structural steel:

Powder coating of approved shade as per Specification. (Refer clause of painting)

Cable Details:

LT Control Cables: Copper conductor armoured PVC insulated 1.1 KV grade.

LT Power Cables: Aluminium conductor armoured XLPE insulated.

Grounding Conductors: Copper/ G.I. as specifications and BOQ

Accuracy Class of Meters:

Revenue Meters: Class-I or as approved by SEB

Ammeters, Voltmeters & Other Instruments: Digital Type

2.2. DRAWINGS:

The list of drawings is enclosed along with this specification. These drawings are meant to give

general idea to bidder regarding the nature of work covered by these specifications.

Any information/data shown/not shown in these drawings shall not relieve the contractor of his

responsibility to carry out the work as per the specifications. Additional information required by

the bidder for successfully completing the work shall be obtained by him.

2.3. SHOP DRAWINGS:

The contractor shall prepare detailed coordinated electrical shop drawing indicating D.G. set

layout, D.G. Control Panel and Cable Schedule with other relevant services and submit to the

Consultant for approval or the Engineer-in-Charge before commencing the work. The shop

drawings shall indicate all setting out details and physical dimensions of all components with

wiring and cable details including system operating write up in the system i.e. Control and Relay

Panel D.G.‟s, cable schedule and routes, manhole trap and fixing details for the above mentioned

work. All work shall be carried out on the approval of these drawings. However, approval of these

drawings do not relieve the contractor of his responsibility for providing maintenance free and full

197

proof system including any missing component/accessories to meet with the intent of the

specifications. Contractor will submit 2 (two) prints for preliminary approval and finally 6 (six)

prints for distribution.

2.4. MANUFACTURER‟S INSTRUCTIONS:

Where manufacturers have furnished specific instructions, relating to the material/equipments to

be used on this job, covering points not specifically mentioned in this document, manufacturer‟s

instructions should be followed.

2.5. COMPLETION DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS:

1. Three copies of operation manuals/catalogues of all standard equipment are to be furnished

by the contractor immediately after commissioning of plant.

2. Three copies of write up on preventive maintenance, trouble shooting and operating

instructions of the system along with as-built drawings are to be supplied by the Contractor at

the time of commissioning.

3. On completion of the work in all respects, the Contractor shall supply five portfolios (300x450

mm), each containing complete set of drawings on approved scale, clearly indicating

complete layouts, location; wiring and sequencing of automatic controls, location of all

concealed wiring and other services. Each portfolio shall also contain consolidated control

diagrams and technical literature on all controls. The Contractor shall frame under glass, in

the Panel rooms, one set of these consolidated control diagrams.

2.6. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

All the materials and equipments shall be of the approved make and design. Unless otherwise

called for any approval by Owner‟s Engineer-in-Charge, only the best quality materials and

equipment shall be used.

Space Heaters:

Suitable number of adequately rated heaters thermostatically controlled with On-Off switch and

fuse shall be provided to prevent condensation in any panel compartment. The heaters shall be

installed in the lower portion of the compartment and electrical connections shall be made from

below the heaters to minimize deterioration of supply wire insulation. The heaters shall be

suitable to maintain the compartment temperature to prevent condensation.

Fungi static Varnish:

Besides the space heaters, special moisture and fungus resistant varnish shall be applied on

parts, which may be subjected or predisposed to the formation of fungi due to the presence or

deposit of nutrient substances. The varnish shall not be applied to any surface of part where the

treatment will interfere with the operation or performance of the equipment. Such surfaces or

parts shall be protected against the application of the varnish.

Ventilation Opening:

In order to ensure adequate ventilation, compartments shall have ventilation openings provided

with fine wire mesh of brass to prevent the entry of insects and to reduce to a minimum the entry

of dirt and dust. Outdoor compartment openings shall be provided with shutter type blinds.

Degree of Protection:

The enclosures of the control cabinet, junction boxes and marshalling boxes, panels. etc to be

installed shall provide degree of protection as detailed her under.

Installed indoor : IP-55

Installed indoor in air-conditioned area : IP-31

Installed in covered area : I P-42

Installed indoor in non air-conditioned area where possibility of entry of water is limited : IP-41

For LT Switchgear (AC and DC distribution boards) : IP-42

198

The degree of protection shall be in accordance with IS: 13947 (Part –I) IEC-947 (Part –I). Type

test report for degree of protection test, on each type of the box shall be submitted for approval.

Rating plates, Name plates and Labels:

D.G. Sets, D.G. Control panel and auxiliary items installed in the building is to permanently

attached to it in a conspicuous position. A rating plate of non-corrosive material with engraved

manufacturer‟s name, year of manufacture, equipment name, type or serial number together with

details of loading conditions of equipment in question has been designed to operate and such

diagram plates as may require by the owner. The rating plate of each equipment shall be in

accordance to IEC requirement.

All such nameplates, instruction plates, rating plates shall be bilingual with Hindi inscription first

followed by English. Alternatively two separate plates on with Hindi and another with English

inscriptions may be provided.

First fill of consumables, Oil & Lubricants:

All the first fill of consumables such as oils, lubricants, filing compounds, touch up paints,

welding/ soldering/ brazing material for all Copper/ G.I earthing and essential chemicals etc.

which will be required to put the equipment/ scheme covered under scope of the specifications,

into successful operation, shall be furnished by the contractor unless specifically excluded under

the exclusions in these specifications/ documents.

Design Improvements:

The bidder shall note that the equipment offered to him in the bid only shall be accepted for

supply. If for any reason, contractor wished to deviate from specification, prior permission from

owner/ consultant shall be sought.

If any change is agreed upon and that if affects the price and schedule of completion, the parties

shall agree in writing as to the extent of any change in the price and/ or schedule of completion

before the contractor proceeds with the change. Following such arrangements, the provision

thereof, shall be deemed to have been amended accordingly in the specification.

Quality Assurance Programme:

To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of this Contract whether

manufactured or performed within the Contractor‟s works or at his sub-contractor‟s premises or at

the Owner‟s site or at any other place of work are in accordance with the specifications, the

Contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance program to control such activities at all points

necessary. Such programme shall be outlined by the Contractor and shall be finally accepted by

the Owner after discussions before the award of Contract. A quality assurance programme of the

contractor shall generally cover the following:

1. His organization structure for the management and implementation of the proposed quality

assurance programme.

2. Documentation control system.

3. Qualification data for bidder‟s key personnel.

4. The procedure for purchases of materials, parts components and selection of sub-

contractor‟s services including vendor analysis, source inspection, incoming raw material

inspection, verification of material purchases etc.

5. System for shop manufacturing and site erection controls including process controls and

fabrication and assembly control.

6. Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective actions.

7. Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field activities.

8. Control of calibration and testing of measuring instruments and field activities.

199

9. System for indication and appraisal of is inspection status.

10. System for authorizing release of manufactured product to the Owner.

11. System for maintenance of records.

12. System for handling storage and delivery and.

13. The Owner or his duly authorized representative reserves the right to carry out quality audit

and quality surveillance of the system and procedure of the Contractor / his Vendor‟s quality

management and control activities.

Quality Assurance Documents

The Contractor shall be required to submit the following Quality Assurance Documents within

three weeks after dispatch of the equipment.

All Non-Destructive Examination procedures, stress relief and weld repair procedure actually

used during fabrication and reports including radiography interpretation reports.

Welder and welding operator qualification certificates.

Welder‟s identification list, listing welder‟s and welding operator‟s qualification procedure and

welding identification symbols.

Raw material test reports on components as specified by the specification and / or agreed to in

the quality plan.

Stress relief time temperature charts/oil impregnation time temperature charts.

Factory test results for testing required as per applicable codes/mutually agreed quality

plan/standards referred in the technical specification.

The quality plan with verification of various customer inspection points (CIP) as mutually and

methods used to verify the inspection and testing points in the quality plan were performed

satisfactory.

2.7. INSPECTION, TESTING AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATES:

The Owner and the Consultant or duly authorized representative shall have at all reasonable

times free access to the Contractor‟s premises or works and shall have the power at all

reasonable times to inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of the works during its

manufacture or erection, if part of the works is being manufactured or assembled at other

premises or works, the Contractor shall obtain permission to inspect as if the works were

manufactured or assembled on the Contractor‟s own premises or works. Inspection may be

made at any stage of manufacture, dispatch or at site at the option of the Owner and the

equipment if found unsatisfactory due to bad workmanship or quality, material is liable to be

rejected.

All equipment being supplied shall conform to type tests and shall be subject to routine tests in

accordance with requirements stipulated under respective sections. Bidder shall submit the type

tests reports for approval. The Contractor shall intimate the Owner/Consultant the detailed

programme about the tests at least three (3) weeks in advance in case of domestic supplies. If

for any item type test were pending payment would be made on successful completion of

type/routine test(s) actually carried out as per Consultant/Owner instructions.

The Contractor shall give the Consultant/Owner thirty (30) days written notice of any material

being ready for testing. Such tests shall be to the Contractor‟s account. The Consultant/Owner

unless witnessing of the tests is virtually waived will attend such tests within thirty (30) days of

the date of which the equipment is notified as being ready for test/inspection, failing which the

Contractor may proceed with the test which shall be deemed to have been made in the presence

of Owner/Consultant and he shall forthwith forward to the Consultant duly certified copies of tests

in triplicate.

The Consultant/Owner shall within fifteen (15) days from the date of inspection as defined shall

200

inform in writing to the Contractor of any objection to any drawings and all or any equipment and

workmanship which in his opinion is not in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall

give due consideration to such objections and make the necessary modifications accordingly.

When the factory tests have been completed at the Contractor‟s or Sub-contractor‟s works, the

Consultant/Owner shall issue a certificate to this effect within fifteen (15) days after completion of

tests but if the tests are not witnessed by the Consultant/Owner, the certificate shall be issued

within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the Contractor‟s Test certificate by the Consultant/Owner.

Failure of the issue such a certificate shall not prevent the Contractor from proceeding with the

works. The completion of these tests or the issue of the certificate shall not bind the Owner to

accept the equipment should, it, on further tests after erection, is found not to comply with the

Specification. The equipment shall be dispatched to site only after approval of test reports and

issuance of MICC by the Owner.

For tests whether at the premises or at the works of the Contractor or of any Sub-Contractor, the

Contractor except where otherwise specified shall provide free of charge such items as labour,

materials, electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be required by

Owner/Consultant or this authorized representative to carry out effectively such tests of the

equipment in accordance with the Specification.

The inspection by Owner/Consultant and issue of Inspection Certificate thereon shall in no way

limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the Contractor in respect of the agreed quality assurance

programme forming a part of the Contract.

The Consultant/Owner will have the right of having at his own expenses any other tests(s) of

reasonable nature carried out at Contractor‟s premises or at site or in any other place in addition

of aforesaid type and routine tests to satisfy that the material comply with the specifications.

The Owner/Consultant reserves the right for getting any field tests not specified in respective

sections of the technical specification conducted on the completely assembled equipment at site.

The testing equipments for these tests shall be provided by the Contractor.

2.8. TESTS:

Charging (Pre-commissioning tests):

On completion of erection of the equipment and before charging, each item of the equipment

shall be thoroughly cleaned and then inspected jointly by the Owner/Consultant and the

Contractor for correctness and completeness of installation and acceptability for charging,

leading to initial precommissioning tests at Site. The pre-commissioning tests to be performed as

per relevant I.S. / vendor/ bidder submittal and as included in the Contractor‟s quality assurance

programme.

Commissioning Tests:

The available instrumentation and control equipment will be used during such tests and the

Contractor will calibrate all such measuring equipment and devices as far as practicable.

However, unmeasurable parameters shall be taken into account in a reasonable manner by the

Contractor for the requirement of these tests. The tests will be conducted at the specified load

points and as near the specified cycle condition as practicable. The Contractor will apply proper

corrections in calculation, to take into account conditions which do not correspond to the

specified conditions.

All instruments, tools and tackles required for the successful completion of the Commissioning

Tests shall be provided by the Contractor, free of cost.

Pre-commissioning test shall be carried out as per relevant IS and/or as specified in the relevant

clause.

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining statutory clearances from the concerned

authorities for commissioning of the equipment. However necessary fee shall be reimburse by

Owner on production of requisite documents.

201

2.9. PACKAGING:

All the equipments shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxed and crated to prevent

damage or deterioration during transit, handling and storage at Site till the time of erection. While

packing all the materials, the limitation from the point of view of availability of Railway

wagon/truck/trailer sizes in India should be taken account of the Contractor shall be responsible

for any loss or damage during transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing. Any

demurrage, wharfage and other such charges claimed by the transporters, railways etc. shall be

to the account of the Contractor. Owner takes no responsibility of the availability of any special

packaging/transporting arrangement.

2.10. PROTECTION:

All coated surfaces shall be protected against abrasion, impact, discoloration and any other

damages. All exposed threaded portions shall be suitably protected with either a metallic or a

non-metallic protecting device. All ends of all valves and piping and conduit equipment

connections shall be properly sealed with suitable devices to protect them from damage. The

parts which are likely to get rusted, due to exposure to weather should also be properly treated

and protected in a suitable manner.

2.11. FINISHING OF METAL SURFACES:

General:

All metal surfaces shall be subjected to treatment for anti-corrosion protection. All ferrous

surfaces for external use unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the specification or specifically

agreed, shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. High tensile steel nuts and bolts and spring

washers shall be electro galvanize. All steel conductors used for earthing/grounding (above

ground level) shall be galvanized according to IS: 2629.

Painting:

All sheet steel work shall be degreased, pickled, and phosphated in accordance with the IS-6005

“Code of practice for Phosphating iron and sheet”. All surfaces, which will not be easily

accessible after shop assembly, shall beforehand be treated and protected for the life of the

equipment. The surfaces, which are to be finished painted after installation or require corrosion

protection until installation, shall be shop painted with at least two coats of primer. Oil, grease,

dirt and swab shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning. Rust and scale shall be

removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing with running water, rinsing with slightly

alkaline hot water and drying.

After Phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water followed by final rinsing

with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying. The phosphate coating shall be sealed with

application of two coats of ready mixed, stoving type zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be

“flash dried” while the second coat shall be stoved.

Powder coating/electrostatic painting of approved shade shall be applied. The exterior color of

the paint shall be as per IS-5 or as approved by Consultant. A small quantity of finishing paint

shall be supplied for minor touching up required at site after installation of the equipments, if

required.

In case the Bidder proposes to follow his own standard surface finish and protection procedures

or any other established painting procedures like electrostatic painting etc. the procedure shall be

submitted along with the Bids for Owner‟s review and approval.

202

2.12. HANDLING, STORAGE AND INSTALLATION:

In accordance with the specific installation instructions as shown on manufacturer‟s drawings or

as directed by the Owner or his representative, the Contractor shall unload, store, erect, install,

wire, test and place into commercial use all the equipment included in the contract. Equipment

shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner so that it is level, plumb, square and properly

aligned and oriented.

Contractor shall follow the unloading and transporting procedure at site, as well as storing,

testing and commissioning of the various equipment being procured by him separately.

Contractor shall unload, transport, store, erect, test and commission the equipment as per

instructions of the manufacturer‟s Engineer(s) and shall extend full co-operation to them.

In case of any doubt/misunderstanding as to the correct interpretation of manufacturer‟s drawings

or instructions, necessary clarifications shall be obtained form the Owner/Consultant. Contractor

shall be held responsible for any damage to the equipment consequent for not following

manufacturer‟s drawings/instructions correctly.

Where assemblies are supplied in more than the one section, Contractor shall make all

necessary connections between sections. All components shall be protected against damage

during unloading, transportation, storage, installation, testing and commissioning. Any equipment

damaged due to negligence or carelessness or otherwise shall be replaced by the Contractor at

his own expense.

The Contractor shall submit to the Owner every week, a report detailing all the receipts during the

weeks. However, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for any shortages or damages in

transit, handling and/or in storage and erection of the equipment at Site. Any demurrage, wharf

age and other such charges claimed by the transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of

the Contractor.

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the equipment/material until the same is handed

over tot he Owner in an operating condition after commissioning. Contractor shall be responsible

for the maintenance of the equipment/material while in storage as well as after erection until

taken over by Owner, as well as protection of the same against theft, element of nature,

corrosion, damages etc.

The Contractor shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage facilities, to store all

equipment, which require indoor storage.

The words „erection‟ and „installation‟ used in the specification are synonymous.

Exposed live parts shall be placed high enough above ground to meet the requirements of

electrical and other statutory safety codes.

The minimum phase to earth, phase to phase and section clearance along with other technical

parameters for the various voltage levels shall be maintained as per relevant IS.

2.13. PROTECTIVE GUARDS

A. Suitable guards shall be provided for protection of personnel on all exposed rotating and / or

moving machine parts. All such guards with necessary spares and accessories shall be designed

for easy installation and removal for maintenance purpose.

B. The Contractor shall also conform to the general regulations governing personnel on the site and

must keep to the working space allocated for their use.

C. The contractor shall be responsible for any kind of mishap, etc. happened with personnel. The

Owner shall not take the responsibility for any of such kind.

2.14. TOOLS AND TACKLES:

The Contractor shall supply with the equipment one complete set of all special tools and tackles

for the erection, assembly, dismantling and maintenance of the equipments.

203

2.15. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

The equipment shall be capable of delivering power continuously at the generator terminals, a

net output not less than the specified value at 0.8-p.f. excluding auxiliary power (shall be included

over and above), when operating under the site ambient conditions described in this

specification. Gen. Set should have minimum 50% single step loading capacity and it should be

able to take full load in less than 25 sec. from start. (The set shall be suitable for prime duty). The

bidder shall furnish the detailed derating calculation due to temperature and other parameters

with supporting document.

The design parameters of the generator and excitation system shall be so chosen that the set is

stable while running at any load between no-load and full load and also during starting of motors

as specified in Annexure-I. It should also have iso-synchronous speed control with load sensing

governing system suitable for parallel running of D.G. sets.

Engine should be heavy-duty four strokes, turbo charged after cooler „V‟ construction, electric

start. Engine should have minimum lube oil change period 300 hrs.

The set shall have vibration limit less then 250 microns (as per BS: 4999 Part-142) and noise

level shall be (105-110 db (A)) at 1 Mtr) under all conditions of load. The set shall be dynamically

balanced. The set shall be mounted directly on the inertia foundation or with foundation bolts etc.

The efficient residential silencer shall be provided.

The total harmonics contents should be less than 3% as per IS 4722/1969. The graph &

calculation for harmonic distortion shall be submitted.

Contractor to specify and guarantee maintenance contract cost and to give an Undertaking to

take a comprehensive maintenance contract after expiry of warranty period for which price may

be quoted.

The successful bidder will submit shop drawing of the equipments/accessories selected for this

work for the approval of Consultant/ Employer.

2.16. DIESEL ENGINE – CONSTRUCTION

Material of construction of major parts shall be as under or as per manufacturer design.

M.S. base frame with anti-vibration mountings.

Crankcase – Aluminium alloys.

Crank shaft, connecting rods – Forged Alloy Steel.

Piston – Al. alloy casting

Piston rings – Alloy steel

Engine block – Cast iron.

Cylinder liner – Cast

All other materials of construction shall be as per relevant standard/code and the copies of same

shall be supplied free of cost to Consultant/Owner.

The Diesel Engine shall be multi-cylinder, 4-stroke, water cooled with engine mounted radiator

with shaft driven fan (not motor driven), totally enclosed, continuous duty, direct fuel injection,

turbo charged, compression ignition, inter cooled oil engine or with individual cylinder head with

provision to measure exhaust temperature.

One common base frame shall be provided for mounting the engine and alternator complete with

electric suspension between DG set and foundation bolts, leveling lines etc. as required.

All externally mounted hardware shall be high tensile steel only.

204

The engine shall be fitted with an exhaust gas driven turbo charger of air/water cooled type

complete with its own self contained lubricating system. The turbocharger shall be positioned at

the free end of the engine preferably. The turbocharger will be provided with a provision to check

its lube oil level.

The engine shall be fitted with a charge air inter cooled of the air/water type. Air from the turbo-

charger compressor passes through the inter cooler and then to the engine manifold. The inter

cooler shall be of tubular construction or a s per manufacturer design with aluminium bronze

tubes, mild sheet steel and cast iron water headers.

Diesel engine shall be capable of starting and operating for a few minutes without supply of raw

water for cooling. Contractor shall indicate the maximum time for which the Diesel Engine can be

operate.

2.17. GOVERNING SYSTEM

The Governor shall be electronic fuel control type for coupled Genset along with speed control

switch (solid state potentiometer) at the end of start on over speed.

2.18. ENGINE STARTING SYSTEM

Starting of the Diesel Engine shall be done by electric starting system.

The electric starting system shall comprise starter motor, starter batteries and battery charger

including with all required instruments and accessories. The engine mounted alternator shall

charge the batteries while engine is running and floor panel mounted solid state battery charger

while engine is at stationery. The battery charger shall be of 2 rate (boost/trickle) with all metering

and control instruments and protections for A/C and D/C circuit. The total system shall be

suitable for auto and manual operation including their wiring etc. Calculation for the battery and

battery charger capacity as well as complete descriptive circuit diagram shall be submitted for

review of Consultant based on 6 consecutive start commands.

2.19. CATALYTIC CONVERTER

A. Catalytic Converter should be suitable for high speed diesel oil available in the country with

sulphur contents to control Hydrocarbon (HC), Carbon Monoxides (CO), Total Particulate Matter

(TPM) and NOX.

B. The catalytic converter should be suitably designed to avoid sulphation of catalyst up to 550 Deg.

C. The converter should be air washable type or can be washed with DG set exhaust gasses in

case compressed air is not available. The casing of the catalytic converter should be in stainless

steel construction and should have a metal catalyst applied to a wash coat ceramic substrate

which will durable at 500 Deg. C temperature. The life of the catalytic converter should be more

than 10,000 hrs. C. The conversion efficiency of the catalytic converter to control exhaust gas

pollutants should be as following at the outlet of converter.

CO (Carbon Monoxides) : 80 – 90%

THO (Total Hydrocarbon) : 80 – 90%

TPM (Total Particulate Matter) : 40 – 50%

NOX : 15 – 20%

Catalytic converter shall be able to reduce the noise level by 10db (A)

2.20. FUEL OIL SYSTEM:

The manufacturer shall furnish a mild steel day tank of required capacity for individual engine.

The day tank shall be suitably located to avoid gravity feed to the engine, shaft driven fuel oil

pumps and shall be complete with gauges, glasses, filling, draining and vent connection with

valves and level switch for auto filling of tank and for alarm in case oil level goes beyond limit.

205

The fuel system shall be provided with full flow duplex oil cartridge filter preferably changeable

during running of the set.

The fuel oil system shall be equipped with a crankshaft driven fuel oil transfer pump which will

draw the fuel oil from the day tank via filters and shall be as per the engine manufacturer design.

Multi point (electronically controlled) fuel injection system or direct injection/through ISO

synchronous fuel Governing system shall be designed taking into account the type of fuel used,

engine speed etc. so as to achieve safe knock free performance with low emission smoke.

2.21. LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM:

All lubricating parts of the engine shall be connected to a pressurized lubricating oil distribution

piping system being continuously charged by gear type lube oil pump mounted at the free end of

the engine and driven from the engine crank shaft. The pumps shall take suction from a sump

tank integral with the engine through a foot valve, suction filter through oil cooler and deliver oil to

a main supply header. High-pressure oil shall be supplied to the main and big end bearings,

crankshaft bearings, governor, auxiliary drive gear etc. Suitable lubricating arrangement for

engine cylinder valve gear, cams and pistons at the required level shall be arranged. A pressure

relief valve shall be mounted on the main supply header for safety against too high-pressure

while starting with cold oil. A timer based, auto running (auto priming pump) shall be provided to

keep engine primed all the time complete with control system (if required).

The lube oil system shall be provided with full flow duplex lube oil cartridge filters. The minimum

lube oil change shall be 300 hrs.

Arrangement shall be provided to bypass the lube oil pressure switches and safety at the starting

till the pressure is built up.

The lube oil sump shall have provision to sense the low level of lube oil in the sump and fill it up

manually or automatically from the main lube oil tank/sump and stop the transfer pump, once the

lube oil is filled in the sump without stopping the engine. Pressure switches to give alarm under

extreme low pressure of lube oil and subsequently to trip the unit when the minimum safe

pressure has been reached, shall be provided.

All necessary accessories such as pressure gauges, temperature indicators, pressure relief

valves, bypass valves, pressure switches shall be provided and the safeties shall be wired up to

junction box

2.22. EXHAUST SYSTEM:

Engine emission exhaust system shall be residential type silencer ducting, bends, hood/canopy,

thermally insulated aluminium clad exhaust piping etc. shall be provided along with structural

support with stays for each engine. Heat resistant paint shall be provided on exhaust pipe for the

portion, which is of outside the building including canopy. Exhaust system pollution level shall be

indicated and shall be got approved by authorities. (Exhaust smoke quality & quantity should be

within the norms of central & state pollution control board).

2.23. ENGINE ALTERNATOR CONTROL PANEL:

A. Engine alternator (D.G.) control panel shall be provided with speedometer, lubricating oil

pressure gauge, lube oil temp, jacket water temp, battery charging, water pressure, fuel pressure

for local indication panel mounted on the engine itself.

B. Engine shall be supplied with engine control module (ECM) for diesel generating set monitoring

control system, which should be equipped with (digital) electronic Governor along with solid-state

AVR to facilitate discreet control of speed and voltage or as per manufacture design. The system

shall be equipped with starting control including integrated fuel ramping to limit the black smoke

frequency overshoot with optimized cold weather starting. The engine instrument panel shall be

equipped with digital alarm and status to monitor and display the following parameters. The

scanner, inter face modules, converter, probe and their wiring up to terminal block in panel with

206

485 ports etc. making compatibility with PLC. The necessary CT/PT shall be included and wired

accordingly to meet the requirements.

C. Engine Indicators:

Digital tachometer with running hour meter

Lubricating oil pressure low

Lube oil temp. high

Coolant water temp. high.

Over speed

Bearing temperature.

Engine fail to start

Lack of fuel due to low level.

Volts RY-YB-BR.

Amps R-Y-B.

2.24. AMF CONTROL PANELS:

Control Philosophy:

Automatic Starting and Stopping of Engines:

The system should come in operation after sensing of GRID FAILURE and / or the voltage

drops below preset value. For this purpose the NB-2 or equivalent “ENGINE CONTROL &

AUTOMATIC MAINS FAILURE STAND BY SYSTEM” shall be provided to perform the

following functions.

Sensing the healthiness of supply from Supply Company, the engine shall be at rest.

On sensing the supply healthiness (the supply fails or drop below the preset value) the

command shall be issued to start the D.G. Set.

In case the D.G. Set does not start in the 1st command, the two more commands shall be

given to start the D.G. Set at an equal interval of time (5 Sec). Even then if the engine

does not start, the indication shall appear on window / screen “Set fail to start” and alarm

shall be generated.

On starting of D.G. Set & monitoring the healthiness of supply, the load shall

automatically be transferred on D.G.

On restoration of the supply & monitoring the healthiness of the system, the load shall be

transferred to Mains automatically & vice versa.

Manual Mode:

Select manual mode on the relay unit.

The Set shall only be started by pushing the “start button” on the relay.

On attaining the requisite voltage & frequency, the D.G. breaker / Contactor will be closed or

tripped manually without shutting down the engine.

The Engine shall be shut down manually by pressing the push button.

Test Mode:

The test mode operation is independent of the conditions of the mains supply & thereby

enables routine testing or exercising of the D.G. Set without closing the D.G. breaker /

contactor. (Select the switch on selector mode & is similar to the auto mode except closing of

the breaker).

207

The relay shall have following features such as:

Mode selector switch (Auto/Manual/Test/Off)

Engine Control switch (On/Off push button)

Reset/Acknowledge push button.

Breaker close/open push button.

Test push button.

Set of visual indication shall be

Load on Mains.

Load on D.G. Set.

Set fails to start.

Low-pressure alarm & Trip.

High temperature alarm & Trip.

Engine over speed.

Alternator overload & short circuit.

Voltages, phase to phase & phase to neutral.

Ammeter Line / Phase current.

Power factor meter.

Kilowatt-hour meter.

Frequency meter.

Tachometer.

2.25. ALTERNATOR (415V – 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE SYSTEM):

The Alternator shall be industrial type screen protected drip proof. IP-23. Class – H insulation

with temperature rise limited to Class-‟H‟, self ventilated, air cooled, rotating field, salient pole,

brush less, machine with self excited, self regulated exciter and shall be rated for continuous

duty.

The Alternator shall have a continuous rating of not less than the value specified under

specific requirement shall be at 0.8. The alternator shall be suitable to run for P.F.0.99 (lag)

with capacitor controlled by APFC relay.

The short circuit ratio (SCR) of the generator at rated KVA and rated voltage shall not be less

than 0.48.

The Alternator shall withstand without mechanical damage, an over speed of 20% for a

period of 3 minutes.

The generator/alternator shall with stand over load of 10% for 1 hour every 12 hourly. The

terminal voltage shall be adjustable and the range of adjustment shall be + 5% of nominal

voltage.

The Alternator shall be capable of withstanding without damage/injury for 3 secs., 3-phase

short circuit at its terminals, when operated at rated KVA and power factor at 5% over voltage

with fixed excitation (3 times the line current for 10 Sec.).

The Alternator shall be capable of withstanding for thirty (10) secs. a current of fifty (50)

percent in excess of its rated current, the voltage being maintained, as near the rated value

as possible, consistent with max. capacity of the prime mover.

Six Nos. embedded Resistant temperature detector (RTDs) of platinum. 100-ohm resistance

at 0 Degree to measure the winding temperature and 2 Nos., BTDS bearing temperature

shall be provided.

The leads of embedded RTDs shall be wired up to the terminal block in a separate auxiliary

terminal box. Manufacturer shall indicate the setting values for each RTD/BTD for alarm and

trip.

All external nuts and bolts shall be of high tensile steel only.

208

Alternator shall be provided with anti-condensation space heater of adequate rating suitable

for 240V, 50 Hz., 1ph A.C. supply and shall be wired up to a separate terminal box.

Thermostatically controlled shall work when the machine is in idle condition only (wiring and

equipment shall be provided by D.G. supplier).

Two independent earth terminals on the frame, complete with nuts, spring washer and plain

washer shall be provided.

Alternator shall be provided with suitable terminal box for terminating TP&N bus-duct/cables

droop and protection. CTS within the terminal box duly wired up to the panel should be

provided.

The alternator shall be capable to sustain the unbalanced current between the phases

minimum 40% of rated current provide that the KVA rating and maximum current does not

exceed 11% of rated current in any phase as per BS-4999 Part-101.

The alternator shall be fitted with radio interference suppressors in accordance with BS-613-

1977 and shall be within the limit of CISPR standard also.

The alternator shall be dynamically balanced complete with rotor and shaft.

Alternator should have bearings at both shaft ends.

Damper winding shall be provided in the pole to damp the oscillations and ensure satisfactory

performance during parallel operation.

Winding of 3 phase alternator shall be of star connected and neutral point shall be brought

out to the terminal box through protection and earthed with independent earth or through

contactor as per scheme.

Protection CT‟s/PT‟s shall be mounted above the terminal box with enclosure. Bus duct/cable

shall be terminated on terminals through this.

Diesel generating set shall be able to start motor of 30% capacity of D.G. set with a 20%

base load.

2.26. AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR:

An automatic high speed, dead band channel voltage regulator shall be provided with all

accessories. The regulation system shall be with equipment accessories for automatic as well as

for manual switchover control.

The voltage regulator shall be dual be dual control type i.e. the voltage regulation shall be

through compound transformer or magnetic amplifier and the electronic regulation through solid

state devices automatically both shall be secured from all three phases. The combined voltage

regulation shall be ± 1% from full load to no-load from hot to cold at unity power factor and 0.8 to

0.99 power factor with 4% speed regulation of the engine.

Voltage regulation and steady state modulation shall be within ± 1% of the line voltage and with

manual voltage adjustment capability within ± 5%. The maximum permissible wave from

distortion should not exceed 5% at any load.

Necessary equipment for field suppression and surge protection shall be provided.

The response time of the exciter and the generator shall be matched to avoid hunting.

AVR system shall be provided with equipment for auto-manual operation from remote (PLC –

joystick or push buttons)

In the event of AVR failure, the generator excitation control is transferred automatically without

any change in the excitation current.

Necessary equipment shall be furnished for the following:

To prevent rise of field voltage in case of failure of potential supply.

209

To initiate from automatic to manual control of excitation on fuse failure in the generator potential

signal.

To facilitate reactive load sharing of parallel operating generator shall be in proposition to their

ratings. The quartrative droop current transfer compensation feature should be provided on

exciter regulation and droop voltage shall be within 1% variation.

D.G. Set Vendor shall inspect the existing system and include all necessary hardware, input/

output modules and junction box with terminal block and its wiring complete as required to make

the system operational in PLC/ Manual mode and to be included in price bid.

2.27. COMMISSIONING CHECKS:

In addition to the checks and test recommended by the manufacturer, the Contractor shall

supervise the following commissioning checks to be carried out at site.

A. Load Test (site and factory):

The engine shall be given test run for a period of at least 6 hours. The set shall be subjected to

the maximum achievable load as directed by Owner without exceeding the specified D.G. Set

rating: During the load test, half hourly records of the following shall be taken:

Ambient temperature

Cooling water temperature at a convenient point adjacent to the water output from the engine

jacket.

Lubricating oil temperature where oil cooler fitted.

Lubricating oil pressure.

Color of exhaust gas.

Speed.

Voltage, wattage and current output.

Oil tank level.

The necessary load to carry out the test shall be provided by the Owner.

B. Insulation Resistance Test for Alternator:

Insulation resistance in mega-ohms between the coils and the frame of the alternator when

tested with a 1000V megger shall not be less than

IR = 2 x (rated voltage in KV) + 1

C. Fuel consumption Check:

A check of the fuel consumption shall be made during the load run test. This test shall be

conducted for the purpose of proper tuning of the engine.

D. Insulation Resistance of Wiring:

Insulation resistance of control panel wiring shall be checked by 500V megger. The IR shall not

be less than one mega ohm.

E. Functional Tests:

Functional tests on control panel. Functional test on starting provision on the engine. Functional

tests on all Field devices. Functional tests on AVR and speed governor.

F. Vibration Measurement:

The vibration shall be measured at Load as close to maximum achievable load and shall not

exceed 130 microns.

210

2.28. TEST CERTIFICATES AND REPORTS:

Test Certificate shall be submitted in eight (8) copies.

The test certificates shall be furnished to the owner for prior approval before dispatch of any

equipment from works and the approval in writing from owner shall be essential to effect dispatch

of the equipment.

The test reports shall furnish complete identification of the data including serial number of each

equipment.

2.29. NOISE CONTROL IN DIESEL GENERATOR ROOMS:

A. Construction Features/ Requirements:

1. The container shall be designed for easy access to serviceable parts of the D.G Set.

2. The acoustic container shall be made of Modular construction for easy assembling and

dismantling.

3. The container shall be fabricated out of CRCA sheet of 14 Gauge. Base frame should be

made out of ISMC of suitable sections or made out of sheet steel minimum of thickness 5

mm.

4. All the hard ware used shall be of high tensile grade.

5. Fuel tank shall be kept outside of enclosure and shall have 990-liter capacities. The fuel

piping shall be carried out to connect the D.G set kept inside.

6. Battery shall be accommodated in the container itself.

7. The container doors should be gasketed to avoid leakage of sound.

8. All the door handles shall be lockable type.

9. The D.G set shall be integrated part of the container .The complete assembly shall be one

unit

B. Painting:

The sheet metal components should be hot dip and seven tanks pretreated.

To have long life of container it shall be painted with P.P. based powder coated (inside as well

outside)

C. Acoustic Insulation:

Sound proofing of enclosure should be done with quality rock wool/mineral wool

The Residential silencer should be provided within the DG to control exhaust noise as per noise

emission laws

Interconnection between silencer and engine should be through stainless steel flexible hose/

pipe.

The insulation should be designed to have 75 dB (A) at a distance of one meter to meet the noise

limitations of pollution department

D. D. Ventilation and Air Circulation: 1. The system should be designed to provide air inlet/exhaust

acoustic louvers for efficient air circulation 2. The ventilation should be designed to restrict the

temperature rise above ambient as five to seven degree centigrade. 3. The manufacturer of

acoustic container shall have approval from engine manufacturer for the design parameter as

specified above and laid down by them from time to time for engine performance and warrantee.

211

E. Electrical:

1. Provision for Neutral/Body Earthing: Points shall be available at side of the enclosure with the

help of flexible copper wires from alternator neutral, and electrical panel body respectively.

The earthing point shall be isolated through DMC insulator mounted on enclosure.

2. Control Panel shall be mounted outside the container.

3. Safeties:

Low lube oil pressure

High water temperature

High enclosure temp.

There should be provision for emergency shut down from outside the container.

F. Exhaust Pipe Insulation:

Exhaust pipe insulation shall be carried out with mineral wood (rigid pipe sections) of 150 kgs/m3

for temp above 250 ºC. The material for pipe insulation shall be factory faced with aluminium foil

reinforced with Kraft paper. The aluminium foil shall extend by min. 50 mm on one side of pipe

side along the length to seal all longitudinal joints etc.

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING:

A. Testing and commissioning shall be done as per the programme/instructions to be given by

Owner/Consultant‟s authorized representative. All testing equipments necessary to carry out the

tests shall be arranged by the electrical Contractor.

B. Before the electrical system is made live, the electrical Contractor shall carry out suitable tests to

the satisfaction of Owner/Consultant that all equipment wiring and connections have been

correctly done and are in good working condition and will operate as intended.

212

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. DESCRIPTION

Provide power factor correction equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2. STANDARDS

The installation shall comply with IS-2834 – Capacitors, BS 1650 and IEC 70 and SEB

regulation.

1.3. SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer‟s product data sheets for Capacitor Banks, over current protection devices,

automatic power factor regulators, harmonic filters, etc.

B. Dimensioned layout and elevation drawings showing the capacitor banks, housekeeping pads,

and support locations and types.

C. One line diagram showing capacitor ratings, over current protection device ratings, cable lugs,

metering displays, identification nameplate, and fuse clip sizes.

D. Wiring diagrams.

E. Installation instructions.

F. Certified test reports.

1.4. FIELD TESTING

A. Field inspection and testing shall occur after installation is complete, feeders are terminated, and

the room is secure. Testing shall be conducted not more than 4 weeks before equipment is

energized.

B. Testing Scope:

1. Visual and physical inspection of equipment.

2. Check control wiring and metering.

3. Meter calibration.

4. System Grounding

C. Certified Test Reports:

1. Field testing shall be performed by an independent third party testing agency.

2. Verify that the installation is in accordance with the manufacturer‟s instructions.

3. Verify that the equipment has been fully type tested and is operational.

4. Perform testing and compile detailed test reports for each capacitor banks and over current

protection device.

213

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. POWER FACTOR CORRECTION / HARMONIC FILTERING EQUIPMENT

A. Voltage: 400volts ± 10% three phase, 50HZ

B. Operating Temperature Limits: manufacture detail to operate at 100 percent rated voltage in

ambient air temperature up to 500C.

C. Indicators: Include LED indicating light for each step of capacity.

D. Basic Impulse Level: 30kV

E. Integrated Equipment Short-Circuit Rating: 65,000 rms amperes symmetrical.

F. Power Factor Sensing and Control: Utilize reactive current sensing and solid state electronic

controller to automatically connect appropriate correction capacitors and detuned reactors to line

through contactors. Include time delay to accommodate capacitor resistor discharge and prevent

hunting.

G. Contactors: electrically held, three-pole, 600-volt, general-purpose magnetic contactors sized in

accordance with IEC Standard. Contacts shall be silver plated. Allow 50 kVAR steps.

H. Power Bus: tin-plated copper sized to handle rated current without abnormal temperature rise.

I. Under voltage Relay: Controller shall incorporate an under voltage relay to interrupt control relays

for power failures longer than 15 milliseconds.

J. Fuses each individual capacitor branch circuit on the line side of the contactor. Fuses shall be

current limiting type with 100,000-ampere symmetrical interrupting capacity.

K. Blown Fuse Indicator: Each capacitor and harmonic filter fuse circuit shall be provided with a

blown fuse indicator consisting of a fused neon lamp which illuminates without requiring removal

of covers.

L. Transient Suppressors: Each capacitor and harmonic filter branch circuit shall include a current-

limiting air core inductor. The inductor shall be sized to limit the capacitor in-rush current to a

value equal to or less than the capacitor switching rating of the contactor.

M. Blocking Reactor; a harmonic current suppression (Blocking Reactor – 7%) shall be provided for

each step.

N. Power Factor Meter: switchboard-type power factor meter with display range of 0.5 lagging

accuracy, plus or minus 1 percent to 0.5 leading. Meter shall be located in the door of the

controller enclosure.

O. Current Transformer: Provide a current transformer with turns ratio as required. Extend control

conductors to controller.

P. Dielectric Impregnate: non-PCB, non combustible liquid.

Q. Enclosure: Complete with enclosure and located in switch room outside switchboard

R. Construction: internally fused, replaceable capacitor cells factory assembled and bussed and

together in protective enclosure; include internal discharge resistor.

S. Cooling: naturally ventilated.

T. Access: enclosure access through a removable capacitor door located on top of enclosure;

access door shall be interlocked to de-energised contactor(s) when the door is opened.

U. Finish: manufacturer‟s standard grey enamel

214

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1. EXAMINATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer‟s instructions.

B. Locate capacitors and harmonic filters to allow adequate ventilation around enclosure.

C. Provide disconnecting switch to remove capacitors and detuned reactors.

3.2. DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide a factory trained field representative to instruct the Employer‟s personnel for a period of

no less than 2 days in maintenance and operation of the equipment.

3.3. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test the Capacitor Banks in accordance with the requirements of Start-up Testing and

Commissions of Electrical Equipment.

215

ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. WORK DESCRIPTION

A. The scope of works for all electrical works and systems comprises engineering, supply, delivery,

installation, testing and commissioning, handover, training, maintenance and warranty all as

described or reasonably implied in the Contract. The Contractor is obliged to provide fully

functioning works and systems in conformance with the requirements of the Contract. In the

event certain items are not fully described or indicated in the Contract, but deemed essential by

the Engineer for the performance of the works and systems then the provision of such items shall

form part of the Contractors scope of works at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible to co-ordinate the equipment and services and shall produce

properly co-ordinated shop drawings to demonstrate the installation comply with the performance

requirement with shop drawing, calculations and details. A. Shop drawings shall take into

account actual measurement and setting out dimensions/levels obtained and determined by the

Contractor on site, actual equipment/material used, actual routing of services, co-ordination with

all installation, and site conditions/constraints. This specification is intended to cover installation,

testing and commissioning of LV Panels and associated equipment/ materials, panels, etc.

1.2. SCOPE OF WORK:

A. The Electrical and ELV installation shall generally include the following:

1. Common Services:

a. Liaison with the local supply Authority to obtain and coordinate provision of incoming

electricity supply.

b. Installation, testing & commissioning of MV system including incoming electricity supply,

consumer main MV switchboard, cabling to component MV switchboards, cabling to

power transformer, power transformers and associated accessories to SEB requirement

and arrange SEB acceptance upon completed.

c. Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of telephone system including incoming

telephone lines, component telephone distribution panel at each level, interconnecting

cablings and associated accessories.

d. To provide telephone cabling as specified on the drawings.

e. Complete central earthing systems for connection with component electrical systems.

2. Internal Services

a. Complete LV distribution system including main LV switchboard, automatic power factor

correction devices, sub-boards and distribution boards, UPS and associated distribution

main and sub-main cabling and associated accessories.

b. Complete lighting and power installation including all final circuiting work and associated

accessories.

c. Normal and emergency lighting supply and installation and associated accessories.

d. Complete earthing system.

e. Complete lightning protection system and associated accessories.

f. Complete telephone cabling system and associated accessories.

g. Complete wiring work to external/landscape and public area architectural/special lighting

and dimming systems and associated accessories.

h. Complete cable support system for future structure cabling system and associate works.

216

i. Miscellaneous works like providing and fixing of rubber mats, fire buckets, first aid box,

fire extinguishers, etc.

j. All associated interfacing power supply work to other mechanical installations.

k. All interfacing works with the Building Management System for remote control and

monitoring.

l. All associated interfacing works with other M&E installations.

m. Other works as shown on the Drawings and described elsewhere in the Contract

documents.

B. The item rate shall remain valid for variation to any extent of the estimated quantities given in the

Schedule of Quantities.

C. All equipment shall be of the class most suitable for working under the conditions specified and

shall withstand the atmospheric conditions without deterioration.

D. Minor civil work is included in the contractor‟s scope of work. Further, the responsibility of

coordination with the civil and other contracting agencies ensuring completion of turnkey contract

rests with the contractor.

E. Contractor shall co-ordinate with all other agencies working at site for interconnection and safety

aspects.

F. Also the Contractor shall furnish back up combined guarantee minimum for 1 year from the date

of successful commissioning from the manufacturer. In case there is any defect, the free

replacement of any part or in whole will be made immediately at no extra cost to Owner.

1.3. FEE, PERMITS & TESTS:

A. The contractor shall obtain all sanctions and permits required for the above said works from all

the relevant authorities. All actual fees payable in this regard will be reimbursed against

receipt/documentary proof (evidence). On completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain

N.O.C from concerned authorities including SEB, Chief Electrical Inspectorate, of State. The

original of the same shall be delivered to the Owner through Consultants.

B. The Owner shall have full power regarding the equipments/ materials get tested by authorized/

recognized independent agency at the contractor‟s expense in order to prove their soundness

and adequacy. The contractor will rectify the defects/ suggestions pointed out by independent

agency through Owner at contractor‟s expense.

C. The installation shall comply in all respects with the requirements of Indian Electricity Act 1910,

Indian Electricity Rules (IER) 1956 and other related Laws and Regulations (for F.F. etc.) as

amended up to date, there under and special requirements, if any, of the State Electricity Boards

etc. The contractor shall be liable to furnish the list of authorized licensed persons/ employed/

deputed to carry out the works/ perform the assigned duties to fulfill the requirement of Rule No.3

of IER 1956 as amended up to date.

1.4. CODES & STANDARDS:

A. The design, manufacture, inspection, testing and performance shall comply with all the currently

applicable statutes, safety codes, relevant Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), British Standards

(BS), International Electro Technical Commission (IEC) publication, NEMA & VDE Standards

amended up to date.

B. The design engineering, manufacturing and the installation shall be in accordance with

established codes, sound engineering, practices and specifications. Further, the same shall

conform to the statutory regulations applicable in the country. Contractor shall obtain all

217

approvals from statutory authorities, e.g. Electrical inspector, SEB or any other agency as

applicable before commissioning of electrical system if required.

C. Some of the relevant Indian and British Standards are listed below.

1. Indian Electricity Act.

2. Indian Electricity Rules.

3. Factory Act.

Any other standard may be followed provided it is equivalent or more stringent than the

standards specified above.

In case of any deviation/conflict of this specification with the codes & standards, the following

order of precedence shall govern

1. Engineer‟s decision.

2. Local codes of practice

3. Drawings.

4. Specifications

5. International standards & requirements.

1.5. DESIGN:

A. The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering practices, to

ensure satisfactory performance and service life. The equipment offered by the contractor shall

be complete in all respects. Any materials or accessories, which may not have been specifically

mentioned, but which are usual and necessary for the completion of the system and satisfactory

& trouble free operation and maintenance of the equipment shall be provided without any extra

cost to the Owner. This shall also include spares for commissioning of the equipment.

B. This specification defines the basic guidelines to develop a suitable electrical system as

necessary for the Complex. All data required in this regard shall be taken in to consideration to

develop a detailed engineering for the system. Site conditions as applicable are mentioned

elsewhere.

C. Compliance with these specifications and/or approval of any of the Contractor‟s documents shall

in no case relieve the Contractor of his contractual obligations.

D. All work to be performed and supplies to be made as a part of contract shall require specific

approval/review of Owner or his authorized representative

E. The engineering activities shall comprise the submission for approval of the following from

Consultants/Owner

1.6. BIDDER SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR:

1. Detailed co-ordination with other services, shop drawings for various electrical layouts such as

equipment layout, cabling layouts, earthing layouts, including equipment installation and cable

termination details etc. prior to start of work.

2. Preparation of bill of materials for electrical works.

3. Protection co-ordination drawings/ tables for complete power system.

4. Shop inspection and testing procedures.

5. Field-testing and commissioning procedures.

6. Preparation of as built drawings.

Bidder shall also be responsible for:

218

Any other work/activity which is not listed above, however is necessary for completeness of

electrical system

Bidder shall clearly understand and quote accordingly:

To ensure that all clauses given in this part of the specifications shall also apply to all other

electrical works of other segments. The bidder shall bring to the notice of the Owner the

differences, if any, and get the same clarified failing which the Owner may impose the more

stringent of the specification/ clauses at the sole risk and costs of the contractor.

1.7. DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION PERIOD:

A. The contractor shall be allowed admittance to the site on the date of commencement as

described in the General Conditions and he shall thereupon and forthwith begin the works and

shall regularly proceed with and complete the same on or before the date of completion subject,

nevertheless to the provisions for the extension of time. The time being the essence of the

contract, the Contractor will adhere to the time, progress chart and project schedule and will give

proportional output/progress in proportional time

1.8. SCHEDULE AND MANNER OF OPERATIONS:

A. Time being the essence of this Contract, the Contractor will be expected to furnish all labour and

materials in sufficient quantities and at appropriate times, expedite and schedule the work as

required and so manage the operation that the work will be completed within the time stated in

the Contract.

1.9. PROJECT SCHEDULE:

A. The contractor will have to submit a detailed project schedule.

1. For various items of works to be carried out by him.

2. For various associated works to be carried out by other agencies. so that the work gets

completed with in the contractual completion time. This schedule shall be submitted by the

contractor in Microsoft project software format. The contractor shall follow this schedule

meticulously and shall also coordinate/ follow up with other agencies to expedite the works

associated with his own work. Liquidity damages clause will become applicable for any delay

in completion of the work.

B. The contractor will submit within 7 days of the award of work, a detailed schedule of program of

work.

C. No additional payment will be made to the contractor for any multiple shift work or other incentive

methods contemplated by him in his work schedules even though the time schedule is approved

by the Consultant/Engineer-in-Charge.

1.10. DESIGN CONDITIONS:

A. Design ambient: 45 Deg. C maximum dry bulb temperature & 2 Deg. C minimum dry bulb

temperature

B. Altitude: 300 m above sea level

C. Relative Humidity: 98% maximum D. Site Environment: Normal.

1.11. COORDINATION OF WORK

A. Contract documents establish scope, materials and quality but are not detailed installation

instruction.

B. Coordinate work with related trades and furnish, in writing, any information necessary to permit

the work of related trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible conflict or delay.

219

C. The drawings show the general arrangement of equipment and appurtenances. Follow these

drawings as closely as the actual construction and the work of other divisions will permit. Provide

offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required but not shown on the drawings.

Investigate the site, and review drawings of other divisions to determine conditions affecting the

work, and provide such work and accessories as may be required to accommodate such

conditions.

D. The locations of thermostats, switches, panels and other equipment indicated on the drawings

are approximately correct. Exercise particular caution with reference to the location of panels,

thermostats, switches, etc., and have the precise and definite locations accepted by the Engineer

before proceeding with the installation.

E. The drawings show only the general run of services and approximate location of equipment,

outlets, panels, etc. Any significant changes in location of equipment, outlets, panels, etc.,

necessary in order to meet field conditions shall be brought to the determine attention of the

Engineer for review before such alterations are made. Modifications shall be made at no

additional cost to the Contract.

F. Carefully check space requirements with other division works to ensure that equipment can be

installed in the space allotted.

G. Wherever work interconnects with work amongst different installation, coordinate with other

trades to insure that they have the information necessary so that the Contractor may properly

install the necessary connections and equipment. Identify items requiring access in order that the

Ceiling Trade will know where to install access doors and panels.

H. Consult amongst installation so that, wherever possible, motor controls and distribution

equipment are of the same manufacturer.

I. Furnish and set sleeves for passage of risers through structural masonry and concrete walls and

floors and elsewhere as required for the proper protection of each riser passing through building

surfaces.

J. Provide fire stopping around all pipes, conduits, ducts, sleeves, etc, which pass through fire

compartments.

K. Provide required supports and hangers for equipment suitably so as not to exceed allowable

loading of structures.

L. Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional detail drawings to scale to

coordinate the work with the work of other trades. Detailed work shall be clearly identified on the

drawings as to the area to which it applies. Submit these drawings to the Engineer for review. At

completion include a set of these drawings with each set of record drawings.

M. Coordinate with the local utility companies/authorities for their requirements for service

connections and provide all necessary provisions, grounding, materials, equipment, labor,

testing, and appurtenances.

N. Before commencing works, examine adjoining works on which this work is in any way affected

and report conditions which prevent performance of the works. Become thoroughly familiar with

actual existing conditions to which connections must be made or which must be changed or

altered.

O. The Contractor is responsible to any modifications required due to service not properly

coordinated.

220

1.12. ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY INTERFACES

A. The Contractor shall provide power supply points/isolators at certain designated locations within

the development for all mechanical and electrical installations as indicated on the drawings. It is

the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate and make connections to these power supply

points/isolators and to provide all the necessary „down-stream‟ power supply distribution

board/network to the mechanical system‟s control panels, equipment, sensors, field devices, etc.

1.13. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND INTERFACES

A. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the mechanical system and equipment to interface with the

Building Management System in accordance with the point schedules specified on the Drawings.

All necessary interfacing works shall be included in the Contract.

1.14. CENTRAL CONTROL ROOM INTERFACES

A. The Contractor shall include the supply and installation of a custom-built control console of

proprietary make in the Fire Command Centre and each building component‟s Security Room to

integrate all control panels, mimic panels, and central equipment of the following systems:

1. Building Management system

2. Security systems, including CCTV, access control, door monitoring, watchman tour, panic

alarm system, etc.

3. Fire Alarm and Detection system

4. Ventilation Control Panel for all emergency operation fans/systems

5. Lift system

6. Escalator system

7. Fireman Intercom system

8. Fire Protection Pumps Control Panel

9. Fireman‟s Override Control Panel

10. Public Address and Emergency Evacuation Announcement systems

11. MATV System

12. all other systems to be housed inside the Fire Command Centre/Security Room

1.15. INTERFACING WITH ALL SERVICES AND SYSTEMS

A. General

1. The Contractor shall provide all necessary provisions for interfacing amongst installation,

services, and equipment. All necessary sensors, current/voltage transformers, voltage-free

contacts, relays, auxiliary contacts, terminals, transducers, etc. for interfacing works shall be

provided by the Contractor.

2. All control/monitoring wiring from sensors, equipment, and components for the interfacing

shall be terminated at a separate interfacing compartment located at the respective

equipment/system‟s switchboard or control panel. The interfacing compartment shall be

completed with all necessary connectors, terminals, and with proper identifications to allow

interfacing works to be easily carried out. The compartment shall clearly indicate “Extra Low

Voltage Cable Only. No Power Cable Connection”. Where there is no equipment/system

switchboard or control panel involved, the Contractor shall provide separate interfacing

panels with provisions same as the interfacing compartment as described above. The

locations of the switchboard/control panels and the interfacing panels shall be properly

coordinated.

3. For every control panel and each module of the switchboard, at least five (5) spare terminals

shall be provided for future interfacing works.

221

4. Wiring and cables for interfacing with the fire alarm system and other fire protection and life

safety systems shall be fire rated to comply with Civil Defense‟s requirements.

5. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, interfacing wiring from Fire Alarm and

Building Management systems shall be provided and terminated at the terminals of the

interfacing compartments or panels by the Fire Alarm System and Building Management

System installation respectively. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the current and voltage

requirements for the interfacing works/provisions. The type of provisions for interfacing

signals shall be as follows, unless otherwise specified:

6. Digital inputs and outputs : voltage-free dry contact

7. Analog inputs and outputs : 4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 mV

8. All the interface provisions shall be DC operated and rated not more than 50 mA.

9. For interfacing works between Fire Alarm System and Building Management System, the

Contractor shall provide the Fire alarm installation with interface wiring and terminate them at

the Building Management System‟s interfacing compartments or panels.

10. The Contractor shall provide and make all power cable connections from mechanical

equipment, local control panels, and distribution boards to the electrical isolators or power

points (including cable termination) provided under Division 16 works. Location of power

supply isolators and power points shall be properly coordinated.

11. In addition to the interfacing requirements shown on the Drawings, interfacing provisions as

described below shall also be provided and included in the Contract.

B. Electrical Installation

1. The Electrical Installation shall provide the following:

a. Isolators and power points (fused spur units) for all mechanical equipment and systems.

Where shown on the Drawings, the Electrical installation shall include direct power cable

connections to the mechanical system‟s main motor control centres.

b. Earthing terminal in the Fire Command Centre and all other plant rooms for

supplementary equipotential bonding of mechanical equipment and systems.

c. Power failure signal to the Lift System (including wiring terminations into the Lift

interfacing panel in the Lift Motor Room), Fire Alarm System and the Building

Management System.

d. Electrical bonding of all roof equipment and external metal cladding including provisions

and connection of bonding cables.

e. Fuel main storage tank and day tank High/Low level alarm signals to the Building

Management System.

f. Emergency power supplies to Building Management System (including all field panels),

Fire Alarm System, car parking system, and all security systems.

g. Emergency power supplies to all fire shutters, smoke shutters/curtains, and automatic

doors.

h. Power point in each toilet for the plumbing installation (for connection to automatic

sanitary sensors and flush valve under the Plumbing and Sanitary installation).

2. Power supply to variable air volume (VAV) boxes and the ACMV system‟s control

components/sensors shall however be provided under the ACMV installation from the

corresponding equipment motor control panel.

222

1.16. EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. Prior to the submitting of bids, visit the project site and become familiar with all conditions

affecting the proposed installation and make provisions as to the cost thereof.

B. The Contract Documents do not make representations regarding the character or extent of the

sub-soils, water levels, existing structural, mechanical and electrical installations, above or below

ground, or other sub-surface conditions which may be encountered during the work, based on

examination of the site or other information. Failure to examine the drawings or other information

does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for satisfactorily completion of the work.

1.17. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Where ever required provide trenches details, duly approved by the consultant with all relevant

section etc. as per IS codes to the Civil contractor, minimum before 1 month of laying the pipes,

etc. Co ordinate with the civil contractor during the excavation, and ensure that the excavation

and backfilling is being properly done as per requirement.

B. Where ever it is asked by the Owner/ consultant for providing trenches in contractor‟s scope. It is

deemed that the cost of the pipe is inclusive of trench digging and backfilling. The following

points needs to be taken care of while making the trenches.

C. The trench shall be of widths necessary for the proper execution of the work. Grade bottom of the

trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support the work on undisturbed soil at every

point along its entire length. Except where rock is encountered, do not excavate below the depths

indicated. Where rock excavations are required, excavate rock to a minimum over depth of four

inches below the trench depths indicated on the drawings or required. Backfill over depths in the

rock excavation and unauthorized over depths with loose, granular, moist earth, thoroughly

machine tamped to a compaction level of at least 95% to standard proctor density or 75% relative

density or as specified by the Engineer. Wherever unstable soil that is incapable of properly

supporting the work is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove soil to a depth required

and backfill the trench to the proper grade with coarse sand, fine gravel or other suitable material.

D. Excavate trenches for utilities that will provide the following minimum depths of cover from

existing grade or from indicated finished grade as required by local authorities.

E. Trenches should not be placed within 3 meters of foundation or soil surfaces which must be

resist horizontal forces.

F. Do not backfill until all required tests have been performed and installation observed by the

Engineer. Comply with the requirements of other sections of the specifications. Backfill shall

consist of non-expansive soil with limited porosity. Deposit in 15 cm layers and thoroughly and

carefully tamp until the work has a cover of not less than 30 cm. Backfill and tamp remainder of

trench at 30 cm intervals until complete. Uniformly grade the finished surface.

1.18. CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. A. All kinds of cutting and repairing of brick Walls or Partitions, etc. for the proper routing of pipe,

shall be in the scope of the contractor. However, cutting and repairing of RCC wall, or ceiling

shall be in the scope of civil contractor.

B. Where cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings or other surfaces

is necessary for the proper installation, support or anchorage of conduit or other equipment,

layout the work carefully in advance. Repair any damage to the building, piping, equipment or

defaced finish plaster, woodwork, metalwork, etc., using skilled trade people of the trades

required at no additional cost to the Contract.

C. Provide slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs as

required. Where these openings are not provided, provide cutting and patching to accommodate

penetrations at no additional cost to the Contract.

223

1.19. SEALING OF PENETRATIONS

A. Air Tight Seals 1. All penetrations through the building fabric subject to suction or pressurization

shall be sealed airtight.

B. Holes in Roof

1. Roof penetrations for passage of conduits or circular PVC and PVC Cables shall be sealed

watertight using a flexible polypropylene conical sleeve manufacturer to seal the cable to the

roof structure, regardless of the roof profile.

2. All sharp metal edges, which may come in contact with the cable, shall be suitably bushed.

C. Fire Rated Penetrations

1. Where services penetrate any fire rated barrier, the Contractor shall seal the penetration with

the use of an appropriate material to ensure the integrity of the fire barrier.

2. The Contractor shall seal the cable enclosures through fire rated barriers to ensure the

integrity and rating of the fire barrier.

D. Acoustic Penetrations

1. Where services penetrate acoustic barriers, sealant shall be supplied and installed to

maintain the acoustic separation at least equal to the barrier penetration.

1.20. MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Verify exact locations and mounting heights with the Engineer before installation.

1.21. SUPPORTS

A. Support work in accordance with the best industry practice. Provide supports, hangers, auxiliary

structural members and supplemental hardware required for support of the work.

B. Provide supporting frames or racks extending from floor slab to ceiling slab for work indicated as

being supported from walls where the walls are incapable of supporting the weight. In particular,

provide such frames or racks in electric closets and equipment room.

C. Provide supporting frames or racks for equipment which is installed in a free standing position.

D. Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty support

system steel members, rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately braced to form a

substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to assure a workmanlike arrangement of all

equipment mounted on them.

E. Adequate support of equipment (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall not

depend on ducts, pipe, electric conduits, raceways, or cables for support.

F. Equipment shall not rest on or depend for support on suspended ceiling media (tiles, lath, plaster,

as well as splinters, runners, bars and the like in the plane of the ceiling). Provide independent

support of equipment. Do not attach to supports provided for ductwork, piping or work of other

trades.

G. Provide required supports and hangers for equipment so that loading will not exceed allowable

loading of structure. Equipment and supports shall not come in contact with work of other trades.

1.22. FASTENINGS

A. Fasten equipment to building in accordance with the best industry practice.

B. Where weight applied to the attachment points is 45 kg or less, conform to the following as a

minimum:

1. Wood : Wood screws

2. Concrete and solid masonry : Dash Fastener of appropriate ratings -HILTI/FISHER

3. Solid metal : Machine screws in tapped holes or with welded studs

224

C. Where weight applied to the building attachment points exceeds 45 kg, but is 135 kg or less,

conform to the following as a minimum:

1. At concrete slabs provide 60 cm x 60 cm x 13 cm steel fishplates on top with through bolts.

Fishplate assemblies shall be chased in and grouted flush with the top slabs screed line,

where no fill is to be applied.

2. At steel decking or sub-floor for all fastenings, provide through bolts and threaded rods. The

tops of bolts and rods shall be set at least one inch below the top fill screed line and grouted

in. Suitable washers shall be used under bolt heads or nuts. In cases where the decking or

subfloor manufacturer produces specialty hangers to work with his decking or sub-floor such

hangers shall be provided.

D. Where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 135 kg, coordinate with and obtain

the approval of Engineer and conform to the following as a minimum:

1. Provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging between building structural steel

elements to establish fastening points. Bridging members shall suitably weld or clamped to

building steel. Provide threaded rods or bolts to attach to bridging members.

E. For items which are shown as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastening to the building

construction element above is not possible, provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron

bridging tying to the building structural elements.

F. Wall mounted equipment may be directly secured to wall by means of steel bolts. Groups or

arrays of equipment may be mounted on adequately sized steel angles, channels, or bars.

1.23. DENTIFICATION

A. Identify equipment with permanently attached black phenolic nameplates with 13 mm high white

engraved lettering. Identification shall include equipment name or load served as appropriate.

Nameplates shall be attached with cadmium plated screws; peel and stick tape or glue on type

nameplates is unacceptable.

B. Services runs shall be properly identified as per the requirements in the Contract.

C. See individual section for additional identification requirements.

1.24. PROHIBITED LABELS AND IDENTIFICATIONS

A. In all public areas, tenant areas, and similar locations within the project, the inclusion or

installation of any equipment or assembly which bears on any surface any name, trademark, or

other insignia which is intended to identify the manufacturer, the vendor, or other source(s) from

which such object has been obtained, is prohibited.

B. Required test lab certification labels shall not be removed nor shall identification specifically

required under the various technical sections of the Specifications be removed.

1.25. EQUIPMENT PADS AND ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Provide all details with proper sections for the equipment pads and anchor. The equipment pads

casting and making provision for anchor fastening shall be as per the final UNALTERED drawing

duly approved by the consultant, shall be in the scope of Civil contractor. However, the

Contractor shall ensure the proper coordination with the civil contractor.

B. All equipment pads for all vibrating equipments shall have cork vibration pads sandwiched

between the finish surface and the bottom surface of required thickness suggested by the civil

consultant, to ensure that the minimum vibration can travel below.

C. Provide galvanized anchor bolts for all equipment placed on concrete equipment pads, inertia

blocks, or on concrete slabs. Provide bolts of the size and number recommended by the

manufacturer of the equipment and locate by means of suitable templates. Equipment installed

on vibration isolators shall be secured to the isolator. Secure the isolator to the floor, pad, or

support as recommended by the vibration isolation manufacturer.

225

D. Where equipment is mounted on gypsum board partitions, the mounting screws shall pass

through the gypsum board and securely attach to the partition studs. As an attached to 15 cm

square, galvanized metal back plates which are attached to the gypsum board with an approved

nonflammable adhesive. Toggle bolts installed in gypsum board partitions are not acceptable.

1.26. MISCELLANEOUS:

A. A site order book will be maintained at site, which will be in the custody of the Owner, or his

representative and all instructions given to the contractor will be recorded in the site order book

and the same has to be signed by the contractor to comply with the instructions given therein.

B. After completion of the work the whole installation shall be tested by the contractor in the

presence of the Consultant/Engineer-in-Charge. The tests shall comply the following I.E.E.

Regulations and shall be submitted along with the final bill:

1. The result of the insulation test shall comply with the I.E.E. Regulations 1101 to 1108A and

1008B as may be applicable.

2. Test shall be carried out to ascertain that all the non-linked SP switches have been

connected to the phase conductor.

3. The continuity test of the earthing system shall comply with I.E.E. Regulations 1108 to 1109

to the latest addition.

C. If the result of the above tests does not comply with the I.E.E. Regulations, the contractor shall

be bound to rectify the faults so that the required results are obtained.

D. The contractor shall be responsible to provide all the necessary testing instruments, such as

megger insulation tester, earth tester multi-meter, AVO meter etc for carrying out the above tests.

E. The work will not be considered as complete and taken over by the Owner till all the components

of the work after being completed at site in all respects have been inspected/ tested by the

Consultant/Owner to his entire satisfaction and a completion certificate issued by the

Owner/Consultant to this effect.

F. Shop drawing for electrical work e.g. equipment, cable earthing and conduit layout for all systems

shall be prepared by the contractor and got approved before starting of the work.

G. At the completion of the work and before issuance of certificate of virtual completion, the

contractor shall submit 6 sets of drawing and two tracing of each drawing to Owner of each

layout drawings drawn at approved.

H. Contractor‟s Superintendence:

1. The contractor shall provide all necessary superintendence during the execution of the works

and as long thereafter as the engineer may consider necessary. The contractor or his

competent and authorized agent or representative approved of in writing by the owner/

Engineer (which approval may at any time be withdrawn) is to be constantly on the works and

shall give his whole time to the superintendence of the same. Such authorized agent or

representative shall receive on behalf of the contractor, directions and instructions from the

Engineer-in-charge or his representative.

2. The contractor shall provide detailed organization of the execution team deployed for the

works with names and CV‟s, of all key staff before the commencement of work and get it

approved of in writing by the Owner/ Consultant. Contact telephone or pager numbers for

emergency and/or twenty-four (24) hour call shall also be included.

3. If in any case of withdrawal of any worker/ technician/Engineer from the execution team, the

replacement of the same shall be done with equivalent qualification, and shall be approved in

writing by the Owner/ Consultant.

226

PART 2 – PROUCT, TESTING & COMMISIONING

1.1. DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Electrical Details for Incoming Supply:

1. Supply Voltage: as approved by SEB

2. Fault Level (Sym.) at supply point (Designated): MVA (to be confirmed from State Electricity

Board by Bidder).

3. Neutral: Grounded

4. Voltage Regulations: + 10%

5. Frequency Regulations: + 3%

6. Combined Regulations: + 10%

B. LT Power Distribution System:

1. Voltage: 415 V

2. Frequency: 50 Hz

3. Neutral: Grounded

4. Short Circuit Fault withstand capacity: 20 to 50 KA for 1 sec., as per BOQ and specifications

C. Control supply for Electrical System: The various supply voltage to be used in the control panels

for the main equipment shall be as under: 1. Spring charge motor: 230 V AC or 24 V DC

(Universal Motor) 2. Closing/ Trip Coil: 24 V DC 3. Alarm/ Indication/ Relays: 24 V DC 4. Heaters:

230 V AC

D. Painting of Panels: Powder coating of approved shade as per Specification. (Refer clause of

painting)

E. Painting of Cable Trays and Structural steel: Powder coating of approved shade as per

Specification. (Refer clause of painting)

F. Cable Details:

1. LT Control Cables: Copper conductor armoured PVC insulated 1.1 KV grade.

2. LT Power Cables: Aluminium conductor armoured XLPE insulated.

3. Grounding Conductors: Copper/ G.I. as specifications and BOQ

G. Accuracy Class of Meters:

1. Revenue Meters: Class-I or as approved by SEB

2. Ammeters, Voltmeters & Other Instruments: Digital Type

1.2. DRAWINGS:

A. The list of drawings is enclosed along with this specification. These drawings are meant to give

general idea to bidder regarding the nature of work covered by these specifications.

B. Any information/data shown/not shown in these drawings shall not relieve the contractor of his

responsibility to carry out the work as per the specifications. Additional information required by

the bidder for successfully completing the work shall be obtained by him.

1.3. SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. The contractor shall prepare detailed coordinated electrical shop drawing indicating Panel layout,

with other relevant services and submit to the Consultant for approval or the Engineer-in- Charge

before commencing the work. The shop drawings shall indicate all setting out details and

physical dimensions of all components with wiring and cable details including system operating

write up in the system i.e. Control and Relay Panel and fixing details for the above mentioned

work. All work shall be carried out on the approval of these drawings. However, approval of these

227

drawings do not relieve the contractor of his responsibility for providing maintenance free and full

proof system including any missing component/accessories to meet with the intent of the

specifications. Contractor will submit 2 (two) prints for preliminary approval and finally 6 (six)

prints for distribution.

1.4. MANUFACTURER‟S INSTRUCTIONS:

A. Where manufacturers have furnished specific instructions, relating to the material/equipments to

be used on this job, covering points not specifically mentioned in this document, manufacturer‟s

instructions should be followed.

1.5. COMPLETION DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS:

A. Three copies of operation manuals/catalogues of all standard equipment are to be furnished by

the contractor immediately after commissioning of plant.

B. Three copies of write up on preventive maintenance, trouble shooting and operating instructions

of the system along with as-built drawings are to be supplied by the Contractor at the time of

commissioning.

C. On completion of the work in all respects, the Contractor shall supply five portfolios (300x450

mm), each containing complete set of drawings on approved scale, clearly indicating complete

layouts, location; wiring and sequencing of automatic controls, location of all concealed wiring

and other services. Each portfolio shall also contain consolidated control diagrams and technical

literature on all controls. The Contractor shall frame under glass, in the Panel rooms, one set of

these consolidated control diagrams.

1.6. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

All the materials and equipments shall be of the approved make and design. Unless otherwise

called for any approval by Owner‟s Engineer-in-Charge, only the best quality materials and

equipment shall be used.

A. Space Heaters: Suitable number of adequately rated heaters thermostatically controlled with On-

Off switch and fuse shall be provided to prevent condensation in any panel compartment. The

heaters shall be installed in the lower portion of the compartment and electrical connections shall

be made from below the heaters to minimize deterioration of supply wire insulation. The heaters

shall be suitable to maintain the compartment temperature to prevent condensation.

B. Fungi static Varnish: Besides the space heaters, special moisture and fungus resistant varnish

shall be applied on parts, which may be subjected or predisposed to the formation of fungi due to

the presence or deposit of nutrient substances. The varnish shall not be applied to any surface of

part where the treatment will interfere with the operation or performance of the equipment. Such

surfaces or parts shall be protected against the application of the varnish.

C. Ventilation Opening: In order to ensure adequate ventilation, compartments shall have ventilation

openings provided with fine wire mesh of brass to prevent the entry of insects and to reduce to a

minimum the entry of dirt and dust. Outdoor compartment openings shall be provided with shutter

type blinds.

D. Degree of Protection: The enclosures of the control cabinet, junction boxes and marshalling

boxes, panels. etc to be installed shall provide degree of protection as detailed her under.

1. Installed indoor : IP-55

2. Installed indoor in air-conditioned area : IP-31

3. Installed in covered area : IP-42

4. Installed indoor in non air-conditioned area where possibility of entry of water is limited :IP-41

5. For LT Switchgear (AC and DC distribution boards) :IP-42 The degree of protection shall be

in accordance with IS: 13947 (Part –I) IEC-947 (Part –I). Type test report for degree of

protection test, on each type of the box shall be submitted for approval.

228

E. Rating plates, Name plates and Labels: LV panel and auxiliary items installed in the building is to

permanently attach to it in a conspicuous position. A rating plate of non-corrosive material with

engraved manufacturer‟s name, year of manufacture, equipment name, type or serial number

together with details of loading conditions of equipment in question has been designed to operate

and such diagram plates as may require by the owner. The rating plate of each equipment shall

be in accordance to IEC requirement. All such nameplates, instruction plates, rating plates shall

be bilingual with Hindi inscription first followed by English. Alternatively two separate plates on

with Hindi and another with English inscriptions may be provided.

F. Design Improvements: The bidder shall note that the equipment offered to him in the bid only

shall be accepted for supply. If for any reason, contractor wished to deviate from specification,

prior permission from owner/ consultant shall be sought. If any change is agreed upon and that if

affects the price and schedule of completion, the parties shall agree in writing as to the extent of

any change in the price and/ or schedule of completion before the contractor proceeds with the

change. Following such arrangements, the provision thereof, shall be deemed to have been

amended accordingly in the specification.

G. Quality Assurance Programme: To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of

this Contract whether manufactured or performed within the Contractor‟s works or at his sub-

contractor‟s premises or at the Owner‟s site or at any other place of work are in accordance with

the specifications, the Contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance program to control such

activities at all points necessary. Such programme shall be outlined by the Contractor and shall

be finally accepted by the Owner after discussions before the award of Contract. A quality

assurance programme of the contractor shall generally cover the following:

1. His organization structure for the management and implementation of the proposed quality

assurance programme.

2. Documentation control system.

3. Qualification data for bidder‟s key personnel.

4. The procedure for purchases of materials, parts components and selection of sub-

contractor‟s services including vendor analysis, source inspection, incoming raw material

inspection, verification of material purchases etc.

5. System for shop manufacturing and site erection controls including process controls and

fabrication and assembly control.

6. Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective actions.

7. Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field activities.

8. Control of calibration and testing of measuring instruments and field activities.

9. System for indication and appraisal of is inspection status.

10. System for authorizing release of manufactured product to the Owner.

11. System for maintenance of records.

12. System for handling storage and delivery and. The Owner or his duly authorized

representative reserves the right to carry out quality audit and quality surveillance of the

system and procedure of the Contractor / his Vendor‟s quality management and control

activities.

H. Quality Assurance Documents The Contractor shall be required to submit the following Quality

Assurance Documents within three weeks after dispatch of the equipment.

1. All Non-Destructive Examination procedures, stress relief and weld repair procedure actually

used during fabrication and reports including radiography interpretation reports.

2. Welder and welding operator qualification certificates.

229

3. Welder‟s identification list, listing welder‟s and welding operator‟s qualification procedure and

welding identification symbols.

4. Raw material test reports on components as specified by the specification and / or agreed to

in the quality plan.

5. Stress relief time temperature charts/oil impregnation time temperature charts.

6. Factory test results for testing required as per applicable codes/mutually agreed quality

plan/standards referred in the technical specification.

7. The quality plan with verification of various customer inspection points (CIP) as mutually and

methods used to verify the inspection and testing points in the quality plan were performed

satisfactory.

1.7. INSPECTION, TESTING AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATES:

A. The Owner and the Consultant or duly authorized representative shall have at all reasonable

times free access to the Contractor‟s premises or works and shall have the power at all

reasonable times to inspect and examine the materials and workma nship of the works during its

manufacture or erection, if part of the works is being manufactured or assembled at other

premises or works, the Contractor shall obtain permission to inspect as if the works were

manufactured or assembled on the Contractor‟s own premises or works. Inspection may be

made at any stage of manufacture, dispatch or at site at the option of the Owner and the

equipment if found unsatisfactory due to bad workmanship or quality, material is liable to be

rejected.

B. All equipment being supplied shall conform to type tests and shall be subject to routine tests in

accordance with requirements stipulated under respective sections. Bidder shall submit the type

tests reports for approval. The Contractor shall intimate the Owner/Consultant the detailed

programme about the tests at least three (3) weeks in advance in case of domestic supplies. If

for any item type test were pending payment would be made on successful completion of

type/routine test(s) actually carried out as per Consultant/Owner instructions.

C. The Contractor shall give the Consultant/Owner thirty (30) days written notice of any material

being ready for testing. Such tests shall be to the Contractor‟s account. The Consultant/Owner

unless witnessing of the tests is virtually waived will attend such tests within thirty (30) days of

the date of which the equipment is notified as being ready for test/inspection, failing which the

Contractor may proceed with the test which shall be deemed to have been made in the presence

of Owner/Consultant and he shall forthwith forward to the Consultant duly certified copies of tests

in triplicate.

D. The Consultant/Owner shall within fifteen (15) days from the date of inspection as defined shall

inform in writing to the Contractor of any objection to any drawings and all or any equipment and

workmanship which in his opinion is not in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall

give due consideration to such objections and make the necessary modifications accordingly.

E. When the factory tests have been completed at the Contractor‟s or Sub-contractor‟s works, the

Consultant/Owner shall issue a certificate to this effect within fifteen (15) days after completion of

tests but if the tests are not witnessed by the Consultant/Owner, the certificate shall be issued

within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the Contractor‟s Test certificate by the Consultant/Owner.

Failure of the issue such a certificate shall not prevent the Contractor from proceeding with the

works. The completion of these tests or the issue of the certificate shall not bind the Owner to

accept the equipment should, it, on further tests after erection, is found not to comply with the

Specification. The equipment shall be dispatched to site only after approval of test reports and

issuance of MICC by the Owner.

F. For tests whether at the premises or at the works of the Contractor or of any Sub-Contractor, the

Contractor except where otherwise specified shall provide free of charge such items as labor,

materials, electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be required by

230

Owner/Consultant or this authorized representative to carry out effectively such tests of the

equipment in accordance with the Specification.

G. The inspection by Owner/Consultant and issue of Inspection Certificate thereon shall in no way

limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the Contractor in respect of the agreed quality assurance

programme forming a part of the Contract.

H. The Consultant/Owner will have the right of having at his own expenses any other tests(s) of

reasonable nature carried out at Contractor‟s premises or at site or in any other place in addition

of aforesaid type and routine tests to satisfy that the material comply with the specifications.

I. The Owner/Consultant reserves the right for getting any field tests not specified in respective

sections of the technical specification conducted on the completely assembled equipment at site.

The testing equipments for these tests shall be provided by the Contractor.

1.8. TESTS:

A. Charging (Pre-commissioning tests): On completion of erection of the equipment and before

charging, each item of the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and then inspected jointly by

the Owner/Consultant and the Contractor for correctness and completeness of installation and

acceptability for charging, leading to initial precommissioning tests at Site. The pre-

commissioning tests to be performed as per relevant I.S. / vendor/ bidder submittal and as

included in the Contractor‟s quality assurance programme.

B. Commissioning Tests:

1. The available instrumentation and control equipment will be used during such tests and the

Contractor will calibrate all such measuring equipment and devices as far as practicable.

However, unmeasurable parameters shall be taken into account in a reasonable manner by

the Contractor for the requirement of these tests. The tests will be conducted at the specified

load points and as near the specified cycle condition as practicable. The Contractor will apply

proper corrections in calculation, to take into account conditions which do not correspond to

the specified conditions.

2. All instruments, tools and tackles required for the successful completion of the

Commissioning Tests shall be provided by the Contractor, free of cost.

3. Pre-commissioning test shall be carried out as per relevant IS and/or as specified in the

relevant clause.

4. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining statutory clearances from the concerned

authorities for commissioning of the equipment. However necessary fee shall be reimburse

by Owner on production of requisite documents.

1.9. PACKAGING:

A. All the equipments shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxed and crated to prevent

damage or deterioration during transit, handling and storage at Site till the time of erection. While

packing all the materials, the limitation from the point of view of availability of Railway

wagon/truck/trailer sizes in India should be taken account of the Contractor shall be responsible

for any loss or damage during transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing. Any

demurrage, wharf age and other such charges claimed by the transporters, railways etc. shall be

to the account of the Contractor. Owner takes no responsibility of the availability of any special

packaging/transporting arrangement.

1.10. PROTECTION:

A. All coated surfaces shall be protected against abrasion, impact, discoloration and any other

damages. All exposed threaded portions shall be suitably protected with either a metallic or a

nonmetallic protecting device. All ends of all valves and piping and conduit equipment

connections shall be properly sealed with suitable devices to protect them from damage. The

parts which are likely to get rusted, due to exposure to weather should also be properly treated

and protected in a suitable manner.

231

1.11. FINISHING OF METAL SURFACES:

A. General: All metal surfaces shall be subjected to treatment for anti-corrosion protection. All

ferrous surfaces for external use unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the specification or

specifically agreed, shall be hotdip galvanized after fabrication. High tensile steel nuts and bolts

and spring washers shall be electro galvanize. All steel conductors used for earthing/grounding

(above ground level) shall be galvanized according to IS: 2629.

B. Painting:

1. All sheet steel work shall be degreased, pickled, and phosphated in accordance with the IS-

6005 “Code of practice for Phosphating iron and sheet”. All surfaces, which will not be easily

accessible after shop assembly, shall beforehand be treated and protected for the life of the

equipment. The surfaces, which are to be finished painted after installation or require

corrosion protection until installation, shall be shop painted with at least two coats of primer.

Oil, grease, dirt and swab shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning. Rust and scale

shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing with running water, rinsing

with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.

2. After Phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water followed by final

rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying. The phosphate coating shall be

sealed with application of two coats of ready mixed, stoving type zinc chromate primer. The

first coat may be “flash dried” while the second coat shall be stoved.

3. Powder coating/electrostatic painting of approved shade shall be applied.

4. The exterior color of the paint shall be as per IS-5 or as approved by Consultant. A small

quantity of finishing paint shall be supplied for minor touching up required at site after

installation of the equipments, if required.

5. In case the Bidder proposes to follow his own standard surface finish and protection

procedures or any other established painting procedures like electrostatic painting etc. the

procedure shall be submitted along with the Bids for Owner‟s review and approval.

1.12. HANDLING, STORAGE AND INSTALLATION:

A. In accordance with the specific installation instructions as shown on manufacturer‟s drawings or

as directed by the Owner or his representative, the Contractor shall unload, store, erect, install,

wire, test and place into commercial use all the equipment included in the contract. Equipment

shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner so that it is level, plumb, square and properly

aligned and oriented.

B. Contractor shall follow the unloading and transporting procedure at site, as well as storing,

testing and commissioning of the various equipment being procured by him separately.

Contractor shall unload, transport, store, erect, test and commission the equipment as per

instructions of the manufacturer‟s Engineer(s) and shall extend full co-operation to them.

C. In case of any doubt/misunderstanding as to the correct interpretation of manufacturer‟s drawings

or instructions, necessary clarifications shall be obtained form the Owner/Consultant. Contractor

shall be held responsible for any damage to the equipment consequent for not following

manufacturer‟s drawings/instructions correctly.

D. Where assemblies are supplied in more than the one section, Contractor shall make all

necessary connections between sections. All components shall be protected against damage

during unloading, transportation, storage, installation, testing and commissioning. Any equipment

damaged due to negligence or carelessness or otherwise shall be replaced by the Contractor at

his own expense.

E. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner every week, a report detailing all the receipts during the

weeks. However, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for any shortages or damages in

transit, handling and/or in storage and erection of the equipment at Site. Any demurrage, wharf

232

age and other such charges claimed by the transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of

the Contractor.

F. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the equipment/material until the same is handed

over tot he Owner in an operating condition after commissioning. Contractor shall be responsible

for the maintenance of the equipment/material while in storage as well as after erection until

taken over by Owner, as well as protection of the same against theft, element of nature,

corrosion, damages etc.

G. The Contractor shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage facilities, to store all

equipment, which require indoor storage.

H. The words „erection‟ and „installation‟ used in the specification are synonymous.

I. Exposed live parts shall be placed high enough above ground to meet the requirements of

electrical and other statutory safety codes.

J. The minimum phase to earth, phase to phase and section clearance along with other technical

parameters for the various voltage levels shall be maintained as per relevant IS.

1.13. PROTECTIVE GUARDS

A. Suitable guards shall be provided for protection of personnel on all exposed rotating and / or

moving machine parts. All such guards with necessary spares and accessories shall be designed

for easy installation and removal for maintenance purpose.

B. The Contractor shall also conform to the general regulations governing personnel on the site and

must keep to the working space allocated for their use.

C. The contractor shall be responsible for any kind of mishap, etc. happened with personnel. The

Owner shall not take the responsibility for any of such kind.

1.14. TOOLS AND TACKLES:

A. The Contractor shall supply with the equipment one complete set of all special tools and tackles

for the erection, assembly, dismantling and maintenance of the equipments.

233

PREAMBLE TO BILL/ SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES

1.1. Tender shall be on the basis of item rates which shall include the cost of materials, labour, all

taxes, duties and all other services required for the complete installation, testing and

commissioning in accordance with the relevant NEC/IER and code in practice including the fees

for inspection together with the liabilities and obligations as detailed in the general conditions of

contract. It will also be the responsibility of the bidder to obtain all types of sanctions etc like

power/light connections and the drawings etc if any, required by the concerned local authorities.

1.2. Prices shall remain firm and free from variation due to rise and fall in the cost of materials and

labour or any other price variation whatsoever whether during extended period of completion, if

any.

1.3. Item rates shall remain valid for any variation in the estimated quantities given in schedule of

quantities.

1.4. In order to facilitate the technical scrutiny of the various quotations, the bidder must supply with

their quotations detailed technical particulars make catalogues and erection drawings for various

items under different parts specified in the schedule of quantities.

1.5. The drawing and specifications lay down minimum standard of equipment and workmanship and

the deviations. In the absence of any deviations, it will be deemed that the bidder is fully satisfied

with the intents of the specifications and drawings and their compliance with the statutory and fire

insurance provisions including local codes, where the drawings and specifications conflict, the

stringiest shall apply.

1.6. All equipments and the installations shall be tested as specified and a test certificate in the

prescribed form as required by the local supply authorities shall be furnished.

1.7. The entire installation shall be guaranteed against defective materials or workmanship for a

period of 12 months from the date of the installation certified by the Consultant and taken over by

the Client. During the guarantee period all the defects shall be rectified by the contract free of

cost.

1.8. The successful bidder shall submit the shop drawings to the Consultant for approval prior to start

the work. The approval of these drawings will be general and will not absolve the contractor of

the responsibility of the correctness of these drawings. At least 6 copies of the approved

drawings shall be supplied to the Consultant for their distribution to the various agencies at site at

no cost to the Client.

1.9. The position of distribution boards and switchboards may require some minor adjustments due to

either site requirements or change in structural layout. All such changes from the position, shown

in the drawings, shall be required to be incorporated without any extra payment or deduction for

change in length of wiring etc.

1.10. The bidders must see the site conditions and take all the aforesaid and foregoing factors while

quoting the rates, as no extra payment will be allowed on any ground arising out of or relating to

the aforesaid and foregoing.

1.11. In single phase (230 V) A.C. supply system circuit wires of same phase shall be drawn in same

conduit. For 3 phase, 4 wire wiring system wires of different colour shall be used and for

insulated neutral only black colour wire shall be used.

1.12. The bidder shall include in his rates for painting with three coats of synthetic enamel paint to

match the surroundings or as directed by the Consultant for all steel structure used for works at

no extra cost.

1.13. The successful bidder shall supply completion drawings of the entire installation on tracing cloth

as well as three prints of each drawing showing the complete wiring diagram as executed at site

drawn to scale approved by the Consultant after the completion of work but before completion

certificate is given by the Consultant.

234

1.14. After laying and jointing the cables shall be subject to necessary tests as stipulated in IS: 5959

(Part-I): 1970.

1.15. As more than one make is mentioned, prior approval of particular make for use shall be obtained

from the Consultant. All samples of all electric fittings and other accessories shall be approved by

the Consultant prior to their installation.

1.16. No alteration whatsoever is to be made to the text of quantities of this schedule of quantities,

unless such alteration is authorized in writing by the Consultant. Any such alteration or addition

shall, unless authorized in writing, be disregarded when tender documents are considered.

1.17. Any error in description or in quantity or omission of items from the contract shall not vitiate this

contract but shall be corrected and demand to be a variation required by the Consultants.

1.18. All measurements shall be taken in accordance with the Indian Standard Electrical Installation in

buildings method of measurements of IS: 5908:1970, unless otherwise specified.

1.19. The contractor shall provide, within one month after completion of the work or along with the final

bill, three sets of manuals properly bound which shall contain the following information:

A. Description of installation items using main items of equipments.

B. Description of all equipments and system operation with trouble shooting manuals.

C. Line diagram of each system including main feature of equipments and showing method of

setting controls.

D. Method of fault finding, routine, adjustment and wiring diagram.

E. Description of routine maintenance, oil and greasing points and recommended lubricants.

F. Manufacturer service manuals for all equipments.

G. Spares reference manuals.

1.20. The contractor shall provide the following at no extra cost to the Client.

A. Danger Notice Boards

B. Treatment for electric shock giving details of FIRST AID TREATMENT with chart diagrams

(mounted in suitable frame).

C. Line wiring diagrams of the electrical system mounted in suitable frame.

1.21. The contractor will remove all the debris and surplus earth from work site (belonging to his work)

free of cost.

ACCEPTABLE MAKES OF MATERIALS – ELECTRICAL Chapter 5.

S.NO Details of Materials /

Equipment

Manufacturer

1. MAIN LT PANEL AND

MOTOR CONTROL

CENTRE

L&T, SIEMENS, C&S, SCHNEIDER (OR FIRMS

WITH VALID CPRI TEST CERTIFICATES)

2. MCCB, MCB, RCCB, ELCB SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (MERLIN GERIN),

LARSEN & TOUBRO, LEGRAND, HAGER

3. DISTRIBUTION BOARD SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (MERLIN GERIN),

LARSEN & TOUBRO, LEGRAND, HAGER

4. POLY CARBONATE MCB

DB

HENSEL, LEGRAND, HAGER OR EQUIVALENT

235

S.NO Details of Materials /

Equipment

Manufacturer

5. CHANGE OVER SWITCH LARSEN& TOUBRO, HPL-SOCOMEC, GE,

SIEMENS

6. METAL CLAD SHEET

STEEL ENCLOSURE

SOCKET/PLUG BOX

L&T, LEGRAND, HAGER, SIEMENS,

SCHNEIDER, HENSEL

7. SWITCH FUSE UNIT, HRC

FUSE

L&T, ABB,GE, SIEMENS

8. HRC HBC FUSES & BASES L&T, SIEMENS, LEGRAND, SCHNEIDER

9. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER

SWITCHES

L&T, SIEMENS, LEGRAND, SCHNEIDER

10. LOAD BREAK SWITCHES L&T, SIEMENS, GE, SCHNEIDER

11. PROTECTION RELAY

(NUMERIC TYPE)

ALSTOM, ABB, SIEMENS, L&T, SCHNEIDER

12. MODULAR PLATE

SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

LEGRAND, CLIPSAL, CRABTREE, MK

13. OVERLOAD RELAYS WITH

BUILT IN SINGLE PHASE

PREVENTER

LARSEN & TOUBRO (ESBEE), SIEMENS,

SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (TELEMECANIQUE-

LDR SERIES)

14. ELECTRONIC DIGITAL

METERS

(A/V/PF/HZ/KW/KWH) WITH

LED DISPLAY

CG SCHLUMBERGER, SECURE, L&T-

CONZERV

15. BUSTRUNKING RISING

MAINS

LEGRAND, C&S, OBO

16. AUTOMATIC POWER

FACTOR CORRECTION

RELAY(NUMERIC TYPE)

BLEUK (GERMANY), LARSEN & TOUBRO, ABB,

EPCOS, ALSTOM

17. XLPE

ALUMINIUM/COPPER

CONDUCTOR ARMOURED

MV CABLES UPTO 1100 V

GRADE

FINOLEX, RR KABEL, POLYCAB, HAVELLS,

CCI

18. 1100 VOLTS GRADE FRLS

PVC CONTROL CABLES

FINOLEX, RR KABEL, POLYCAB, HAVELLS,

L&T

19. 11/33 KV HT CABLE FINOLEX, HAVELLS, L&T, RR KABEL,

POLYCAB

20. LT JOINTING KIT /

TERMINATION

RAYCHEM, SAFE KIT, M-SEAL

236

S.NO Details of Materials /

Equipment

Manufacturer

21. CABLE GLANDS DOUBLE

COMPRESSION WITH

EARTHING LINKS

COMET, PEECO, GRIPWELL, DOWELLS

22. BIMETTALIC CABLE LUG DOWELL‟S , LAPP KABEL, COMET

23. PVC INSULATED COPPER

CONDUCTOR STRANDED

FLEXIBLE WIRES (FRLS)

FINOLEX, RR KABEL, HAVELLS, POLYCAB,

NICCO,

24. MS CONDUIT (ISI

APPROVED)

BEC, AKG, PRECISION

25. ACCESSORIES FOR MS

CONDUIT (ISI APPROVED)

SHARMA SALES CORPORATION, PRAKASH

ENGINEERING WORKS, SUPER SALES

CORPORATION

26. PVC CONDUIT &

ACCESSORIES (ISI

APPROVED)

POLYCAB, HARSH, BERLIA, AKG

27. CEILING FAN CROMPTON GREAVES, POLAR, BAJAJ,

HAVELLS,

28. VCB/HT SWITCHGEAR

(11/33KV)

SIEMENS, CROMPTON, SCHNEIDER, ABB, L&T

29. LIGHT FIXTURES PHILIPS/ WIPRO/ HAVELLS-SYLVANIA/ AS PER

BOQ

30. EXTERNAL LIGHTING

FIXTURE, POLES

PHILIPS/ WIPRO/ CROMPTON/ BAJAJ/ AS PER

BOQ

31. LAMPS PHILIPS, OSRAM, HAVELLS

32 SELECTOR SWITCH,

TOGGLE SWITCH

SALZER (LARSEN & TOUBRO), KAYCEE,

SIEMENS

33 TIMER IN DISTRIBUTION

BOARDS

SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (TELEMECANIQUE),

MDSLEXIC, LARSEN & TOUBRO (HAGER),

ABB, SIEMENS, GE(C&I)

34 BATTERIES LEAD ACID EXIDE, STANDARD FURKAWA, AMRON, AMCO

35 SEALED MAINTENANCE

FREE BATTERIES

EXIDE, AMRON, STANDARD FURUKAWA, HBL

36 BATTERY CHARGER VOLSTAT, CROMPTON GREAVES, CALDYNE,

CHHABI ELECTRICALS

37 LT SERVO AUTOMATIC

VOLTAGE STABILIZER

ICON, RECON, SELVON, AUTOMATIC

ELECTRIC

38 CABLE TRAYS (FACTORY

FABRICATED)

/RACEWAYS

VENUS/PILCO/SLOTTCO/INDIANA/STEELWAY

S/PROF AB/SKABER/ DYNAMIC

39 FIRE SEALANT BIRLA 3M, HILTI, PROMAT

237

S.NO Details of Materials /

Equipment

Manufacturer

40 220/24V TRANSFORMERS VOLSTAT ELECTRONICS, AUTOMATIC

ELECTRIC

41 LIGHTING HIGH MAST

SYSTEM

PHILIPS, BAJAJ, KESELEC, CROMPTON

42 SOFT STARTER ALLEN BRADLEY, SIEMENS, ABB, L&T,

SCHNEIDER.

43 VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES ALLEN BRADLEY, SIEMENS, ABB, L&T,

SCHNEIDER, DANFOSS.

44 TELEPHONE OUTLETS LEGRAND, MK, CLIPSAL

45 MULTI-METERS &

MEGGARS

ESCROP/MOTWANI OR EQUIVALENT

46 LIGHTING PROTECTION INDELEC, PIORTEH, POUYET

47 PUMPS KIRLOSKAR, CROMPTON, GRUNDFOSS, KSB,

MATHER & PLATT

48 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT LAPP, HENSEL, JAINSONS

49 BAKELITE SHEET HYLAM/FORMICA/GREENLAM

50 TELECOMMUNICTION

CABLE

BATRA HENLAY, FINOLEX, DELTON, HAVELLS

51 TV COAXIAL CABLE BATRA HENLAY, FINOLEX, DELTON, HAVELLS

52 COMPUTER/DATA CABLE LEGRAND, DIGILINK, D-LINK, AVAYA, AMP,

CLIPSAL

53 TAG BLOCK KRONE, ERICCSON

54 MOTORS SIEMENS, KIRLOSKAR, CROMPTON, ABB

55 TRANSFORMERS (OIL

IMMERSED & DRY TYPE)

ABB, KIRLOSKAR, CROMPTON, SCHNEIDER,

SEIMENS

56 RING MAIN UNIT SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS, ABB, L&T

57 AIR-BREAK SWITCH ABB, CROMPTON, SCHNEIDER, LEGRAND

58 CURRENT

TRANSFORMERS/

POTENTIAL

TRANSFORMERS

MDC, AE, KAPPA, POWERONICS, RESISE,

C&S, INDOTEC, FORME MARSHALL,

GILBERT& MAXWELL

59 DG SET CATERPILLAR, LERROYSOMER, CUMMINS,

STAMFORD, VOLVO-PENTA, KIRLOSKAR

60 DG AMF PANEL, DG

AUXILIARY PANEL AND

MOTOR CONTROL

CENTRE

SAME AS LT PANEL/ DG PACKAGER.

61 VIBRATION ISOLATORS RESISTOFLEX, FLENONICS (USA), GERB

238

S.NO Details of Materials /

Equipment

Manufacturer

62 NOISE CONTROL

SILENCER / MUFFLER

INTERTEC, SOUND CONTROL INDIA

63 D.G. PACKAGER SUDHIR GENSETS, TIL, STERLING WILSON,

JAKSON, GMMCO, RAIPOWER.

64 HSD FUEL TRANSFER

PUMPS

ROTODEL

65 FUEL TANK AVENUE ENGINEERS, INDO ASIATIC

ENGINEERS PVT LTD

66 CCTV SONY, HONEYWELL, SANYO

67 UPS EMERSON, SOCOMEC, AROS, PCI,

MITSUBISHI

68 SMOKE DETECTORS MORLEY-IAS, EDWARDS, NOTIFIER, COOPER,

SCHRACK

69 HEAT DETECTORS MORLEY-IAS, EDWARDS, NOTIFIER, COOPER,

SCHRACK

70 CONTROL MODULES /

MONITOR MODULES /

FAULT ISOLATORS

MORLEY-IAS, EDWARDS, NOTIFIER, COOPER,

SCHRACK

71 MAIN CONTROL PANEL MORLEY-IAS, EDWARDS, NOTIFIER, COOPER,

SCHRACK

72 MANUAL CALL STATIONS /

HOOTERS

MORLEY-IAS, EDWARDS, NOTIFIER, COOPER,

SCHRACK

73 STROBE LIGHTS MORLEY-IAS, EDWARDS, NOTIFIER, COOPER,

SCHRACK

74 SPEAKERS/ AMPLIFIERS BOSE, BOSCH, EDWARDS, NOTIFIER,

COOPER,

75 RESPONSE INDICATOR MORLEY-IAS, EDWARDS, NOTIFIER, COOPER,

SCHRACK

76 MIMIC PANEL MORLEY-IAS, EDWARDS, NOTIFIER, COOPER,

SCHRACK

77 MICC CABLES TYCO (UK), WREXHAM (UK), MICC(UK), KME

(ITALY)

78 VOICE EVACUATION

SYSTEM

EDWARDS, NOTIFIER, HONEYWELL

79 FIRE FIGHTING

TELEPHONE

EDWARDS, NOTIFIER, HONEYWELL

239

TENDER FORM

To, The Director RUDSET Institute, Tilak Deka Road, Natun Bazar,House No 48, Nagaon, Dist- Nagaon, Assam-78201 Name of work : Construction of Rural Development and Self Employment Training Institute (RUDSETI) at Khagarijan Development Block Office Campus, Nagaon, Dist.: Nagaon, Assam. I/We have read and examined the notice inviting tender. Schedules A,B,C,D,E & F, specifications applicable, Drawings and Designs, General Rules and Directions, Conditions of Contract, clauses of contract, Special conditions, Schedule of Rate and all other documents and Rules referred to in the conditions of contract and all other contents in the tender document for the work. I/We hereby tender for the execution of the work specified for the RUDSET Institute within the time specified in Schedule „F‟ at the rates specified in the attached Schedule „A‟ viz., schedule of quantities and in accordance in all respects with the specifications, designs drawings and instructions in writing referred to in Rule-1 of General Rules and Directions and in Clause 11 of the conditions of contract and with such materials as are provided for, by, and in all respects in accordance with, such conditions so far as applicable. I/We agree to keep the tender open for hundred and twenty days from the due date of submission thereof and not to make any modifications in its terms and conditions. A sum of Rs. ____________ is hereby forwarded in Demand Draft / BG of ……………………. Bank as Earnest Money Deposit . If I/We, fail to commence the work specified I/We agree that the RUDSET Institute shall without prejudice to any other right or remedy, be at liberty to forfeit the said earnest money absolutely otherwise the said earnest money shall be retained by it towards security deposit to execute all the works referred to in the tender documents upon the terms and conditions contained or referred to therein and to carry out such deviations as may be ordered, upto maximum of the percentage mentioned in Schedule „F‟ and those in excess of that limit at the rates to be determined in accordance with the provision contained in Clauses 12.2 and 12.3 of the tender form. I/We hereby declare that I/We treat the tender documents, drawings and other records connected with the work as secret/confidential documents and shall not communicate information/derived therefrom to any persons other than a person to whom I/We am /are uthorized to communicate the same or use the information in any manner prejudiced to the safety of the state. I/We fully understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any tender you may receive. Shri.____________________________,Partner/Proprietor/_________________ , is the person uthorized to negotiate commercial and technical terms and conditions and sign on behalf of the firm any Agreement, Bills and receipts for this work.

240

I/We agree that should I/We fail to deposit the full amount of initial security deposit and/or fail to commence the work specified in the above memorandum, an amount equal to the amount of the earnest money mentioned in the form of invitation of tender shall be absolutely forfeited to the RUUDSET Institute and the same ,may at the option of the RUDSET Institute be recovered without prejudice to any other right or remedy available in law, out of the deposit in so far as the same may extend in terms of the said bond and in the event of deficiency out of any other money due to me/us under this contract or otherwise. I/We agree that until a formal agreement on stamp paper is prepared and signed, this tender with your written acceptance thereof shall constitute a binding contract between us.

Signature of Contractor Full Postal Address Pin Code No. & Telephone No.

Dated the: ________________day of 2019 Witness: Name : Address : Occupation :

241

ANNEXURE-1:

BIO DATA

1. (a) Name of the Applicant :

Address :

Telephone No. :

Office :

Residence :

Mobile :

Fax :

E-Mail :

(b) Address of office :

2 a) Status of the Firm (Whether company/ Partnership / proprietary) :

b) Name of the Proprietor/ Partners/ Directors (With professional qualifications, if any):

I) II) III)

c) Year of establishment :

3. Whether registered with Registrar of

Companies/ firm. If so, No. & Date :

4 . Registration with Tax Authorities :

a) Income-tax No. PAN ; (Furnish copies of Income-tax returns) b) Goods& Services Tax (GST) Regn Number : (Furnish the latest copies of the returns filed) d) Electrical Contractor license number & name of associate :

If available 5. Names of the Bankers with address :

I) II)

242

6. Turnover of the Company/firm (Please attach copy of documents in support of the details).

Sl.No.

Year Turnover

1 2014-15

2 2015-16

3 2016-17

4 2017-18

7. Registration/Empanelment with Government / Public Sector / Banks / Corporate if any (Copy of

valid registration/empanelment copy should be enclosed).

NAME OF THE ORGANISATION

NATURE OF WORKS

VALUE OF WORKS DATE OF REGISTRATION

8. What are your fields of activities? Mention the fields on preference Basis 1) 2) 3) 9 Details of the works executed during the last 7 years prior to 31.03.2018 to meet eligibility Criteria

04.

Sl. No.

Name of Work

Work executed for (name of the organization with address, concerned office and telephone number)

Nature of work (in brief)

Location of the work

Actual Value of the works

Date of commencement & Completion.

10. Key personnel permanently employed in your organization:

Sl. No.

Name Qualifications

Experience Particulars of work

Employed in your firm since

Any other

243

11. Furnish the names of three responsible clients/ persons to whom the major works carried out by

the applicant with address and telephone number who will be in a position to certify about the quality as well as past performance of your organization.

NAME OF THE OFFICIAL

ORGANISATION & ADDRESS

CONTACT NUMBERS

12. Furnish the details of AWARDS, CITATIONS etc received in recognition of your services in

projects designed/ associated

YEAR

Name of the Award with details

Name of the organization from whom award was received

Name of the project for which such award was received

D E C L A R A T I O N 1. All the information furnished by me / us here above is correct to the best of my knowledge and

belief.

2. I / we have no objection if enquiries are made about the work listed by me / us in the accompanying sheets / annexure.

3. I / We agree that the decision of Bank / CBCRD TRUST in selection will be final and binding to me / us.

Place :

SIGNATURE Date : NAME & DESIGNATION

SEAL OF ORGANISATION

244

:ANNEXURE-2:

A C C E P T A N C E The above tender (as modified by us or negotiations as provided in the letters mentioned hereunder) is

accepted by me for and on behalf of the RUDSET Institute for a sum of Rs.______________

(Rupees_______________________ )

The letters referred to below shall also form part of this contract agreement : a) b) c)

For & on behalf of the RUDSET INSTITUTE

Signature :_______________________

Designation:______________________

Dated this ______________day of 2018.

245

:ANNEXURE-3:

RUDSET INSTITUTE

FORM OF AGREEMENT

This agreement made the _____________day of the month of ______________ in the year 2018 BETWEEN, Director, RUDSET Institute, Nagaon, Tilak Deka Road, Dist- Nagaon, Assam-782001 of the ONE PART; and Shri/M/s _____________________ S/D/o______________________________ resident of __________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ the sole proprietor of M/s______________________________________ having office at___________________________________________________________ _______________/the partnership firm represented by its Managing/duly authorised partner, having an administrative/principal office at_________________________________________________________________ /a company/body corporate being its registered office at _______________ ___________________________________________________________________ duly represented at ___________________________ duly represented by its constituted and authorised Managing Director, Shri____________________ and (hereinafter called the Contractor) of the other part WHEREAS THE RUDSET INSTITUTE is desirous that certain works should be constructed viz.,____________________________________________________ and has accepted the tender dt._____________ furnished by the contractor for the constructions, completion and performance of such works. NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH as follows: 1. In this agreement words and expression shall have the same meanings as are respectively

assigned to them in the conditions of contract hereinafter referred to. 2. The following documents not inconsistent with these presents shall be deemed to form and be

read and construed as part of this agreement viz.,

a) Notice inviting Tender b) The Tender form d) General Rules and Directions to tenderers . e) Conditions of contract and clauses of contract along with Annexures thereto and

Schedules A to F. f) Schedule of Rates ( SOR ) includes Prices and tendered amount. g) Tender drawings. h) Technical Specifications for the work. i) Safety code and Model rules for the protection of health, Sanitary arrangements for

workers employed. j) Letter of Acceptance. k) Letters from and to the Contractor, if any, leading to and prior to acceptance letter.

246

3. In consideration of the payments to be made by the RUDSET INSTITUTE to the Contractor the

Contractor hereby convenants and agrees with the Bank to construct, complete and perform the works in conformity in all respects and subject to all terms and conditions/rules as mentioned in the aforesaid documents which shall from part of this agreement.

In witness whereof the parties hereto have hereunto set their respective hands and seals the day and year first above written.

Signed, sealed and delivered by the said contractor, to RUDSET INSTITUTE, Nagaon, Tilak Deka Road, Natun Bazar, Dist- Nagaon, Assam-782001 in the presence of:

Signature of Contractor (with seal) Signature of Director, RUDSETI, Nagaon (with seal)

247

ANNEXURE-4:

DETAILED LIST OF CONSTRUCTIONAL PLANTS AND EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE WITH THE CONTRACTOR FOR USE ON THIS WORK.

Sl. No

Name and Description of the Equipments

Make & Year

Signature of the Contractor

248

:ANNEXURE-5:

LIST OF RELATIVES EMPLOYED IN RUDSET INSTITUTE AND WITH THE ARCHITECT FOR THIS

WORK.

S.No. Name Designation

Branch/ Office of Bank / Architect

Relationship with Contractor

Signature of the Contractor

249

:ANNEXURE-6:

FORMAT OF RECEIPT OF MATERIALS AT SITE

Sl.No. Description

Opening balance

Receipt during month

Consumption during month

Closing balance

Total quantity received till date

1 Cement (M.T.)

2 Mild steel (M.T.)

3 Tor steel (M.T.)

4 Coarse aggregate (cu.mt.)

5 Fine aggregate (cu.mt.)

6 Teak wood (cu.mt.)

7 Bricks (Nos.)

8 Tiles (Nos.)

Sl.No. Description of work Date of Commencement

Due date of completion

Percentage progress achieved

1 General building work

2 Security equipment work

3 Pest control treatment work

4 Sanitary & Plumbing work

5 Electrical work

6 Air-conditioning work

7 Other work

250

:ANNEXURE-7:

FORMAT OF CONCRETE CUBE TEST REPORT

1. Name of the Project_____________________________________________

2. Name of the Contractor__________________________________________

Sl.No. Date of Casting

Identification Mark and location in which the representative concrete is placed

Mix proportion

Date of testing

Crushing strength as on the date of test

1 2 3 4 5 6

Crushing strength as on the 28th day

Average crushing strength (average of 3 companion cubes) as on the 28th day

Remarks Signature of the Site Engineer

7 8 9 10

251

:ANNEXURE-8:

FORMAT OF MEASUREMENT BOOK

MEASUREMENT BOOK PAGES NOS. 1 TO ……………..

Tender Item No.

Description Measurement details L B D/H

Quantity Remarks

Site Engineer Architect Contractor Checking/Test checking Engineer Date of checking/Test checking NOTE: Checking and test checking pertains to items wherever initialed.

252

:ANNEXURE-9:

FORMAT FOR RUNNING BILL I. Running A/C Bill i) Name of Contractor / Agency:

ii) Name of work:

iii) Sr. No. of this bill:

iv) No. and date of previous bill:

v) Reference to Agreement No:

vi) Date of written order to commence: vii) Date of completion as per agreement:

Sl.No. Item Description

Unit Rate (Rs.) As per tender Qty, Amount (Rs.)

1 2 3 4 5

Upto previous R/A Bill Upto date (Gross) Present Bill Remark

Qty. Amount(Rs.) Qty. Amount(Rs.) Qty. Amount(Rs.)

6 7 8 9

Note: 1) If part rate is allowed for any item, it should be_______________________________

Indicated with reasons for allowing such a rate. Net value since 2) If adhoc payment is made, it should be mentioned previous bill specifically.

253

II. ACCOUNT OF SECURED ADVANCE, IF ADMISSIBLE ON MATERIALS HELD AT SITE BY THE CONTRACTOR

No. Item Quantity Unit Amount

Remarks

1 2 3 4 5 6

Total value of materials at site. Secured Advance @ ________________ % of above value B CERTIFIED (i) that the materials mentioned above have actually been brought by the contractor to the site of the work and no advance on any quantity of any of this item is outstanding on their security (ii) that the materials are of imperishable nature and are all required by the contractor for use in the work in connection with the items for which rates of finished work have been agreed upon. Dated signature of Site Engineer Preparing the bill Designation __________________ Dated Signature of RUDSET INSTITUTE Architects (Name of the Architects) ____________________ Dated signature of Contractor

254

CERTIFICATE

The measurements on the basis of which the above entries for the Running Bill No.

_____________________ were made have been taken jointly on _______________ and are recorded

at pages _________ to ___________ of measurement book No. ______________

The work recorded in the above mentioned measurements has been done at the site satisfactorily as per

tender drawings, conditions and specifications.

Signature of Contractor or contractor‟s representative

Signature of Architect or Architect‟s representative

Date

Date

Seal

Seal

Test Check by Bank / RUDSET INSTITUTE authorized representative

Signature of Bank/RUDSET INSTITUTE Official.

Date

Seal

255

:ANNEXURE-10:

FORMAT FOR RATE ANALYSIS OF ITEMS I. MATERIAL

1. Basic Cost of Material Rs. ______________ 2. Wastage – 5% - Rs._______________

II. Labour: As per Standard - Rs._______________ Labour output and labour input required for the Particular item using quoted labour rates

III. Machinery / Tools - Rs._______________

Inputs of Machinery / Tools requirements as per the item and hire charges as per market.

TOTAL (I) + (II) + (III) Rs._______________ IV. Tax Liability [as per contractual clauses will be added] - Rs. V. Add – ½ % for water charges - Rs.______________ ½ % for Electricity - Rs. VI Any other Expenditure (please specify) Rs._______________ TOTAL Contractor Profit & OH – 15% - Rs. ______________

GRAND TOTAL - Rs. ______________ TDS will be deducted as per standard norms and recovery shall be made for water and electricity as per tender conditions.

256

:ANNEXURE-11:

FORMAT OF CERTIFICATE OF PAYMENT BY ARCHITECT

Certificate No. Interim /

Dated

Project No. Building work / interior work

Particulars:

Contractor

Contract / Letter No.

Dated:

Contractor‟s Bill No.

Dated:

This is to certify that the amount given below (*) is due to your Contractors for the work done by them and/or against materials delivered at site and/or for advance towards contract on the above referred project. Advance against contract Rs____________________ Less: Advance adjusted to-date Rs.____________________ Balance Advance Rs.____________________ Advance against material delivered at site Rs.____________________ Amount of work done to-date Rs.____________________ Total Rs.____________________ Less: Retention on work done Rs____________________ Less: previously certified upto Rs____________________ PRESENT CERTIFICATE (*) Rs.____________________ RUPEES……………………………………………………………………………….. The cost of cement or any other material supplied by you or payments made by you directly, if any and not covered herein above, should be adjusted before making the payment of the certificate amount (*). Necessary Deduction U/S194C of the income Tax 1961 and sales tax may be made before paying the above certified amount. By a copy of this letter, we are intimating the Contractors to call on you for the necessary payments.

Remarks if any: The details of Insurance policy are given in the next page.

Signature of Architects Enclosures : Bill

257

:ANNEXURE-12:

FORMAT OF SITE ORDER BOOK Name of the work ______________________________________ Date of Commencement__________________________________

Sl.No. Remarks/ Instructions of the site Engineer/ Architect

Dated Initials of site Engineer/ Architect

Initials of the Contractor for having received the instructions

Action taken with date

Dated initials of the site Engineer

Remarks of the Architects PMC/C.C. Officials

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

258

:ANNEXURE-13:

FORMAT FOR APPLICATION BY CONTRACTOR FOR EXTENSION OF TIME

1 Name of the Contractor

2 Name of the work as given in the Agreement

3 Agreement WO

4 Tender amount

5 Date of commencement of work

6 Period allowed for completion as per agreement

7 Date of completion as per agreement

8 Period for which extension of time has been given

Date Month Year

a) 1st extension vide RUDSET INSTITUTE Letter No.

b) 2nd extension vide RUDSET INSTITUTE Letter No.

c) 3rd extension vide RUDSET INSTITUTE Letter No.

9 Reasons for which extensions have been previously given (copies of the previous applications should be attached)

10 Period for which extension is applied for and the reasons thereof including hindrances, time for extra work assigned, if any etc.

259

:ANNEXURE-14:

FORMAT OF HINDRANCE REGISTER

Name of Work :

Date of state of work :

Name of Contractor :

Period of completion :

Agreement No.

Date of completion

Sl. No.

Nature of Hindrance

Date of occurrence of hindrance

Date of which hindrance was removed

Period of hindrance

Signature Site Engineer/ Project Engineer

Remarks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

260

:ANNEXURE-15:

Bank Guarantee Format for Earnest Money Deposit

To WHEREAS ______________________________(Name of Tenderer) (hereinafter called "the Tenderer" has submitted its tender dated _______________________ (Date) for the execution of (Name of Contract)_____________ _______(hereinafter called "the Tender") in favour of RUDSET INSTITUTE hereinafter called the "Beneficiary"; KNOW ALL MEN by these presents that we, _________(name of the issuing Bank), a body corporate constituted under the _______________________having its Head Office at __________________amongst others a branch/office at ________________ (hereinafter called "the Bank" are bound unto the Beneficiary for the sum of Rs_______________(Rupees________________________________________only) for which payment well and truly to be made to the said Beneficiary, the Bank binds itself, its successors and assigns by these presents; THE CONDITIONS of this obligation are: (a) If the Tenderer withdraws its Tender during the period of Tender validity specified in the Tender; or (b) If the Tenderer having been notified of the acceptance of his Tender by the Beneficiary during the period of Tender validity; (i) fails or refuses to execute the Agreement, if required; or (ii) fails or refuses to furnish the performance security, in accordance with clause ___________ of conditions of Contract. We undertake to pay to the Beneficiary up to the above amount upon receipt of his first written demand without the Beneficiary having to substantiate his demand, provided that in his demand the Beneficiary will note that the amount claimed by him is due to him owing to the occurrence of one or both of the two conditions, specifying the occurred condition or conditions. Notwithstanding anything contained herein i) Our liability under this Bank Guarantee shall not exceed Rs.__________ (Rupees ________________________________only) ii) This Bank Guarantee is valid up to ________________ and iii) We are liable to pay the guaranteed amount or any part thereof under this Bank Guarantee only and only if you serve upon us a written claim or demand on or before ______________________ (mention period of guarantee as found under clause (ii) above plus claim period) Dated _________________day of ________________________2018. SIGNATURE & SEAL OF THE BANK

261

:ANNEXURE-16:

BANK GUARANTEE FORMAT FOR SECURITY DEPOSIT Guarantee No……………………………

Amount of Guarantee Rs………………………………………………..

Guarantee cover from Dated : ………………………………………….

To Dated: ………………………………………………………………….

Last Date for Lodgement of claim: ……………………………………..

To: ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………

In consideration of ……………………………………… (hereinafter called "Beneficiary") having agreed to

exempt …………………………… …….. Ltd., having its Registered Office situated at

………………………………. (hereinafter called the "the obligator(s)") from the demand of security

deposit of Rs…………………… (Rupees ………………………………………………….. only) under the

terms and conditions of an agreement dated …………………. (hereinafter called the "said Agreement")

for the due fulfillment by the said obligator of the terms and conditions contained in the said agreement,

on production of the Bank Guarantee for Rs…………………. (Rupees …………………………………

only), at the request of the obligator ______ Bank, a body corporate constituted under the Banking

Companies (Acquisition & Transfer of undertakings) Act, 1970 having its Head Office at _____________

amongst others a branch at ……………………… (hereinafter referred to as "the Bank") has agreed to

give following guarantee in favour of the beneficiary for an amount not exceeding Rs………………..

(Rupees ……………………………………………………….. only) against any loss or damage caused to

or suffered or would be caused to or suffered by reason of any breach by the said Obligator(s) of any of

the terms and conditions contained in the said agreement.

1. We, the Bank to hereby undertake to pay the amount payable under this guarantee without any

demur merely on a demand from the beneficiary stating that the amount claimed is due by way of loss or damage caused to or would be caused to or suffered by reason or any breach of the terms and conditions contained in the said agreement or by reason of the obligator's failure to perform the said agreement. Any such demand in writing made on the Bank shall be conclusive as regards the amount due and payable by the Bank under the guarantee. However, our liability under this guarantee shall be restricted to an amount not exceeding Rs……………………………….

262

2. We, the Bank further agree that the guarantee herein contained shall remain in full force and

effect during the period that would be taken for the performance of the said agreement and that it shall continue to be enforceable till all the dues of the beneficiary under or by virtue of the said agreement have been fully paid and its claims satisfied or till the beneficiary certifies that the terms and conditions of the said agreement have been fully discharged this guarantee. Unless a demand for claim under this guarantee is made on us in writing on or before ………………………… we shall be discharged from all liabilities under this guarantee thereafter.

3. We, the Bank further agree that the beneficiary shall have the fullest liberty, without consent and

without effecting in any manner or obligations hereunder, to extend time of performance the said obligator(s) from time to time or to postpone for any time any of the powers exercisable by the beneficiary against the said obligator(s) and to forbear or enforce any of the terms and conditions relating to the said agreement and we shall not be relieved of our liability by reason of any extension being granted to the said obligator(s) for any forbearance, act or omission on the part of the beneficiary or any indulgence by the beneficiary to the said obligator(s) or by any such matter or thing whatsoever which under the law relating to sureties would not for this provision have effect of so relieving us.

4. We, the Bank lastly undertake not to revoke this guarantee during its currency except with the

previous consent of the beneficiary in writing. 5. Not withstanding anything contained herein:

(i) Our liability under this Bank Guarantee shall not exceed Rs. ……… (Rupees ……………………………………………………………… only) (ii) This Bank Guarantee is valid upto ……………………….. and

(iii) We are liable to pay the guaranteed amount or any part thereof under this Bank Guarantee only and only if you serve upon us a written claim or demand on or before ………………. (mention period of the guarantee as found under clause (iv) above plus claim period)

PLACE: DATE : SIGNATURE

263

: ANNEXURE 17 :

PRE CONTRACT INTEGRITY PACT

1. GENERAL 1.1. This pre-bid contract Agreement (herein after called the Integrity Pact) is made on_____ day of

the month 20____ , between, ____________________________________________, with

Institutes spread over India (hereinafter referred to as BUYER which expression shall include its

successors and assigns) acting through Shri________________ , (Designation of the officer)

representing _________ _________________, of the BUYER, of the FIRST PART

AND

M/s.________________represented by Shri ____________Chief Executive Officer/Authorised Signatory (hereinafter called the "BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER", which expression shall mean and include, unless the context otherwise requires, his successors and permitted assigns), of the SECOND PART

1.2. WHEREAS the BUYER proposes to procure (Name of the Stores/Equiprnent/ltem) /engage the services and the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER is willing to offer/has offered the stores/services and

1.3. WHEREAS the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER is a private company/

public company/Government undertaking/ partnership/ LLP/registered export agency/service provider, duly constituted in accordance with the relevant law governing its formation/incorporation/constitution and the BUYER is a body corporate constituted under Banking Companies (Acquisition and transfer of undertakings), Act 1970.

1.4. WHERAS the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER has clearly understood

that the signing of this agreement is an essential pre-requisite for participation in the bidding process in respect of Stores/Equipment/ltems/Services proposed to be procured by the BUYER and also understood that this agreement would be effective from the stage of invitation of bids till the complete execution of the agreement and beyond as provided in clause 13 and the breach of this agreement detected or found at any stage of the procurement process shall result into rejection of the bid and cancellation of contract rendering BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER liable for damages and replacement costs incurred by the BUYER.

2. Now, therefore, the BUYER and the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER

agree to enter into this pre-contract integrity agreement, hereinafter referred to as Integrity Pact, which shall form part and parcel of RFP as also the contract agreement if contracted with BIDDER, in the event that the BIDDER turns out to be successful bidder, and it is intended through this agreement to avoid all forms of corruption by following a system that is fair, transparent and free from any influence/prejudiced dealings prior to, during and subsequent to the Contract to be entered into with a view to:-

2.1. Enabling the BUYER to obtain the desired Stores/Equipment/Work/Service/Materials at a

competitive price in conformity with the defined specifications by avoiding the high cost and the distortionary impact of corruption on public procurement, and

264

2.2. Enabling BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER/SERVICE PROVIDER to

refrain from bribing or indulging in any corrupt practices in order to secure the contract, by providing assurance to them that the BUYER shall not be influenced in any way by the bribery or corrupt practices emanating from or resorted to by their competitors and that all procurements shall be free from any blemish or stain of corruption and the BUYER stays committed to prevent corruption, in any form, by its officials by following transparent procedures.

The parties hereto hereby agree to enter into this integrity Pact and agree as follows: COMMITMENTS OF THE BUYER

The BUYER commits itself to the following:-

3.1. The BUYER represents that all officials of the BUYER, connected whether directly or indirectly

with the procurement process are duty bound by rules and regulations governing their service terms and conditions not to demand, take promise for or accept, directly or through intermediaries, any bribe, consideration, gift, reward, favour or any material or immaterial benefit or any other advantage from the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER either for themselves or for any person, organization or third party related to the contract in exchange for an advantage in the bidding process, bid evaluation, contracting or implementation process related to the contract.

3.2. The BUYER will, during the pre-contract stage, treat all BIDDERS/

SELLERS/CONTRACTORS/SERVICE PROVIDERS alike, and will provide to all BIDDERS/SELLERS/CONTRACTORS/SERVICE PROVIDERS the same information and will not provide any such information to any particular BIDDER/ SELLER/ CONTRACTOR/ SERVICE PROVIDER which could afford an advantage to that particular BIDDER/ SELLER/CONTRACTOR/ SERVICE PROVIDER in comparison to the other BIDDER/ SELLER/CONTRACTOR/ SERVICE PROVIDERS.

3.3. The BUYER shall report to the appropriate Government Regulators/Authorities any attempted or

completed breaches of the above commitments as well as any substantial suspicion of such a breach, as and when the same is considered necessary to comply with the law in force in this regard.

In case any such preceding misconduct on the part of such official(s) is reported by the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER to the BUYER with the full and verifiable facts and the same is prima facie found to be correct by the BUYER, necessary disciplinary proceedings, or any other action as deemed fit, including criminal proceedings may be initiated by the BUYER and such a person shall he debarred from further dealings related to the contract process. In such a case, while an enquiry is being conducted by the BUYER, the proceedings under the contract would not be stalled.

4. COMMITMENTS OF BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDERS

The BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent corrupt practices, unfair means and illegal activities during any stage of its bid or during any pre-contract or post-contract stage in order to secure the contract or in furtherance to secure it and in particular commit itself to the following:-

4.1. The BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER will not offer, directly or through intermediaries, any bribe, gift, consideration, reward, favour, any material or immaterial benefit or other advantage, commission, fees, brokerage or inducement to any official of the BUYER, connected directly or indirectly with the bidding process, or to any person, organization or third party related to the contract in exchange for any advantage in the bidding, evaluation, contracting and implementation of the contract.

265

4.2. The BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER further undertakes that it has not given, offered or promised to give, directly or indirectly any bribe, gift, consideration, reward, favour, any material or immaterial benefit or other advantage, commission, fees, brokerage, or inducement to any official of the BUYER or otherwise for procuring the Contract or for forbearing to do or for having done any act in relation to the obtaining or execution of the contract or any other contract with the BUYER or for showing or forbearing to show favour or disfavour to any person in relation to the contract or any other contract with the BUYER.

4.3. The BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER further confirms and declares to

the BUYER that the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER is the original Manufacturer/Integrator/Authorized government sponsored export entity of the stores/Authorised Service Provider having necessary authorizations, intellectual property rights and approvals from the intellectual property right owners of such materials/services and has not engaged any individual or firm or company whether Indian or foreign to intercede, facilitate or in any way to recommend to the BUYER or any of its functionaries, whether officially or unofficially to the award of the contract to the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER, nor has any amount been paid, promised or intended to be paid to any such individual, firm or company in respect of any such intercession, facilitation or recommendation.

4.4. The BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER, either while presenting the bid or

during pre-contract negotiations or before signing the contract, shall disclose any payment he has made, is committed to or intends to make to officials of the BUYER or their family members, agents, brokers or any other intermediaries in connection with the contract and the details of services agreed upon for such payments.

4.5. The BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER will not collude with other parties

interested in the contract to impair the transparency, fairness and progress of the bidding process, bid evaluation, contracting and implementation of the contract.

4.6. The BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER will not accept any advantage in

exchange for any corrupt practice, unfair means and illegal activities emanating from other competitors or from anyone else.

4.7. The BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER shall not use improperly, for

purpose of competition or personal gain, or pass on to others, any information provided by the BUYER as part of the business relationship, regarding plans, technical proposal and business details, including information contained in any electronic data carrier. The BIDDER/ SELLER/ CONTRACTOR /SERVICE PROVIDER also undertakes to exercise due and adequate care lest any such information is divulged.

4.8. The BIDDER/ SELLER/ CONTRACTOR/ SERVICE PROVIDER commits to refrain from giving

any complaint directly or through any other manner without supporting it with full and verifiable facts.

4.9. The BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER shall not instigate or cause to

instigate any third person to commit any of the acts mentioned above. 5. PREVIOUS TRANSGRESSION 5.1 The BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER declares that no previous

transgression occurred in the last three years immediately before signing of this Integrity Pact with any other company in any country in respect of any corrupt practices envisaged hereunder or with any Public Sector Bank, Public Sector Enterprise/Undertaking in India or any Government Department in India that could justify BIDDER's exclusion from the tender process.

5.2. If the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER makes incorrect statement on

this subject, BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER can be disqualified from the tender/bid process or the contract, if already awarded, can be terminated for such reason.

266

6. EARNEST MONEY (SECURITY DEPOSIT) 6.1. Every BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER while submitting commercial bid,

shall deposit an amount as specified in RFP/Tender Documents as Earnest Money/Security, Deposit, with the BUYER through any of the instruments as detailed in the tender documents.

6.2. The Earnest Money/Security Deposit shall be valid for a period till the complete conclusion of the

contractual obligations or for such period as mentioned in RFP/Contract , including warranty period, whichever is later to the complete satisfaction of BUYER.

6.3. In the case of successful BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER, a clause

would also be incorporated in the Article pertaining to Performance Bond in the Purchase Contract that the provisions of Sanctions for violation shall be applicable for forfeiture of Performance Bond in case of a decision by the BUYER to forfeit the same without assigning any reason for imposing sanction for violation of this Pact.

6.4. No interest shall be payable by the BUYER to the BIDDER/SELLER/ CONTRACTOR/ SERVICE

PROVIDER on Earnest Money/Security Deposit for the period of its currency. 7. SANCTIONS FOR VIOLATIONS 7.1. Any breach of the provisions herein contained by the BIDDER/SELLER /CONTRACTOR/SERVICE

PROVIDER or any one employed by it or acting on its behalf (whether with or without the knowledge of the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER shall entitle the BUYER to take all or any one of the following actions, wherever required:-

(i) To immediately call off the pre contract negotiations without assigning any reason or giving any

compensation to the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER. However, the proceedings with the other BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER(s) would continue.

(ii) To forfeit fully or partially the Earnest Money Deposit (in pre-contract stage) and/or Security

Deposit/Performance Bond (after the contract is signed), as decided by the BUYER and the BUYER shall not be required to assign any reason therefor.

(iii) To immediately cancel the contract, if already signed, without giving any compensation to the

BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER. (iv) To recover all sums already paid by the BUYER, and in case of the Indian

BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER with interest thereon at 2% higher than the prevailing Prime Lending Rate of (Name of the Bank/Financial Institution) while in case of a BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER from a country other than India with Interest thereon at 2% higher than the LIBOR. If any outstanding payment is due to the BIDDER/SELLER /CONTRACTOR from the BUYER in connection with any other contract such outstanding payment could also be utilized to recover the aforesaid sum and interest. The BUYER shall also be entitled to recover the replacement costs from BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER.

(v) To encash the advance bank guarantee and performance bond/warranty bond, if furnished by the

BIDDER/ SELLER/ CONTRACTOR/ SERVICE PROVIDER, in order to recover the payments, already made by the BUYER, along with interest.

(vi) To cancel all or any other contracts with the BIDDER / SELLER/ CONTRACTOR/ SERVICE

PROVIDER and the BIDDER/ SELLER /CONTRACTOR/ SERVICE PROVIDER shall be liable to pay compensation for any loss or damage to the BUYER resulting from such cancellation/rescission and the BUYER shall be entitled to deduct the amount so payable from the money(s) due to the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER.

(vii) To debar the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER from participating in

future bidding processes of the BUYER for a minimum period of five years, which may be further extended at the discretion of the BUYER.

267

(viii) To recover all sums paid in violation of this Pact by BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE

PROVIDER(s) to any middlemen or agent or broker with a view to securing the contract. (ix) In cases where irrevocable Letters of Credit have been received in respect of any contract signed

by the BUYER with the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER, the same shall not be opened.

(x) Forfeiture of The Performance Bond in case of a decision by the BUYER to forfeit the same

without assigning any reason for imposing sanction for violation of this Pact. (xi) The BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER shall not lend to or borrow any

money from or enter into any monetary dealings or transactions, directly or indirectly, with any employee of the BUYER, and if he does so, the BUYER shall be entitled forthwith to rescind the contract and all other contracts with the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER. The BIDDER/SELLER/ CONTRACTOR shall be liable to pay compensation for any loss or damage to the BUYER resulting from such rescission and the BUYER shall be entitled to deduct the amount so payable from the money(s) due to the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER.

7.2. The BUYER will be entitled to take all or any of the actions mentioned at para 7.1 (i) to (xi) of this

Pact, also in the event of commission by the BIDDER/ SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER or anyone employed by it or acting on its behalf (whether with or without the knowledge of the BIDDER), of an offence as defined In Chapter IX of the Indian Penal code, 1860 or Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988 or any other statute enacted for prevention of corruption.

7.3. The decision of the BUYER to the effect that a breach of the provisions of this pact has been

committed by the BIDDER / SELLER/ CONTRACTOR shall be final and conclusive on the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR. However, the BIDDER / SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER can approach the Independent External Monitor(s) appointed for the purposes of this Pact.

8. FALL CLAUSE 8.1. The BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER undertakes that it has not

supplied/is not supplying similar product/systems or subsystems/services at a price lower than that offered in the present bid to any other Bank or PSU or Government Department or to any other organization/entity whether or not constituted under any law and if it is found at any stage that similar product/systems or sub systems/services was supplied by the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER to any other Bank or PSU or Government Department or to any other organization/entity whether or not constituted under any law, at a lower price, then that very price, with due allowance for elapsed time, will be applicable to the present case and the difference in the cost would he refunded by the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER to the BUYER, if the contract has already been concluded.

9. INDEPENDENT EXTERNAL MONITORS 9.1. The BUYER has appointed two Independent External Monitors (hereinafter referred to as

Monitors) for this Pact in accordance with the recommendations and guidelines issued by Central Vigilance Commission.

9.2. The task of the Monitors shall be to review independently and objectively, whether and to what

extent the parties comply with the obligations under this Pact. 9.3. The Monitors shall not be subject to instructions by the representatives of the parties and perform

their functions neutrally and independently.

268

9.4. Both the parties accept that the Monitors have the right to access all the documents relating to

the project/procurement, including minutes of meetings. The Monitors shall on receipt of any complaint arising out of tendering process jointly examine such complaint, look into the records while conducting the investigation and submit their joint recommendations and views to the Management and Chief Executive of the BUYER. The MONITORS may also send their report directly to the CVO and the commission, in case of suspicion of serious irregularities.

9.5 As soon as any event or incident of violation of this Pact is noticed by Monitors, or Monitors have

reason to believe, a violation of this Pact, they will so inform the Management of the BUYER. 9.6. The BIDDER(s) accepts that the Monitors have the right to access without restriction to all

Project /Procurement documentation of the BUYER including that provided by the BIDDER/ SELLER/ CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER. The BIDDER/ SELLER/ CONTRACTOR/ SERVICE PROVIDER will also grant the Monitors, upon their request and demonstration of a valid interest, unrestricted and unconditional access to his documentation pertaining to the project for which the RFP/Tender is being /has been submitted by BIDDER/ SELLER/ CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER. The same is applicable to Subcontractors. The Monitors shall be under contractual obligation to treat the information and documents of the BIDDER/ Subcontractors( ) with confidentiality.

9.7. The BUYER will provide to the Monitors sufficient information about all meetings among the

parties related to the Project provided such meetings could have an Impact on the contractual relations between the parties. The parties may offer to the Monitors the option to participate in such meetings.

9.8. The Monitors will submit a written report to the BUYER at the earliest from the date of reference

or intimation to him by the BUYER/BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER and submit proposals for correcting problematic situations.

10. FACILITATION OF INVESTIGATION

In case of any allegation of violation of any provisions of this Pact or payment of commission, the BUYER or its agencies shall be entitled to examine all the documents including the Books of Accounts of the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER and the BIDDER/SELLER/CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER shall provide necessary information of the relevant documents and shall extend all possible help for the purpose of such examination,

11. LAW AND PLACE OF JURISDICTION This Pact is subject to Indian Law and the place of jurisdiction is Guwahati, Assam.

12. OTHER LEGAL ACTIONS

The actions stipulated in this Integrity Pact are without prejudice to any other legal action that may follow in accordance with the provisions of the any other law in force relating to any civil or criminal proceedings.

13. VALIDITY 13.1. The validity of this Integrity Pact shall be from the date of its signing and extend up to 5 years or

such longer period as mentioned in RFP/Contract or the complete execution of the contract to the satisfaction of the BUYER whichever is later. In case BIDDER/SELLER/ CONTRACTOR/SERVICE PROVIDER is unsuccessful, this Integrity Pact shall expire after six months from the date of the signing of the contract.

269

13.2. If one or several provisions of this Pact turn out to be invalid; the remainder of this Pact shall

remain valid. In such case, the parties will strive to come to an agreement to their original intentions.

14. The parties hereby sign this Integrity Pact at ............ on ................... BUYER BIDDER Name of the Officer CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER /AUTHORISED SIGNATORY Designation Name of Wing RUDSET INSTITUTE Witness 1) 1) 2) 2)

270

:ANNEXURE-18:

Name of work : Details List of Retired Government / PSU / Bank employees, employed by the Tenderer :

NAME OF THE RETIRED OFFICIAL

DESIGNATION NAME & ADDRESS OF THE PREVIOUS EMPLOYER

Name & Sign